JP2015077454A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of appropriately handling a predicted result of a jackpot lottery.SOLUTION: A sound lamp control device can discriminate whether a jackpot random number table used for read-ahead of a lottery result of a current jackpot lottery agrees with a scheduled jackpot random number table used for an actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the read-ahead, and regards that a predicted result corresponding to the current jackpot lottery is credible if the tables agree and it is not credible if not agree. If the current jackpot lottery is not credible, execution of a continuous notice performance is stopped even if the continuous notice performance is scheduled to be executed in the current variation performance. Thus, problems of blind execution of a continuous notice performance and execution of a continuous notice performance not related to an actual lottery result are suppressed.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a pachinko machine has been known which performs a big hit lottery along with the game ball winning to the starting opening and displays on the display screen a variable effect and a big hit effect according to the lottery result. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . Among pachinko machines of this type, for example, when a game ball wins in a starting opening, a player who predicts a lottery result of a jackpot lottery accompanying the prize based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of winning. is there. In addition, as the game state, a low probability state in which the probability that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the winning will be a big hit is low, a high probability state in which the probability of a big win is higher than the low probability state, and the like are provided. Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is predicted, and the prediction result becomes a jackpot, an effect (notice to notify in advance that there is a high possibility of shifting to the jackpot which is a special gaming state advantageous to the player In order to improve the player's expectation, for example, the effect is given.

  In this pachinko machine, when the game ball wins to the starting opening, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the winning is predicted based on the gaming state at the time of winning, but the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the prize is It is performed later than prediction, and is performed based on the gaming state at the time of the lottery. More specifically, when the gaming ball wins the starting opening, a random number value is acquired along with the winning, and if the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the winning is a low probability state, the lottery table for low probability If the gaming state at the time of winning is the high probability state, the lottery table for high probability is referred to. Then, the lottery result is predicted based on the table referred to and the random number value acquired in connection with the winning.

  In addition, when random number values are acquired in connection with the winning, when a variable effect corresponding to the winning is started, a jackpot lottery based on the random values is performed. In this jackpot lottery, unlike the prediction of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the lottery table is referred to based on the gaming state at the time of lottery. More specifically, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of lottery is a low probability state, the lottery table for low probability time is referred to, while if the gaming state at the time of lottery is a high probability state, high probability The hourly lottery table is referred to. Then, the lottery result is determined based on the table referred to and the random number value acquired in connection with the winning. If the lottery result is a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set according to the big hit type when the big hit is finished.

  However, even when random numbers are acquired as a result of winning, if random effects are being performed or a big hit, the random values obtained as a result of that winning are accumulated in a predetermined storage area, and a jackpot lottery Execution is suspended. In addition, when the same winning is repeatedly generated, for example, the jackpot lottery is suspended up to four times. And, when the fluctuation production and jackpot being executed is ended, if the held jackpot lottery is left, the oldest one of the held jackpot lottery is executed. Similarly, while the jackpot lottery is being held, the pending jackpot lottery is executed one by one each time the on-going variation effect or the jackpot is finished.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-333089

  Therefore, when the game ball is newly awarded to the starting opening, if the jackpot lottery is held, after the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new prize is predicted, the held jackpot lottery is executed. Then, the actual jackpot lottery with the new prize is performed. Therefore, if the pending jackpot lottery is executed and any lottery result becomes a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set at the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, so the jackpot of The gaming state may change before and after.

  Here, when the gaming state changes, the actual jackpot lottery with a new winning is performed in the gaming state after the change, so the lottery table referred to in the prediction of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with a new prize and And the lottery table to be referred to in the actual jackpot lottery accompanying a prize will change. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result will not coincide, and if the effect (pre notice effect) is performed using the prediction result, the actual jackpot There is a high possibility that an effect unrelated to the lottery result of the lottery will be performed. Therefore, when there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may not coincide with each other, it is avoided to use the prediction result. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably handling the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information accompanying establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and random numbers acquired by the random number information acquiring means. Random number information storage means for storing information, stored information acquisition means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and lottery results under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions The lottery determination means for determining from the random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition means, and the lottery condition for the lottery determination means are set when the special gaming state transitioning according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended. Main control means having lottery condition setting means and performing main control regarding the game, and first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state; And a sub control means controlled according to an instruction from the main control means, the information processing apparatus further comprising: notification means for notifying one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information other than the first suggestion information; The first drawing condition acquiring means for acquiring the drawing conditions set by the drawing condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the drawing conditions acquired by the first drawing condition acquiring means A lottery result determination unit that determines a lottery result when random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination unit, and a determination result indicating a lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit Determination information transmitting means for transmitting determination information including information and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result to the sub-control means, and a lottery set by the lottery condition setting means The second lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring a condition, and condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery conditions acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring means to the sub control means, the sub control means Storing the determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means, the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and the determination condition information in association with each other Determining information storage means, condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and the determination The first comparison means for comparing with the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the information storage means, and the first comparison when the notification by the notification means is performed And notification control means for controlling the notification means such that one of the first indication information and the second indication information is notified based on the comparison result by the means.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the lottery condition setting means sets the lottery condition of the lottery determination means to a predetermined lottery condition when shifting to the special gaming state. The lottery determination means is configured to hold the determination of the random number information from the transition to the special game state until the end, and the main control means establishes the predetermined start condition. If it is determined that the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means to determine whether or not the special gaming state, and the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means, the lottery conditions after the special gaming state is ended The third lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the setting means, and the lottery result judging means, if it is judged by the gaming state judging means that the special game state is present, the previous Is to determine the lottery result when the random number information obtained with the establishment of the predetermined start-up condition by lottery condition acquired by the third drawing condition acquiring means is determined by the lottery determining means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is a random number information acquisition unit that acquires random number information based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and a random number that stores a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition unit. Information storage means, stored information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and lottery result under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions The lottery determination means determined based on the random number information acquired by the means, the lottery condition setting means for setting the lottery condition of the lottery determination means, and the special gaming state for shifting according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended And a lottery control means for controlling the subsequent determination by the lottery determination means to be performed under a predetermined lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means. Together with the main control means for performing main control regarding the game, and the notification means for notifying the suggestion information indicating that the possibility to shift to the special game state is high, and the sub controlled by an instruction from the main control means A control means is provided, and the main control means acquires information for judging the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. A lottery result in the case where random number information acquired with the acquisition of the information is determined by the lottery determination means under the lottery conditions determined by the lottery condition acquisition means and the information acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means Lottery result determination means for determining the determination result, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result And the second lottery condition acquiring unit for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting unit, and the second lottery condition acquiring unit Condition information transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-control means the condition information indicating the lottery conditions, the sub-control means receiving the condition information for receiving the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means Means, the determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means, the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and the determination condition information Determination information storage means to be stored, lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and the condition information receiving means The notification means is set to notify the suggestion information based on the second comparison means for comparing with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the judgment result information of the judgment information received by the judgment information reception means. Whether the notification means is made to notify the suggestion information on the basis of the comparison result by the second comparison means when the indication information is announced by the notification means according to the notification setting means and the setting by the notification setting means And notification control means for controlling the

  A gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising display means for performing a variable effect including dynamic display of identification information based on a lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, The determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information, and the notification setting means When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, a notification determination means is provided that determines whether the notification means is to notify the suggestion information in a plurality of variation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information, When it is determined that the indication information is to be notified by the notification determination means, the determination result stored in the determination information storage means among the determinations made by the lottery determination means It is set so that the indication means is notified by the notification means in each of the variable effects performed based on the drawing result of the drawing result indicated by the information, and the second comparing means is the judgment information Among the determination condition information stored in the storage means, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information are compared in order from the oldest reception order to the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means And the notification control means determines that the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of the comparison by the second comparison means. It controls so that the said suggestion information is not alert | reported by the said notification means in each subsequent fluctuation production including the fluctuation production performed corresponding to information.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the second comparison means is a lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and a lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the second comparison means. Transition judging means for judging whether the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information matching the lottery condition indicates the lottery result for transitioning to the special gaming state, and the transition When it is determined by the determination means that the determination result information indicates the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means after the special gaming state is ended is determined When the lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determination means to be selected and the lottery condition determination means, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information is replaced by the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and It said second comparing means comprises a first comparator control means for controlling to continue the comparison with been drawing condition.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the random number information associated with the establishment is acquired by the random number information acquiring unit and stored in the random number information storing unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery result under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is selected from the random number information. The game is judged by the judging means, and it shifts to the special game state according to the lottery result. Further, one of the first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special gaming state is ended. When it is determined that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means is acquired by the first drawing condition acquiring means, and the drawing result judging means acquires the drawing under the acquired drawing conditions. A lottery result in the case where random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means is determined. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information and the judgment condition information are associated with each other. It is stored in the determination information storage means. In addition, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The lottery conditions indicated by are compared by the first comparison means. Then, when notification by the notification means is performed, the notification control means is controlled based on the comparison result of the first comparison means so that one of the first indication information and the second indication information is indicated by the notification means. Ru. For example, when notifying one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information on the basis of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used Since it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means if this is refrained, the notification by the notification means is suppressed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first suggestion based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended. The notification means can notify one of the information and the second suggestion information. Therefore, even when it is refrained from utilizing the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, since notification by the notification means can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determination It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means becomes useless. Therefore, there is an effect that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the first aspect, the following effect is exhibited. That is, when shifting to the special gaming state, the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means are set to predetermined lottery conditions by the lottery condition setting means, and during the transition to the special gaming state, the lottery determination means The judgment of the random number information by is suspended. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, it is determined by the game state determination means whether or not the special game state is determined, and if it is determined that the special game state is selected, a lottery is made after the special game state is ended. The lottery conditions set by the condition setting means are acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. In addition, if it is determined that the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means, the random number information acquired upon establishment of the predetermined start condition is the lottery determination means under the lottery conditions acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. The lottery result in the case where the determination is made is determined by the lottery result determination means. Since the determination by the lottery determination means is suspended during the special gaming state, when a predetermined start condition is established between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the determination of the random number information accompanying the establishment is It is made after the special gaming state is over. According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special game state and the end, in the predetermined lottery condition set in the special game state Instead, it is possible to determine the lottery result of the random number information accompanying the establishment of the predetermined start condition under the lottery condition set for the lottery determination means after the special gaming state has ended. Therefore, even when the predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the lottery result of the determination performed by the lottery determination means can be accurately determined along with the establishment, so the correct lottery can be performed. The possibility of determining the result can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the chance of suitably handling the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the random number information is acquired by the random number information acquiring unit based on the establishment and stored in the random number information storing unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the plurality of random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is performed based on the random number information. The result is determined by the lottery determination means, and transition to the special game state is made according to the lottery result. In addition, the notification means notifies the suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state, and when the special gaming state is ended, the subsequent determination by the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means It is controlled by the lottery control means so as to be performed under a predetermined condition. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, information for determining the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means is acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means, and is acquired by the lottery result judgment means The lottery result in the case where the random number information acquired along with the information of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determined by the lottery information is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means. Then, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the judgment information and the judgment condition information are correlated and stored in the judgment information storage means Be done. Further, based on the determination result information of the received determination information, it is determined by the notification determination means whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means, and when it is determined to notify the suggestion information here, the condition information receiving means The second comparison means compares the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information with the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means. And based on the comparison result, it is controlled by the notification control means whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means.

  When a lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting means, there is a possibility that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means will change. Temporarily, if the lottery condition changes, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means before the change of the lottery condition disagrees with the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means after the change of the lottery condition. And there is a possibility that the respective lottery results do not match. Therefore, when the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means may not be used as being unreliable. In such a case, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is not used and is wasted. According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, the notification information is notified of the suggestion information based on the relationship between the drawing condition of the drawing result determined by the drawing result determining means and the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means. It can be done. Therefore, even when using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means is refrained, using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means, the notifying means is notified of the suggestion information it can. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted, there is an effect that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information are stored in the determination information storage means in association with the reception order of the determination information. When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification determination means determines whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means in the plurality of fluctuation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information. Here, if it is determined to notify the suggestion information, among the determinations made by the lottery determination means, based on the lottery results of the determinations of the lottery results indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means The notification setting unit sets the notification information so that the notification unit notifies the suggestion information in each of the variation effects to be performed. Then, among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information in descending order of reception order and the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means are listed first (2) When the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of the comparison by the comparison means, the fluctuation effect to be performed corresponding to the determination result information indicating the mismatch Control is performed by the notification control unit so that the notification unit does not notify the suggestion information in each of the subsequent variable effects including the above. When the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the second comparison means, the lottery result judged by the lottery result judgment means and the lottery result judged by the lottery judgment means Because there is a possibility that they will not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted. Then, when it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, there shifts to the special gaming state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, and thereafter, the lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting means There is also a possibility that the lottery condition of the determination means may be changed. Therefore, also in the next comparison, it becomes unclear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the comparison thereafter is also similarly unclear. If it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the result judging means, then it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result judged by the lottery result judging means. According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in the comparison by the second comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, and the lottery result judged by the lottery result judgment means can be trusted. When it lose | eliminates, it can be made for a notification means not to alert | report a suggestion information in each subsequent fluctuation production including the fluctuation production performed corresponding to the determination result information which becomes the non-coincidence. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, it is possible to use the ones that can be relied upon and the ones that can not be relied upon to be used more, so the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means There is an effect that it can be handled suitably.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, the following effects can be achieved. That is, in the comparison by the second comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information corresponding to the lottery condition is the special gaming state It is determined by the transition determination means whether or not it indicates the lottery result to be transferred to. Here, if it is determined that the lottery result for transitioning to the special game state is indicated, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is determined by the lottery condition determination means after the special game state is ended, and the condition is set. Control is performed by the first comparison control means so that the second comparison means continues comparison based on the lottery conditions determined by the lottery condition determination means instead of the lottery conditions indicated by the information. When transitioning to the special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means after the special game state is ended. . Therefore, after the special gaming state ends, it becomes unclear whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. According to the gaming machine of claim 5, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means after the special gaming state is ended is determined by the lottery condition determination means, and the lottery condition is changed to the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. Control is performed such that the second comparison means continues the comparison according to the lottery condition determined by the determination means. Therefore, since it becomes clear whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information even after the special gaming state has ended, the lottery result determined by the lottery result judging means It can distinguish whether it can be trusted or not. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, those that can be trusted can be increased, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more suitably handled.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the flow of jackpot production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the model which showed typically the structure of various counters and a holding ball storage area. FIG. 5 is a schematic view schematically showing data included in a prefetch command. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the data contained in fanfare command. It is the model which showed the structure of the prefetch information storage area typically. It is the model which showed the content of the continuous advance notice determination table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the ending production decision processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow by which the display mode of an ending production is determined in an ending production determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow by which the display mode of an ending production is determined in an ending production determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow by which the display mode of an ending production is determined in an ending production determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow by which the display mode of an ending production is determined in an ending production determination process. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the boot processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing fanfare command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which generate | occur | produces when determining the display mode of an ending production based only on the prediction result obtained by pre-reading. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which generate | occur | produces when determining the display mode of an ending production based only on the prediction result obtained by pre-reading. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which generate | occur | produces when determining the display mode of an ending production based only on the prediction result obtained by pre-reading. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the prefetch information storage area in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing of the voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing of the voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing of the voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow to which continuous notice execution status is changed by continuous notice execution status confirmation process A. FIG. It is the flow chart which showed continuation notice execution status confirmation processing B which is a modification of continuation notice execution status confirmation processing A performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status check process D which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status check process A performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with entering the first ball entry port 64 described later (start winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage It is done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage" → → "island stage" → "in the city stage" → ... It changes repeatedly in the following order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  Although details will be described later, in this pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination), the lottery of the first symbol (special symbol) is performed, and whether it is a jackpot or not Judgment (big hit lottery) is performed. In this jackpot lottery, when it is determined to be a jackpot, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 2R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared.

  The “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state when the jackpot of the maximum round number 15 ends, “2R probability variation jackpot” is When the jackpot of 2 rounds of the maximum round number is finished, it is a probability change jackpot that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a state in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a low probability state when the jackpot of the maximum round number 15 ends, and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation times) ) Is a jackpot that becomes a short time condition.

  And "high probability state" refers to a state where the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (due to probability change), in other words, transition to the special game state jackpot It is a state of easy playing. The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the first ball entry 64 by increasing the probability of hitting the second symbol.

  On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability is not in a definite state, and means a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability state. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the “low probability state”, the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the hitting probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball enters the first entrance 64. It refers to the state of easy-to-ball game. In addition, while the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot, a jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased during or during a definite change, but instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Alternatively, the opening time of the motorized accessory (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64 or the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory associated with one jackpot may be changed.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. A plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not they are in the process of being fluctuated along with the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (start winning), or stop symbols after the end of fluctuation As the first symbol according to the result of the lottery that is performed for the starting winning combination is shown by the lighting state, or the ball that has not been executed among the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 The number of holding balls which is the number of) is shown by the lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors reduces the various gaming states (high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 with fewer LEDs. It is possible to display low probability state, middle hit, etc.). In addition, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, not the stop symbol indicating only the jackpot or the jackpot but the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed on the LED 37a.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that performs the fluctuation display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 by using the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”), and a second symbol symbol composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of the second entry port 67 A display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state is performed by the first symbol display device 37 in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 described later, while the third symbol display device 81 is a display of the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the display. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a jackpot, a variation display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed A jackpot is generated after the variable display ends. In the case of shifting to a high probability state (probability state) after the end of the jackpot, variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low probability state after the big hit ends, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to the "low probability symbols") to which the even number is added is aligned is performed.

  More specifically, if the lottery result is "15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot", the variation display in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added is aligned When the lottery result is "15R normal jackpot", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" which is an even number are added are aligned. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out, there is a case where a continuous advance notice effect is performed to suggest (high notice) that the possibility of becoming a jackpot is high, In that case, when the variable display is performed, a combination of predetermined main symbols (for example, on the effective line L1, the combination of the main symbols is "3" "4" "1" in order from the left symbol row Z1) The so-called "chance" is always displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 and scrolled from top to bottom (Y direction indicated by an arrow) with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 Display is done. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. A notice effect production is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball (start winning combination) to the 1st ball entrance 64 could be hold | held to a maximum of 4 times, the maximum number of holding balls is limited to 4 times Alternatively, it may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is different by the number of number-hold balls. (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Continuously, with reference to FIG. 5, the jackpot effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 5 (a) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot effect, and FIGS. 5 (b) and 5 (c) are display screens displayed in the ending effect which is a part of the jackpot effect. FIG.

  In the main control unit 110, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning combination), a big hit lottery is performed using it as a trigger, and thereafter, the first symbol (special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 Variable display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and as a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the first symbol display device In accordance with the change display of 37, the change display of the third symbol is performed.

  When variable display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, first, high-speed variable display of the third symbol is started, and thereafter, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds, etc.) When has passed, it switches to the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further switches to the low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, stop display in which the main symbols (third symbol) of the same number are aligned is performed, and the fluctuation effect is ended, and then the jackpot effect is started. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out, the stop display where the main symbol (third symbol) of the same number is not aligned is performed and the fluctuation effect is ended, if there is a start winning prize held, While the next jackpot lottery is performed, the next fluctuation production is started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the fanfare effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. The fanfare production is a production for notifying the player that the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit from now on, and enhances the player's sense of expectation. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on while blessing the jackpot. Further, the ending effect informs the player that the lottery result will be the big win in any of the big win lottery if the big win lottery is carried out based on the start winning prize being held with the big win ending (decisive effect display Or simply notifying the player that the jackpot has ended (normal display is performed).

  If the "finalized display" is performed in the ending effect, if the jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning after the jackpot is completed, the lottery result will be the jackpot in any jackpot lottery A sense of expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, after the jackpot is finished, the player can be made to rejoice every time the jackpot lottery based on the pending start winning is performed until the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result becomes the jackpot. In addition, even if the lottery result is out, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot is increased, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  When the jackpot effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, first, according to the timing when the stop display of the third symbol is made, the sound lamp control from the main control device 110 A fanfare command is transmitted to the device 113. Although details will be described later (see FIG. 9), the fanfare command includes information indicating the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. When the fanfare command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 starts the fanfare effect following the fluctuation effect.

  Next, at the timing when the fanfare effect ends, the main controller 110 transmits a round number command indicating the first round to the audio lamp control device 113. When the number-of-rounds command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the first round is started following the fanfare effect. In this embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot state is continued until the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated the number of times (two rounds or fifteen rounds) according to the jackpot type.

  After the first round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds has elapsed or 10 balls have been won) has elapsed. At the same time, the first round is over. Then, immediately after the start timing of the second round, the main controller 110 transmits a round number command indicating the second round to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started following the round effect corresponding to the first round. When the second round is started, as in the case of the first round, opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. After that, every time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. To be done. Thereby, each round presentation from the 1st round to the round (2 rounds or 15 rounds) according to jackpot classification is performed in order.

  Then, the ending command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening and closing of the specific winning combination opening 65a is all finished. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect. As described above, in the ending effect, when the jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning with the jackpot ending, the player is informed that the lottery result will be the jackpot in any jackpot lottery The player is informed (or the display is normally performed) that the jackpot is to be performed (the final effect display is performed) or that the jackpot is simply ended. Although details will be described later, it is determined in the sound lamp control device 113 whether “finalized display” or “normal display” is performed in the ending effect.

  When "normal display" is performed in the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), "Mot ne!" Is displayed in the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Ru. This screen means that the jackpot ends. Since the player can recognize that the jackpot ends when this screen is displayed, the player can prepare to return to the normal game.

  On the other hand, when "confirmed effect display" is performed in the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5C, "super chance!" In the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. This screen means that if any of the held jackpot lotterys is made, the lottery result will always be a jackpot.

  When this screen is displayed, it is possible for the player to recognize that the lottery result will be a jackpot if any lottery among the held jackpot lotterys is made after the jackpot is finished, so that the player can be assured It is possible for the player to have a feeling of expectation of becoming a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, it is possible to bring the player to a standstill every time a held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes a jackpot. In addition, even if the lottery result is out, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot is increased, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery of the second symbol performed in conjunction with the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67 is being executed by the lighting state, As the stop symbol after the end, the second symbol according to the lottery result of the second symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. It becomes a state (it is open | released), and as a result, it is comprised so that it may be in the state which a ball | bowl easily enters into the 1st ball entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. Ru. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 37 and the third symbol other than the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment. It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second ball entry port 67 is not limited to 4 times the maximum number of holding balls, similarly to the first ball entry port 64, not more than 3 times, or 5 times or more (for example, , 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. As described above, the first inlet 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  Therefore, when the time is short and the number of balls entering the first entrance 64 increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases accordingly, and as a result, even if the player plays a game, it is difficult to lose balls. Or, the balls will not be reduced. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state, the player can obtain a feeling that a big hit can be obtained in a state in which the balls are difficult to reduce or in a state in which the balls are not reduced. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and if the lottery result is a jackpot, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned to a stop symbol for the jackpot after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while being lighted, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a jackpot in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. At this jackpot, the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of jackpot which is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the award of gaming value. It will be.

  The special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, since the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a special winning opening 65a during the jackpot, a large number of balls enter the first ball entrance 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is making a big hit, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, a jackpot is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time a predetermined number of times is formed as a big hit as the opportunity for the ball to be won into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may do so.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are set by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to set the display of the big hit lottery, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display of the second symbol display device 83. used.

  In the jackpot lottery, and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, and the first hit type counter used for selection of the jackpot symbol C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS1 used to select a change pattern are used. The second random number counter C4 is used to set the display of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 26). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, a holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas) is provided in the RAM 203, and each of these areas is provided with a holding ball storage area 203b. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are respectively stored according to the timing of entering the first entrance 64 into the ball.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and then reached 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), Is stored in any one of the first to fourth areas for holding provided in the holding ball storage area 203b. The value of the jackpot random number is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the jackpot random number for the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches with the value (hit value), it is determined that the jackpot. The jackpot random number table 202a includes a jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (period in which the probability change is not in progress) Two types of jackpots for the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 used for high probability state (during definite variation) are prepared, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. As described above, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time and the high probability time by changing the number of random numbers to be jackpots.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (per wins) that will be the big wins at low probability is 3 and the value “7, 307, 582” is stored in the low probability big hit random number table 202a 1 ing. On the other hand, the number of random numbers (hit value) that will be a big hit in high probability is 30, the value “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390 , 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored in the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 .

  In the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 do not have overlapping values, Each has a set value. Here, regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, if there is a value that becomes a winning value, the value is easily predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of being jackpotted illegally may be increased. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, according to the low probability state or high probability state), by changing the value of the random number that will be the jackpot Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, And, each counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired, and then a big hit lottery is performed based on each obtained counter value, but the lottery result is predicted prior to the big hit lottery. It is done. Thereafter, prior to the jackpot lottery, it is described that the lottery result is predicted by predicting the lottery result. In this pre-reading, each counter value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is used to predict the success or failure of the jackpot lottery and the type thereof. The fluctuation pattern type is predicted by using the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thereafter, the success or failure of the jackpot lottery and the result of predicting the type thereof will be described as the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the result of predicting the fluctuation pattern type will be described as the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type.

  When the success or failure of the jackpot lottery is predicted in the pre-reading, similarly to the case of the jackpot lottery, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot random number set by the jackpot random number table 202a (hit value) A comparison with is made. Specifically, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of winning is a low probability state, while the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability time is referred to, while if the gaming state is a high probability state, for high probability time The jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to. Then, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 thus acquired matches the value (hit value) of the random number stored in the referred table, the lottery result is predicted (judged) as a big hit. .

  Then, after the pre-reading (in some cases, after a time interval is open), the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game of the pachinko machine 10 when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the counter value is started A jackpot lottery is performed based on the state. In the present embodiment, when the ball wins the first ball entry 64 (start winning) during the execution of the fluctuation effect or during the big hit, the winning (first winning) for the first ball entrance 64 is suspended The hold is done up to 4 times.

  And, when the fluctuation effect and the big hit which is under execution ends, if the starting winning a prize is suspended, one of the oldest among the jackpot lottery with the starting winning a prize which is on hold is executed. Similarly, while the starting winning combination is suspended, one big hit lottery with the starting winning combination being held is executed one by one each time the variable effect being executed and the big hit end.

  Therefore, if the start winning is already suspended when the ball newly wins at the first entry slot 64 (start winning), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning is pre-read, By the time the jackpot lottery with the new starting winning combination is performed, the already held jackpot lottery is performed. Even if the jackpot lottery already held is performed, if the lottery result is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the jackpot type, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes Sometimes. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, a jackpot lottery with a new start winning is performed in the gaming state after the change, so the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to at the time of prefetching and at the time of lottery are one. Even if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the predicted result does not match the actual lottery result.

  The first collision type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing) and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in any one of the holding areas of the first to fourth holding areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is not a large random number, that is, if it is a random number falling out, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of removal. In this case, the stop type at the time of removal is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area, and the change pattern at the time of removal is the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and It is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that makes a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the type of stop in the change production become the one at the big hit . In this case, the stop type at the time of the big hit is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same hold area, and the change pattern at the time of the big hit is the first hit type stored in the same hold area It is determined based on the values of the counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1.

  The value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first collision type counter C 2 and the jackpot type table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot “15R probability variation jackpot”, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot and 100 During the number of times of fluctuation, there are "15R normal jackpots" that are short-lived, and there are "2R probability variation jackpots" in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpots.

  In the jackpot type table, each jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, the value "0 to 39" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit, and the value "40 to 79" of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to the 15R normal jackpot. The value "80 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is "20" If the 15R normal jackpot is determined, and the value of the first collision type counter C2 is "90", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected with a probability of 40% when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R regular jackpot is selected with the probability of 40 percent, and the 2R probability variation jackpot is selected with the probability of 20%. . The probability that each jackpot type is selected when it is a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first collision type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type displayed at the third symbol display device 81 at the time of detachment, and after reach is generated, the final stop symbol shifts by only one before and after the reach symbol. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in any one of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C 3, a plurality of stop type selection tables (not shown) are provided in the ROM 202 that differ for each table in the range of random number values for which the stop type is selected. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is selected so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated. It becomes easy to be selected as "complete removal". In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, a table with a narrow range of random numbers from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is selected to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64. And it becomes difficult to select "completely out". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than back and forth deviation" is wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than back and forth deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines fluctuation patterns such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach and the like by the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the reach type or the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Determine the variation mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a variation pattern table, a variation pattern table for big hit used at the time of big hit and a variation pattern table for removal used at the time of removal are prepared. Also, as a variation pattern table for removal, the variation pattern for removal (probability variation) depending on whether the gaming state is a short time state or a high probability state at a definite change, or a normal low probability state excluding a time reduction state. A table and an off (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table are prepared.

  For example, the jackpot variation pattern table is divided into groups based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is divided into 15R jackpot common to be referred to when the 15R probability variable jackpot and 15R regular jackpot are determined as the jackpot type, and 2R probability variable jackpot dedicated to be referred to when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined. There is. The values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are associated with the divided groups. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value (per-hit value) that makes a big hit, the hold area according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same hold area The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the is determined from the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

  There are various normal reach, various super reach, and various special reach in 15R jackpot common, and correspondence with the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for normal reach, 11 to 99 for various super reach, and various special reach It is 100 to 198. The Norlech variety is a reach where the fluctuation time is short, and after the short reach, the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned (so-called, the symbol is aligned with a stop at the bitter end). This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than normal reach (for example, reach extending from long reach or normal reach), and various special reach variations are longer than super reach. It is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the time reach (for example, a reach that develops further after a super reach or a special reach where a destination from a normal reach differs from a super reach). Since the 15R jackpot common table is selected in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot, in order to give the player a sense of expectation, it is easy to select the special reach. However, by configuring so that various types of normal reach and various types of super reach are selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  In addition, "reach various" means that there are many things that effect contents differ also in each reach, for example, in the super reach, the reach which changes the back image rapidly and is displayed, and a certain character There is a reach to be displayed suddenly, etc. In addition to that, there are multiple reach with different effects, such as the one to which a notice effect before the start of fluctuation is added, and the one to which a jackpot effect by re-change is added.

  2R fluctuations A to C are provided exclusively for 2R probability variation jackpots, and 2R fluctuation A is 0 to 99, 2R fluctuation B is 100 to 149, and 2R fluctuation C is associated with the value of fluctuation type counter CS1. It is 150 to 198. Note that 2R fluctuation A is, for example, an effect that the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops with a specific symbol with "chicken", and 2R fluctuation B does not normally appear " It is an effect that the final first symbol (or the third symbol) stops with a specific symbol with the girl 'and the 2R fluctuation C is the final first symbol with the lighting of the above-mentioned one-shot notification lamp. It is an effect that the symbol (or the third symbol) is stopped at a specific symbol.

  In addition, although the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, it may be determined by another fluctuation type counter whether or not to add a notice effect for giving notice of the start of a jackpot or reach effect before the start of a change or during a change effect, or when reach is established, The number of first symbols (or third symbols) to be stopped may be determined by shifting the number of symbols and stopping (for example, one symbol offset or the like).

  Then, for example, the out-of-order (normally) fluctuation pattern table is a complete out-only only to be referred to when the complete out is determined as the out type of stop at the out, and a case other than the front and back out of reach and the front and back out of reach. It is divided into groups (groups) based on reach common referred to and stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the first random number counter C1 is not a jackpot value (hit value), that is, it is a value that is out, and the gaming state is in the normal low probability state excluding the time saving state, According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the first random number counter C1, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is It is determined from the outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern.

  For complete dedication only, there are short deviances in which the fluctuation ends in a short time and reach does not hold, and long deductions that cause a longer fluctuation time than the short declination, but with a value of fluctuation type counter CS1. As for the correspondence, the short gap is 0 to 148, and the long gap is 149 to 198. Also, common to reach, the reach is established but the fluctuation time is short, and the normal reach which is short and the fluctuation time which is longer than the normal reach, the various super reach which is longer than the various There are various reach types, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 148 for out-of-normal reach types, 149 to 190 for out-of-order super reach types, and 191 to 198 for out-of-order special reach types.

  In addition, the out-of-order (probability change) fluctuation pattern table is referred to when the complete outfall is determined as the stop type at the same time as the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table. Referenced when out-of-bound and out-of-front and out-of-front and out-of-front non-reach reach is determined, based on reach common with out-of-bounds normal reach, out-of-bounds super reach and out-of-back special reach, and based on exit type Are divided into groups (groups), and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that does not make a big hit, that is, it is a value that comes off, and the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of definite variation, it is stored in the same holding area According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is determined from the out-of-order (probable change) change pattern.

  The correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the complete deviation exclusive use is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. Further, the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in common to reach is 0 to 148 for various types of out-of-normal reach, 149 to 190 for various types of out-of-super reach, and 191 to 198 for various types of out-of-order special reach.

  This out-of-order (probable change) fluctuation pattern table is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is in a short time state or a high probability state at the time of definite change, so that the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64 Become. Therefore, if a long interval is frequently performed while in the time saving state or the high probability state, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, giving the player a waiting state, which gives the player an unpleasant feeling. there is a possibility. In addition, it is not preferable because the operation rate decreases as a hole. Therefore, when the gaming state is a short time state or a high probability state at the time of definite variation, the short gap is configured to be more easily selected than in the other cases, and the game is started by performing the next variable display early. Can reduce the possibility of giving discomfort to people. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

  Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination (selection of presence / absence of advance notice, etc. may be selected). Also, although the selection of the outlier type is divided into the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table and the outlier (probability change) fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of holding balls (for example, even if the gaming state is normal) In the case of a maximum of four, three or more) may end the fluctuation display early, so it may be selected by referring to the out-of-order (probability change) fluctuation pattern table, or the number of holding balls It may be configured to prepare a variation pattern table for normal use or probability variation corresponding to.

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned variation pattern table for each deviation, if short deviation and long deviation are simply regarded as deviation, and the deviation is selected, the other table is referred to, and the short deviation and the long deviation have a predetermined probability. It may be configured to select at. Of course, also in this case, a table corresponding to the number of holding balls may be prepared.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right. It is acquired when it is done. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, it is determined to be won when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5-153", and the symbol "o" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) in the second symbol display device 83. Is lighted and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. Note that the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and setting of display on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Referring back to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 26), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes a gaming state flag 203a, a holding ball storage area 203b, a holding ball number counter 203c, a large hitting after game state flag 203d, a big hitting middle flag 203e, a prefetch execution flag 203f, and a big hitting middle winning flag 203g. And at least.

  The gaming state flag 203a is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or in a high probability state (during a definite change). If the gaming state flag 203a is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, and if the gaming state flag 203a is on, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state Indicates This gaming state flag 203a refers to the above-mentioned high probability large hitting random number table 202a1 or the high probability large hitting random number table 202a1 when performing a big hit lottery or when prefetching a lottery result of the big hit lottery It is used by the MPU 201 to determine whether to do so.

  Specifically, when the jackpot lottery is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is off, the jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1. On the other hand, when the jackpot lottery is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the jackpot random selection table 202a2 for high probability is referred to, and the jackpot lottery is performed. Although details will be described later, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is read ahead, not only the state of the gaming state flag 203a but also the state of the big hit after-game state flag 203d and the big hit middle winning flag 203g described later are added. It is determined whether to refer to the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 or to refer to the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2, and the determined tables 202a1 and 202a2 are referred to, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is Read ahead.

  The gaming state flag 203a is set to off by the initial setting process (see S714 of FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Also, when a jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10, it is set to off (see S316 in FIG. 21). Then, a jackpot lottery is performed, and when the lottery result becomes a probability variation jackpot, when the jackpot ends, the gaming state flag 203a is set to ON (see S916 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, even if the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is a jackpot, if the jackpot type is normally a jackpot, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is not changed even if the jackpot ends (FIG. See S915: No). Further, even when the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is out, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is not changed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is normally a jackpot, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is not changed even if the jackpot is completed. However, the game state flag 203a may be set to OFF (overwrite) when the jackpot is finished (see S915 in FIG. 27: No). That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a may be updated (re-set) each time the jackpot lottery is performed.

  The holding ball storage area 203b is configured of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas) (see FIG. 7). In each of these areas, a first per-random-number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the first per-random-number counter C1 and a first per-class counter storage area 203b2 for storing the first per-class counter C2; A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a game state flag 203a at the time of winning are stored as a winning game state flag The game condition flag storage area 203b5 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, the change type counter storage area 203b4, and the winning game condition flag storage Although the area 203b5 is provided in one holding ball storage area 203b, a plurality of holding ball storage areas are provided, and each of the five areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4, 203b5 is used as a holding ball storage area It may be provided in

  As described above, when the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing of the winning, and they are held by the holding ball storage area 203b. It is stored in the area. In addition to this, in the present embodiment, the gaming state flag 203a is acquired at the winning timing, and the gaming state flag 203a is stored as the winning game state flag, and the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored. It is stored in the pending area. Here, the value stored in the reserve area is used in the case of prefetching the lottery result of the big hit lottery and in the case of performing the big hit lottery. The pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery will be described later.

  In this holding ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the winning game state flag) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is maximum It is stored up to 4 times. In addition, when data is stored, the data is sequentially arranged from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserve areas (first to fourth reserved areas). It is memorized. That is, as the area number decreases, data corresponding to the start winning combination that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data that corresponds to the oldest starting winning combination in time is stored. When data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored even if the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning).

  Then, when the MPU 201 determines that it has come to the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, the data stored in the holding first area of the holding ball storage area 203b (the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the game upon winning) The status flag is shifted (moved) to each of the execution areas 203b1 to 203b5. Then, the data shifted to the execution area is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22), and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a fluctuation effect is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and the stop type.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Here, the details of the data shift will be described. If the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start the execution of the variation effect, it shifts the random number value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area to the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the execution area. Similarly, the random number value of the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the hold first area is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the execution area, and the randomness of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the hold first area The numerical value is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the execution area, the random number value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 of the hold first area is shifted to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 of the execution area, and the hold first area The state of the winning game state flag storage area 203b5 is shifted to the winning game state flag storage area 203b5 of the execution area.

  Then, when the shift of each data to the execution area is completed, the pending first area becomes empty, so the data stored (held) in the other pending areas (pending 2nd area to 4th pending area) is stored. , Shift processing is performed to pack in a small holding area (holding first area to holding third area) with a small area number. In the present embodiment, in the holding ball storage area 203b, data shift is performed only for the holding areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held).

  For example, it is assumed that data is stored in all the holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) in the holding ball storage area 203b when it is determined that the start of the variation effect is performed (the holding ball number counter described later The value of 203c becomes “4”). In this case, when the data of the holding first area is shifted to the execution area and the holding first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 respectively displays the data of the other holding areas (the holding second area to the holding fourth area). , Shift the area number to one smaller holding area (holding first area to holding third area). That is, the data of the holding second area is shifted to the holding first area, the data of the holding third area is shifted to the holding second area, and the data of the holding fourth area is shifted to the holding third area.

  Also, for example, when data is stored only in the two holding areas of the first holding area and the second holding area when the judgment of the start of the change effect is performed (the value of the holding ball number counter 203c described later) Becomes “2”), the MPU 201 shifts only the data of the reserved second area to the reserved first area to complete the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift process is not performed for the holding area (hold third area to hold fourth area) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. Control burdens can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the hold area (hold second area to hold fourth area) may be configured to be shifted to a hold area with a smaller area number, respectively. In that case, since the determination as to whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (the holding second area to the holding fourth area) is unnecessary, the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the program can be reduced, and the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  The holding ball number counter 203c is a variation effect (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waits) up to four times. The holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S613 in FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, one is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S204 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation effect is newly executed (see S306 in FIG. 21).

  The value of the holding ball number counter 203c (that is, the holding ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 20). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the starting winning is detected and the holding ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the value of the number of holding times of the fluctuation effect itself held by the main control unit 110 by the holding ball number command. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can manage the number of holdings of the variable effect without accessing the main control device 110. Also, every time when the start winning is detected, the main ball controller 110 transmits a ball number command for holding balls to the sound lamp control device 113 so that the number of holding balls of the fluctuation effect managed in the sound lamp control device 113 is noise. Even if the main ball control unit 110 deviates from the actual number of balls held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of the etc., it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the ball number command received next.

  The jackpot after game state flag 203d is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or a high probability state when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot and the jackpot ends. If the jackpot after game state flag 203d is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in the low probability state when the jackpot is finished, if the jackpot after game state flag 203d is on, the jackpot ends When it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be a high probability state.

  The jackpot after game state flag 203 d is used by the MPU 201 when a jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10. Although the details will be described later, when the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 transmits a fanfare command for notifying the start of the jackpot or the like to the audio lamp control device 113. In that case, the MPU 201 generates the fanfare command based on the jackpot after game state flag 203d. Although details will be described later, the jackpot after game state flag 203d is also read ahead when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched based on the data stored in the hold area of the hold ball storage area 203b described above. It is used by MPU201 that the data used as a target of was acquired with the starting winning combination during a big hit.

  The jackpot after game state flag 203d is set to an initial value as an initial value by an initial setting process (see S714 of FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Further, the jackpot after game state flag 203d is set to ON when it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the jackpot type is determined to be a probability variation jackpot (see S410 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the big hit post game state flag 203d is set to off when it is determined that the big hit type is normally a big hit (see S411 in FIG. 22). When it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the state of the flag 203d does not change.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is determined to be a probability variation jackpot, or when the jackpot type is determined to be a normal jackpot, it is configured to set the state of the jackpot after gaming state flag 203d The state of the flag 203d may be set before the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot type is determined.

  The jackpot middle flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot. When the big hit flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in big hit, and when the big hit flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is big hit. The jackpot flag 203 e is used to determine whether the winning has occurred during the jackpot or outside the jackpot when the ball has won (start winning) at the first entrance 64. Used by

  In the present embodiment, when the big winning flag 203e is on when the ball is won (start winning) at the first ball entry port 64, it is assumed that the winning occurred during the big hit, and the ball enters the first ball. When the jackpot 64 is a prize (start prize) and the jackpot middle flag 203e is off, it is assumed that the prize has occurred other than during a jackpot.

  The jackpot flag 203e is set to an initial value as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S714 of FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. The jackpot flag 203d is set to ON when jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10 (see S315 in FIG. 21), and is set to OFF when the jackpot is ended (see S914 in FIG. 27).

  The prefetch execution flag 203 f is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched for the new entering ball when the ball newly enters the first entrance 64. When the prefetch execution flag 203f is on, it indicates that the lottery result of the big hit lottery is prefetched for the new entering ball, and when the prefetch execution flag 203f is off, the lottery result of the big hitting lottery is about the new entering ball. Indicates not to read ahead.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of holding times of winnings (starting winnings) to the first entrance 64 has reached the maximum value (four times in the present embodiment), the ball enters the first entering. Even if a new ball enters the ball mouth 64, no further start winnings are held. That is, even if the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the counter value etc. associated with the ball (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a) are not acquired, and they are It does not hold in the holding ball storage area 203b.

  The prefetch execution flag 203 f is used by the MPU 201 to determine whether or not to prefetch the lottery result of the big hit lottery for a new entering ball when the ball newly enters the first entrance 64. Then, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, except for the new ball entry, if the above-mentioned holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (ie, it is not the maximum value), pre-reading The execution flag 203f is set to on (see S210 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, except for the new ball entry, if the above-mentioned holding ball number counter 203c is 4 (ie, if it is the maximum value), pre-read execution is performed The flag 203 f is kept off (see S 203 in FIG. 20: No). In addition, after the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to ON, when prefetching of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is ended, it is set to OFF (see S516 in FIG. 23).

  In this embodiment, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set. However, in the state of the flag 203f, the ball enters the first entry. It may be configured to be set after entering the ball opening 64 until the prefetch execution process (see S107 in FIG. 19) described later is executed.

  In the big hit medium winning flag 203g, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and a winning game state flag) obtained in conjunction with a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 is a big hit It is a flag indicating whether it has been acquired by the start winning combination in the middle, or acquired or obtained by the winning combination other than the jackpot.

  When the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on, it indicates that the data acquired in conjunction with the first entry ball slot 64 winning start (start winning combination) is obtained by the big hit starting winning combination, the big hit When the middle prize flag 203g is off, it indicates that the data acquired as a result of winning (start winning) at the first ball entry port 64 is obtained by a starting winning other than during a big hit. When the jackpot result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched, the jackpot flag 203g refers to the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability or performs the prefetch referring to the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability. It is used by the MPU 201 to determine what to do.

  The MPU 201 determines the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to in the prefetching, based on the state of the above-mentioned winning-time gaming state flag (that is, the winning-time gaming state flag 203a) when the big hit medium winning flag 203g is off. On the other hand, when the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to in the pre-reading are determined based on the state of the big hit after-game status flag 203d described above.

  More specifically, if the winning game state flag is off when the big hit medium winning flag 203g is off, while the low probability time jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to, the big hit middle winning flag 203g is off In this case, if the winning game state flag is on, the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 is referred to, and the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is performed.

  Also, when the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on, if the big hit after game state flag 203d is off, while the low probability time big hit random number table 202a1 is referenced, if the big hit middle winning flag 203g is on, If the jackpot-after game state flag 203d is on, the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to, and prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In this big hit middle winning flag 203g, when the ball newly enters the first entrance ball slot 64, except for the new entering ball, the above-mentioned holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (i.e., If the jackpot flag 203e is on (that is, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot), it is set to ON (see S210 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 anew, except for the new ball entry, the above-mentioned holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (that is, unless it is the maximum value) Further, if the big hit medium flag 203e is off (ie, the pachinko machine 10 is not big hit), it is set to off (see S211 in FIG. 20). In addition, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 anew, except for the new ball entry, if the number of balls holding counter 203c is 4 (ie, if it is the maximum value), during a large hit The state of the winning flag 203g is not changed (see S203: No in FIG. 20).

  In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, it is configured to set the state of the big hit medium winning flag 203g, but in the state of the flag 203g, the ball is the first It may be configured to be set after entering the ball entrance 64 and before the pre-reading execution process (see S107 in FIG. 19) described later is executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Next, the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed in the main control unit 110 and the prefetching command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 when the prefetching is performed will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball wins to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the gaming state flag 203a (that is, the winning game state flag) Is acquired and stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern type are prefetched prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data.

  If the result of the lottery is predicted, first, one of the two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 is used for prediction, and thereafter, as in the case of the jackpot lottery, the acquired first The value of the random number counter C1 per 1 is compared with the value (percent value) of the random numbers stored in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prediction, and if any matches, it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit It is predicted (judged).

  In the present embodiment, if the data acquired as a result of the start winning is obtained by a start winning other than a big hit, it may be determined whether the gaming state at the time of the winning was a low probability state or a high probability state. Whether or not it is determined is determined, and if the gaming state at the time of winning is in the low probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability time is used to predict success or failure. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning is in the high probability state, the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 is used to predict the success or failure.

  More specifically, when the jackpot middle winning flag 203g is off, if the winning at game state flag in the data acquired along with the winning is off, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability is used If the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability is used to predict the success or failure.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the data acquired in connection with the start winning is obtained by the start winning during the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the end of the big hit. It is determined whether it is set or set to a high probability state, and if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a low probability state at the end of the jackpot, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability time is used to predict success or failure Be done. On the other hand, if the gaming state is in a high probability state at the end of the big hit, the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is used to predict whether it is acceptable or not.

  More specifically, if the jackpot after game flag 203g is on, if the jackpot after game state flag 203d is off, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability is used to predict success or failure, and after the jackpot game If the state flag 203d is on, the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 is used to predict whether it is acceptable or not. In addition, the reason why the method of determining the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is changed depending on whether the data acquired along with the starting winning combination is acquired by the starting winning combination during the big hit or the winning combination other than the big hitting among the winning combinations Will be described later.

  Then, the success or failure of the lottery result is predicted, and as a result, when the jackpot is predicted, the jackpot type is further predicted. When the jackpot type is predicted, as in the case of the jackpot lottery, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the jackpot type table (not shown). And the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is determined (predicted). On the other hand, when it is predicted that the lottery result is out of order, the type of stop at the time of out is predicted. Even when the stop type at the time of disconnection is predicted, the value of the acquired stop pattern selection counter C3 and the value of the random number stored in the stop type selection table (not shown) as in the case of the jackpot lottery And the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is determined (predicted).

  Also, even when the variation pattern type is predicted, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the variation pattern table, as in the case of the big hit lottery, and the variation type The fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the value of the counter CS1 is determined (predicted).

  Then, as described above, when prefetching is executed in main controller 110 and the yes / no and its type and variation pattern type are predicted, the prefetch command including the prediction result is voiced from main controller 110 The lamp controller 113 is notified. The prefetch command will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect with respect to the series of fluctuation effects pending at that time. Then, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be performed, setting of an aspect of the continuous advance notice effect is also performed.

  Here, the continuous advance notice effect will be described. The continuous advance notice effect is a type of advance notice effect that indicates that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed with the winning (opening start) to the first entrance 64 is likely to be a jackpot (notice), It is an effect that a chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the fluctuation effect over all the fluctuation effects held at the time of winning. If this continuous advance notice effect is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the pending variable effects, the player is expected to feel a big hit after all the pending changed effects are finished. It can be held against. In the present embodiment, when continuous notice effects are performed over all the change effects pending at the time of winning, the chance eyes are displayed in each change effect, but the same character or the same in each change effect You may comprise so that the character relevant to a character may be displayed. In addition, the number of the same character or the number of characters related to the same character may be displayed so as to be increased each time the variation effects are performed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that a change effect different from the normal one has been performed, and therefore can recognize that a continuous advance notice effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation to be a big hit after all the suspended change effects are finished.

  In the present embodiment, when execution of continuous advance notice effects is set for the pending change effects, the chance symbol (for example, a figure as a stop symbol when the change effects are finished in the third symbol display device 81) On the effective line L1 shown in 4, “3”, “4” and “1”) are displayed in order of the combination of main symbols from the left symbol row Z1. Then, among the series of fluctuation effects for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, for the last fluctuation effect, the display of the chance eye is not performed as the stop symbol, and the original stop symbol is displayed as it is.

  In general, the player pays attention to the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to play a game, so by displaying the chance eyes continuously as a stop symbol appearing after stopping the fluctuation effect. The player can easily recognize that the continuous advance presentation effect has been performed. In addition, even if the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot does not appear as the stop symbol, the chance eye is displayed, thereby providing the player with an expectation that the jackpot will be a jackpot after the continuous advance notice effect is finished. You can have it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the prefetch command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is prefetched in the main controller 110 will be described. The prefetch command is the prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by the prefetching (the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type in the case of jackpot, the stop classification when outliers, the variation pattern type), and the lottery result in the prefetching In the command to notify the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control unit 110 the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as "prediction assumption"), which is the precondition for the prediction when predicting is there.

  In this embodiment, when the prediction precondition is the low probability state, it indicates that the lottery result is predicted under the precondition that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state. Specifically, it means that the lottery result is predicted by using the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 in the main control device 110. On the other hand, when the prediction precondition is the high probability state, it indicates that the lottery result is predicted under the precondition that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state. Specifically, it means that the lottery result is predicted by using the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 in the main control device 110.

  FIG. 8 is a schematic view schematically showing data included in the prefetch command. In FIG. 8, the left direction in the drawing is the upper bit direction of data, and the right direction is the lower bit direction of data. In this embodiment, each command is composed of 2 bytes regardless of the type of command, and in the upper 1 byte, data indicating the type of the command is stored, and in the lower 1 byte , And data to be parameters of the command are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, data indicating that the command is a prefetch command is stored in the upper 1 byte of the prefetch command, and data that is a parameter of the prefetch command is stored in the lower 1 byte. It is done.

  Specifically, the prediction precondition for read ahead is indicated by the most significant bit of the 8 bits constituting the lower 1 byte. Also, the lower 3 bits following the most significant bit indicate the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the lower 3 bits following the 3 bits indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicate the variation pattern type prediction result Indicated. Other information is shown for the least significant 1 bit.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b1), if “0” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, the prediction precondition for read ahead indicates that the state is a low probability state, and the most significant bit of the lower byte is If "1" is stored, it indicates that the state is a high probability state. In other words, if the most significant bit of the lower byte is “0”, this means that the lottery result is predicted in main controller 110 using jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability, and the lowermost byte has the highest value. When the upper bit is “1”, it means that the lottery result has been predicted by using the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 in the main control device 110.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine, based on the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command, which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to perform the prediction result indicated by the prefetch command.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b 2), the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “complete out of reach” which does not become reach if “000” is stored in the lower 3 bits following the most significant bit of the lower byte, as shown in FIG. Show. Similarly, if "001" is stored, it indicates that it is a "back and forth" that causes the back and forth reach, and if "010" is stored, and that if it is "back and forth" that causes a reach other than "back and forth" Indicates that it is "other reach", "01 1" indicates that it is "15R normal jackpot" if it is stored, and "100" indicates that it is "2 probability variation jackpot" if it is stored. If "101" is stored, it indicates "15R probability variation jackpot".

  As the prediction result of the variation pattern type, as shown in FIG. 8 (b3), among the lower 1 byte of the prefetch command, “000” is stored in the lower 3 bits following 3 bits indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. If it does, it indicates that it is off (short out). Similarly, if "001" is stored, it indicates that it is out (long out), and if "010" is stored, it indicates that it is normal reach, and if "011" is stored, it is super reach And “100” is stored to indicate that it is a special reach.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when start winning is detected, the pre-reading process is executed by the main control unit 110, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern judgment predicted by the pre-reading is included in the pre-reading command By transmitting to the lamp control device 113, more versatile control can be realized in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the normal reach, the super reach and the special reach are configured to include both the jackpot case and the outlier case, but each reach in the case of the jackpot and each reach in the case of the outfall And may be divided. Each reach in the case of the jackpot and each reach in the case of disengagement are separately configured, and further, the execution judgment of the continuous advance presentation effect in the audio lamp control device 113 is also considered in consideration of the prediction result of the variation pattern type If configured to be performed, it is possible to perform the execution judgment of the continuous advance presentation effects on finer conditions by increasing the types of the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type notified by the prefetch command. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the control requiring the pre-reading, the control in the audio lamp control device 113 can be performed more variably.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 does not notify the voice lamp control unit 113 from the pre-read command only whether it is simply a loss or a jackpot as a prediction result of the jackpot lottery, but in the case of a miss, "" Reach before or after "outside back", "not reach back and forth outside" notification, in the case of the jackpot, "15R regular jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" or "15R probability variation jackpot" to notify There is. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform the execution judgment of the continuous advance presentation effect, which will be described later, in more detailed conditions, as compared with the case of notifying whether it is simply a loss or a jackpot as a prediction result of the jackpot lottery. It is possible to diversify the control that requires pre-reading, for example. Therefore, control in the audio lamp control device 113 can be performed more colorfully.

  In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the main controller 110 is notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by dividing into 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and 15R probability variation jackpot. Of course, the prefetch command may be configured to simply notify that it is a jackpot. In addition, according to the maximum number of rounds that occur in the big hit, “15R big hit” (15R normal big hit and 15R probability variation big hit correspond) and “2R big hit” (2R probability variation big hit corresponds), main controller 110 The preread command may be configured to notify the sound lamp control device 113 from the above. Alternatively, depending on whether the gaming state to be transferred after the big hit is a high probability state, divided into "probably big hit" (15R positive variation big hit and 2R positive variation big hit are applicable) and "normal big hit" (15R normal big hit is applicable) The pre-read command may be configured to notify the audio lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out, the main control unit 110 is notified from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 by dividing it into complete out, back and forth reach, and back and forth out of reach. Of course, the pre-read command may be configured to notify that it is simply out. Also, the read ahead command may be configured to be divided into off reach generation and complete off. If the information content to be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 is reduced as compared with the case of the present embodiment by configuring in this manner, the audio lamp control device 113 performs processing based on the jackpot lottery prediction result of the present embodiment. It can be simplified than in the case. Therefore, in this case, while making the voice lamp control device 113 perform control relating to pre-reading, it is possible to suppress an increase in control burden relating to pre-reading and make the processing capacity of the voice lamp control device 113 directed to other control. . Therefore, while performing control by prefetching, it is possible to achieve diversification of effects that do not require prefetching.

  Further, if the information content to be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 in the jackpot lottery prediction result of the pre-read command is simply reduced to a "big hit" or "out", the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Then, the process based on the jackpot lottery prediction result can be simplified as compared to the case of the present embodiment. Therefore, in this case, while making the voice lamp control device 113 perform control relating to pre-reading, it is possible to suppress an increase in control burden relating to pre-reading and make the processing capacity of the voice lamp control device 113 directed to other control. . Therefore, while performing control by prefetching, it is possible to achieve diversification of effects that do not require prefetching.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the fanfare command transmitted from main controller 110 to audio lamp control device 113 when the lottery result of the big hit lottery in main controller 110 is a big win will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic view schematically showing data included in the fanfare command. As in the case of FIG. 8, in FIG. 9, the left direction in the drawing is the upper bit direction of data, and the right direction is the lower bit direction of data. Further, in the upper one byte of the two-byte command, data indicating the type of the command is stored, and in the lower one byte, data serving as a parameter of the command is stored.

  As described above, the fanfare command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110 of the start of the fanfare effect and the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit . Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, and then the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare command is sent from the main control device 110 It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this embodiment, the fanfare command includes information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fanfare command from the fanfare command. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the present jackpot is acquired. Although the details will be described later, the gaming state acquired here is referred to when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode as to whether to perform “finalized display” or “normal display” in the ending effect. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the upper 1 byte of the fanfare command stores data indicating that the command is a fanfare command, and the lower 1 byte stores data serving as a parameter of the fanfare command. It is done.

  Specifically, the gaming state to be set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is indicated by the most significant bit of the 8 bits constituting the lower 1 byte. That is, the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present jackpot is shown. Other information is indicated in the other lower 7 bits following the most significant bit. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), if "0" is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the "low probability state" at the end of the current big hit. If “1” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “high probability state” at the end of the current big hit.

  Then, when the fanfare command is generated in the main control unit 110, if the above-mentioned big hit after game state flag 203d is off, "0" is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, and the big hit after game state flag 203d Is on, “1” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command, but instead of the fanfare command, the variation is changed. The main controller 110 may notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit by the pattern command, stop type command, round number command, or ending command. . That is, after the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot in the main control unit 110 and the jackpot type is determined, the main control unit is determined until the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the sound lamp control unit 113. As long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by the audio lamp control device 113, any command may be used for notification. In addition to the fanfare command, a command to notify the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is provided, and the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command, but When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command notified from the control device 110, it is set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on what the stop type indicated by the stop type command is. The sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine the playing state.

  That is, in the main control device 110, when the jackpot lottery is performed, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern and the determined stop type A stop type command indicative of is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, when the stop type corresponding to the lottery result is determined, if the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, the big hit type is determined, so whether the present big hit is a probability change big hit by the stop type command It is indicated whether it is a jackpot. Therefore, when the stop type command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on what the stop type indicated by the stop type command is. .

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 at least stores a continuous advance judging table 222a. Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the holding ball number counter 223b, the big hit after game state flag 223c, the change start flag 223d, the stop type selection flag 223e, the ending mode counter 223f, a continuous notice lottery counter 223g, a continuous notice frequency counter 223h, and a after-notice jackpot flag 223i are provided. For convenience of explanation, the description of the continuous notice determination table 222a of the ROM 222 will be made after the continuous notice lottery counter 223g of the RAM 223 is described.

  The prefetch information storage area 223a is an area for storing various information (predicting preconditions for prefetching, prediction results of jackpot lottery, prediction results of variation pattern type) notified from the main control device 110 by the above-described prefetch command. is there.

  Here, details of the pre-reading information storage area 223a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the pre-reading information storage area 223a. The prefetch information storage area 223a has five areas of one execution area and four reserve areas (preserve first area to reserve fourth area). In each of these areas, at least a big hit lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, a variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and a prediction precondition storage area 223a3 are provided.

  The jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 is an area for storing information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery described above, and the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 is information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type described above It is an area for storing. The prediction precondition storage area 223a3 is an area for storing information indicating the above-described prediction precondition of the prefetching. Each area of the pre-read information storage area 223a is initialized in the process of setting the initial value of the RAM (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is cleared to 0.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110, various information (prefetch preconditions, jackpot lottery prediction results, and variation pattern type prediction results) from the prefetch commands are received. Is extracted as prefetching information, and the extracted prefetching information is stored in the prefetching information storage area 223a.

  Although details will be described later, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the main control device performs prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, only the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are voice lamp control The device was not notified. However, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 110 performs prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, in addition to the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type, further, the prediction precondition of prefetching Is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113, and each information is stored in the same hold area in the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Therefore, referring to the data stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 for each reserve area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the same reserve area and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are It is possible to determine what kind of prediction preconditions have been read ahead. That is, it is possible to determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 the prefetching has been performed in the main control device 110.

  When the extracted prefetch information is stored in the hold area, the area numbers (first to fourth) of the vacant areas of the four hold areas (first to fourth hold areas) are stored. Data is stored in order from the small area. That is, as the area number decreases, data corresponding to the start winning combination that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data that corresponds to the oldest starting winning combination in time is stored.

  More specifically, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 stores the same data (see FIG. 8 (b2)) as the data indicating the jackpot lottery prediction result included in the prefetch command. Specifically, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the pre-reading command is completely out, "000" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1. Similarly, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of back and forth reach, "001" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and the jackpot lottery prediction result is the reach other than back and forth, the jackpot lottery If "010" is stored in the prediction result storage area 223a1 and the prediction result of the big hit lottery is 15R normal big hit, "011" is stored in the big hit lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and the prediction result of the big hit lottery is In the case of 2R probability variation jackpot, "100" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 is "101" when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is 15R probability fluctuation jackpot Is stored.

  Similarly, in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, the same data (see (b3) in FIG. 8) as the data indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type included in the prefetch command is stored. Specifically, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the pre-read command is out (short), "000" is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2. Similarly, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is out (long), "001" is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, "010" is stored in the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and "011" is stored in the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 when the variation pattern type prediction result is super reach, and the variation pattern is stored. When the prediction result of the type is the special reach, “100” is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2.

  Then, in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3, the same data (see FIG. 8 (b1)) as the data indicating the prediction precondition included in the prefetch command is similarly stored. Specifically, when the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command is in the low probability state, “0” is stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3. Similarly, when the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command is in the high probability state, “1” is stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  In the present embodiment, the same data as the data indicating the jackpot lottery prediction result included in the prefetch command in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and the prediction precondition storage area 223a3. The same data as the data indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, the same data as the data indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetching, the information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery, the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, the prediction of prefetching Although stored as information indicating preconditions, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command, data indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, prediction precondition of prefetching Conversion of the data shown to another data, As the information indicating the prediction result of the lottery, the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetching, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, the prediction precondition storage It may be stored in the area 223a3.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it shifts (moves) each data stored in the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a to the execution area. . Specifically, the information indicating the jackpot lottery prediction result stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 of the reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 of the execution area. Similarly, the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 of the holding first area is shifted to the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 of the execution area, The prediction preconditions stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the area are shifted to the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the execution area.

  Then, when the shift of data to the execution area is completed, the hold first area becomes empty, so the data stored in the other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is the area number 1 Shift processing is performed to pack in a small reserved area (pending first area to pending third area). In the present embodiment, in the pre-reading information storage area 223a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift process is not performed for the holding area (hold third area to hold fourth area) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. Control burdens can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the hold area (hold second area to hold fourth area) may be configured to be shifted to a hold area with a smaller area number, respectively. In that case, since the determination as to whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (the holding second area to the holding fourth area) is unnecessary, the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the program can be reduced, and the free space of the ROM 222 can be increased.

  Further, as described above, in the pre-read information storage area 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, one execution area and four suspension areas (storage first area (storage first area), similarly to the suspension ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 ~ Hold 4th area) is provided. This is for storing mutually corresponding data in each area of the holding ball storage area 203b and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. That is, in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prefetch information corresponding to the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b is stored. Similarly, the prefetch first information corresponding to the reserve first area of the reserve ball storage area 203b is stored in the reserve first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the reserve ball in the reserve second area of the prefetch information storage area 223a The prefetch information corresponding to the reserved second area of the storage area 203b is stored, and the prefetched information corresponding to the reserved third area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the reserved third area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, Prefetching information corresponding to the reserved fourth area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the reserved fourth area of the information storage area 223a.

  Although the details will be described later, when the ball is newly awarded to the first entrance (start winning), data associated with the new starting winning is acquired in main controller 110, and the data is stored in storage ball storage area 203b. As well as being newly stored in the reserved area, the pre-reading for the start winning is performed. Then, a prefetch command including various information (prediction result of jackpot lottery, prediction result of variation pattern type) obtained by the prefetching and prediction precondition of prefetching is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 Ru. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command, various information and prediction preconditions are extracted as prefetch information from the prefetch command, and the prefetch information is newly stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. (See S1210 in FIG. 31). Thus, every time the ball newly wins to the first entrance (start winning), the data associated with the starting winning is the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 and the voice lamp control device The information is stored in the hold area of the preread information storage area 223 a 113.

  Further, when the jackpot lottery is newly started in main controller 110, shift processing is performed for each area of holding ball storage area 203b (see 307 in FIG. 21). Then, in the main control device 110, when the big hit lottery is performed, the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 along with the big hit lottery. When the variation pattern command is received by the voice lamp control device 113 and setting for variation display is performed, shift processing is performed for each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (see S1506 in FIG. 38). Thus, each time the main controller 110 performs a big hit lottery, each area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110 and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the audio lamp control apparatus 113 Shift processing is performed. Therefore, mutually corresponding data is stored in each area of the holding ball storage area 203 b in the main control unit 110 and each area of the pre-reading information storage area 223 a in the audio lamp control unit 113.

  The previously read information storage area 223a described above is referred to when it is determined whether or not to perform continuous advance notice effects. When the voice lamp control device 113 stores new prefetch information in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in response to the reception of the above-mentioned prefetch command, the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a will be described later. Based on the value of the holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g, it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect for a series of fluctuation effects pending at that time.

  Further, the prefetch information storage area 223a is also referred to when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit. When the audio lamp control device 113 performs ending effect which is a part of the above-described jackpot effect, the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the contents of the hold area of the preread information storage area 223a and the state of the after-succeeding game state flag 223c described later. It is determined whether "finalized display" or "normal display" is to be performed in the ending effect.

  The holding ball number counter 223b is, similarly to the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the control device 110 up to four times. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the holding ball number counter 223b. There is.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls in the variable display is added by entering the first entry ball 64, a holding ball number command indicating the value of holding ball number counter 203c after addition is added. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command, and holds It stores in the counter 223b (see S1208 in FIG. 31).

Further, in the main control device 110, when a new variation display is started in the first symbol display device 37, the value of the holding ball number counter 203c is subtracted, and furthermore, the variation display to be started in the third symbol display device 81 The variation pattern command indicating the aspect of is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and sets the mode of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 in response to the reception, the value of the holding ball number counter 223b 1 is subtracted (see S1505 in FIG. 38)
As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 or the variation pattern command, so the holding ball number of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203c.

  Further, the value of the holding ball number counter 223 b is used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the holding ball number counter 223b and displays the value of the holding ball number counter 223b after storage in response to the reception of the holding ball number command. In order to notify the control device 114, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when this display ball holding number command for display is received, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number pattern for the value of the holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the holding ball number counter 203 c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The jackpot after game state flag 223c, like the jackpot after game state flag 203d of the main control device 110, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot in the special game state, when the jackpot is finished, the game of the pachinko machine 10 It is a flag indicating whether the state is in the low probability state or the high probability state. If the jackpot after game state flag 223c is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be a low probability state when the jackpot is finished, if the jackpot after game state flag 223c is on, the jackpot ends When it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be a high probability state.

  The jackpot after game state flag 223c is set to an initial value as an initial value by an initial value setting (see S1010 in FIG. 28) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Further, the state of the big hit post game state flag 223c is set when the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1214 in FIG. 31). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes the jackpot, and then the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare is made. A command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113. In that case, in the main control device 110, a fanfare command including information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is generated, and the generated command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 .

  In the sound lamp control device 113, when the fanfare command is received, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is extracted from the fanfare command. That is, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is extracted. Then, if the extracted gaming state is the "low probability state", the big hit after game state flag 223c is set to be off, and if it is the "high probability state", the big hit after game state flag 223c is set to be on Be done.

  The jackpot after game state flag 223c is used by the MPU 221 when ending effect determination processing (S1221 in FIG. 31) described later is executed. Although the details will be described later, when the ending effect which is a part of the jackpot effect described above is performed, based on the content of the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a described above and the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c, It is determined whether "finalized display" or "normal display" is to be performed in the ending effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set based on the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110, but instead of the fanfare command, the main control device 110 is used. The state of the jackpot after-game state flag 223c may be set based on the stop type command transmitted from the. That is, in the main control device 110, when the jackpot lottery is performed, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern and the determined stop type A stop type command indicative of is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, when the stop type corresponding to the lottery result is determined, if the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, the big hit type is determined, so whether the present big hit is a probability change big hit by the stop type command It is indicated whether it is a jackpot. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the stop type command is received, it is possible to set the state of the jackpot after-game state flag 223c based on what the stop type indicated by the stop type command is.

  Specifically, if the stop type indicated by the stop type command is a probability change big hit, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit can be determined to be a high probability state, so the big hit after game state flag 223c is turned on. Set to On the other hand, if the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command is normally a jackpot, it can be determined that the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present jackpot is a low probability state, so the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set off. Do. When setting the state of the big hit after-game status flag 223c by the stop type command, the fanfare command does not include the information indicating the playing status set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. good.

  In addition to the fanfare command, a command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit is newly provided, and the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113. Make it up. Then, based on a new command transmitted from the main control device 110, the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c may be set. The method of setting the jackpot after game state flag 223c is omitted because it may be performed in the same manner as the fanfare command described above. When a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command may not include information indicating the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fanfare command is received, the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set, but the state of the flag 223c will be described later after the fanfare command is received. The setting may be made before the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is started. In addition, even if it is configured to set the state of the jackpot after-game state flag 223c when the stop type command is received, the state of the flag 223c is an ending effect determination process described later after receiving the stop type command. It should be configured to set it before it starts. Also, a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, and when the new command is received, the state of the flag 223c is that the state of the flag 223c is set even if it is set to set the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c It may be configured to be set after reception of a new command and before start of ending effect determination processing described later.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1202 in FIG. 31) and turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1502 in FIG. 38). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1205 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1508 in FIG. 38). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type) extracted from the received stop type command and the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h. It is determined whether to set the stop type to the chance type.

  More specifically, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “big hit”, the extracted stop type is set as it is (see S1512 in FIG. 38). In addition, even when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “off” and the consecutive notice number counter 223 h is less than 2, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S 1512 in FIG. 38). reference). On the other hand, if the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “off” and the number of consecutive notices counter 223 h is 2 or more, the chance is the stop type instead of the extracted stop type. It is set (see S1513 in FIG. 38).

  The ending mode counter 223 f is a counter used to determine the display mode in the ending effect, and is updated once every execution of the main process (see FIG. 29) of the audio lamp control device 113. The updating of the ending mode counter 223f is performed, for example, by sequentially incrementing by one within the range of 0 to 3 and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 3).

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit and determines the display mode in the ending effect, the value of the ending mode counter 223f and the ending mode selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 222 It is compared and it is determined whether the value of the ending mode counter 223f is a value (for example, 3) predetermined in the ending mode selection table.

  Although details will be described later, in the audio lamp control device 113, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit and immediately before starting the ending effect described above, the content of the holding area in the prefetch information storage area 223a described above and Based on the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c, it is determined whether to obtain the value of ending mode counter 223f. Here, when the value of the ending mode counter 223 f is not acquired, the display mode is determined such that “normal display” is performed in the ending effect.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is acquired, if the value of the ending mode counter 223f is a value (for example, 3) previously determined in the ending mode selection table, "confirmed effect display" is displayed. As performed, the display mode of the ending effect is set (see S1414 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, if the value of the ending mode counter 223f is other than the value (for example, 3) predetermined in the ending mode selection table, the display mode of the ending effect is set such that "normal display" is performed. (See S1415 in FIG. 33). That is, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is acquired, the display mode is determined such that the "fixed effect display" is performed with a probability of 1/3, and the "normal display" with the remaining 2/3 probability. The display mode is determined so that

  When the display mode of the ending effect is set, a display ending command indicating the display mode (“normal display” or “finalized effect display”) of the ending effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, when the display ending command is received, display control is performed so that the ending effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode indicated by the received display ending command.

  The continuous notice lottery counter 223g is a counter used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect, and is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. The update of the consecutive notice lottery counter 223g is performed, for example, by sequentially adding one by one within the range of 0 to 127, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command from the main control device 110, based on the prediction result of the current prefetch, the jackpot type of the held jackpot, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g, etc. The start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined (see FIG. 32).

  The value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g is compared with the continuous advance notice determination table 222a (see FIG. 11) described next, and the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g is within a predetermined range in the continuous advance notice determination table 222a. Is determined. Then, when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is within a predetermined range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S1315 and S1316 in FIG. 32).

  When the advance notice command is received from main controller 110, continuous notice determination table 222a satisfies a predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see the continuous notice determination process in FIG. 32)). If it is, it is a table for setting "the continuous notice determination probability". Here, the continuous advance notice determination probability is a probability to determine to cause the third symbol display device 81 to start the continuous advance notice effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the details of the continuous notice determination table 222a will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the continuous notice determination table 222a. As shown in FIG. 11, the continuous advance judgment table 222a has two tables of a continuous advance judgment table 222a1 at the time of big hit and a continuous advance judgment table 222a2 at the time of disconnection. When the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the prefetch command received from the main control unit 110 is "big hit", the voice lamp control device 113 selects the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of jackpot, and the jackpot lottery prediction result If “off” is selected, the continuous advance notice determination table 222a2 at the time of out is selected. In this way, it is possible to change the continuous advance notice determination probability in accordance with the gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect (whether it is a "big hit" or "out").

  Each of the consecutive notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of removal is each value “1” that can be taken by the number-of-holds ball counter 223b (number of holding times N of variable display) The range of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g (hereinafter referred to as "the continuous notice determination range") for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is respectively defined in association with "4".

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the holding ball number counter 223b, and the holding ball number counter Define "0 to 15" as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "2" of 223b, and associate "0 to 39" as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "3" of the holding ball number counter 223b. It prescribes | regulates, it matches with the value "4" of the number holding ball counter 223b, and prescribes | regulates "0-63" as a continuous notice determination range.

  Further, the continuous advance notice determination table 222a2 at the time of disconnection is associated with the value "1" of the holding ball number counter 223b, defines "0" as the continuous advance notice determination range, and is set to the value "2" of the holding ball number counter 223b. Correspondingly, "0 to 9" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range, and "0 to 25" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in correspondence to the value "3" of the holding ball number counter 223b. In association with the value "4" of the counter 223b, "0 to 39" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 satisfies the predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see continuous notice determination process in FIG. 32)). If so, as a table for setting the continuous advance notice determination probability, one of the continuous advance judgment table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous advance judgment table 222a2 at the time of out is selected. Then, from the selected continuous notice determination table, the continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the holding ball number counter 223b at that time is specified, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g at that time becomes the continuous notice determination range. If it is included, decide the start of the continuous advance presentation effect.

  By the way, in the example of FIG. 11, the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of out are both defined such that the continuous notice determination range becomes wider as the value of the holding ball number counter 223b becomes larger. However, if the continuous advance notice determination range is wide, it becomes easy to be determined to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice determination probability becomes high. Both of the tables 222a2 mean that the larger the value of the holding ball number counter 223b (the number N of holdings of the variable display), the higher the probability of determining the continuous advance notice is defined. Here, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed over all the fluctuation effects that are being held when the continuous advance notice effect is determined, it is possible to set the continuous advance notice determination probability higher as the number of holding times is larger. There is a high possibility that the number of fluctuation effects included in the continuous advance notice effects of will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect is performed as the continuous advance notice effect is performed over many continuous fluctuation effects, so that the player is made special. It can give you a sense of expectation. In addition, since the number of holding times of the variable display generally has a small value in many cases, when the number of holding times is small, it can be suppressed so that continuous advance presentation effects are not performed frequently, while the number of holding times is small. When it becomes large, it can be made easy to perform continuous notice production.

  Further, when the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the big hit in the example of FIG. 11 and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of out are compared, the continuous notice determination range associated with the same value of the holding ball number counter 223b is It is defined that the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of jackpot is the same as or wider than the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of removal. That is, the continuous advance notice determination probability in the case where the gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "big hit" is the same as the continuous advance notice determination probability in the case where the game state after the end of the continuous advance effect is "off" Is also set to be high. Thereby, when the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it can be suggested to the player that there is a high possibility that the gaming state will be a "big hit" after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. The player can have a high sense of expectation. Also, the probability that the gaming state after completion of the continuous advance notice effect (i.e., the result of the lottery performed when the ball is won to the first entrance 64) will be the "big hit" is the probability of being "off" Is also set to a small size, so when the gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "off", it can be suppressed so that the continuous advance notice effect is not performed frequently, but in the case of "big hit" , It can be made easy to perform continuous advance notice production.

  Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, not only the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the prefetch command received from the main control device 110 is "big hit", but also the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is "off" and Also in the case where the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is "long reach out of reach", the permission judgment of the continuous advance notice effect is performed. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous advance presentation effects even when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is "long reach out" etc. Can be done with Therefore, when continuous advance notice effects are performed, it is possible to give the player various expectations. In addition, even when the game is continuously lost as a result of the lottery, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed, it is possible to give the player a high sense of expectation and prevent the player from being bored. be able to.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. The continuous notice frequency counter 223 h is a counter that counts the number of times the continuous notice effect is performed. The initial value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is set to 0, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined when the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the holding ball number counter 223b at that time is determined. The value of is stored (see S1317 in FIG. 32).

  The value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223 h is referred to when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110. At this time, first, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command. Then, if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is a value of 2 or more, the chance is set as the stop type instead of the extracted stop type (see S1513 in FIG. 38), and the set stop type The display control device 114 is notified by the display stop type command. Further, the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is decremented by 1 (see S1516 in FIG. 38).

  The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. In addition, when the chance eye is set as the stop type, for example, on the effective line L1 shown in FIG. 4, the combination of the main symbols stops in sequence from the left symbol row Z1 to “3” “4” “1” The symbol is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 38), and the set stop is performed. The type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. The value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is maintained at 0 (see S1515: No in FIG. 38). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  In addition, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1, it is the last fluctuation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, so it is used as the stop type As in the case where the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 32), and the set stop type is the display stop type without setting the chance item. The display control device 114 is notified by the command. However, the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is decremented by 1 (see S1516 in FIG. 32).

  As described above, while the value of the consecutive notice number counter 223h is 2 or more, every time the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, a chance is set as the stop type, and the set is performed. A display stop type command indicating the stop type is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, in the display control device 114, when the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 ends, a stop symbol as a chance is displayed.

  Here, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the value of the holding ball number counter 223b at that time is stored, and thereafter, every time when the stop type command is received If the value is one or more, the value is decremented by one. Therefore, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the stop symbol serving as the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for all the fluctuation effects reserved in the main control device 110. That is, the stop symbol which becomes a chance eye is displayed continuously.

  Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the continuous advance notice effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chance eyes as the stop symbol of the change effect which is most closely watched during the game. In addition, even if the stop symbol according to the big hit is not shown as the stop symbol, the chance eye is displayed, and the player has a feeling of expectation that the big hit will be obtained after the continuous advance notice effect is finished. You can

  Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command, the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is referred to in order to determine whether the execution of the continuous notice effect has already been set (FIG. 32). See S1305). Then, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 0 (see S1306: Yes in FIG. 32), the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set in all the fluctuation effects suspended by the main control unit 110, Of the predetermined conditions described above, it is determined that the condition (condition 1) is satisfied, and the start of continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the processing relating to the continuous advance presentation effect, the main control device 110 does not determine whether to start the continuous advance presentation effect or not, and the winning of the first ball entrance 64 Based on data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 and winning game state flag) acquired according to (start winning), the lottery result of the big hit lottery is pre-read, and various information obtained by the pre-reading ( The voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type) and the prediction precondition of the prefetching in the prefetching command. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information from the pre-reading command, stores them as pre-reading information in the pre-reading information storage area 223a, and determines the start of continuous notice effect start according to the contents of the pre-reading information storage area 223a. to decide. Then, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the setting of the stop type is also performed for each of the fluctuation effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Therefore, by causing the sound lamp control device 113 to perform complicated processing, the main control device 110 can concentrate the processing on the lottery processing.

  The after-announcement big-hit flag 223i is stored in the continuous announcement frequency counter 223h by storing the value of the holding ball number counter 223b, so that after execution of all continuous announcement effects set for a plurality of fluctuation effects is performed It is a flag which shows the game state after the fluctuation production. If the value of the jackpot flag 223i after this notice is on, it indicates that the gaming state after the fluctuation effect after the execution of all the successive notice effects is performed will be the "big hit" state, and the jackpot flag 223i of after the notice If the value is off, it indicates that the gaming state after the variation effect after the execution of all the continuous advance notification effects is "out". Incidentally, the fluctuation effect after the execution after all the continuous notices is the fluctuation effect performed when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223 h is one.

  When the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined on the basis of the pre-reading command received from the main control unit 110 in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot after jacking flag 223i is the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the pre-reading command If the "big hit" is set to ON (see S1319 in FIG. 32), if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the pre-read command is "off" is set to off (see S1320 in FIG. 32). Then, the value is held until the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 refers to the after-notification jackpot flag 223i when it is determined that the continuous advance presentation effect is being executed when the pre-read command is received (see S1307 in FIG. 32). Then, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is on (see S1307 in FIG. 32: Yes), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set Since the state is the "big hit" state, 2 further between the variation effect (hold ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last variation effect (hold ball) for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set It is judged whether or not the above-mentioned fluctuation effect (holding ball) exists (that is, the difference between the value of the holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 3 or more), and the above-mentioned predetermined It is determined whether (condition 2) is satisfied among the conditions of (see S1309 in FIG. 32).

  On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is off (see S1307 in FIG. 32: No), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is the "out" state, it is further determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery newly notified by the prefetch command is the "jackpot", and among the predetermined conditions described above (condition 3) Is determined (see S1311 in FIG. 32).

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to start at the timing of the new starting winning. The game state flag 203a (ie, the winning game state flag) is acquired. Then, when the acquired data is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data The type is prefetched in main controller 110. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, together with the various information (the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type) obtained by the pre-reading, the prediction precondition is the voice lamp control device from the main controller 110 by the pre-reading command 113 is notified. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-reading command, it extracts various information from the command as pre-reading information and stores it in the hold area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a. The preread information stored here is used when the display mode of the ending effect is set in the sound lamp control device 113 or when it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notification effect.

  However, as will be described later, in either the pachinko machine 10 or the conventional pachinko machine, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by prefetching and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are the main control unit 110 May differ. This is the case where there is a start winning on hold and the jackpot lottery with the start winning on hold is made when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning). The lottery result is a big hit, and is generated by the change of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before and after the big hit.

  That is, the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10 are configured such that winnings (start winnings) at the first ball entry port 64 are held a plurality of times (up to 4 times in the pachinko machine 10) In the main control unit 110, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), if there is a starting winning on hold, the lottery of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning After the results are pre-read, the jackpot lottery with the new starting winning combination is performed after all the jackpot lotterys with each starting winning combination that were on hold at the time of the new starting winning combination are finished.

  Then, when the main control unit 110 executes a jackpot lottery with each starter prize that has been on hold at the time of the new starter prize, if any lottery result becomes a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot end. The game state of is newly set. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start winning combination does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the big hit lottery with the new starting winning combination I will.

  In the main controller 110 of the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning game, The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used are configured to be determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery.

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the new start winning and the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the big hit lottery accompanying the new starting win do not match, it was used in the prefetch of the lottery result of the big hit lottery The main control device 110 disagrees between the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, since the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are different, there is a high possibility that the comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery The main control device 110 may sometimes differ from the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result.

  In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start winning matches the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the big hit lottery accompanying the new starting win, it is used in prefetching The main control device 110 matches the determined jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, since both the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are the same, the respective comparison results match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result The main control device 110 matches the actual jackpot lottery result.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed, and the prediction result of which table 202a1,1 is obtained. It was not configured to be able to determine whether it was obtained using 202a2. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, also in the sound lamp control unit 113, it is determined which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result. could not.

  However, even with the conventional pachinko machine, since the main control unit 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big hit lottery, while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change, both the pre-reading of the big win lottery result and the big hit lottery It is performed in the same gaming state in the main control device 110. Therefore, in main controller 110, jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Match Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot selection lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, in the voice lamp control unit 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, The prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as credible.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the main control unit 110 performs prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes It becomes unclear in which gaming state the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was made. Therefore, the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. It will be unclear. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in main controller 110, in voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot lottery is performed. It treats the forecast result of as unreliable.

  And, in the conventional sounding machine control device 113 for pachinko machines, when it is not possible to trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, a process not related to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery (for example, It was suppressed that the continuous advance notice effect, the ending effect etc.) were performed. Therefore, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot effect and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery were wasted.

  On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to use all the prediction results of the obtained jackpot lottery, for example, so that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained in the main control device 110 is not wasted, As described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, there arises a problem that processing unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is performed. In this case, as described above, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), there is a starting winning on hold, and the starting is on hold. When a jackpot lottery with a prize is made, the lottery result becomes a jackpot, and occurs before and after the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes.

  Here, with reference to each of FIGS. 53 to 55, a problem that arises when the display mode of the ending effect which is a part of the jackpot effect is determined using the prediction result of the jackpot lottery will be described. The determination of the display mode of the ending effect is performed based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery immediately before the ending effect is started. Also, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, here, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, “decision effect display” is always selected in the ending effect, and the prediction precondition is the same as the conventional pachinko machine It is assumed that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning is selected.

  Each of FIGS. 53 to 55 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined based on the prediction result of the large winning lottery during the large hitting effect. First, an example of the problem will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 53 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is usually determined to be a jackpot, and the fluctuation effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed, and further, the fluctuation effect Shows the state where start winnings A and B have occurred during execution of. It should be noted that in the big hit lottery accompanying the starting prize A, the lottery result is out regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine, and in the jackpot lottery accompanying the starting prize B, the pachinko machine If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change jackpot, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result will be out.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), when the starting winning combination A occurs during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the prefetching A of the lottery result is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. Since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a high probability state when the start winning combination A occurs, the high probability state is selected as the prediction precondition of the prefetch A. As a result, when the look-ahead A of the lottery result is performed for the start winning combination A, the prediction result of the look-ahead A is out. In addition, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a high probability state as in the case of the start prize A when the start prize B is generated, the high probability state is selected as the prediction precondition of the prefetch B. As a result, when the look-ahead B of the lottery result is performed for the starting winning combination B, the prediction result of the look-ahead B becomes a probability variation jackpot.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot effect starts, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state. Since the jackpot of this time is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine continues to be in a low probability state even after the jackpot effect is finished. And, when the jackpot effect is finished, first, the jackpot lottery with the start winning prize A is performed, the fluctuation presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the starting prize B is performed, the jackpot The fluctuation effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning combination A is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state.

  Therefore, although the high probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the pre-reading A is performed, the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning prize A is performed in the low probability state, so the prediction result of the pre-reading A and the actual drawing result It is likely to be different. However, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), for the starting winning combination A, both the prediction result of the prefetch A and the actual lottery result are out of coincidence, and therefore, the respective lottery results coincide.

  Further, similarly to the case of the start prize A, the jackpot lottery accompanying the start prize B is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state. Therefore, in this case also, although the high probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead B is performed, the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning B is performed in the low probability state. The possibility of being different from the lottery result is high. And, in this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), although the prediction result of the pre-reading B is a probability change jackpot, the actual lottery result is out, and the respective lottery results are not coincident.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is configured to merely determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the prefetching, the prediction result of the prefetching B is a big hit, so the pending jackpot lottery Among them, it is determined that there is a lottery result to be a big hit, as a result, in the ending effect, "confirmed effect display" is performed. As described above, in the "confirmed effect display", the player is notified that the lottery result will be the big hit in the large hit lottery being held with the end of the big hit, so that "fixed effect display" is performed The player has an expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot if any of the held jackpot lotterys is made after the jackpot is over.

  However, since the jackpot result (offing effect) is ended after that and the actual jackpot lottery with start winnings A and B held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out, It doesn't actually make a big hit. Therefore, even though the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, In fact, there is a problem that the lottery result will not be a big hit. That is, there arises a problem that a process (for example, effect, etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the player is given a sense of useless expectation to disappoint the player, and the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  Subsequently, the problem will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 54 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in a low probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a probability variation jackpot, and a fluctuation effect corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is executed, and further, the fluctuation effect Shows the state where start winnings C and D have occurred during execution of. It should be noted that in the big hit lottery accompanying the starting prize C, regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine, the lottery result shall be out, and in the jackpot lottery accompanying the starting prize D, the pachinko machine If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result is out, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result is usually a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the starting winning combination C occurs during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the prefetching C of the lottery result is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. Since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state when the start winning combination C is generated, the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition of the look-ahead C. As a result, when the pre-reading C of the lottery result is performed for the starting winning combination C, the prediction result of the pre-reading C is out of order. Further, when the start winning combination D occurs, as in the case of the starting winning combination C, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition of the prefetch D. As a result, when the pre-reading D of the lottery result is performed for the start winning D, the prediction result of the pre-reading D usually becomes a jackpot.

  After that, even if the jackpot effect is started, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is originally a low probability state, it continues to be a low probability state. In addition, since the present jackpot is a probability change jackpot, when the jackpot effect is finished, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state. And, when the jackpot effect is finished, first, the jackpot lottery with the start winning prize C is performed, the fluctuation presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the starting prize D is performed, and the jackpot The fluctuation effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the jackpot lottery accompanying the starting winning combination C is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state.

  Therefore, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the pre-reading C is performed, the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the starting winning combination C is performed in the high probability state. It is likely to be different. However, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), for the starting winning combination C, since both the prediction result of the prefetch C and the actual lottery result are out of coincidence, the respective lottery results coincide.

  Further, similarly to the case of the start winning D, the jackpot lottery accompanying the starting winning D is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state. Therefore, even in this case, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead D is performed, the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning combination D is performed in the high probability state. The possibility of being different from the lottery result is high. And, in this case, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), although the prediction result of the pre-reading D is usually a jackpot, the actual lottery result is out, and each lottery result is not coincident.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is simply configured to determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the prefetching, the prediction result of the prefetching D is a big hit, so the pending jackpot lottery Among them, it is determined that there is a lottery result to be a big hit, as a result, in the ending effect, "confirmed effect display" is performed. As described above, in the "confirmed effect display", the player is notified that the lottery result will be the big hit in the large hit lottery being held with the end of the big hit, so that "fixed effect display" is performed The player has an expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot if any of the held jackpot lotterys is made after the jackpot is over.

  However, since the jackpot result (offing effect) is ended after that, even if the actual jackpot lottery with start winnings C and D held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out, It doesn't actually make a big hit. Therefore, even though the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, In fact, there is a problem that the lottery result will not be a big hit. That is, there arises a problem that a process (for example, effect, etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the player is given a sense of useless expectation to disappoint the player, and the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  Subsequently, the problem will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which start winnings E and F are generated when the pachinko machine is a big hit and the big hit effect accompanying the big hit is being executed, and further, at the timing when the big hit ends, It shows a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine changes from the low probability state to the high probability state. As described above, while the pachinko machine is in the jackpot, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in the low probability state. In addition, in the jackpot lottery with the start winning E, regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine (low probability state, high probability state), the lottery result shall be out, in the jackpot lottery with the starting prize F, of the pachinko machine If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result will be out, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the start winning combination E occurs during execution of the jackpot effect, the prefetch E of the lottery result is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. Since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state when the start winning prize E occurs, the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition of the prefetch E. As a result, when the look-ahead E for the starting winning combination E is performed, the prediction result of the look-ahead E is not. Further, when the start winning prize F occurs, as in the case of the starting winning prize E, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is the low probability state, the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition of the prefetch F. As a result, when the look-ahead F of the lottery result is performed for the starting winning combination F, the prediction result of the look-ahead F becomes a probability variation jackpot.

  After that, when the jackpot effect ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state. And, first, the big hit lottery with starting winning E is done, fluctuation production with that big hitting lottery is executed, subsequently, the big winning lottery with starting winning F is done, the fluctuation production with that big hitting lottery To be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning combination E is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state.

  Therefore, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the prefetching E is performed, the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning E is performed in the high probability state, so the prediction result of the prefetch E and the actual lottery result are It is likely to be different. However, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), for the start winning combination E, since both the prediction result of the prefetch E and the actual lottery result are out of coincidence, the respective lottery results are identical.

  Further, similarly to the case of the start winning F, the jackpot lottery accompanying the starting winning F is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state. Therefore, even in this case, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead F is performed, the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning F is performed in the high probability state. The possibility of being different from the lottery result is high. And, in this case, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), although the prediction result of the pre-reading F is a probability change jackpot, the actual lottery result is out, and each lottery result is not coincident.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is configured to merely determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the prefetching, the prediction result of the prefetching F is a big hit, so the pending jackpot lottery Among them, it is determined that there is a lottery result to be a big hit, as a result, in the ending effect, "confirmed effect display" is performed. As described above, in the "confirmed effect display", the player is notified that the lottery result will be the big hit in the large hit lottery being held with the end of the big hit, so that "fixed effect display" is performed The player has an expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot if any of the held jackpot lotterys is made after the jackpot is over.

  However, since the jackpot result (offing effect) is ended after that, even if the actual jackpot lottery with start winnings E and F held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out, It doesn't actually make a big hit. Therefore, even though the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, In fact, there is a problem that the lottery result will not be a big hit. That is, there arises a problem that a process (for example, effect, etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the player is given a sense of useless expectation to disappoint the player, and the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to use all the prediction results of the jackpot lottery so that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is not wasted, the actual jackpot lottery There arises a problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result is executed. As described above, in any case, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), there is a pending starting winning, and the jackpot associated with the pending starting winning In the lottery, the lottery result is a big hit, and occurs before and after the big hit when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes.

  That is, as described above, in the main control device 110, when there is a start winning on hold when the start winning is newly made, after the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning is pre-read, After all the big hit lottery with each starting winning combination which has been on hold at the time of the new starting winning combination is finished, the big winning pulling lottery with the new starting winning combination is done. Therefore, when the main control unit 110 executes a jackpot lottery with each starter prize that has been on hold at the time of the new starter prize, if any lottery result becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type at the jackpot end In accordance with the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start winning combination does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the big hit lottery with the new starting winning combination I will.

  And, as described above, in the main control device 110 of the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning game. Furthermore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are configured to be determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the new start winning and the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the big hit lottery accompanying the new starting win do not match, it was used in the prefetch of the lottery result of the big hit lottery The main control device 110 disagrees between the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading.

  Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, since the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are different, there is a high possibility that the comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery There are cases where the main control device 110 may differ from the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result. Then, when such a prediction result is notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and used in the voice lamp control device 113, a process (for example, an effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery Problems occur, etc.).

  Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 Treated the lottery's predicted result as unreliable and refrained from using that predicted result. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.

  In order to solve this, it is conceivable, for example, to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, when the main control device 110 performs the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202 a 1 and 202 a 2 are obtained using both the big hit random number tables 202 a 1 and 202 a 2, and further It is conceivable to notify the voice lamp control device 113 so as to make it possible to determine which table corresponds to the two prediction results.

  According to this configuration, when using the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the voice lamp control device 113, one of the two prediction results can always be treated as credible. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using this credible prediction result, it is possible to suppress the problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed.

  However, as described above, when prefetching the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the main control unit 110, as in the case of the big hit lottery, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 are stored. A process is performed to compare one by one with the current hit value. Therefore, the process of comparing the value of the first random number counter C1 with the winning value stored in each of the two big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 one by one each time a new starting winning combination occurs, It has to be repeated up to 33 times. Therefore, every time a new start winning combination occurs, the comparison process may take a long time, and time may be wasted.

  Further, although the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 are both obtained in the main control device 110 using the two big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is used in the voice lamp control device 113 In the case, only one prediction result is used. Therefore, the comparison processing which may take time in the main control device 110 is partially wasted. In addition, although the main controller 110 obtains two prediction results each time a new start winning is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses only one of the prediction results, so that useless prediction results are always generated. Therefore, the number of useless prediction results increases more than in the case of the conventional pachinko machine.

  Further, since the audio lamp control device 113 stores the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively, a storage area larger than that of the conventional one is required. Further, since main controller 110 notifies prediction results corresponding to each of two tables 202a1 and 202a2 to audio lamp controller 113, data to be transmitted from main controller 110 to audio lamp controller 113 is increased. Therefore, there is a possibility that data etc. desired to be transmitted preferentially can not be transmitted, and the control burden on the main control device 110 also increases. Further, since the data to be received also increases in the audio lamp control device 113, the control load increases.

  As described above, in the case where the main control device 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 are obtained using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 so as to make it possible to determine which table the two prediction results respectively correspond to, the credit in the voice lamp control device 113 Although it can handle more predictions that can be made, other problems occur, such as an increase in processing time and control burden.

  Also, apart from this, for example, it is also conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control unit 110 and the lottery result becomes the jackpot, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit, the main control unit 110 uses the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the current big hit, and pre-reads each pending start winning combination It is conceivable that the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of each prediction result obtained by the re-doing and re-doing.

  According to this configuration, the main control device 110 changes the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed. As a result, even if the voice lamp control device 113 can not trust the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change, the prediction of the jackpot lottery notified again from the main control device 110 instead. The results can be used as credible.

  The prediction result of the jackpot lottery to be notified again is obtained by the main controller 110 in the same tables 202a1 and 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot end. is there. Therefore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified again and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result coincide with each other in the main control device 110, in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery Can be treated as credible. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using this credible prediction result, it is possible to suppress the problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10, every time the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the pre-reading for each start winning combination pending in the main controller 110 is re-done, and each prediction result obtained by the re-do The control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 again. Therefore, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery which has become the target of the retrial and the prediction result are wasted.

  Therefore, unnecessary processing is performed in the main control device 110, which imposes a control burden. Also, since the voice lamp control device 113 receives the useless prediction result and stores it in the RAM 223, useless processing is performed in the voice lamp control device 113 and the control load Hangs. Further, data to be transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 is increased. Therefore, there is a possibility that data etc. desired to be transmitted preferentially can not be transmitted, and the control burden on the main control device 110 also increases. Further, since the data to be received also increases in the audio lamp control device 113, the control load increases.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 hits the jackpot, the main control unit 110 uses the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the present jackpot to hold each start winning prize on hold When the pachinko machine 10 is configured to reread the pre-reading for each and to notify each of the prediction results obtained by the re-reading to the voice lamp control device 113, the credit in the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Although it can handle more prediction results that can be done, other problems occur such as unnecessary processing and increased control burden.

  Also, apart from this, for example, it is also conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control unit 110 and the lottery result becomes the jackpot, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the main control unit 110 normally does not pre-read the lottery result of the big hit drawing, and only when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, the main control unit 110 in the big hit random number table corresponding to the gaming state at the big hit end. It is conceivable to pre-read each pending start winning combination using 202a1 and 202a2 and to notify each sound lamp control device 113 of each prediction result from the main control device 110.

  If configured in this way, it is possible to pre-read each pending start winning combination only when the main control device 110 makes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big hit and there is a high possibility that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes. . The prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by this pre-reading is obtained by the main controller 110 in the same table 202a1, 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 scheduled to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot end. . Therefore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result coincide with each other in the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery It can be treated as Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using this credible prediction result, it is possible to suppress the problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed.

  However, since the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot in the main control device 110, the number (frequency) of prefetching decreases. Then, the number of jackpot lottery prediction results notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 is also reduced, so the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction result in the voice lamp controller 113 decreases, and the above-described continuous Opportunity to carry out the preview production is reduced. Therefore, the amusement of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

  As described above, the main controller 110 does not usually pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and only when the pachinko machine 10 hits the jackpot, the main controller 110 copes with the gaming state at the time of the jackpot end When the pachinko machine 10 is configured to pre-read each pending start winning combination using the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and to notify each prediction result from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 The audio lamp control device 113 can handle more credible prediction results, but the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction results decreases, which may lower the interest of the pachinko machine 10, and other problems. Will occur.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 stores the prediction preconditions and corresponds to the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the prefetching It was comprised so that discrimination | determination with the jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 of the plan to be used by the actual jackpot lottery to be performed can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to handle more credible prediction results without causing problems such as unnecessary processing and increased control burden, and a problem that the frequency of using the prediction results of the jackpot lottery decreases.

  That is, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored, when the main control device 110 performs prefetching of the lottery result of the big hit lottery, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes It becomes unclear in which gaming state the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was made. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. It could not be determined whether or not there was a match. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in main controller 110, in voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot lottery is performed. It treats the forecast result of as unreliable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the prediction precondition and the jackpot after game state flag 223c are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table 202a1, which is used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery The voice lamp control device 113 can always determine whether the main control device 110 matches the 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Even in the case where it is unclear in the main control device 110 whether or not they coincide, the determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the main control device 110 is highly likely to match the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the prediction result. it is conceivable that. Therefore, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible in this embodiment. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  More specifically, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), data associated with the new starting winning is acquired in the main control unit 110, and the data is stored in the holding ball storage area 203b. As well as being newly stored in the reserved area, the pre-reading for the start winning is performed. Then, a prefetch command including various information (prediction result of jackpot lottery, prediction result of variation pattern type) obtained by the prefetching and prediction precondition of prefetching is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 Ru.

  Then, when the pre-reading command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, various information (prediction result of big hit lottery, prediction result of fluctuation pattern type) and pre-reading prediction precondition are extracted as pre-reading information from the pre-reading command The pre-read information is newly stored in the hold area of the pre-read information storage area 223a. Thereby, when using the pre-reading information in the voice lamp control device 113, by referring to the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is obtained by the pre-reading based on which gaming state Can determine if it is a thing. That is, the main control device 110 can determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In addition, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery becomes the big hit in the main control device 110, the start of the fanfare effect and the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit are voice lamps from the main control device 110 by the fan fare command. The control device 113 is notified. Therefore, when there is a possibility that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, the newly set gaming state can be notified again to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fanfare command.

  Then, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the fanfare command is received, the gaming state is extracted from the fanfare command, and the state of the big hit after-game state flag 223c is set according to the gaming state. As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set when the jackpot ends in the main control device 110 can be determined based on the jackpot after game state flag 223c. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to determine the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery newly executed in the main control unit 110 after the present jackpot is finished.

  As described above, since the prediction precondition and the big hit after-game status flag 223c are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, when using the pre-reading information in the voice lamp control device 113, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery It can be determined whether the main control unit 110 matches the used jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Even in the case where it is unclear in the main control device 110 whether or not they coincide, the determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the main control device 110 is highly likely to match the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the prediction result. it is conceivable that. Therefore, even in the conventional pachinko machine, even if the prediction result treated as unreliable may be treated as credible in the pachinko machine 10, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled in the present embodiment. . Therefore, it is possible to use the prediction result of the jackpot lottery more frequently than the conventional pachinko machine, and to increase the opportunity to improve the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the voice lamp control device 113 according to this embodiment, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number table 202a1 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. , 202a2 match in the main control unit 110, and as a result, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result Treat the jackpot lottery predictions as unreliable because they are likely to be different. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to preferably handle the prediction result of the big hit lottery, and it is also possible to suppress problems such as execution of processing (for example, effects etc.) unrelated to the actual lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the main control unit 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is not necessary to obtain both of the prediction results corresponding to each of the two tables 202a1 and 202a2. Further, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control device 110 is a jackpot, it is not necessary to re-read the pre-reading for each pending start winning. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled without causing problems such as increase in processing time and control load, and problems such as useless processing and increase in control load.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like in the prefetch command, the main control device further includes information indicating the prediction precondition of prefetching. Although transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 from 110, the information indicating the prediction precondition of this pre-reading is only 1 bit. In addition, the main control unit 110 sends information to the voice lamp control unit 113 from the main control unit 110 including information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit this time in the fanfare command, but at the time of the big hit Information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 is also only one bit. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, compared with the conventional pachinko machine, the amount of data processed in MPU201, 221 hardly changes. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 is small, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, even if Pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big win and the number of prize balls paid out in one big win are different models, the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the same specification. Since there are models, the display control device 114 is made into a common part and cost reduction is achieved.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 39) executed after the boot process (see S1601 in FIG. 39) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 18) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1603 and S1604 in FIG. 39).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 13, while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after the power is turned on, the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of power on as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in Fig. 13 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" is shown at the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on, as shown in FIG. The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. If the result is judged as “big hit”, the image shown in FIG. 13 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the fluctuation production, and if it is “displaced”, the image shown in FIG. Display for a fixed period of time after stopping.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Referring back to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the range of the back surface image stored in the back surface image area 235c among the back surface image and the back surface image will be described. FIGS. 14 and 15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining three types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. 14 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage" while Fig. 15 shows the back surface C corresponding to the "island stage". Are shown respectively.

  Of the back faces A to C, the back face images corresponding to the back faces A and B are, as shown in FIG. 14, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "image for scrolling") are configured such that the back surface images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "at-the-city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between position a and position a 'of the corresponding back image first. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the back image on the back C is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... Of FIG. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, in the back surface C, the image of the mountain that soars on the island, the image of the sandy beach that spreads to the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island, the third pattern It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the image of the sky that spreads over the mountain changes its color tone over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the player operating the frame button 22, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface C. In the rear surface image shown in FIG. 15A, an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15 (b), a bright blue sky indicating day is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black as time passes, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 15C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and gradually to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back surface image shown to Fig.15 (a), and the back surface image of Fig.15 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the stage in the city, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the stage in the city displayed frequently is the back image area By being resident on 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage has a partial area of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b Is stored in the rear image area 235c of In addition, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 15 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing. In order to change the back image instantly, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but in such a case, it becomes very useful as the resident video RAM 235. A large amount of RAM must be used, which may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a 'or in the range of FIG. The image data between the position a and the position b including the initial position and the image corresponding to the image between FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (b) are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 is changed when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range image is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surface C displays the images of FIGS. 15A and 15B using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 15 (a) so that transfer of the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. 15 (b)-(c) and 15 (c)-(a) can be completed from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. Thus, while displaying the images of FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 15 (b) to 15 (c) and FIGS. Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 15A and 15B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 15 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 15 (c) to 15 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time using the image data corresponding to the back image. be able to.

  In the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 12) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back surface B, an image corresponding to an image between the position b ′ and the position b in the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Referring back to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) having the numerals "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a fanfare data transfer flag 223 i, at least a stored image data determination flag 233 j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233 k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects and fanfare effects Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is 15R probability variation hit, 2R If it is a probability variation big hit, either of 15R normal big hit, the stop design which shows each big hit is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The fanfare production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the jackpot and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is repeatedly opened from now on, and the round production congratulates the jackpot It is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect informs the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the big win lottery being held with the end of the big win (performs a fixed effect display), or simply gives the player that the big win is finished. It is an effect for informing (normal display).

  By performing a confirmed effect display in the ending effect, the player will be a jackpot result if any lottery among the jackpot lottery held at the time of the jackpot end is made after the jackpot is finished Can recognize. Therefore, since the player can be made to have a feeling of expectation that the player will definitely win a jackpot, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, it is possible to bring the player to a standstill every time a held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes a jackpot. In addition, even if the lottery result is out, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot is increased, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage," "empty stage" and "island stage") is displayed Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table “0000H” describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 16) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (the address “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 17 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 17).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 17) In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 17, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  Referring back to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1605 in FIG. 39). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3205 in FIG. 50 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S1901 in FIG. 41B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S1908 in FIG. 41 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 41B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 41 (b) (see S1909) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 42 to 46) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 47 to 49) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3101 in FIG. 50A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 50B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 18) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d according to the command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command etc. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later (see FIG. 18) describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. In S1903), the pointer update process (see S2805 in FIG. 47) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 18), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 18, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third symbol (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S2807 in FIG. 47). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j is generated by an initial setting process (see S 1602 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233 j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236 a.

  Then, the stored image data determination flag 233 j is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3317 in FIG. 51). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3318 in FIG. 51). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is 1. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3402 in FIG. 52).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 41B) is performed (see S3402 of FIG. 52).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated with power on and a main process executed after the start-up process, and activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be performed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interruption process, first, a reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the acquired ball number to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, when the external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process described later is executed, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values. When ((in the present embodiment, 899, 99, 99, 198, and 250, respectively) are reached, they are cleared to 0, respectively. When the value of the first random number counter C1 reaches the maximum value (one rotation), the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is set as the first value of the first random number counter C1. When the value of the second random number counter C4 reaches the maximum value (one revolution), the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting the variation pattern type of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the first ball entry is performed. The start-up winning process accompanying the winning on the mouth 64 is executed (S105). The details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the start winning process is executed, it is determined whether there is a ball entry to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and if there is a start winning, the ball is excluded If the number of balls held is less than the maximum value (four balls), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired at the timing when the start winning is achieved, and Stored. In addition, based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) newly stored in the holding ball storage area 203b, the prefetch execution flag is used to prefetch the lottery result of the big hit lottery 203f is set to on.

  Then, when the start winning process is completed, it is next determined whether the prefetch execution flag 203f is on (S106), and if the prefetch execution flag 203f is on (S106: Yes), the prefetch process is executed (S106) S107), for the data newly stored in the holding ball storage area 203b by the start winning process described above (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1, the winning game state flag), the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is performed . The details of the prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the prefetch execution flag 203f is off (S106: No), the process of S107 is skipped. Next, launch control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the Then, when the ball firing is on, the information of the ball firing signal is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball firing signal to the firing control device 112. Thus, when the external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process described later is executed, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 20, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process, it is judged whether or not there is a ball entry to the first entrance 64 (start winning), and if there is a starting winning, each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1, gaming state flag 203a and Is stored in the holding ball storage area 203b (pending), and further, for the pending data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the winning game condition flag), the lottery result of the big hit lottery is read ahead In order to do this, processing is performed to set the prefetch execution flag 203 f on.

  In the start winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S201). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 The ball number N) is acquired (S202), and it is determined whether the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S203).

  Then, whether there is no winning on the first ball entry 64 (S201: No) or if there is a winning on the first ball entering 64, the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203c is 4 or more If there is (S203: No), the start winning process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the first entrance 64 (S201: Yes), and the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S203: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (Pending ball number N) is incremented by 1 (S204), and the pending ball number command indicating the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (pending ball number N) after addition is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, The ball number command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S205). As a result, when the external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process described later is executed, the ball holding ball number command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are read out from the counter buffer, and the hold ball number storage area 203b of the RAM 203 is provided The first per random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter 203b3 of the areas corresponding to the value (N) indicated by the holding ball number counter 203c among the 1 area to the 4th holding area And each is suspended (stored) in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 (S206).

  Specifically, if the value of the holding ball number counter 203c after the addition in the process of S204 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the first holding area. . In addition, if the value of the holding ball number counter 203c after the addition is "2", each storage area of the holding second area is stored, and if the value of the holding ball number counter 203c after addition is "3," the holding third area If the value of the holding ball number counter 203c after the addition is "4" in each of the storage areas, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the holding fourth area.

  Next, using the gaming state flag 203a as the winning game state flag, the value corresponds to the value (N) indicated by the holding ball number counter 203c among the holding first area to the holding fourth area provided in the holding ball storage area 203b. The game state flag storage area 203b5 of the area to be stored is stored (S207). That is, in the process of S207, the winning game state flag is stored in the same hold area as the hold area in which the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the process of S206.

  When the MPU 201 detects that the variable presentation execution start timing has come, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b and the winning-time gaming state flag are It shifts to the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b, the jackpot lottery, the determination of the variation pattern type, and the like are executed. As described above, the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the holding ball storage area 203b is used in the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect, the determination of the variation pattern type, and the like.

  Next, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to ON (S208). Here, when the pre-reading execution flag 203 f is set to ON, pre-reading processing (see FIG. 23) to be described later is executed, and as a result, the data stored in the holding ball storage area 203 b by the processing of S206 and S207 (each For each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched. That is, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) stored in the holding ball storage area 203b are also used for the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  Next, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203e is on (S209). As described above, if the jackpot flag 203e is on, then the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot and if the jackpot flag 203e is off, then the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (during a high probability state or a jackpot) Low probability state except). If the jackpot flag 203e is on (S209: Yes), it means that the start winning prize this time is a jackpot during a jackpot, so the jackpot flag 203g is set to ON (S210), The start winning process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the big hit flag 203e is off (S209: No), it means that the current start winning is a win in the normal state, so the big hit flag 203g is set off (S211) ), This start winning process ends, and returns to the timer interrupt process.

  The MPU 201 pre-reads the jackpot lottery result of the data stored in the holding ball storage area 203b (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) by the processing of S206 and S207. The state of the jackpot middle winning flag 203g is referred to. As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot, although the jackpot lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state. That is, the gaming state flag 203a is off during the jackpot. Therefore, when each ball C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired at the timing of the start winning when the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning) during the big hit, The state of the gaming state flag 203a is always off (low probability state), and as a result, the winning game state flag is always off.

  Therefore, if the data targeted for pre-reading is acquired along with the winning prize during the big hit, and if the lottery result is predicted according to the winning-time gaming state flag in the data, the pre-condition for pre-reading prediction However, the prediction result is less likely to match the actual lottery result, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result is degraded. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, if the data targeted for pre-reading is acquired along with the start winning in the big hit, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit It is constituted so that a lottery result may be predicted according to a state. In the processing of S209 to S211, when the prefetching process (see FIG. 23) to be described later is executed, it is determined whether or not the data acquired with the start winning is obtained with the large winning start winning. As possible, the state of the jackpot middle winning flag 203 e is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the variation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S104). The variation process (S104) is to control variation effects performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit medium flag 203e is on and the big hit is currently going on (S301). The jackpot includes the middle of a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. The jackpot flag 203e is set to ON at the timing when the jackpot start is set by the processing of S315 described later, and then the timing when the jackpot ends by the processing of S914 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 27) described later. Is set to off.

  If the result of the determination in S301 is that the big hit medium flag 203e is on and the big hit is in progress (S301: Yes), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203e is off and not jackpot (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), the first symbol display If the display mode of the device 37 is not changing (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: No), the present process is ended as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 only for a predetermined time, so the player can be made to visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation stop (S303: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (the holding ball number N of the fluctuation display being held in the main controller 110) Is determined (S304), and it is determined whether the value (N) of the acquired holding ball number counter 203c exceeds 0 (S305). As a result, if the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (the holding ball number N) exceeds 0 (S305: Yes), it is judged that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, first, the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (The holding ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S306). This is because one pending variable effect is started by the variation start process (S308) described later, and as a result, the number of holding balls decreases by one.

  Next, the data stored in the holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S307). The data shift process performed in the process of S307 is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the pending first area to the pending fourth area of the pending ball storage area 203b toward the area with a smaller area number. Specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data

  When the processing of S307 is finished, next, fluctuation start processing for starting fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S308), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (the holding ball number N) is 0 (S305: No), a demonstration effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81 It is determined whether or not the demonstration is under way (S309). In the process of S309, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (holding ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0 Determine the interval between demonstrations.

  When it is determined that the demo is not underway (S309: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S310), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is being performed (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process as it is. The demonstration command set in the process of S310 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is output when an external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process described later is executed It is transmitted to the control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with this demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demonstration command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the change stop. Therefore, after the fluctuation stop, if the fluctuation display is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined in the process of S302 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S311). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern type selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed If not (S311: No), the process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S311: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set to the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is preset by the fluctuation start process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. Although the details will be described later, in the variation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c is determined. The stop symbol (big hit type) is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the stop symbol (big hit type) or the 2R positive variation big hit (the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds), which will be a 15 R probability variation big hit after a big hit (a maximum variation may shift to a high probability state after 15 round hits). A stop symbol (big hit type) that shifts to a high probability state after a big hit or a stop symbol (big hit type that a maximum round number shifts to a low probability state after a big hit of 15 rounds) or a 15R normal big hit ) Is determined.

  Then, in the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot after the big hit, the red LED is lit in the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the red LED in the 15R regular jackpot And turn on the blue LED. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that each LED is released from lighting when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for several seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  When the process of S312 is finished, next, it is determined whether the lottery result corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is a big hit (S313), If the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation display is out (S313: No), the fluctuation processing is ended and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is a big hit (S313: Yes), the start of the big hit is set (S314). Here, when the start of the jackpot is set, if the jackpot control processing (S803) of the main processing (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, the processing branches to S901: Yes (refer to FIG. 27) and fanfare command Is set. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  When the process of S314 ends, next, the big hit flag 203e is set to ON (S315), the gaming state flag 203a is set to OFF (low probability state) (S316), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, the gaming state flag 203a is off (low probability state) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit. It should be noted that if the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a probability change jackpot, when the jackpot ends, the gaming state flag 203a is set ON, while the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is usually a large jackpot If there is, even if the jackpot ends, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is maintained off.

  In the variation processing described above, the start of the jackpot is set in the processing of S314, and then the jackpot flag 203e is set on in the processing of S315. As described above, when the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S314, when the jackpot control process (see S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, the process proceeds to S901: Yes (see FIG. 27). ) Branch. Therefore, in the jackpot control process, when the processing branches to S901: Yes, the jackpot flag 203e may be set to ON. That is, any process may be performed as long as the flag 203e is set to ON by the start time of the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a variation start process (S308) which is one process of the variation process performed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S308). In this variation start process (S308), based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit" or "out of place" is performed. At the same time, an effect pattern (variation pattern type) or the like of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the fluctuation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b Acquire (S401). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state flag 203a is on (high probability state) (S402). If the state of the gaming state flag 203a is on (S402: Yes), two types of jackpot random number tables are prepared. Among 202a, high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 is acquired (S403). On the other hand, if the state of the gaming state flag 203a is off (S402: No), among the jackpot random number table 202a prepared two types, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability is acquired (S404).

  Then, the jackpot random number table acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 (S405). As described above, three random number values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low probability big-hit random number table 202a 1 as random number values (hit values) that become big hits at low probability. Further, in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2, 30 random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276” are used as random number values (winning value) that become large hitting at high probability. 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 656, 716, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored. In the process of S405, the random number value (per hit value) stored in the obtained big hit random number table is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401, and when they match, the big hit It is determined that

  Then, it is determined whether the result of the comparison in the process of S405 is a big hit (S406), and if it is determined that a big hit (S406: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 And a display mode at the time of big hit is set based on the above-mentioned big hit type table (S407).

  In the process of S407, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 in the jackpot type table, that is, the maximum number of rounds transitions to the high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds. It is determined whether the 15R probability variation jackpot, the maximum round number transitions to the low probability state after the 15 round jackpot, or the 2R probability variation jackpot maximum number transitions to the high probability state after the 2 round jackpot. And the display mode (lighting state of LED37a) at the time of the big hit in the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is set based on the determined big hit type.

  In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, by setting the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) directly as the stop type 3 The display mode at the time of a big hit in the symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 and the above-described fluctuation pattern table for jackpot, the fluctuation pattern type at the time of jackpot is determined (S408). In the process of S408, among the various types of normal reach, various super reach, various special reach, 2R fluctuations A to C, the jackpot type determined in the process of S407 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401. A corresponding jackpot fluctuation pattern type is determined. When the variation pattern type is set in the process of S408, the variation time is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The relationship between the variation pattern type and the variation time is previously defined by a table or the like.

  When the process of S408 is completed, it is next determined whether the jackpot type determined in the process of S407 is a probability variation jackpot (S409). In the process of S409, when the jackpot type is a definite variation jackpot (S409: Yes), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low probability state at the timing when the jackpot is started, and then at the timing when the jackpot ends. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the high probability state. Therefore, in this case, the jackpot after game state flag 203d indicating the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to ON (S410), and the process proceeds to S414. On the other hand, in the process of S409, if the jackpot type is normally a jackpot (S409: No), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low probability state at the timing when the jackpot is started, and then the jackpot ends. Even then, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained at a low probability state. Therefore, in this case, the jackpot after game state flag 203d indicating the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to OFF (S411), and the process proceeds to S414.

  In the process of S406, when it is determined that the jackpot is not the jackpot (S406: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S412). In the process of S412, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is disengaged and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401. As the type of stop to be displayed in, one of the front and back out of reach, reach other than back and forth out of reach, complete out of the set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type is in accordance with whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state. The table is set to be different.

  Next, the variation pattern type at the time of out of step is determined (S413), and the process proceeds to the process of S414. In the process of S413, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the disconnected symbol is determined. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the normal time except the short state, based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table for deviation (usually) described above, short deviation, long deviation, various types of normal reach out, out Out of the various types of super reach and out-of-order special reach, a change pattern type at the time of removal associated with the stop type set by the processing of S412 and the change type counter CS1 acquired by the processing of S401 is determined.

  In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state or a high probability state at the time of definite change, short out, long out, various out-of-normal reach various out-of-range super reach based on the deviation pattern table for deviation (probability change) described above. Out of various types of out-of-order special reach types, the out-of-side fluctuation pattern type associated with the stop type set in the process of S412 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 is determined. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relation between the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation time which is previously defined by a table or the like.

  In the processing of S414, based on the fluctuation pattern type determined by the processing of S408 and S413, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern type via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S414) . Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S407 or S412 via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S415), and the process returns to the variation process. The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when the external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process described later is executed, A command is sent to the voice lamp controller 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command based on that, and transmits it to the display control device 114.

  In the present embodiment, setting of the state of the big hit post game state flag 203d (S410 and S411) is performed in the variation start process, but this big hit post game state flag 203d is a big hit control process described later (FIG. In the reference), the process of S902 is executed, and is referred to when a fanfare command is generated. Therefore, it may be set at any timing before the process of S902 is performed.

  Next, the prefetching process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S107) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19). In this pre-reading process, data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) associated with the detection of starting winning is newly acquired in the above-mentioned starting winning process (see FIG. 20), and pre-reading execution flag This processing is executed when the 203 f is set to ON, and prefetches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the newly acquired data.

  In this pre-reading process, first, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the change type counter CS1, and the winning game state flag stored in the holding ball storage area 203b lastly Is read out (S501). The data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) finally stored in the holding ball storage area 203b are specified based on the holding ball number counter 203c. Specifically, when the value of the holding ball number counter 203c is 1, the data stored in the holding first area is specified as the data finally stored in the holding ball storage area 203b. Similarly, when the value of the holding ball number counter 203c is 2, the data stored in the holding second area is; when the value of the holding ball number counter 203b is 3, the data stored in the holding third area is When the value of the ball number counter 203b is 4, the data stored in the reserved fourth area is specified as the data finally stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Next, it is determined whether the winning-time gaming state flag acquired in the process of S501 is on (high probability state) (S502). In the process of S502, when the winning game state flag is on (S502: Yes), when the prediction precondition of the prefetch is to be the high probability state, that is, the premise that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability This is a case where pre-reading is performed under conditions. Therefore, in this case, of the two types of jackpot random number tables 202a prepared, the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to the processing of S507. On the other hand, in the process of S502, when the winning game state flag is off (S502: No), it is determined whether the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on (S503).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, when the data targeted for the pre-reading is acquired along with the start winning during the big hit, the winning game state flag in the data always indicates the low probability state. Therefore, when the lottery result is predicted according to the winning game state flag in the data, the prefetching precondition is always in a low probability state, and the prediction result is unlikely to coincide with the actual lottery result. And the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result will be worse.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, with regard to the start winning during the big hit, prefetching is performed with the gaming state at the end of the big hit as the prediction precondition, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result is improved. That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 110 is a jackpot, it is further determined what the jackpot type is, and thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a jackpot. Then, when the big hit ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the present big hit type. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined in the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot. Therefore, the gaming state at the end of the big hit can not be determined until the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the main control device 110 becomes the big hit, but when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the playing state at the big hit is already decided The main control unit 110 can determine the gaming state at the end of the jackpot.

  And, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot is finished, if there is a jackpot lottery being held in the main control unit 110, the jackpot lottery being held is one by one in the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot end The main control unit 110 sequentially executes them. Therefore, the jackpot lottery held in the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot.

  Therefore, when pre-reading for the start winning during the jackpot, it is better to set the prediction precondition as the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, rather than always setting the prediction precondition to the low probability state, with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery It is possible to improve the possibility that the main controller 110 matches the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result. Therefore, since the number of prediction results that can be treated as credible in the voice lamp control device 113 can be increased, in the present embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used.

  Specifically, in the process of S503, when the jackpot middle winning flag 203g is off and winning is made in the normal state (S503: No), the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, in the process of S503, when the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on, and when the start winning is done during the big hit (S503: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit after game state flag 203d is on (high probability state) (S504). As described above, the jackpot after game state flag 203d is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot, the variation start process (see FIG. 22) described above is executed, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot If it is determined that the flag 203d is set, the state of the flag 203d is set. Therefore, the state of the jackpot after game state flag 203d is already set before the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot. Therefore, when there is a starting winning combination in the jackpot, it is possible to predict the prefetching of the starting winning on the basis of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot (the state of the jackpot later gaming state flag 203d).

  And, in the process of S504, if the jackpot after game state flag 203d is on (S504: Yes), start winning during the jackpot, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot is high probability Since this is the case, the process proceeds to the process of S505, the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to the process of S507. In addition, in the process of S504, when the jackpot after game state flag 203d is off (S504: No), although the start winning during the jackpot, but the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot becomes a low probability Since this is the case, the process proceeds to the process of S506. In the process of S506, the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is acquired (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

  In the process of S507, the jackpot random number table acquired in the process of S505 or S506 is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S501 to predict whether the result is yes or not (S507). As described above, three random number values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low probability big-hit random number table 202a 1 as random number values (hit values) that become big hits at low probability. Further, in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2, 30 random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276” are used as random number values (winning value) that become large hitting at high probability. 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 656, 716, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored. In the process of S405, the random number value (per hit value) stored in the obtained big hit random number table is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401, and when they match, the big hit Predict that

  Then, if the result of the comparison in the process of S507 is that the jackpot is predicted (S508: Yes), the jackpot type and the variation pattern type are predicted (S509), and the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S509, first, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot) associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S501 in the jackpot type table described above Predict. Next, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table described above, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type (normal reach various, corresponding to the jackpot type predicted earlier and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S501). Super reach various, special reach various, 2R fluctuation A-C) is predicted.

  If it is predicted that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the process of S508 (S508: No), the stop type at the time of disconnection and the fluctuation pattern type are predicted (S510), and the process proceeds to the process of S511. In the process of S510, first, the type of stop (long reach, reach other than the previous or later, complete drop) is predicted based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S501. In the present embodiment, as described above, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type The table is set so that the range is different.

  Next, when the winning game state flag acquired in the process of S501 is on, or when the large hit medium winning flag 203g is on and the large hit after game state flag 203d is on, the above Out of the forecasted stop types among the short out, long out, out of range normal reach, out of range super reach, out of range special reach, and the variation obtained in the process of S501 based on the out-of-order (probability change) change pattern table The variation pattern type at the time of deviation associated with the type counter CS1 is predicted.

  On the other hand, when the winning game state flag obtained in the process of S501 is off and the big hit medium winning flag 203g is off, or the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on, and the big hit after game state flag When 203d is off, based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table for deviation (normal), it is predicted earlier among the short deviation, long deviation, out-of-normal reach various, out-of-super reach various, and out-of-special reach various The variation pattern type at the time of deviation associated with the stop type and the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S501 is predicted.

  In the process of S511, a prefetch command is generated based on the various prediction results predicted in the processes of S507 to S510 (S511). Here, among the prefetch commands described with reference to FIG. 8, the upper 1 byte indicating the command type and each bit value other than the most significant bit in the lower 1 byte are set. That is, a bit value indicating that the command is a prefetch command, a bit value indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and a bit value indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type are set.

  Next, it is determined whether the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on (S512). In the process of S512, if the jackpot middle winning flag 203g is on (S512: Yes), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched with the gaming state at the end of the jackpot as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in this case, according to the state of the jackpot after game state flag 203d indicating the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, a bit value indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command is set, and further, the prefetch command is the voice lamp control device 113 In order to transmit the pre-read command, the pre-read command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S513).

  Specifically, if the jackpot after game status flag 203d is off, the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command (the most significant bit of the lower 1 byte) is set to a bit value "0", and the jackpot after game status flag If 203 d is on, the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command is set to the bit value “1”. Then, when the process of S513 is finished, next, the jackpot middle winning flag 203g is set to OFF (S514), and the process proceeds to the process of S516.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110, only information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by the prefetch command. It had been. That is, no prediction preconditions were notified. Therefore, even if the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the prediction result of the jackpot lottery from the prefetch command, it can not be determined which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used for the prediction result.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 110 prefetches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetching is prefetched The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a command.

  As described above, when the prediction precondition is the low probability state, the main controller 110 uses the low probability big-hit random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, while the prediction precondition is the high probability state. The pre-reading is performed using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result indicated by the prefetch command based on the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command.

  In the process of S512, when the big hit medium winning flag 203g is off (S512: No), it is a case where the lottery result of the big hit lottery is prefetched with the gaming state at the time of winning as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in this case, according to the state of the winning game state flag indicating the gaming state at the time of winning obtained in the process of S501, set a bit value indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command, and further, voice the prefetch command In order to transmit to the lamp control device 113, the pre-read command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S515).

  Specifically, if the winning game state flag is off, the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command (the most significant bit of the lower 1 byte) is set to the bit value "0", and the winning game state flag is If it is on, a bit value "1" is set to the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command. When the processing of S513 or S515 described above is executed and the prefetch command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, the external output processing (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main processing to be described later If executed, a pre-read command is sent to the audio lamp controller 113. Then, when the process of S515 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S516. In the process of S516, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to OFF (S516), the prefetch execution process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  When prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control 110 by the prefetching process shown in FIG. 23 above, the prediction preconditions capable of discriminating the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching are prefetched. The obtained prediction result can be included in the prefetch command and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result indicated by the prefetch command based on the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is read ahead in the main control unit 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed, and the prediction result uses either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. It was not configured to be able to determine if it was obtained. That is, no prediction precondition was stored. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by the pre-read command, also in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result is obtained using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. I could not tell if it was a thing.

  However, as in the conventional pachinko machine, even if the prediction preconditions are not stored, while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change after the prefetching of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110 Both the pre-reading of the jackpot result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot lottery are performed in the same gaming state in the main control device 110. Therefore, in main controller 110, jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Match Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot selection lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, in the voice lamp control unit 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, The prediction result of this jackpot lottery was treated as credible.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction preconditions are not stored, until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in main controller 110 When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. It will be unclear. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot selection lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be different. So, I was treating the prediction result of this jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the prediction precondition and the jackpot after game state flag 223c are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery , 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading can always be determined. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Even in the case where it is unclear in the main control device 110 whether or not they coincide, the determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the main control device 110 is highly likely to match the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the prediction result. it is conceivable that. Therefore, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible in this embodiment. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  In addition, since the prefetching process shown in FIG. 23 described above is performed with the gaming condition at the end of the big hit as the prediction precondition for the start winning during the big hit, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, when the data targeted for the pre-reading is acquired along with the start winning during the big hit, the winning game state flag in the data always indicates the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the lottery result is predicted according to the winning game state flag in the data, since the prediction precondition of the look-ahead is always in the low probability state, the prediction result is unlikely to coincide with the actual lottery result. And the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result will be worse. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the big hit can not be determined until the lottery result of the big hit lottery becomes the big hit, but when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the big hit is already finished Since the gaming state of is determined, the main control device 110 can determine the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot is finished, if there is a jackpot lottery pending in the main control unit 110, the jackpot lottery that was on hold is one in the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot termination The main control unit 110 sequentially executes them one by one.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery held in the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when there is a start winning in the big hit, when performing pre-reading for that starting winning, it is the jackpot that made the prediction precondition the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, rather than always making the prediction precondition a low probability state It is possible to improve the possibility that the main controller 110 matches the predicted result of the lottery and the actual lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the predicted result. Therefore, since the number of prediction results that can be treated as credible in the voice lamp control device 113 can be increased, in the present embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used.

  In the prefetching process shown in FIG. 23 described above, with regard to those that start winning during the big hit, pre-reading is performed with the gaming state at the end of the big hitting as a prediction precondition, and the accuracy of the lottery result prediction is improved There is. As described above, since the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot, after that determination, it is possible to pre-read the gaming state at the jackpot end as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in addition to the winning combination during the big hit, after the big hit classification is determined in the big hit lottery, for the starting winning until the big hit is started, the prefetching is made with the gaming state at the big hit end as a prediction precondition You may do so. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance that the main control device 110 matches the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the predicted result. Therefore, since the number of prediction results treated as credible in the voice lamp control device 113 can be further increased, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be more suitably used.

  In the pre-read process shown in FIG. 23 described above, the big hit medium winning flag 203g is provided, but when each process is executed in the single task method in main controller 110, the big hit middle winning flag 203 g is not provided. It is good. When the big hit middle winning flag 203 g is not provided, the big hit middle flag 203 e is referred to in place of the big hit middle winning flag 203 g. When execution of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started by the single task method, another process (main process, other interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process is completed. Because there is not, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of execution of the above-mentioned start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetch process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the big hit medium flag 203e, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data acquired along with the start winning combination is obtained along with the big start winning combination.

  Further, in the pre-reading process described above, the winning game state flag is provided, but when each process is executed in the single task method in the main control device 110, the winning game state flag may not be provided. When the winning game state flag is not provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to in place of the winning game state flag. As described above, the winning game state flag is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the start winning, and when the ball starts winning to the first ball entrance 64, each counter C1 to C1 at the timing when the starting win is made. The values of C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired. Then, the gaming state flag 203a acquired here is set as a winning game state flag. Therefore, if the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning is the high probability state, and if the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, the pachinko at the time of starting winning Indicates that the gaming state of the machine 10 is in a low probability state. When execution of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started by the single task method, another process (main process, other interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process is completed. Because there is not, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a does not change from the start of execution of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetch process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning can be determined by referring to the gaming state 203a. In addition, since it is not necessary to execute the processing of S207 in the above-described start winning processing (see FIG. 20) when the winning game state flag is not provided, the burden on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the winning game state storage area 203b5 in the holding ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S701). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (the sub controller such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, the wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S703).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S704), and if it is turned on (S704: Yes), the process proceeds to S712. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), it is further judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S705). If not stored (S705: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S712 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S706), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S712. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S813 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub control device (sub control device) (S712). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S713, S714) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S713, S714) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S713, S714) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S713, S714), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S714). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S710.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S705: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S707: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S708). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (sub controller) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of the driving power shutoff is transmitted (S709), and the process proceeds to S710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls. In the process of S710, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S710), and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S711), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up processing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, pre-read processing, counter update processing, and power-off processing are executed roughly divided. As a summary, each process of S801 to S807 is executed as a periodic process of 4 m second cycle, and the counter update process of S809 and S810 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S801). Specifically, the prize ball command set in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Further, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the pre-reading command set in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, in the last 4 ms cycle, a fanfare command, a round number command, and an ending command set by the jackpot control processing described later are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormal signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S802), and then, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect, the variable winning device 65 A jackpot control process is executed to open or close the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of (step S803). The jackpot control process will be described in detail later, but in the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, or the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or the specific winning opening 65a Determine if the ball has won the specified number. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  When the jackpot control processing is completed, next, the motor-operated part opening / closing processing is performed to perform the opening / closing control of the motorized part attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S804). In the opening and closing process of the electric combination, the opening pattern of the electric combination is set as the winning of the second symbol, or the lottery result of the large winning drawing is usually the large opening, the opening time and opening of the combination. When the number of times is set, the motorized part is opened and closed according to the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S805). In the first symbol display update process, when the change pattern type is set by the process of S408 or the process of S413 of the change start process (see FIG. 22), the change display corresponding to the change pattern type is displayed as the first symbol Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type set by the process of S408 or the process of S413 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) ends, and as a result, the fluctuation process (FIG. 21) When the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set by the process of S312 of reference), the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and S407 of the variation start process (see FIG. 22) The stop symbol (the first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of step S412 or the processing of step S412.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S806). In the second symbol display updating process, when the second symbol lottery is executed and the variation time of the second symbol is set, the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol display mode in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the second symbol lottery. The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 83.

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S 807), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S 807: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S808) If the predetermined time has already passed (S808: Yes), the process proceeds to S801, and the above-described S801 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process of this time (S 808: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, ie, until the execution timing of the next main process 1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S809, S810).

  First, the first initial random number counter CINI1 and the second initial random number counter CINI2 are updated (S809). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S810). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S801 to S807 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S807, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S807: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 24 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S811 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S811), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (a sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 or the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S812). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S813), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S814), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S 807 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S 801 to S 806, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S 809 and S 810 performed within the remaining time It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S801. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S801. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S801. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  In the present embodiment, in the main processing, the winning ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading processing (S802), the jackpot control processing (S803), the electric combination opening / closing processing (S804), the first symbol control processing (S805), the second Although the symbol control process (S806) is executed, a part or all of these processes may be configured to be executed in the timer interrupt process instead of the main process.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S803) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S803). This jackpot control process (S803) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, a specific winning opening (large jackpot Opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot is started (S901). Specifically, the process of S314 of the variation process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot is set, it is determined that the jackpot is started. In the process of S901, when the jackpot is started (S901: Yes), the gaming state at the time of jackpot end in the fanfare command is set based on the state of the jackpot after game state flag 203d (S902).

  In the process of S902, among the fanfare commands described with reference to FIG. 9, the upper 1 byte indicating the command type and the most significant bit in the lower 1 byte are set. Specifically, first, a bit value indicating that the command is a fanfare command is set, and then, if the jackpot after game state flag 203d is off, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot among the fanfare commands. If the bit value “0” is set to the bit indicating the (lower 1 byte most significant bit) and the big hit after game state flag 203d is on, the bit indicating the game state at the end of the current big hit among fanfare commands Set the bit value "1" to. Then, a fanfare command is set (S903), and this processing ends.

  The fanfare command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the received fanfare command. Also, upon receiving the fanfare command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display fanfare command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the fanfare effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot is not started in the process of S901 (S901: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203e is on and the jackpot is now (S904). The jackpot includes the middle of a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As described above, the jackpot flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, and the start of the jackpot is set by the process of S315 in the above-described variation process (see FIG. 21). The timing is set to ON, while the processing in S914 of the jackpot control process is set to OFF at timing when the jackpot ends.

  In the process of S904, the jackpot middle flag 203e is off, and if the jackpot is not medium (904: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S904, if the big hit medium flag 203e is on and the big hit (S904: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S905). If it is the start timing of a new round (S905: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S906), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S907). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S905, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S905: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S908). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls are present. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S908, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S908: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S909), and this processing is ended. Do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S908: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S910).

  In the process of S910, when it is the start timing of ending effect (S910: Yes), an ending command is set (S911), and this process is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the pre-reading information stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223 a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the selected display mode of the ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the process of S910, when it is not the timing to start the ending (S910: No), it is determined whether the present jackpot is ended (S912).

  In the process of S912, in the case of terminating the current jackpot (S912: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S913), and the jackpot flag 203e is set to OFF (S914). Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot after game state flag 203d is on (high probability state) (S915). As described above, the jackpot after game state flag 203d indicates whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state or the high probability state when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the jackpot and ends. It is a flag. It is to be noted that, when the big hit after game state flag 203d is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes high probability state at the current big hit end, and when the flag 203 d is off, the current big hit ends Sometimes it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state.

  In the process of S 915, when the after-big hit gaming state flag 203 d is off (S 915: No), this processing is ended without doing anything and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is kept in the low probability state. As described above, since the gaming state flag 203a is off during the jackpot, the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to set the flag 203a off again at the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S915, when the large hitting after game state flag 203d is on (S915: Yes), the game state flag 203a is set to ON (high probability state) (S916), and this process is ended. Here, by turning on the gaming state flag 203a, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a high probability state at the end of the jackpot.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the jackpot after game state flag 203 d is off in the process of S 915 (S 915: No), this process ends without doing anything, but the game state flag The processing may be ended by setting 203 a to OFF (low probability state).

  When transmitting a fanfare command to the voice lamp control device 113 by the jackpot control processing shown in FIG. 27 described above, the fanfare command includes information indicating the gaming state to be set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot of this time. It can be sent including. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the received fanfare command. Then, as described above, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the jackpot lottery. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery newly executed in the main control unit 110 after the present jackpot is finished based on the received fanfare command. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command, but the big hit lottery If the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 whether the present jackpot is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot by the above-described stop type command. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, it is not necessary to include in the fanfare command the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command, but instead of the fanfare command, the variation is changed. The main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by another command such as a pattern command, stop type command, round number command or ending command. You may. That is, after the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot in the main control unit 110 and the jackpot type is determined, the main control unit is determined until the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the sound lamp control unit 113. As long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by the audio lamp control device 113, any command may be used for notification. In addition to the fanfare command, a new command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit is provided, and the new command causes the pachinko machine 10 to be set at the end of the current big win. The gaming state may be notified from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113. When a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command may not include information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 28, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1119 (see FIG. 29) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is determined whether or not it is started during the execution of step S1002). As described later with reference to FIG. 29, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1116 in FIG. 29), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing of S1119. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1119 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1119 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is judged that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1119 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the start of the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223. Therefore, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1002: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1119, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in this case, the process proceeds to S1004 to initialize the RAM 223.

  In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1119 is performed (see S1118 in FIG. 29). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1119 is executed, the process of S1008 is instantaneous when the power-off flag is turned on until the processing of S1008 is performed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010). The permission is set (S1011), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, since the start-up processing this time is started after the power is completely shut off, the processing of S1004 through S1006 is performed It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010). Then (S1011), it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that, when the process of S1008 is performed via the processes of S1004 to S1006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S1101 was performed last time (S1101), and one millisecond If the above has not elapsed (S1101: No), the processing proceeds to S1112 without performing the processing of S1102 to S1111. In the process of S1101, it is a process regarding display (rendering) to determine whether 1 millisecond has elapsed or not, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1112 and the command determination process of S1113 in a short cycle. By performing the process of S1112 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform the setting relating to the variable effect without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. In addition, since the process of S1113 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception failure of the command transmitted from the main control device 110.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), first, various commands set by the processes of S1103 to S1113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 in the previous 1 millisecond cycle (S1102) . Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1109 described later (S1103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1104) . The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the pending number display updating process, a process of lighting the pending lamp 285 is performed according to the value of the pending ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and the rear surface image change for the display control device 114 is changed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process ends, a vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S1108). The vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S1151), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is a predetermined level or more. (S1152). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1152: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1152: Yes), it is determined that vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10, and setting is made to output an alarm sound from the audio output device 226 (S1153) An error command for notifying the control device 114 of the occurrence of the vibration error is set (S1154), and the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 29). Thereby, in the display control device 31, a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image notifying of a vibration error is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 29, the description of the main processing is continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) is ended, next, a lamp editing process is executed (S1109), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1110). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 30) (see S1153), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by the sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is a voice It is output from the output device 226.

  After the process of S1110, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1111), and the process shifts to the process of S1112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1109 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1110 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1112, in order to display the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation display setting process, the command determination process is performed to perform the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1113). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S1113 is finished, the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is updated (S1114), and the updating process of the ending mode counter 223f is executed (S1115). The continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g is updated by one each in the range of 0 to 127 each time the update process is performed, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). Further, the updating of the ending mode counter 223f is performed by incrementing one by one within the range of 0 to 2 each time the updating process is performed, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 2). The value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g updated by the update process of S1114 is referred to by the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 32) described later, and is used to determine the execution of the continuous notice effect. Further, the value of the ending mode counter 223f is referred to by an ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) described later, and is used to determine whether the display mode of the ending effect is a normal display or a fixed effect display.

  When the process of S1115 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1116 (S1116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1118), and the power-off process is executed (S1119). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1120), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1116 (S1116: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1117) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1117: No), the process returns to S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1117: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the main processing is not executed when the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the command determination processing (S1113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1113). This command determination process (S1113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In this process, when the prefetch command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the ending command is received from the main control device 110, the ending is performed. Set the display mode in the effect.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110 It is determined whether or not (S1201). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1202), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1203), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1204). When the stop type command is received (S1204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1206). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1207). When the ball holding ball number command is received (S1207: Yes), the value contained in the received ball holding ball number command, that is, the value of the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110 (the fluctuation display is held The number of times N) is extracted and stored in the holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1208). Further, in the process of S1208, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated holding ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1208 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), the voice in the processing of S1208 every time the starting winning is detected. The value of the holding ball number counter 223b of the lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the holding ball number counter 223b can be corrected to match the value of the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110.

  In the process of S1207, when the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1207: No), it is next determined whether or not the pre-read command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1209). Then, when the prefetch command is received (S1209: Yes), from the received prefetch command, the prediction precondition of the prefetch, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are extracted, and they are prefetched As information, it stores in the reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S1210). Then, the continuous advance notice determination process is executed (S1211), and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 in the main control unit 110 and the gaming state flag 203a The acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired are stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b, and the acquired gaming state flag 203a serves as a winning game state flag, and each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the same hold area as the stored hold area. Then, when data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) are stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110, separately from the original big hit lottery The various information obtained when the original big hit lottery is performed from the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserve area and the winning game state flag (probability, stop type, change pattern type) Are read ahead (predicted).

  Then, when the pre-reading ends in the main control unit 110, a pre-reading command indicating various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern type) obtained by the pre-reading and the prediction precondition of the pre-reading is an audio lamp from the main control unit 110 It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, it extracts from the prefetch command the prediction precondition of the prefetch, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and prefetches them as prefetch information. It stores in the reservation area of the information storage area 223a.

  As described above, when the prediction precondition is the low probability state, the main controller 110 uses the low probability big-hit random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, while the prediction precondition is the high probability state. The pre-reading is performed using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the prefetch information based on the prediction precondition of the prefetch information.

  In the continuous advance notice determination process, the change pending at that time based on the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a lastly, the value of the hold ball number counter 223b, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g It is determined whether or not to perform a series of successive announcement effects for the effect.

  In the process of S1209, when the prefetch command is not received (S1209: No), it is then determined whether the fanfare command is received from the main control device 110 (S1212). When the fanfare command is received (S1212: Yes), the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is extracted from the received fanfare command (S1213), and the extracted gaming state is set. Based on the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set (S1214). In the process of S1214, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot extracted from the fanfare command is the "low probability state", the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set to OFF, and the jackpot end time extracted from the fanfare command If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high probability state", the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set to on.

  As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 which is set at the end of the jackpot in the main control device 110 based on the jackpot after game state flag 223c.

  Then, as described above, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the jackpot is completed and then a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the new jackpot lottery are based on the gaming state set at the time of jackpot termination. Is determined. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, by referring to the after game condition flag 223c, after the current big hit is finished, the big hit random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the big hit lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 Can be determined.

  Next, a display fanfare command for starting the jackpot effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S1215), and the process returns to the main processing. The display fanfare command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S1102) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a fanfare effect.

  On the other hand, if the fanfare command has not been received in the process of S1212 (S1212: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1216). When the round number command is received (S1216: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1217), and the display round number command according to the extracted round number is set ( S1218), the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1216 (S1216: No), it is then determined whether the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1219). When the ending command is received (S1219: Yes), the ending setting process for setting the display mode and the like of the ending effect is executed (S1221), and this process is ended. In the ending setting process, it is determined based on the pre-reading information stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223a whether the display mode of the ending effect is to be a normal display or a fixed effect display, and for display according to the determination Ending command is set. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect of the display mode according to the ending command for display.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1219, when the ending command is not received (S1219: No), it is determined whether or not other commands are received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1220). ), Return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  As described above, when the fanfare command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received, the voice lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment determines the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit from the fanfare command. The game state of is extracted, and the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set according to the game state. However, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 110 is a jackpot, the main lamp control device from the main control unit 110 determines whether the present jackpot is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot by the stop type command described above. 113 is notified. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, when the stop type command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, if the stop type command indicates a big hit type, the big hit after game state flag 223c is set according to the big hit type. It is good. In this case, it is not necessary to include in the fanfare command the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the continuous advance notice determination process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice determination process (S1211). The continuous advance notice determination process (S1211) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1211 in FIG. 31), and as described above, the prefetch command is received. When it is determined, it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notice effect.

  In this continuous advance notice determination process, first, it is determined whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) which is a predetermined condition to be described later is satisfied, and any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, next, it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notice effect. If it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is started here, the continuous advance notice effect is started. S1302 to S1310 described later are processes for determining whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, and S1311 to S1316 described later start continuous notice effects. It is the process for determining whether to do.

  Note that (Condition 1) means that execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set, and (Condition 2) becomes a "big hit" when all the set continuous advance notice effects are finished, and additionally, Two or more change effects (hold balls) exist between the change effects (hold balls) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last change effects (hold balls) for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set (hold balls) That is, the difference between the value of the holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 3 or more), and (condition 3) is “when all the continuous notice effects set have been completed. In addition, of the pre-reading information extracted from the newly received pre-reading command, the success or failure in the lottery result of the big hit lottery is “big hit”.

  In the continuous advance notice determination process, first read out the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a last (that is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the prediction precondition of prefetch) (S1301) . The pre-reading information finally stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223a is specified based on the holding ball number counter 223b. That is, when the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is 1, the pre-reading information stored in the first holding area is specified as the pre-reading information finally stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223a. Similarly, when the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is 2, the prefetching information stored in the holding second area is; when the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is 3, the prefetching information stored in the holding third area is When the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is 4, the prefetching information stored in the holding fourth area is specified as the prefetching information stored in the prefetching information storage area 223a last.

  Next, among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301, it is determined whether the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is "big hit" (S1302), and the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is "big hit" (S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery prediction result is "outside" (S1302: No), it is determined whether the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type read out in the processing of S1301 is "back and forth reach" (S1303) ). In the process of S1303, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is "reach before and after" (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is not the “back and forth out of reach” but the other fluctuation pattern type (S1303: No), this processing is ended.

  In the process of S1304, the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is substituted into the variable A (S1304), and then the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is substituted into the variable B (S1305). Then, it is judged whether the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 223h) is 0 (S1306), and if the value of the variable B is 0 (S1306: Yes), the continuous notice effect is executed Since the setting is not made and the above (condition 1) is satisfied, the process proceeds to the process of S1311, and it is determined by the processes after S1311 whether to start the continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1306, when the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous announcement frequency counter 223h) is not 0, that is, 1 or more (S1306: No), execution of continuous announcement effect is already set. Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the after-prediction jackpot flag 223i is on (S1307). As described above, when the value of the after-notice jackpot flag 223i is on, the gaming state after the change effect after the continuous advance effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set If the value of the jackpot flag 223i after notification is OFF, then the gaming state after the variation effect is performed in all the variation effects for which the continuous notification effect is set Indicates that it will be in the "out" state.

  Then, in the process of S1307, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is ON (S1307: Yes), it becomes a "jackpot" when all the set continuous announcement effects are finished, so that a variable The difference between the value of A (i.e., the reserved ball number counter 223b) and the value of the variable B (i.e., the consecutive announcement number counter 223h) is calculated, and the difference is substituted for the variable C (S1308). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable C is 3 or more (S1309). As a result, when the variable C is 3 or more (S1309: Yes), the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received prefetch command (pending It can be determined that two or more variable effects (held balls) exist between the ball) and the last variable effects (held balls) for which execution of the continuous advance notice effect is currently set. Therefore, since it can be determined that the above (condition 2) is satisfied from the results of the processing of S1306, the processing of S1307, and the processing of S1309, the processing shifts to the processing of S1311 and continuous notice effect starts by the processing of S1311 and subsequent Decide whether to

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1309, when the variable C is not 3 or more (that is, less than 3) (S1309: No), the fluctuation effect (hold ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command is continuous at this time Since two or more change effects (hold balls) do not exist between the last change effect (hold ball) for which the execution of the advance notice effect is set, the process of S1306, the process of S1307, and the process of S1309 From the results, it can be determined that none of the above (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining the start of the continuous advance presentation effect.

  In the process of S1307, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is on (S1307: Yes), it becomes a "jackpot" when all the set continuous announcement effects are finished, so this "jackpot" As a result, the sense of expectation by the continuous notice effect held by the player is interrupted once. However, if (condition 2) is satisfied, that is, between the fluctuation effect (hold ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last fluctuation effect (hold ball) for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set If two or more variable effects (holding balls) exist, it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notification effect. Therefore, only in such a case, if the start of continuous notice effects is determined with a predetermined probability, it is possible to always display a chance symbol as a stop symbol in two or more change effects performed after the “big hit”. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous advance notice effect, and to strengthen the expectation which the player feels to the continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1307, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is off (S1307: No), it becomes "out" when all the continuous notice effects set have ended, so Among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not the yes or no in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is the "big hit" (S1310). And, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit" (S1310: Yes), since the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery among the pre-reading information read out in the process of S1301 is "big hit" From the results of the process of S1306, the process of S1307, and the process of S1309, it can be determined that the above (Condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to the process of S1311, and it is determined by the processes after S1311 whether to start the continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1310, when the judgment result of the jackpot lottery is "outside" (S1310: No), the process of S1307, the process of S1308 and the process of S1311 mentioned above It can be determined that none of the conditions 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining the start of the continuous advance presentation effect. Here, if the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is off (S1307: No), it becomes "out" when all the set continuous notice effects are finished. In such a situation, the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined with a predetermined probability only when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery among the prefetched information extracted from the newly received prefetch command is "big hit". As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect in progress from being completed and becoming "off", and subsequently, the continuous notice effect being performed to be "off" again. Therefore, it can suppress that the state which becomes "off | omission" is complete | finished after completion | finish of continuous prior announcement production | generation. In addition, it is possible to give the player a strong sense of anticipation to be a "big hit" when the continuous notice effect is "off" after the end of the continuous notice effect, and the game is continued to the player. Can be motivated to

  As described above, in the processing of S1302 to S1310, it is determined whether or not any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) described above is satisfied, and any of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is If not satisfied, the continuous advance notice determination process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process. As a result, when none of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, the processing after S1311 for determining the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is not executed. It is possible not to be Moreover, since the process after S1311 is abbreviate | omitted, the increase in the processing load in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 can be suppressed.

  Next, in the processing of S1311 to S1313, it is used to determine the start of continuous preview effect from among two continuous preview determination tables 222a (continuous preview determination table 222a1 for big hit or continuous preview determination table 222a2 for out) The continuous advance notice determination table (see FIG. 10) to be selected is selected.

  First, in the process of S1311, it is determined whether the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery among the pre-reading information read in the process of S1301 is a "big hit" (S1311). Then, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is "big hit" (S1311: Yes), the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit is selected as a continuous notice determination table used to determine the start of continuous notice effect start (S1312 ). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery prediction result is "out" (S1311: No), the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of out is selected as the continuous notice determination table used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect (S1313). ).

  When the continuous notice determination table is selected by the process of S1311 to S1313, next, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is acquired (S1314). Then, the continuous advance notice determination table (the continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 at the big hit or the continuous advance decision table 222a2 at the time of disconnection) selected in the process of S1312 or the process of S1313 and the value of the holding ball number counter 223b (variation display The continuous advance notice determination range is specified based on the hold frequency N), and the continuous advance notice determination range is compared with the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g (S1315).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous advance notice determination range, and it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notice effect (S1316). In the process of S1316, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is not included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is not started (S1316: No), the process after S1317 is skipped and the command determination process is performed. Return to That is, the setting of the continuous notice frequency counter 223 h is held as it is. Therefore, if there is a holding ball for which the setting for performing the fluctuation production advance notice is present, the continuous advance notice effect is performed on the holding ball, and if such a retention ball does not exist, the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Absent.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1316 that the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous advance notice determination range and it is determined to start the continuous advance notice effect (S1316: Yes), the hold ball number counter 223b is stored in the continuous advance notice counter 223h. The value of is set (S1317). Here, by setting the value of the holding ball number counter 223b in the continuous notice frequency counter 223h by the process of S1317, all the fluctuation effects previously held before the fluctuation effect corresponding to the prefetch command received this time are continuously performed. The execution of the notice effect is set. In other words, it is possible to display the chance symbol on the third symbol display device 81 over all the fluctuation effects corresponding to the holding balls held before the holding balls corresponding to the prefetch command received this time.

  Next, it is determined whether the yes or no in the prediction result of the big hit lottery among the pre-reading information read out in the process of S1301 is the “big hit” (S1318). Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery prediction result is "jackpot" (S1318: Yes), the after-notice jackpot flag 223i is set to ON (S1319), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery prediction result is "off" (S1318: No), the after-announce jackpot flag 223i is set to OFF (S1320), and the process ends.

  When all the set continuous announcement effects are finished by the process of S1319 or S1320, it is possible to set the jackpot flag 223i after the advance notice as to be the "big hit" or the "out". . As a result, when the continuous advance notice determination process is executed again and the process of S1307 is executed, the above-described (condition 2) or (condition 3) is performed using the value of the after-announcement big hit flag 223i set here. It can be judged whether or not it is satisfied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an ending setting process (S1221) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S1221). This ending setting process (S1221) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1221 in FIG. 31), and an ending effect is produced when the ending command is received. It is a process for determining the display mode of.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result is determined to be "big hit" in the big hit lottery in the main control device 110, the pachinko machine 10 goes to the big hit when the variation effect corresponding to the "big hit" is finished. While shifting, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the fanfare effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, first, the fanfare effect is performed, and it is informed to the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the jackpot from this. Next, as the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a jackpot, round effects are started, and the number of rounds of this time is notified to the player each time a new round is started. Then, when the jackpot (2 rounds or 15 rounds) is finished, an ending effect is performed finally, and the player is notified of the termination of the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, when this ending effect is performed, the final effect display for notifying the player that the lottery result will be the big win in the big win lottery held with the big win ending, or simply the big win A normal display is performed to inform the player that the end of the event has ended.

  In the ending setting process, first, the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S1401), and it is determined whether the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 ( S1402). In the process of S1402, when the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b is 0 (S1402: No), it is the timing to start the ending effect, but at the main control unit 110, one big hit lottery is held Since there is no case, the process proceeds to the process of S1415.

  In the process of S1402, when the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S1402: Yes), since one or more jackpot lottery is held in the main control unit 110, the hold is held. From the earlier held order of the jackpot lottery, check the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one.

  Specifically, among the reserve areas (preserve area 1 to reserve area 4) of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserve area in order from the reserve area with the smallest area number Check one by one. The smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning combination that is older in time is stored.

  Therefore, first, 1 is set to the variable i (S1403), and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S1404). Then, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in the reserve i-th area is compared with the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c (S1405), and as a result of the comparison, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition It is determined whether or not the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c indicates the same gaming state (S1406).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch is main control by the prefetch command The device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113. It should be noted that if this prediction precondition is a low probability state, this means that the main controller 110 has used the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, and the prediction precondition is a high probability status Means that the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is used to look ahead.

  Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the prediction precondition for prefetching, the prediction result of the big hit lottery, etc. are extracted as prefetching information from the prefetch command, and the reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a Stored. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, by referring to the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is obtained by using the main control device 110 using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 You can determine the

  Further, as described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 becomes the jackpot, and thereafter, when it is the start timing of the jackpot, the fanfare command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 . In that case, in the main control device 110, a fanfare command including information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is generated, and the generated command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 . In the sound lamp control device 113, when the fanfare command is received, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is extracted from the fanfare command, and the big hit after game state flag 223c is The state is set. As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set when the jackpot ends in the main control device 110 can be determined based on the jackpot after game state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the main control unit 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the jackpot lottery, but when the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot, At the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main control 110 after the jackpot end, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot end. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the gaming state set at the end of the big hit can be determined based on the big hit after-game state flag 223c, it is newly executed in the main control device 110 after the current big hit is finished. The big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the big hit lottery can also be determined based on the big hit after game state flag 223c.

  Therefore, in the process of S1405 mentioned above, the jackpot used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information with the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c. It can be compared whether the main control unit 110 matches the random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the large hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading.

  And, in the process of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the gaming state indicated by the large hitting after game state flag 223c indicate the same gaming state (S1406: Yes), the jackpot lottery In the case where the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, since both the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are the same, the comparison results match each other, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result thereof The main controller 110 matches the corresponding actual jackpot lottery result. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as credible.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1406, when the prediction precondition in the preread information and the gaming state indicated by the big hit post game state flag 223c indicate different gaming states (S1406: No), the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery In the case where the main control unit 110 does not match the used jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, there is a possibility that the comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result It becomes unclear whether or not the main controller 110 matches. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can not trust the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

  In the process of S1406, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c indicate the same gaming state (S1406: Yes), as described above, In the case where the main control device 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery acquired in the process of S1404 and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is the jackpot (S1407).

  In the process of S1407, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is out (S1407: No), 1 is added to the variable i (S1409), and the value of the variable i is It is determined whether it is less than or equal to the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b (S1410). In the process of S1410, when the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b (S1410: Yes), the prefetching information is also stored in the other pending areas in the prefetch information storage area 223a Since it is the case, the process returns to the process of S1404 and confirms the prefetch information stored in the other hold area.

  In addition, after returning to the process of S1404, each process of S1404 to S1410 mentioned above is repeated, and the gaming state shown by the prediction precondition stored in the other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) The comparison with the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after-game state flag 223c is performed in ascending order of the area number.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when the value of the variable i exceeds the value (M) of the hold ball number counter 223b (S1410: No), the prefetch information stored in the reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a Although all confirmed, it is a case where the prediction results in each piece of prefetch information are all out of order. In this case, since there is no preread information to be confirmed, the process proceeds to the process of S1415.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a big hit (S1407: Yes), the process proceeds to S1411, and the finalized effect display is displayed as the ending effect display mode. Perform processing to determine whether to set. In the present embodiment, even if a plurality of prefetching information are stored in the reserve area of the prefetching information storage area 223a and each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, if the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit in the process of S1407. For example, the repetition of S1404 to S1410 is configured to be stopped there. That is, the processing does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  This is because the "confirmed effect display" informs the player that the lottery result will be the big win in the big win lottery being held with the big win ending, so the big win lottery held in the main control device 110 Among them, if there is at least one jackpot, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to confirm the read-ahead information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery.

  In addition, even if the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed here, if the jackpot lottery which has been held is executed and it becomes a jackpot again, the ending effect determination processing is executed during the second jackpot, Therefore, no problem occurs because the remaining prefetch information is confirmed.

  In addition, when there is something where the lottery result becomes a big hit among the big hit lottery held in main controller 110, after the running jackpot is finished, the big hit lottery that was on hold is in order 1 When executed one by one, the lottery result becomes a big hit in any of the big hit lottery, and becomes a big hit again. When the jackpot is over again, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the second jackpot by the fanfare command.

  As described above, when the fanfare command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit from the received fanfare command. The state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set according to the game state. Therefore, when there is something that the lottery result becomes a big hit among the big hit lottery held in the main control unit 110 and it becomes a big hit again, if it becomes the big win again, the big hit after the game state The state of the flag 223c may change. Therefore, for the big hit lottery which is executed after the big hit lottery where the lottery result becomes the big hit among the big hit lottery held in the main control device 110, the comparison process of S1405 is performed using the big hit after game state flag 223c Even I can not trust the comparison result. Therefore, it does not make sense to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the confirmation of the prefetched information is unnecessary, the confirmation is not performed, so that the execution of the unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  And, in the process of S1406, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c indicate different gaming states (S1406: No), as described above The main control unit 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching That's the case. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110, in this case, the voice lamp control device of this embodiment Even in the case of 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be relied upon, and it is refrained from using the prediction result.

  However, as described later, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be exceptionally treated as credible, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is the jackpot (S1408). As described above, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c indicate different gaming states. (S1406: No), it proceeds to the process of S1408, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserve i area is a jackpot, but in the case of S1406: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery It may be configured to shift to the process of S1415 without performing the process of S1408, as the one that can not be trusted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 do not become overlapping values. As such, each hit value is set. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the preread information is different from the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery Even if the main control unit 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the corresponding actual jackpot lottery, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot, it corresponds to the prediction result In the actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, and it is uniquely determined that it is an outlier. In the audio lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the numerical value which is the winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes the outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but the outlier in the one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 It is unknown whether the numerical value which becomes is a win value or an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and even if the result is determined to be out of order, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the main control unit 110 determines that the result is a big hit or it is determined that the result is out of order. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  In the process of S1408, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserve i-th area is the jackpot (S1408: Yes), as described above, exceptionally, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order and can be trusted In the case where it can be treated as, the processing shifts to the processing of S1409. As described above, in the case of the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, even the prediction result treated as being unreliable may be treated as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled. Also, in that case, the process can return to the process of S1409, and can repeat and execute the process of S1404 to S1410. Therefore, the opportunity which can set the display mode of an ending production to a "fixed production display" can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is out (S1408: No), the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game indicated by the large hit after-game state flag 223c This is a case different from the state, and further, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is deviated. In this case, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be trusted, and it becomes unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result will be the jackpot or the jackpot.

  Therefore, in this case, the process does not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410, but proceeds to the process of S1415, and performs the process of setting the normal display as the display mode of the ending effect. As described above, in the ending effect determination process, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is the jackpot or the outlier, it does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is confirmed It is configured not to.

  This is because one of the prediction results is obtained when the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery are checked one by one from the earlier held order of the jackpot lottery held in the main control unit 110. If unknown, the remaining prediction results will also be unknown.

  That is, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of this big hit lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next big winning lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next big winning lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about subsequent jackpot lotterys.

  As described above, since the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction result of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted after the prediction result It becomes unknown. Therefore, when confirming the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. But there is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In the process of S1411, the value of the ending mode counter 223f is acquired (S1411), and the acquired counter value is compared with an ending mode selection table (not shown) (S1412). Then, the acquired counter value is included in the range for selecting the execution of the fixed effect display, and when it is determined that the fixed effect display is to be performed (S1413: Yes), the process proceeds to S1414. In the process of S1414, the fixed effect display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1414), and the process proceeds to S1416. In the process of S1413, when the acquired counter value is included in the range for selecting the execution of the normal display and it is determined that the normal display is to be performed (S1413: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1415. In the process of S1415, the normal display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1415), and the process shifts to the process of S1416.

  In the process of S1416, based on the display mode set by the process of S1414 or the process of S1415, a display ending command for notifying the display control device 114 of the display mode of the ending effect is generated, and the command is displayed It is set for transmission to the control device 114 (S1416). In the display control device 114, when the display ending command is received, the ending of the display mode indicated by the display ending command is controlled to be displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

  According to the ending effect determination process shown in FIG. 33 above, in the process of S1405, the jackpot lottery is performed by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetched information with the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c. Whether the main controller 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery results with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching it can.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the pachinko machine is executed before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 When the gaming state of 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. It will be unclear. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot selection lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in main controller 110, the voice lamp control device of the conventional pachinko machine is used. In 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prediction precondition and the jackpot after game state flag 223c are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery It can always be determined whether the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Even in the case where it is unclear in the main control device 110 whether or not they coincide, the determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, when the respective big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, both the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison become the same, so the respective comparison results The main control unit 110 matches the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as credible. As described above, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible, so the present embodiment In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, according to the ending effect determination process, even if the plurality of pre-reading information is stored in the reserve area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a and each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, a large winning lottery is made in the process of S1407. If the prediction result is a big hit, it is possible to stop the repetition of each processing of S1404 to S1410 there. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is credible, and the prediction result is a jackpot, the processing does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  As described above, this is to notify the player that the lottery result will be the jackpot in the jackpot lottery being held with the termination of the jackpot, so that the main control unit 110 holds the hold. This is because if there is at least one jackpot among the jackpot lottery being performed, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to confirm the read-ahead information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery.

  In addition, even if the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed here, if the jackpot lottery which has been held is executed and it becomes a jackpot again, the ending effect determination processing is executed during the second jackpot, Therefore, no problem occurs because the remaining prefetch information is confirmed.

  In addition, when there is something where the lottery result becomes a big hit among the big hit lottery held in main controller 110, after the running jackpot is finished, the big hit lottery that was on hold is in order 1 When executed one by one, the lottery result becomes a big hit in any of the big hit lottery, and becomes a big hit again. When the jackpot is over again, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the second jackpot by the fanfare command.

  As described above, when the fanfare command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit from the received fanfare command. The state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set according to the game state. Therefore, when there is something that the lottery result becomes a big hit among the big hit lottery held in the main control unit 110 and it becomes a big hit again, if it becomes the big win again, the big hit after the game state The state of the flag 223c may change. Therefore, for the big hit lottery which is executed after the big hit lottery where the lottery result becomes the big hit among the big hit lottery held in the main control device 110, the comparison process of S1405 is performed using the big hit after game state flag 223c Even I can not trust the comparison result. Therefore, it does not make sense to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the confirmation of the prefetch information is unnecessary, the confirmation is not performed, so that the execution of the unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the ending effect determination process, when a plurality of prefetching information are stored in the reserve area of the prefetching information storage area 223a and each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, the prefetching information in the process of S1406 The gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the game differs from the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c (S1406: No), and in the processing of S1408, it is determined that the jackpot lottery prediction result in the prefetch information is the jackpot For example (S1408: Yes), it is possible to return to the process of S1409 and continue and repeat the process of S1404 to S1410.

  As described above, in the process of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c, the jackpot used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery This is the case where the main control device 110 does not match the random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110, in this case, the voice lamp control device of this embodiment Even in the case of 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be relied upon, and it is refrained from using the prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning values stored in the low probability large jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning values stored in the high probability large jackpot random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery And, even if the main jack 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading in the main control unit 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot If it is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result will be out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, and it is uniquely determined that it is an outlier. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Even if there is no match in the main control unit 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, it is possible to regard the prediction result as an outlier, return to the processing of S1409, and repeatedly execute each processing of S1404 to S1410. .

  Therefore, if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as the credible one, the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment may be able to handle the prediction result which is treated as being unreliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the big hit after-gaming state flag 223c If it is, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result will become unknown.

  In the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery If is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of this big hit lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next big winning lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next big winning lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about subsequent jackpot lotterys.

  As described above, since the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction result of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted later than the prediction result is also It becomes unknown. Therefore, when confirming the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. But there is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Specifically, in the ending effect determination process described above, when a plurality of pieces of pre-reading information are stored in the hold area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a and each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, the process of S1406 The gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the preread information is different from the gaming state indicated by the big hit after game state flag 223c (S1406: No), and further, in the processing of S1408, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prereading information is out of order If it is determined that there is (S1408: No), repetition of each processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped there. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is unknown and can not be trusted, the process does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information can not be trusted, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that the execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the ending effect determination process, when it becomes unclear whether the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery becomes a big hit or becomes out of the way, the normal display is set as the display mode of the ending effect . As a result, although the "finalized display" has been performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed. In fact, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of the problem that the lottery result is not a big hit.

  Further, although the ending effect determination process described above is executed when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is time to start the ending effect. Ru. Therefore, the ending effect determination process is not executed immediately after the jackpot effect is started, but is performed after waiting until immediately before the start of the ending effect. As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the jackpot, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is the maximum (four times), so it is executed at the timing when the jackpot ends. If the pre-reading information is acquired from the pre-reading information storage area 223a immediately before the start of the ending effect to be performed, in most cases, four pieces of pre-reading information can be obtained.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the ending effect determination process is executed immediately after the jackpot effect is started, there is a high possibility of acquiring a large amount of pre-reading information, so the possibility of branching to Yes in the process of S1407 is increased. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the opportunity for the "fixed effect display" to be performed in the ending effect, the lottery result is the jackpot when any lottery among the held jackpot lottery is made after the jackpot is finished. Can increase the chances of giving the player a sense of expectation that In addition, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, it is possible to increase the chances of having the player happy, and to increase the feeling of expectation that the player will be the big win next time, so the player's interest can be further enhanced. It can be enhanced.

  Further, although the ending effect determination process described above is configured to be executed when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the ending effect determination process is for determining the display mode of the ending effect. It is sufficient that the process is executed and finished before the ending effect is started. That is, it may be executed any time as long as it is finished before the ending effect is started after the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

  In addition, in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment, every time the jackpot lottery accompanying the entry into the first entrance 64 is suspended, the lottery result is pre-read and the lottery result obtained by the pre-reading ( A process of notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the prediction result is performed. Then, in the audio lamp control device 113, when it is just before starting the ending effect, “decisive effect display” is performed in the ending effect based on the prediction result obtained by the pre-reading in the main control device 110, or “ A complicated process such as a process of determining a display mode as to whether “normal display” is performed is performed. As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the jackpot lottery (that is, the jackpot lottery associated with entering the first ball entrance 64), which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10, By using the MPU 221 having high processing capability as the lamp control device 113, it is possible to easily set the determination condition of the display mode in the ending effect to various modes.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process will be described. Each of FIGS. 34 to 37 is a schematic view showing an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determining process. In the examples shown in FIGS. 34 to 37, the description is started on the assumption that the start winning is not suspended in the pachinko machine 10.

  In FIG. 34 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is normally determined to be a jackpot, and a fluctuation effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. It shows a state where start winnings G, H, I have occurred during the execution of the fluctuation effect. It should be noted that in the big hit lottery accompanying the start winning G, the lottery result is out regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10, and in the big hit lottery accompanying the starting winning H, pachinko machine If the gaming state of 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result is out, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change jackpot. Moreover, in the big hit lottery accompanying the start winning I, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result is out, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result is usually a big hit Shall be

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the start winning combination G occurs during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, but since it is not in the big hit When it is performed, the low probability state, which is the gaming state at the time of starting winning, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination G is out. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, the pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning combination G is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the big hit lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning H occurs, as in the case of the starting winning G, it is not a big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state. The low probability state which is the gaming state at the start winning is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination H becomes a probability variation big hit, and the pre-reading command corresponding to the starting winning combination H is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the prediction indicated by the pre-reading command The precondition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning I occurs, as in the case of the starting winning G, it is not a big hit, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state. The low probability state which is the gaming state at the start winning is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning I is usually a big hit, and the prefetch command corresponding to the starting winning I is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the prediction indicated by the prefetch command The precondition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot effect starts, the main control unit 110 transmits a fanfare command to the audio lamp control unit 113. Since the present jackpot is usually a jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the jackpot is completed, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is originally a low probability state, even if the jackpot effect is started, it continues to be a low probability state. Further, since the present jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continues to be in a low probability state even if the jackpot effect ends. And, when the jackpot effect is finished, first, the jackpot lottery with the start winning game G is performed, the fluctuation presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the starting prize H is performed, and the jackpot The fluctuation effect accompanying the lottery is executed. After that, a jackpot lottery with the start winning I is performed, and a fluctuation effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, among the reserved areas of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, it is acquired from the pre-reading information stored earlier, so first, in the first processing of S1404 The corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning combination G matches the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the prediction result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the starting winning combination G matches the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery .

  However, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), since the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination G is out, next, in the second processing of S1404, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting winning combination H The prediction precondition is acquired, and in the second process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the jackpot. Also in this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning combination H matches the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the prediction result of the big winning lottery corresponding to the starting winning combination H matches the lottery result of the actual big winning lottery . Here, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning H is a probability variation jackpot.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information indicates the jackpot In addition, it is configured to determine whether or not to set "confirmed effect display" as the display mode of the ending effect. Further, the other pre-reading information stored in the hold area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a is not confirmed. This is because the "confirmed effect display" informs the player that the lottery result will be the big win in the big win lottery being held along with the end of the big win, so at least during the big win lottery being held This is because if there is one jackpot, it is not necessary to check the lottery result for other pre-reading information.

  Therefore, in this case, as described above, the processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, the processing of S1411 is performed, and the processing of determining whether or not to set the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect is To be done. That is, in the ending effect determination process of this time, since the pre-reading information corresponding to the start winning combination I is not referred to, “decision effect display” can be performed in the ending effect, and unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the determined effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is ended, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is in order If it is done, it becomes a jackpot in any lottery. Therefore, although the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, It can suppress that the problem that a lottery result does not become a jackpot actually generate | occur | produces.

  Then, when the "decision effect display" is performed in the ending effect, the player becomes a big hit if the lottery is held after the big hit is finished and any lottery among the held big win lottery is made I can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a good remorse every time the held jackpot lottery is performed until the lottery result becomes the jackpot after the jackpot is finished. In addition, even if the lottery result is out, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot is increased, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  Next, FIG. 35 will be described. In FIG. 35 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is normally determined to be a jackpot, and the fluctuation effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. It shows a state in which start winnings J, K, L have occurred during the execution of the fluctuation effect. In the jackpot lottery with the start winning J, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result will usually be a jackpot, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result will be out In the jackpot lottery associated with the start-up winning character K, the lottery result is out regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the big hit lottery accompanying the start winning L, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change big hit, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result is out Shall be

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the start winning combination J occurs during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the jackpot is not in a big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state. The high probability state, which is the gaming state at the time of starting winning, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning J is usually a jackpot. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, the pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning combination J is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command and the prediction result of the big hit lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Further, even when the start winning K occurs, similarly to the starting winning J, it is not a big hit, and since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, when prefetching is performed for the starting winning K, as a prediction precondition The high probability state which is the gaming state at the start winning is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination K is out, and the pre-reading command corresponding to the starting winning combination K is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the prediction premise indicated by the pre-reading command The conditions, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second holding area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, even when the start winning L occurs, as in the case of the starting winning J, the jackpot is not in progress and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state. The high probability state which is the gaming state at the start winning is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning L becomes a probability variation jackpot, and the pre-reading command corresponding to the starting winning L is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the prediction indicated by the pre-reading command The precondition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot effect starts, the main control unit 110 transmits a fanfare command to the audio lamp control unit 113. Since the present jackpot is usually a jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the jackpot is completed, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from the high probability state to the low probability state when the jackpot effect is started. Further, since the present jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continues to be in a low probability state even if the jackpot effect ends. And, when the jackpot effect is finished, first, the jackpot lottery with the start winning J is performed, the fluctuation presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the starting prize K is performed, and the jackpot The fluctuation effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery with the start-up winning L is performed, and a variable effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, among the reserved areas of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, since it is acquired from the pre-reading information stored earlier, the start winning combination J in the first processing of S1404. The corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning J is different from the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the prediction result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the starting winning J does not match the actual lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  However, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), even if the prediction precondition and the gaming state at the end of the jackpot do not match, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning J is a jackpot. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the prediction precondition for prefetching does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot, in the actual jackpot lottery , The lottery result is out.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large falling random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is a big hit when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state is out when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state. Similarly, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is the jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state is out when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading information is not unknown, and it is uniquely determined when the lottery result is out.

  Therefore, in the ending effect determination process, next, in the second processing of S1404, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination K and the prediction precondition are acquired, and in the second processing of S1405, the acquisition The predicted preconditions that have been played are compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the jackpot. However, even in this comparison, the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning combination K does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. Furthermore, this time, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination K is out.

  As described above, when the prediction precondition for prefetching and the gaming state at the end of the jackpot do not match, and further, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is out, the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery It becomes unclear whether it will be a big hit or will come off.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process described above, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is the jackpot or the jackpot, it is not returned to the processing of S1404 to S1410, and the prediction result is unclear. It is configured not to confirm the pre-reading information of. Therefore, in this case, the process does not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410, but proceeds to the process of S1415, and performs the process of setting the normal display as the display mode of the ending effect. That is, in the ending effect determination process of this time, since the prefetch information corresponding to the start winning combination L is not referred to, it is possible to suppress the execution of the unnecessary process.

  Next, FIG. 36 will be described. In FIG. 36 (a), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot, and further, a start winning M, N, O occurs during execution of a jackpot effect according to the jackpot Shows the condition. It should be noted that, in the big hit lottery accompanying the starting winning M, the lottery result is out regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10, and in the big hitting lottery with starting winning N, pachinko machine If the gaming state of 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result is out, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result is usually a big hit. Moreover, in the big hit lottery accompanying start winning a prize O, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change big hit, but if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result is out Shall be As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the start winning combination M occurs during execution of the jackpot effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, but since the jackpot is in progress, prefetching is performed for the start winning combination M In this case, the high probability state, which is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination M is out. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, the pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning combination M is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the big hit lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In addition, even when the start winning N occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state as well as the starting winning M, but since it is a big hit, when prefetching is performed for the starting winning N, as a prediction precondition The high probability state which is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination N is out, and the pre-reading command corresponding to the starting winning combination N is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the prediction premise indicated by the pre-reading command The conditions, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second holding area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, even when the start winning prize O occurs, as with the starting winning prize M, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, but since it is a big hit, when prefetching is performed for the starting winning prize O, The high probability state which is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize O becomes a probability variation jackpot, and the pre-reading command corresponding to the starting winning prize O is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the prediction indicated by the pre-reading command The precondition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, the jackpot effect has already been executed, but before the jackpot effect is started, the fanfare command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113. Since the jackpot of this time is a probability change jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a high probability state at the end of the jackpot, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 . In the game state of the pachinko machine 10, during the jackpot effect, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but it is in a low probability state. Moreover, since the present jackpot is a probability change jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from the low probability state to the high probability state at the end of the jackpot effect. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, the jackpot lottery with the start winning M is performed, the fluctuation presentation with the jackpot lottery is performed, and subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the starting prize N is performed, and the jackpot The fluctuation effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery with the start-up winning a prize O is performed, and the fluctuation effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, among the reserved areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a, it is acquired from the earliest prefetch information stored in the stored order, so first in the first processing of S1404 The corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning M matches the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the prediction result of the big winning lottery corresponding to the starting winning M matches the lottery result of the actual big winning lottery .

  However, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), since the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning M is out, next, in the second processing of S1404, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting winning N The prediction precondition is acquired, and in the second process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) at the end of the jackpot. Also in this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning combination N matches the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the prediction result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the starting winning combination N matches the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery .

  However, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination N is out of the way, so next, in the third processing of S1404, the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting winning combination O The prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired, and in the third processing of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state (high probability state) at the end of the jackpot are compared. In this comparison as well, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize O matches the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting winning prize O matches the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery . At this time, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination O becomes the probability variation jackpot.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information indicates the jackpot In addition, it is configured to determine whether or not to set "confirmed effect display" as the display mode of the ending effect. Therefore, in this case, as described above, the processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, the processing of S1411 is performed, and the processing of determining whether or not to set the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect is To be done.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the determined effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is ended, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is in order If it is done, it becomes a jackpot in any lottery. Therefore, although the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, It can suppress that the problem that a lottery result does not become a jackpot actually generate | occur | produces.

  Then, when the "decision effect display" is performed in the ending effect, the player becomes a big hit if the lottery is held after the big hit is finished and any lottery among the held big win lottery is made I can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a good remorse every time the held jackpot lottery is performed until the lottery result becomes the jackpot after the jackpot is finished. In addition, even if the lottery result is out, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot is increased, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  Next, FIG. 37 will be described. In FIG. 37 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is normally determined to be a jackpot, and a fluctuation effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. It shows a state where the start winning combination P has occurred during the execution of the fluctuation effect. Also, the variation presentation corresponding to the big hit is finished, and the pachinko machine 10 becomes the big hit, and furthermore, it shows a state where the start winnings Q and R are generated during the execution of the big hit presentation accompanying the big hit. It should be noted that in the big hit lottery accompanying the start winning prize P, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result will usually be a big win, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result will be out In the jackpot lottery with the start winning Q, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result is out, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result Is supposed to be a jackpot. Further, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning R, the lottery result is out regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the start winning combination P occurs during the execution of the fluctuation effect, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the prediction premise is taken when prefetching is performed for the start winning combination P. A high probability state is selected as the condition, and its pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination P is usually a jackpot. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, the pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning combination P is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the big hit lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot effect starts, the main control unit 110 transmits a fanfare command to the audio lamp control unit 113. Since the present jackpot is usually a jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the jackpot is completed, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from the high probability state to the low probability state when the jackpot effect is started. Further, since the present jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continues to be in a low probability state even if the jackpot effect ends.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the start winning combination Q occurs during execution of the jackpot effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, but since the jackpot is in progress In this case, the low probability state, which is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination Q becomes a probability variable jackpot. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, the pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning combination Q is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command It is stored in the second reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, even when the start winning R occurs, as with the starting winning Q, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, but since it is a big hit, when prefetching for the starting winning R is performed, The low probability state which is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning R is out, and the pre-reading command corresponding to the starting winning R is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction premise indicated by the pre-reading command The conditions, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, the jackpot lottery with the start winning prize P is performed, the fluctuation presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the starting prize Q is performed, and the jackpot The fluctuation effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery with the start-up winning R is performed, and the fluctuation effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, among the reserved areas of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, it is obtained from the pre-reading information stored earlier, so first, in the first processing of S1404 The corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning combination P and the gaming state at the end of the big hit are different, the prediction result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the starting winning combination P does not match the actual lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  However, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), even if the prediction precondition and the gaming state at the end of the jackpot do not match, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination P is a jackpot. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the prediction precondition for prefetching does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot, in the actual jackpot lottery , The lottery result is out. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading information is not unknown, and it is uniquely determined when the lottery result is out.

  Therefore, in the ending effect determination process, next, in the second processing of S1404, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination Q and the prediction precondition are acquired, and in the second processing of S1405, the acquisition The predicted preconditions that have been played are compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the jackpot. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning game Q matches the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting winning game Q matches the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery . At this time, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination Q becomes the probability variation jackpot.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot In the case of indicating “,” it is configured to determine whether or not “finalized effect display” is set as the display mode of the ending effect. In this case, the remaining prefetch information stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is not confirmed. This is because the "confirmed effect display" informs the player that the lottery result will be the big win in the big win lottery being held with the big win ending, so the big win lottery held in the main control device 110 Among them, if there is at least one jackpot, the lottery results of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to confirm the lottery results for the remaining prefetch information.

  Therefore, in this case, as described above, the processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, the processing of S1411 is performed, and the processing of determining whether or not to set the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect is To be done. That is, in the ending effect determination process of this time, since the pre-reading information corresponding to the start winning combination R is not referred to, “decision effect display” can be performed in the ending effect, and unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the determined effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is ended, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is in order If it is done, it becomes a jackpot in any lottery. Therefore, although the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, It can suppress that the problem that a lottery result does not become a jackpot actually generate | occur | produces.

  Then, when the "decision effect display" is performed in the ending effect, the player becomes a big hit if the lottery is held after the big hit is finished and any lottery among the held big win lottery is made I can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a good remorse every time the held jackpot lottery is performed until the lottery result becomes the jackpot after the jackpot is finished. In addition, even if the lottery result is out, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot increases, so it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variable display setting process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1311). This variation display setting process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (ie, off) (S1706: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, it is determined whether the type of stop acquired in the process of S1708 is the type of stop corresponding to "big hit" (S1709). If the acquired stop type is a stop type corresponding to “big hit” (S1709: Yes), the process proceeds to S1711. On the other hand, if the acquired stop type is the stop type corresponding to “off” (S1709: No), it is further determined whether the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710: Yes), since the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the change effect, the chance eye is set as the stop type of the change effect (S1712), the processing proceeds to S1713. By this process of S1712, the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110, and the symbol on the middle line L2 is left It is set to "3" "4" "1" in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol which becomes a chance eye can be displayed at the time of a stop of change production in the third symbol display device 81 as a continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1710, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is less than 2 (S1710: No), when the last variation effect for which continuous notice effect is executed is executed (continuous notice frequency counter 223h Since the value is 1) or the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set (the value of the continuous advance frequency counter 223h is 0), the process proceeds to the process of S1711. In the process of S1711, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1711), and the process shifts to the process of S1713.

  If the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1 in the process of S1711, it is the last variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, so the chance type is not set as the stop type, and the continuous notice frequency is set. As in the case where the value of the counter 223h is 0, the type of stop notified from the main control device 110 is set.

  In the process of S1713, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1713). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714). If the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714: Yes), the continuous notice frequency counter The value of 223h is decremented by 1 (S1715), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 0 (S1714: No), the process of S1715 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variable display setting process (S1112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1112). This variation display setting process (S1112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1501: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1507. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). In the display control device 114, when the display variation pattern command is received, the third symbol display device 81 performs variation display of the third symbol in the third pattern display device 81 with the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command. , The display control of the fluctuation production is started.

  Next, the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1505), and the prefetching information (data) stored in the prefetching information storage area 223a is shifted (S1506). In the process of S1506, the prefetch information stored in the pending first area to the pending fourth area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift prefetch information. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1507.

  In the process of S1507, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1507). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S1507: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1507: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1508), and then in the process of S1206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1509).

  Next, it is determined whether the type of stop acquired in the process of S1509 is the type of stop corresponding to "big hit" (S1510). If the acquired stop type is a stop type corresponding to “big hit” (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the acquired stop type is the stop type corresponding to “disengagement” (S1510: No), it is further determined whether the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 2 or more (S1511).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 2 or more (S1511: Yes), the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the change effect, so the chance eye is set as the stop type of the change effect. (S1513), the process proceeds to S1514. By the process of S1513, the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110, and the symbol on the middle line L2 is left It is set to "3" "4" "1" in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol which becomes a chance eye can be displayed at the time of a stop of change production in the third symbol display device 81 as a continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1511, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is less than 2 (S1511: No), when the last variation effect for which continuous notice effect is executed is executed (continuous notice frequency counter 223h Since the value is 1) or the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set (the value of the continuous advance number counter 223h is 0), the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1512), and the process moves to S1514.

  If the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1 in the process of S1512, this is the last variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, so the chance eye is not set as the stop type, and the continuous notice frequency is set. As in the case where the value of the counter 223h is 0, the type of stop notified from the main control device 110 is set.

  In the process of S1514, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1514). . In the display control device 114, when the display stop type command is received, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1 or more (S1515). If the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1 or more (S1515: Yes), the continuous notice frequency counter The value of 223h is decremented by 1 (S1516), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 0 (S1515: No), the process of S1516 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 52. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1601), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S1601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S1701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1702). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1702, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1703). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after the other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S1704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S1601 in FIG. 39) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 39) (S1705), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is ended.

  As described above, when the boot process (S1601) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 40, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S1702. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1703 to S1705 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S1701. And after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1702, the processing of S1703 to S1705 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1703 to S1705 without performing the processes of S1701 and S1702. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1603). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1603, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1604). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1604, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S1605). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 50A) described later. The resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3102 in FIG. 50A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. As a result, during this time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (the main image at power-on or the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. 13 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41 (b)). A determination process (see S1908 in FIG. 41B) and a simplified display setting process (see S1909 in FIG. 41B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When the display variation pattern command is received through the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, Simple change effects can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1605, interrupt permission is set (S1606), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1606, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 41 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1801), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 41 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S1901: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S1902) is executed, and then a display setting process (S1903) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S1902), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46.

  In the display setting process (S1903), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S1902) or the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S1904). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S1903) or the simple display setting processing (S1909) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S1905). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S1906). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S1904), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S1905) The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1907). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S1907, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than the 15 probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, 15R normal big hit, front and back outreach, front and back out) The stop type table and stop type counter corresponding to the reach, complete deviance, chance eye) are compared with each other, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1901: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 13 on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S1908) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S1909) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S1902) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2001), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2001: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2001: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S1903) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S2002). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2003).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2004), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2004: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2005), the process returns to the process of S2001.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2005) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S2101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2101 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2101 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2103). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2103. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2104), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2105). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2106), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2105, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2101. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2102. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2104, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2004 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display suspension type command among the unprocessed commands (S2006). If there is a display type-of-stop command (S2006: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S2007), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2007) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, any chance eyes) Then, the stop type table corresponding to is determined (S2201), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41 (b)) is executed. Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2202).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to off (S2203).

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2202 is described. In the above-described task processing (S1904), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2202 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2203, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the processing of S2203, next, stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15 positive change big hit, 2R positive change big hit, 15R normal big hit, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, any chance eyes) It is determined whether the stop type of the jackpot (S2204), if it is the stop type of the jackpot (S2204: Yes), the transfer start of the image data to be used in the fanfare effect when the on state is normal image The fanfare data transfer flag 223i to be notified to the transfer setting process (S3103) is set to ON (S2205), the termination type command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if the stop type information is not a big hit stop type (S2204: No), the process of S2205 is skipped, the stop type command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on the fanfare data transfer flag 223i, while the fluctuation effect to be a big hit is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the video RAM 236 for normal use It can be transferred. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Since the display fanfare command instructing start of fanfare production is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in time with the end of the fluctuation production in the third symbol display device 81, the display fanfare command is received. From the above, if image data used in fanfare production is transferred from character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the fluctuation production to the start of the fanfare production, and the player There was a fear that they might not have stopped, or they might have a sense of discomfort.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device It is controlled so that transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished until the fluctuation effect which becomes the big hit at 81 is finished. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect to be a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 can immediately start the fanfare effect, so the player may not be aware that the operation has stopped. And, I will not give a sense of incongruity. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is used. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2201, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S2202.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to "big hit" is set, the stop symbol corresponding to "big hit" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually "off". As a result, the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "big hit", and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete removal is set, and in fact, if it is a "big hit", the complete removal stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Even so, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 will be a "big hit".

  Referring back to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the process of S2006, when it is determined that there is no display type command for display (S2006: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display fanfare command among the unprocessed commands (S2008). If there is a fanfare command for use (S2008: Yes), fanfare command processing is executed (S2009), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the fanfare command processing (S2009) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 (a) is a flowchart showing fanfare command processing. The fanfare command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fanfare command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fanfare command processing, first, the fanfare display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2301). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302).

  Then, based on the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ((0) S2304). Then, the demonstration display flag and the determination display flag are both set to OFF (S2305), the fanfare command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the fanfare command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2304, from the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301, At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is extracted by the processing of S2302 while extracting the drawing contents defined in the address shown by the pointer 233f. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the image data of the necessary sprites in the set fanfare display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 2. From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, when the fanfare command processing is executed, the fanfare transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, while the fanfare effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, image data necessary for round effect and ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (fanfare effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to transfer image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so the first round is shown. If the image data required for the round effect has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 since the command for the number of rounds for display has been received, there will be a lot of waiting before the start of the round effect after the fanfare effect is completed. There is a possibility that time will occur and the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation is stopped.

  In addition, the ending command for display which instructs the start of ending effect, from the sound lamp control device 113 according to the timing when all round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (15 rounds or 2 rounds) finished As it is sent, if image data required for ending effect is transferred from character ROM 234 to video RAM 236 for normal use after receiving the ending command for display, ending effect is started after round effect is completed. A lot of waiting time occurs, which may cause the player to feel uneasy or uncomfortable feeling that the operation has stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display fanfare command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and the variation display of the big hit is finished in the third symbol display device 81 It controls so that transfer of data required for round production and ending production ends. Thereby, when the fanfare effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds) Or, when ending for two rounds, since the ending effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation is stopped. There is no Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, It is controlled so that transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished before the variation effect which becomes the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect to be a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 can immediately start the fanfare effect, so the player may not be aware that the operation has stopped. And, I will not give a sense of incongruity. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  Referring back to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2008 that there is no display fanfare command (S2008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2010), and display is performed. If there is a command for the number of rounds (S2010: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S2011), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S2011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233 d is set (S 2401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2402).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2404). Then, the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are both set to OFF (S2405), the fanfare command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When it is determined in the process of S2010 that there is no display round number command (S2010: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2012). If there is an ending command for use (S2012: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2013), and the process returns to the process of S2001.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2013) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the process of S2501 is turned on, The data table determination flag corresponding to the other ending display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d corresponds to the display mode of which ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S 2503. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2405). Then, the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are both set to OFF (S2406), the fanfare command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2012 that there is no display ending command (S2012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2014), and the back image If there is a change command (S2014: Yes), the rear image change command processing is executed (S2015), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 46A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2015) will be described. FIG. 46 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3103) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S2601) . Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2602), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2601 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2602. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2602 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2602, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2014 that there is no rear image change command (S2014: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S2016). For example (S2016: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2017), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2017) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2701). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2702), and the error command is generated. The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2701, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2702, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2702, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2016 that there is no error command (S2016: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2018), and the process returns to S2001.

  In the process of S2001 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2001: Yes ), The processing of S2002 to S2018 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2001 to S2018 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2001 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S1909) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 13, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 43 (b)), which are processing corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2101. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2102, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S1903) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2801), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (S2801: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S2802 to S2804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2801: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S2802), S2803 to S2804. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of In the process of S2803, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S2803). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S2803: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S2804).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S2901).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters. Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2901, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2902), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S2804), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S2803, the process proceeds to S2805. At S2805, pointer update processing is executed (S2805).

  Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3001). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3001, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (S3002). As a result, if it is the End information (S3002: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3003). If it is the demonstration display data table (S3003: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3004), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3005), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3003 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3003: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3006), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3002, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3002: No), this processing is ended and the processing returns to the display setting processing.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2806). In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents acquired in the processing of S2806 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S2807), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S2808). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S2808: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S2808: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S2809).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S2809: No), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S2810), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2811). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S2812), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2813). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S2814), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S2815) Return to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2815 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S1904), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S2815, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is not on but is on in the process of S2809 (S2809: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S2816). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S2816: No), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 2817), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 2818). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S2819). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2820), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S2821), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, after the finalized display effect is finished, the third symbol display device 81 automatically performs the demonstration effect when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect start or the fanfare command is not received. The drawing contents can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S2816, if the demonstration display flag is on (S2816: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simple display setting process (S1909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 41B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting, in the display data table buffer 233d, a display data table which specifies to stop and display the image (FIG. 13 (b) or (c)) is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S1905) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 50 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3102), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3101, that is, if it is off (S3101: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3103), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3102), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S1905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 50 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3102).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3201), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3201: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer processing of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3202). In the process of S3202, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3202 (S3202: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to S3203. Further, as a result of the process of S3201, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3203.

  In the process of S3203, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3203), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3203: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3204), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing of S3203, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3203: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3205), and the resident image transfer setting processing is ended. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S1908 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting process (see S1909 in FIG. 41B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 42 to 46) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 47 to 49) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) (see S3101: No in FIG. 50A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a normal image transfer setting process (S3103) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S1905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3103).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S2805) of the display setting process (S1903) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3301). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3302), and if it is transfer data information (S3302: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3303), the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3304), and the process proceeds to step S3305.

  In the process of S3302, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data (S3302: No), the process of S3303 and S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. In the process of S3305, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S3305), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3305: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3306).

  In the process of S3306, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3306 (S3306: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3306: Yes), the process proceeds to S3307. Also, as a result of the process of S3305, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3305: No), the process proceeds to S3307.

  In the process of S3307, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3307), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3307: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3308), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3303 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3317. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3307: No), it is then determined whether the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309).

  When the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 42), and as a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is It means that it was determined that it is a jackpot stop type. Therefore, in this case, control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is completed until the third symbol display device 81 ends the variation effect which becomes a big hit. That is, if the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309: Yes), the fanfare data transfer flag is set to off (S3310), and the image data used in the fanfare effect is set as the transfer target image data (S3311). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data used in fanfare effect is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (video RAM 236 for normal use) are acquired. Then (S3312), the process proceeds to S3317.

  In the process of S3309, if the fanfare data transfer flag is not on but is off (S3309: No), it is then determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3313). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3313: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3313: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3314), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3315). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3316), and the process proceeds to S3317.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3315, if the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S3317, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3317). The determination in the process of S3317 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3317 (S3317: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3317 (S3317: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3318). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3318, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3319), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233 j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and the sub of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S1906) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S1905) (S3401). That is, in the processing of S3401, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S1904), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S1905), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3402). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3402, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S3403). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 k is performed by inverting the value, that is, by setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 41B) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main control unit 110 selects the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new starting winning. , CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a (ie, the winning game state flag) are acquired. Then, when the acquired data is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data The type is prefetched in main controller 110. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, various information (predicting result of big hit lottery, prediction result of fluctuation pattern type) obtained by the pre-reading and the prediction precondition of the pre-reading are voice lamp control The device 113 is notified.

  As described above, the prediction precondition included in the prefetch command indicates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that is the precondition of the prediction when the lottery result or the like is predicted in the prefetch. If this prediction precondition is a low probability state, this means that the main controller 110 has used the low probability big-hit random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, and the prediction precondition is a high probability status. The high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is used to mean that prefetching has been performed.

  Then, when the pre-reading command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, various information (pre-reading preconditions, big-win lottery prediction results, fluctuation pattern type prediction results) are extracted as pre-reading information from the pre-reading commands The prefetch information is newly stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. As described above, in the voice lamp control device 113, since the prediction precondition is stored as the prefetching information together with the prediction result of the big hit lottery, when using the prefetching information in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is By referring to it, it is possible to determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the main control unit 110 is a big win, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type when the big hit ends. And in the main control unit 110, since the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, after the jackpot is finished, the main controller 110 is newly added. When the jackpot lottery is performed, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state newly set at the end of the jackpot are used to perform the jackpot lottery.

  Then, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the start of the fanfare effect and the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit are voiced from the main control device 110 by the fanfare command. The lamp controller 113 is notified. In the sound lamp control device 113, when the fanfare command is received, the gaming state is extracted from the fanfare command, and the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set according to the gaming state. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the time of the big hit end can be determined in the main control device 110 based on the big hit after game state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the main control unit 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the jackpot lottery, but when the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot, At the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main control 110 after the jackpot end, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot end. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the gaming state set at the end of the big hit can be determined based on the big hit after-game state flag 223c, it is newly executed in the main control device 110 after the current big hit is finished. The big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the big hit lottery can also be determined based on the big hit after game state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment, when using the prefetch information, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching It can be determined whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the above.

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot corresponding to the prefetching are scheduled to be used In the main control apparatus 110, it can not be determined whether or not the large hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match with each other.

  That is, the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10 are configured such that winnings (start winnings) at the first ball entry port 64 are held a plurality of times (up to 4 times in the pachinko machine 10) In the main control unit 110, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), if there is a starting winning on hold, the lottery of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning After the results are pre-read, the jackpot lottery with the new starting winning combination is performed after all the jackpot lotterys with each starting winning combination that were on hold at the time of the new starting winning combination are finished.

  Then, when the main control unit 110 executes a jackpot lottery with each starter prize that has been on hold at the time of the new starter prize, if any lottery result becomes a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot end. The game state of is newly set. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, a jackpot lottery with a new start winning is performed in the changed gaming state, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new starting winning and its new The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning will not match.

  As described above, in the main control device 110 of the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning game, Furthermore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are configured to be determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start winning and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the big hit lottery accompanying the new starting win do not match, it is used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the big hit lottery In the main control unit 110, the determined big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the pre-reading do not match.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed, and the prediction result of which table 202a1, 202a2 It was not configured to be able to determine whether it was obtained by using it. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, also in the sound lamp control unit 113, it is determined which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result. could not.

  However, even with the conventional pachinko machine, since the main control unit 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big hit lottery, while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change, both the pre-reading of the big win lottery result and the big hit lottery It is performed in the same gaming state in the main control device 110. Therefore, in main controller 110, jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Match Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot selection lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, in the voice lamp control unit 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, The prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as credible.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction preconditions are not stored, until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in main controller 110 When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. It will be unclear.

  Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot selection lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in main controller 110, the voice lamp control device of the conventional pachinko machine is used. In 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as unreliable. And, in the conventional sounding machine control device 113 for pachinko machines, when it is not possible to trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, a process not related to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery (for example, It was suppressed that the continuous advance notice effect, the ending effect etc.) were performed. Therefore, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot effect and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery were wasted.

  In contrast to such a conventional pachinko machine, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, when using the pre-reading information in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. It can be determined whether the main control unit 110 matches the 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Even in the case where it is unclear in the main control device 110 whether or not they coincide, the determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the main control device 110 is highly likely to match the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the prediction result. it is conceivable that. Therefore, even in the conventional pachinko machine, even if a prediction result treated as unreliable may be treated as a credible thing in the present pachinko machine 10, in the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery should be suitably handled. it can. As a result, it is possible to use the prediction result of the jackpot lottery more frequently than the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to increase the opportunity to improve the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device At 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as unreliable and he refrained from using the prediction result. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.

  When solving this by a method different from the present embodiment, for example, it is conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results.

  That is, when the main control device 110 performs the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202 a 1 and 202 a 2 are obtained using both the big hit random number tables 202 a 1 and 202 a 2, and further It is conceivable to notify the voice lamp control device 113 so as to make it possible to determine which table corresponds to the two prediction results.

  According to this configuration, when using the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the voice lamp control device 113, one of the two prediction results can always be treated as credible. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using this credible prediction result, it is possible to suppress the problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed.

  However, as described above, when prefetching the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the main control unit 110, it is stored in the first hit random number counter C1 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 as in the case of the big hit lottery. A process of comparing the hit values one by one is performed. Therefore, each time a new start winning combination occurs, the process of comparing the first random number counter C1 with the winning values stored in the two big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 one by one is a maximum of 33. It has to be done repeatedly. Therefore, every time a new start winning combination occurs, the comparison process may take a long time, and time may be wasted.

  Further, although the main controller 110 obtains the prediction results corresponding to each of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 by using the two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2, both of the prediction results for the jackpot lottery in the audio lamp control device 113 are When used, only one prediction result is used. Therefore, the main control device 110 wastes the comparison process which may take time and may be performed. In addition, although the main controller 110 obtains two prediction results each time a new start winning is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses only one of the prediction results, so that useless prediction results are always generated. Therefore, the number of useless prediction results increases more than in the case of the conventional pachinko machine.

  Further, since the audio lamp control device 113 stores the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively, a storage area larger than that of the conventional one is required. Further, since main controller 110 notifies prediction results corresponding to each of two tables 202a1 and 202a2 to audio lamp controller 113, data to be transmitted from main controller 110 to audio lamp controller 113 is increased. Therefore, there is a possibility that data etc. desired to be transmitted preferentially can not be transmitted, and the control burden on the main control device 110 also increases. Further, since the data to be received also increases in the audio lamp control device 113, the control load increases.

  As described above, in the case where the main control device 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 are obtained using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 so as to make it possible to determine which table the two prediction results respectively correspond to, the credit in the voice lamp control device 113 Although it can handle more predictions that can be made, other problems occur, such as an increase in processing time and control burden.

  Further, when solving by another method, it is also conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows, for example, so as to handle more reliable prediction results in the audio lamp control device 113. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control unit 110 and the lottery result becomes the jackpot, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit, the main control unit 110 uses the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the current big hit, and pre-reads each pending start winning combination It is conceivable that the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of each prediction result obtained by the re-doing and re-doing.

  According to this configuration, the main control device 110 changes the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed. As a result, even if the voice lamp control device 113 can not trust the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change, the prediction of the jackpot lottery notified again from the main control device 110 instead. The results can be used as credible.

  The prediction result of the jackpot lottery to be notified again is obtained by the main controller 110 in the same tables 202a1 and 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot end. is there. Therefore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified again and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result coincide with each other in the main control device 110, in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery Can be treated as credible. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using this credible prediction result, it is possible to suppress the problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10, every time the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the pre-reading for each start winning combination pending in the main controller 110 is re-done, and each prediction result obtained by the re-do The control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 again. Therefore, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery which has become the target of the retrial and the prediction result are wasted.

  Therefore, unnecessary processing is performed in the main control device 110, which imposes a control burden. Also, since the voice lamp control device 113 receives the useless prediction result and stores it in the RAM 223, useless processing is performed in the voice lamp control device 113 and the control load Hangs. Further, data to be transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 is increased. Therefore, there is a possibility that data etc. desired to be transmitted preferentially can not be transmitted, and the control burden on the main control device 110 also increases. Further, since the data to be received also increases in the audio lamp control device 113, the control load increases.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 hits the jackpot, the main control unit 110 uses the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the present jackpot to hold each start winning prize on hold When the pachinko machine 10 is configured to reread the pre-reading for each and to notify each of the prediction results obtained by the re-reading to the voice lamp control device 113, the credit in the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Although it can handle more prediction results that can be done, other problems occur such as unnecessary processing and increased control burden.

  Further, when solving by another method, it is also conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows, for example, so as to handle more reliable prediction results in the audio lamp control device 113. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control unit 110 and the lottery result becomes the jackpot, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the main control unit 110 normally does not pre-read the lottery result of the big hit drawing, and only when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, the main control unit 110 in the big hit random number table corresponding to the gaming state at the big hit end. It is conceivable to pre-read each pending start winning combination using 202a1 and 202a2 and to notify each sound lamp control device 113 of each prediction result from the main control device 110.

  If configured in this way, it is possible to pre-read each pending start winning combination only when the main control device 110 makes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big hit and there is a high possibility that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes. . The prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by this pre-reading is obtained by the main controller 110 in the same table 202a1, 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 scheduled to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot end. . Therefore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result coincide with each other in the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery It can be treated as Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using this credible prediction result, it is possible to suppress the problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed.

  However, since the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot in the main control device 110, the number (frequency) of prefetching decreases. Then, the number of jackpot lottery prediction results notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 is also reduced, so the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction result in the voice lamp controller 113 decreases, and the above-described continuous Opportunity to carry out the preview production is reduced. Therefore, the amusement of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

  As described above, the main controller 110 does not usually pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and only when the pachinko machine 10 hits the jackpot, the main controller 110 copes with the gaming state at the time of the jackpot end When the pachinko machine 10 is configured to pre-read each pending start winning combination using the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and to notify each prediction result from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 The audio lamp control device 113 can handle more credible prediction results, but the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction results decreases, which may lower the interest of the pachinko machine 10, and other problems. Will occur.

  As described above, the three solutions other than the above-described embodiment allow the voice lamp control device 113 to handle more reliable prediction results, but the main controller 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 The problem of processing time, wasteful processing, increase in control load, and other problems of the possibility of reducing the interest of the pachinko machine 10 arise.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like in the prefetch command, the information further includes the information indicating the prediction precondition of prefetching, Although transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, the information indicating the prediction precondition of this pre-reading is only one bit. In addition, the main control unit 110 sends information to the voice lamp control unit 113 from the main control unit 110 including information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit this time in the fanfare command, but at the time of the big hit Information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 is also only one bit. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, compared with the conventional pachinko machine, the amount of data processed in MPU201, 221 hardly changes. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 is small, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, as described above, even if the prediction result treated as unreliable in the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as credible in the present pachinko machine 10, in this embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is It can be handled suitably. Therefore, the frequency with which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be used is higher than that of the conventional pachinko machine, and the opportunity to improve the interest of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is preferable to handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery without causing problems such as increase in processing time and control load, and problems such as unnecessary processing and increase in control load. Further, the opportunity to improve the interest of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main control unit 110 checks the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new starting winning. , CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a (ie, the winning game state flag) are acquired. Then, when the acquired data is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data The type is prefetched in main controller 110.

  Then, when the pre-reading is performed in the main control device 110, if the data targeted for pre-reading is acquired along with the start winning other than during the big hit, then the winning game state flag is included in the data. Based on the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for the pre-reading, are determined. On the other hand, if the data targeted for pre-reading is acquired in accordance with the winning combination during the big hit, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for pre-reading are determined based on the big hit post game state flag 203d. . When the winning game state flag or the big hit after game state flag 203d is off (indicating a low probability state), the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 is selected, and the winning game state flag, after a big hit When the gaming state flag 203d is on (indicating a high probability state), the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 is selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, when the game state flag 203a is in the big hit, it is off, and the data targeted for pre-reading is acquired along with the winning game during the big hit, the game time flag in the data at that time is always off. . Therefore, when the tables 202a1 and 202a2 are determined based on the winning game state flag in the data, the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 is always selected. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is less likely to coincide with the actual lottery result, and the accuracy of the lottery result prediction becomes worse.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the data targeted for the pre-reading is acquired in association with the start winning during the big hit, the big hit random number table 202a1, which is used for the pre-reading based on the big hit post game state flag 203d. 202a2 has been determined. Thereby, the precision of prediction of a lottery result can be improved.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot. Therefore, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot can not be determined until the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes the jackpot, but when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, the gaming state at the jackpot end is already determined. The control device 110 can determine the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. And, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot is finished, if there is a jackpot lottery pending in the main control unit 110, the jackpot lottery that was on hold is one in the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot termination The main control unit 110 sequentially executes them one by one.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery held in the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when there is a start winning in the big hit, when performing pre-reading for that starting winning, it is the jackpot that made the prediction precondition the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, rather than always making the prediction precondition a low probability state It is possible to improve the possibility that the main controller 110 matches the predicted result of the lottery and the actual lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the predicted result. Therefore, since the number of prediction results that can be treated as credible in the voice lamp control device 113 can be increased, in the present embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 110 is a jackpot, the stop symbol indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a jackpot, In the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, in the third symbol display device 81, an ending effect that is a part of the jackpot effect is performed.

  In this ending effect, if the jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning with the jackpot ending, whether the lottery result will be notified to the player that the lottery result will be a jackpot in any jackpot lottery ( The fixed effect display is performed) or the player is notified that the jackpot is simply ended (normal display is performed). It is determined in the audio lamp control device 113 whether “finalized display” or “normal display” is performed in the ending effect.

  Specifically, immediately before the ending effect is started, the above-mentioned ending effect determination process (refer to FIG. 33) is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, and the contents of the pre-reading information storage area 223a and the ending mode counter Whether the display mode of the ending effect is “fixed effect display” or “normal display” is determined based on the value of 223 f or the like. The prefetch information storage area 223a is provided with one execution area and four reserve areas (preserve first area to reserve fourth area), and the smaller the area number, the older the start in time The prefetch information corresponding to the winning is stored.

  When the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, among the hold areas of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the hold areas are sequentially stored in the hold area from the area with the smallest area number The read ahead information that is present is acquired one by one, and the prediction precondition in the read ahead information is compared with the gaming state indicated by the after-big play state flag 223c (see S1401 to S1410).

  Then, if it is determined in the process of S1406 that the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information matches the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c, as described above, by the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery In this case, the main control unit 110 matches the used jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, the speech lamp control device 113 predicts the jackpot lottery prediction result in the prefetch information. Can be treated as credible. Therefore, in this case, in the process of S1407, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is the jackpot.

  Then, in the process of S1407, when it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out, another piece of prefetch information stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is confirmed. Specifically, each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1407 that the prediction result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, the process proceeds to S1411 without checking the remaining pre-reading information stored in the hold area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, A process of determining whether or not to set the display mode of the ending effect to "finalized effect display" is executed. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is credible, and the prediction result is a jackpot, the processing does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  As described above, this is to notify the player that the lottery result will be the jackpot in the jackpot lottery being held with the termination of the jackpot, so that the main control unit 110 holds the hold. This is because if there is at least one jackpot among the jackpot lottery being performed, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to confirm the read-ahead information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the confirmation of the prefetched information is unnecessary, the confirmation is not performed, so that the execution of the unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Further, the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) described above is executed, and it is determined in the process of S1406 that the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the gaming state indicated by the large hitting after game state flag 223c do not match. In this case, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching , And the main controller 110 do not match. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110, in this case, the voice lamp control device of this embodiment Even in the case of 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be relied upon, and it is refrained from using the prediction result.

  However, as described above, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information may be treated as credible, next, whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot by the process of S1408 It is determined. Then, in the process of S1408, if it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the prediction result is credible and can be regarded as being out, so the process returns to S1409 and repeats each process of S1404 to S1410 Run it.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 do not overlap with each other. You have set a hit value. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery And, even if the main jack 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading in the main control unit 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot If it is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result will be out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, and it is uniquely determined that it is an outlier. In the audio lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit in the process of S1408, the prediction result can be regarded as a drop, so that the process returns to S1409 and repeatedly executes each process of S1404 to S1410. can do. As described above, in the case of the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, even the prediction result treated as being unreliable may be treated as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the big hit after-game state flag 223c, and in the processing of S1408 the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is out If so, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result will be unknown.

  And according to the ending effect determination process (refer to FIG. 33) mentioned above, when each process of S1404 to S1410 is being executed, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, and after the big hit If it is determined in the process of S1408 that the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223c is different (S1406: No) and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is out of place (S1408: No), S1404 to S1410 The repetition of each process of can be stopped there. That is, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual lottery result corresponding to the prediction result, and if the prediction result can not be trusted, the processing does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining It does not confirm pre-reading information. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information can not be trusted, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that the execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) described above, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery is a big hit or a drop, normal display is set as a display mode of the ending effect Are configured to As a result, although the "finalized display" has been performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed. In fact, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of the problem that the lottery result is not a big hit.

  Further, although the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) described above is executed when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the ending command is the ending effect. It is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when it is time to start. Therefore, the ending effect determination process is not executed immediately after the jackpot effect is started, but is performed after waiting until immediately before the start of the ending effect. As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the jackpot, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is the maximum (four times), so it is executed at the timing when the jackpot ends. If the pre-reading information is acquired from the pre-reading information storage area 223a immediately before the start of the ending effect to be performed, in most cases, four pieces of pre-reading information can be obtained.

  Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 113, there is a high possibility that more pre-reading information can be obtained as compared with the case where the ending effect determination processing is immediately executed after the jackpot effect is started. It is possible to increase the possibility of being Therefore, since it is possible to increase the opportunity for the "fixed effect display" to be performed in the ending effect, the lottery result is the jackpot when any lottery among the held jackpot lottery is made after the jackpot is finished. Can increase the chances of giving the player a sense of expectation that In addition, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, it is possible to increase the chances of having the player happy, and to increase the feeling of expectation that the player will be the big win next time, so the player's interest can be further enhanced. It can be enhanced.

  The above is the description of the first embodiment. As described above, in the first embodiment, the jackpot in the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) executed during the jackpot as an example capable of suitably handling the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the voice lamp control device 113. An example has been described in which the prediction result of the lottery is suitably handled, and it is determined whether the display mode of the ending effect is "fixed effect display" or "normal display".

  However, according to the present invention, not only the determination of the display mode of the ending effect but also the processing of dealing with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled. For example, as one of the processes for handling the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, there is a process relating to continuous notice effects. The present invention can also be applied to processing relating to this continuous advance presentation effect, and of course, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Next, as a second embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to processing relating to continuous advance notice effects will be described. In the second embodiment, only parts different from the first embodiment will be described.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In addition to the counters 223b, 223f to 223h and the flags 223c to 223e, 223i described above, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is a prefetch information storage area in which a part of the configuration is added as compared with the first embodiment. It has at least 223a, a newly added gaming state flag 223j, and a newly added effect execution time gaming state flag 223k.

  Here, details of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic view schematically showing a configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment.

  The difference between the prefetching information storage area 223a in the second embodiment and the prefetching information storage area 223a (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment is that, in each of five areas from the execution area to the hold fourth area This is the difference between the presence or absence of the preliminary execution status area 223a4. As in the first embodiment, the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment also receives various information notified from the main control device 110 by the prefetch command (prediction of preconditioning for prefetching, prediction result of jackpot lottery, fluctuation This is an area for storing the prediction result of the pattern type).

  As shown in FIG. 57, the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment includes one execution area and four hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) as in the first embodiment. There are five areas, and each of these areas is provided with at least a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, a variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and a prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 is provided in each of five areas of the execution area to the hold fourth area. The continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is an area for storing the continuous notice execution status, and the continuous notice execution status corresponds to each area (execution area to hold fourth area) in which the status is stored. When the variable effect is executed, it indicates whether or not the continuous advance effect is executed in the variable effect.

  In the present embodiment, 13 types of continuous notice execution statuses are provided, and different status values are assigned to the respective statuses. Details will be described later, but there are six types of status indicating that continuous notice production is to be performed in the fluctuation production, and six types of status indicating that the continuous notice production is scheduled to be performed in the fluctuation production but are canceled In addition, there are 13 types of statuses including one type of status indicating that continuous advance presentation effects are not performed in the fluctuation effects.

  Regarding the status indicating that continuous notice effects are to be executed in the fluctuation production, the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect among the probability variation big hit, the normal big hit, and the out of the gap, the prediction that became the trigger of the continuous notice effect Status values of "1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13" are assigned so that it can be determined whether it is a result. In addition, the classification of the prediction result used as the opportunity of continuous notice production is the classification of the prediction result used for the judgment, when it is judged that execution of the continuous notice production is performed.

  The status value “1” indicates that although the type of the prediction result that has triggered the continuous advance presentation effect is a probability change jackpot, the prediction result is not an opportunity for the continuous advance presentation effect. Similarly, the status value "2" indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is usually a big win, and the status value "3" indicates the predicted result that became the trigger for the continuous notice effect. Although it shows that it is a deviation, each prediction result shows that it is not a trigger of continuous notice production.

  On the other hand, the status value “11” indicates that the type of the prediction result that is the trigger for the continuous advance notice effect is a probability change jackpot and that the prediction result is the trigger for the continuous advance notice effect. Similarly, the status value "12" indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous advance presentation effect is usually a big win, and the status value "13" indicates that the prediction result that became the trigger of the continuous advance presentation effect It indicates that the type is out, and further indicates that each prediction result is a trigger for continuous notice effects.

  On the other hand, with regard to the status indicating that it was planned to carry out continuous notice production in the fluctuation production but was canceled, the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice production out of the probability variation big hit, the normal big hit, and the out Also, status values of "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13" are assigned so that it can be determined whether or not it is a prediction result that has been a trigger for continuous advance notice effects.

  In the present embodiment, as status values, positive status values “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” and negative status values “−1, −2, −3, −11, −12 , -13 ", but the status values may be distinguished in another way. For example, when managing the status value with 1 byte or 2 bytes, the most significant bit may be changed to 0 or 1 to distinguish the status value. Specifically, when the most significant bit is 0, it indicates the above-mentioned positive number status value, and when the most significant bit is 1, it indicates the above-mentioned negative number status value. Note that other bits may be changed instead of the most significant bit. Also, the status value may be one of a positive number status value and a negative number status value, and each status value may be assigned such that each status value is different to distinguish the status values.

  The status value “−1” indicates that although the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous advance presentation effect was a probability change jackpot, the prediction result was not an opportunity of the continuous advance presentation effect. Similarly, the status value "-2" indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect was normally a big hit, and the status value "-3" is the prediction that triggered the continuous notice effect Although the result shows that it was dislocated, each predicted result shows that it was not a trigger for continuous notice effects.

  On the other hand, the status value “−11” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous advance presentation effect was a probability change jackpot and that the prediction result was an opportunity for the continuous advance presentation effect. Similarly, the status value "-12" indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect was usually a big win, and the status value "-13" became the trigger for the continuous notice effect It indicates that the type of the prediction result is out, and further indicates that each prediction result is a trigger for continuous notice effect. Then, a status value of “0” is assigned to the status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is not to be executed in the variable effect.

  One of the 13 types of status values is stored in the above-described continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4. As described in the first embodiment, in each of five areas from the execution area to the reserved fourth area in the prefetch information storage area 223a, the process of setting the initial value of the RAM (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed at power on. The initialization is performed, and the inside of each of five areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a is cleared to 0. That is, the status value of the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 is set to "0" when the power is turned on.

  In the status value of the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4, it is determined that the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-reading command and based on the pre-reading information extracted from the pre-reading command, it is determined to execute the continuous advance presentation effect. Be changed. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command, and various information (prefetch preconditions, jackpot lottery prediction results, fluctuation pattern type prediction results) are extracted as prefetching information from the prefetch commands. The pre-read information is newly stored in the hold area (one of the hold first area to the hold fourth area) of the pre-reading information storage area 223a.

  Then, a continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59) to be described later is executed, and it is determined whether to perform a continuous notice effect based on the pre-read information newly stored in the hold area. Here, if it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed, the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the holding area in which the prefetch information is newly stored indicates that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the change effect, and The status value (one of 11, 12, and 13) indicating that the prediction result of the pre-reading information is a trigger for continuous notice effects is set to one according to the type of the prediction result that is the trigger for continuous notice effects Be done.

  For example, if it is determined that the continuous preview effect is to be executed when the prediction result of the new prefetch information is a probability change jackpot, the positive change jackpot becomes the prediction result that became the trigger of the continuous preview effect, and as a result, continuous preview execution A status value "11" is set in the status storage area 223a4.

  Furthermore, for all pending areas having a smaller area number than the pending area where the prefetch information is newly stored, that is, all pending areas in which the prefetch information is already stored, the status is stored in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4. The value is set. In this case, although the status value set indicates that continuous advance notice effects are to be executed in the fluctuation effect, it is assumed that the pre-read information in the holding area in which the status values are set is not a trigger for continuous notice effects. One value (one of 1, 2, and 3) is set according to the type of the prediction result that is the trigger of the continuous advance notice effect.

  For example, in the case where the prediction result that triggered the continuous advance presentation effect is a probability variation jackpot, the status value "1" is stored in the continuous advance notification execution status storage area 223a4 for all the pending areas in which the prefetch information is already stored. It is set.

  Then, the continuous advance notice status stored in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the hold area is stored in the execution area and referred to by the MPU 221 when the change effect corresponding to the hold area is started. The details will be described later, but when the change effect is started, if the continuous advance notice execution status of the execution area is any of “1, 2, 3”, the continuous notice in the start of the change effect started If the effect is performed, and the status value is "0", "11, 12, 13" or "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13", the change effect to be started is In the above, no advance presentation is performed, and a normal fluctuation presentation is performed.

  Further, although details will be described later, it is determined that the prediction result of the prefetching information stored in the execution area of the prefetching information storage area 223a can not be trusted when the fluctuation effect scheduled to execute continuous notice rendering is started. Then, a status value is set in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area to indicate that the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled to be executed but has been canceled. Specifically, a minus sign is added to the positive number status value stored in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4, and the negative number is set.

  For example, when the fluctuation effect is started, it is determined that the status value in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area is "1" and the prediction result of the prefetch information stored in the execution area can not be trusted. Then, the status value "-1" is set in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area. As a result, even if the change presentation intended to execute the continuous advance presentation effect is performed, the continuous advance presentation effect is not performed, and the normal change presentation is performed.

  In this embodiment, in order to easily show the continuous advance notice execution status in the drawings to be referred (FIG. 62, FIG. 64, FIG. 66, and FIG. 68), not the status value but the presence or absence of the flag, the shape of the flag, and Indicate whether the flag is standing or falling. Specifically, when the status value is “0”, the flag is not described, when the status value is a positive number, a flag is displayed, and when the status value is a negative number, the flag is displayed. Also, when the status value is "1", it is indicated by a triangular white flag. Similarly, if the status value is "11", the flag is filled with triangles, if the status value is "2", the flag is blank, and if the value is "12", the flag is filled with squares. A value of “3” is an open flag with a V-shaped break in the square, and a status value of “13” is a black flag with a V-shaped cut in the square, respectively. Show.

  Here, the explanation will return to the explanation of FIG. The gaming state flag 223 j is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or a high probability state (during a definite change), similarly to the gaming state flag 203 a of the main control device 110. If the gaming state flag 223j is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, and if the gaming state flag 223j is on, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state Indicates

  The gaming state flag 223 j is set to off in the RAM initial value setting process (see S 1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Further, when the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10 and the jackpot ends (that is, when the ending effect is ended), the jackpot is set according to the jackpot type. Specifically, if the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, the gaming state flag 223 j is set to ON at the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, the gaming state flag 223j is set to off at the end of the jackpot.

  In addition, the gaming state flag 203a of the main control device 110 is set to off before the big hit start, and is set to on or off according to the big hit type after the big hit ends, but the playing state flag of the voice lamp control device 113 223 j is set to ON or OFF only after the end of the jackpot. This is because the voice lamp control device 113 does not refer to the gaming state flag 223 j during the jackpot, and there is no need to set it. The game state flag 223 j may also be set to off before the jackpot start, as with the game state flag 203 a.

  The gaming state flag 223 j is used by the MPU 221 to determine whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223 a is credible or credible. If the gaming state flag 223j is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, so if the main control device 110 is to perform a big hit lottery when the flag 223j is off, the main control device At 110, the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to, which means that a jackpot lottery is performed. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 223 j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, and therefore, if the main control device 110 is to perform a big hit lottery when the flag 223 j is on, the main control device 110 Means that the jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  Then, as described above, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the big hit lottery is performed based on the data stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110. In this embodiment, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110 and each area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a in the voice lamp control unit 113. Therefore, when the big hit lottery is performed in main controller 110, the pre-reading information corresponding to the big hit lottery performed in main controller 110 is stored in the execution area of pre-reading information storage area 223a in voice lamp control device 113. Ru.

  Also, as described above, in the execution area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a and each area of the hold area (hold first area to hold fourth area), the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type In addition, read-ahead prediction preconditions are also stored. Therefore, by referring to the data stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the execution area and the reserve area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the same area and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are It can be determined whether or not it is prefetched by such prediction preconditions. That is, it is possible to determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 of the tables 202a1 or 202a2 is used in the pre-reading performed in the main control device 110.

  Therefore, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the game state flag 223j is used in the present jackpot lottery by comparing the prediction precondition stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Whether the main controller 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 202 to be scheduled and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 202 used in the pre-reading of the present jackpot lottery can be determined in the voice lamp control unit 113.

  And, as a result of comparison, when the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 coincide with each other, the prediction result of the present big hit lottery and the lottery result of the present big hit lottery match in the main control unit 110, so the voice lamp control The apparatus 113 determines that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a can be trusted. On the other hand, when the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match, there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current big hit lottery and the current lottery result of the big hit lottery may be different in the main controller 110, so the voice lamp control device At 113, it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a can not be trusted.

  The effect execution time game state flag 223 k is a high probability state whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state when one target variable change effect is executed among the pending change effects. It is a flag indicating whether or not the

  If the effect execution time game state flag 223k is off, it indicates that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, when one of the target variable effects is performed. As described above, since the fluctuation effect is executed in conjunction with the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery is always performed before the fluctuation effect. Therefore, when the effect execution time game state flag 223k is off, the main control unit 110 refers to the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 when the target variation production is executed, and the big hit lottery Means to be done.

  On the other hand, if the effect execution time game state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, when one target variable change effect is performed. That is, when the effect execution time game state flag 223k is on, the main control unit 110 refers to the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 when the target variation production is executed, and the big hit lottery Means to be done.

  The effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to off in the process of setting the initial value of the RAM (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Although details will be described later, the gaming state flag 223 j is compared with the prediction preconditions stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223 a, and the jackpot random number tables 202 a 1 202 actually used in the jackpot lottery When the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202 used in the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and it is determined that the jackpot lottery prediction result stored in the execution area can be trusted If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored in the hold area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area .

  Specifically, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a jackpot, the state of the above-described jackpot after-game state flag 223c is set. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out, the state of the above-mentioned game state flag 223 j is set. In the case of setting the effect execution time game state flag 223k during the big hit, the state of the big hit after game state flag 223c is set without confirming the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the execution area. Also good.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the present big hit lottery is a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type at the end of the big hit. In other words, while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out of game, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. Therefore, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a jackpot and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes according to the jackpot type, the effect execution time game state flag 223k, after the jackpot game The state of the state flag 223c is set to set the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. Thus, the effect execution time game state flag 223k can be set to indicate the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery.

  On the other hand, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is out and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change, the state of the gaming state flag 223 j is set in the effect execution time gaming state flag 223 k The game state of the current pachinko machine 10 is set. Thus, the effect execution time game state flag 223k can be set to indicate the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery. As described above, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the effect execution time game state flag 223 k when the next big hit lottery is performed by the main control unit 110 (that is, when the next change effect is performed). Ru.

  The effect execution time game state flag 223 k is used by the MPU 221 to determine whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in the hold area of the pre-reading information storage area 223 a can be trusted or not. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area, then the effect execution time game state flag 223k And the prediction precondition stored in the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a are compared, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved first area can be trusted.

  Here, in the effect execution time game state flag 223k, as described above, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 when the next big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 is set. Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by comparing the effect execution time game state flag 223k with the prediction precondition stored in the reserved first area, and the It is possible to determine in the voice lamp control device 113 whether the main control device 110 matches the large hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 which are scheduled to be used in the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the pre-reading.

  Then, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, so the voice lamp control The device 113 can determine that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted.

  Here, if it is determined that the jackpot lottery prediction result can be trusted, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set based on the jackpot lottery prediction result, and the jackpot lottery prediction result is further determined. Similarly, while it is determined that the image can be trusted, the comparison is repeated in the order of the hold second area, the hold third area, and the hold fourth area. In the present embodiment, of the four reserve areas (preserve area 1 to reserve area 4) of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning combination older in time is stored, In the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest start winning in time is stored. Therefore, the main control is performed by setting the effect execution time game state flag 223k while determining the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the hold area in order from the first hold area to the fourth hold area. Whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted can be determined according to the order in which the jackpot lottery is performed in the device 110.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The same reference numerals are given to steps for executing the same processes as those of the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing main processing in the second embodiment. In the main processing, the processing of S1111 is executed, and when the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S3501). In the process of S3501, if it is the end timing of ending effect (S3501: Yes), the state of the jackpot after-game state flag 223c is set to the game state flag 223j of the RAM 223 (S3502).

  Specifically, when the jackpot after game state flag 223c is off and the jackpot is terminated when the jackpot is over, the game state flag 223j is also set to be off. On the other hand, when the jackpot after game state flag 223c is on and the jackpot is over when the jackpot is over, the game state flag 223j is also set to be on. If it is not the end timing of the ending effect in the process of S3501 (S3501: No), the process of S3502 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1112.

  Further, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S1101 was performed last time (S1101: Yes), S1102 to S1111. And S3501 are executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that one millisecond or more has not elapsed since the main processing was started, or if the processing of S1101 was performed last time (S1101: No), S1102 to S1111, and S3501. The processing proceeds to step S1112 without performing the processing of

  According to the main processing shown in FIG. 58, when the ending effect is ended (that is, when the big hit is finished), the gaming state flag 223 j indicates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the big hit is finished. You can set the state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the continuous advance notice determination process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice determination process (S1211) in the second embodiment. The continuous advance notice determination process (S1211) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1211 in FIG. 31), and as in the first embodiment, it is read ahead. When the command is received, it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notice effect.

  In the continuous advance notice determination process, in the process of S1302, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301 is "big hit" (S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to S1312. . On the other hand, in the prefetched information read out in the process of S1301, if the result of the jackpot lottery prediction result is "out of place" (S1302: No), the prediction result of the variation pattern type read out in the process of S1301 is "super" It is determined whether it is "reach" (S3601).

  In the process of S3601, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is "super reach" (S3601: Yes), the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is not "super reach" but another fluctuation pattern type (S3601: No), this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1316 that the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is not included in the continuous notice determination range and it is determined that the continuous notice effect is not started (S1316: No), the process of S3602 and subsequent steps is skipped. The process ends and returns to the command determination process. That is, continuous advance presentation effects are not performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1316 that the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous notice determination range and it is determined that the continuous notice effect is started (S1316: Yes), the prefetch information read out in the process of S1301 It is determined what the success or failure of the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is (S3602). If the result of the jackpot lottery prediction result is "probable jackpot" (S3602: probability change jackpot), the prediction of the jackpot lottery among the reserved areas (hold 1st area to the hold 4th area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a The continuous advance notice execution status of all the pending areas in which the result is stored is set to "1" (S3603). That is, the status value is set to indicate that the type of the prediction result that is the trigger of the continuous advance notice effect is the probability variation jackpot.

  In addition, when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is "normal jackpot" (S3602: normal jackpot), the jackpot lottery among the reserved areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The continuous advance notice execution status of all the pending areas in which the prediction results of are stored is set to "2" (S3604). That is, the status value is set to indicate that the type of the prediction result that is the trigger of the continuous advance notice effect is usually a big hit.

  Moreover, when the yes or no in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is "outside" (S3602: out), the prediction of the jackpot lottery among the hold areas (hold 1st area-hold 4th area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The continuous advance notice execution status of all the pending areas in which the result is stored is set to "3" (S3605). That is, the status value is set to indicate that the type of the prediction result that has triggered the continuous advance presentation effect is out of order.

Next, among the reserve areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the last notice of the reserve area in which the prefetch information (that is, the prediction result of the big hit lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the prediction precondition of prefetching) is stored last "10" is added to the execution status (S3606)
In this embodiment, based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of the reserve area where the prefetch information is stored last, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect over a plurality of fluctuation effects, and the continuous advance notice effect When it is determined to start, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of the holding area in which the pre-reading information is stored last is the trigger. Therefore, when it is determined to start the continuous advance presentation effect, if "10" is added to the continuous advance notification execution status of the holding area where the prefetch information is stored last, the prediction result that became the trigger of the continuous advance presentation effect is stored The continuous advance notice status can be set to any one of "11, 12, 13" for the reserved area being held. Therefore, when referring to the continuous advance notice status of each hold area, it is determined based on the status value whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of the hold area is the prediction result which became the trigger of the continuous advance notice effect or is different. it can.

  According to the continuous advance notice determination process shown in FIG. 59 described above, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be started, the jackpot lottery among the hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The continuous advance notice execution status of the holding area in which the prediction result of is stored can be set to the status value “1, 2, 3” indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the change effect.

  In addition, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be started, the status value is increased by “10” for the pending area storing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the determination, and the continuous advance notification status is It can be set to any of "11, 12, 13". Therefore, when referring to the continuous advance notice status of each hold area, it is judged whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of the hold area is the prediction result which became the trigger of the continuous advance notice or the difference based on the status value. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the variable display setting process (S1112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1112) in the second embodiment.

  This variation display setting process (S1112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110. Further, in order to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuation effect, the display stop type command is set based on the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In the variable display setting process, when the process of S1506 is executed to shift the prefetch information (data) stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a, next, of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prefetch information by the process of S1506 is The reserved area that has become free due to the shift is cleared (S3701). Then, the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the preread information storage area 223a is acquired (S3702), and the acquired continuous advance notice execution status indicates that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the fluctuation effect. It is determined whether it is "1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13" (S3703).

  In the process of S3703, if the acquired continuous advance notice execution status is a status "1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13" indicating execution of continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuation effect (S3703: Yes), continuous The notice execution status confirmation process A is executed (S3702). Although details will be described later, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A is stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a when the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed in the change effect. By comparing the prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223j, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery prediction result stored in the execution area is credible or not, and depending on the judgment result, the fluctuation effect is continuously made It is a process for determining whether or not to execute the advance presentation effect.

  Further, in the process of S3703, if the acquired continuous advance notice execution status is other than the status "1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13" indicating that continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the fluctuation effect (S3703: No) The process skips the process of S3704 and shifts to the process of S1507. Then, the processing of S1509 is executed, and in the processing of S1206 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 31), when the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223, next, the prefetch information storage area 223a The continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of is acquired (S3705).

  Then, it is determined whether the continuous advance notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status "1, 2, 3" indicating that continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the fluctuation effect (S3706). In the process of S3706, if the continuous advance notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status "1, 2, 3" indicating that continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the change effect (S3706: Yes), The chance eye is set as the stop type (S3707), and the process proceeds to the process of S1514.

  By the process of S3707, the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110, and the symbol on the middle line L2 is left It is set to "3" "4" "1" in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol which becomes a chance eye can be displayed at the time of a stop of change production in the third symbol display device 81 as a continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3706, if the continuous advance notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is other than the status "1, 2, 3" indicating that continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the fluctuation effect (S3706: No), The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3708), and the process shifts to the process of S1514.

  By the process of S3708, the continuous advance notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status "11, 12, 13" indicating that continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the fluctuation effect, and the last to which execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set In the case of the fluctuation effect of, the chance eye is not set as the stop type. In addition, the status "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13" indicating that it was planned to perform continuous advance notice production in the change production has been canceled, and it is originally continuous in the change production The stop type notified from the main control device 110 is similarly set in the case of the status “0” indicating that the advance effect is not to be executed.

  According to the fluctuation display setting process shown in FIG. 60 described above, when setting the stop type of the current fluctuation effect, the stop type is determined based on the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Or a stop type instructed by the main control unit 110 can be set as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processing A (S3704) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A (S3704).

  The continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A (S3704) is executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is newly changed in the third symbol display device 113. When the effect is started, it is executed if it is set to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuation effect. Then, it is judged whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a is credible, and if it is not credible, execution of continuous notice effect for the fluctuation effect to be executed this time Set to cancel.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A, first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S3801). Then, the prediction precondition acquired in the process of S3801 is compared with the gaming state flag 223j (S3802). Then, as a result of comparison, it is determined whether the gaming state indicated by the predicted precondition and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223 j indicate the same gaming state (S 3803).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch is main control by the prefetch command The device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113. It should be noted that if this prediction precondition is a low probability state, this means that the main controller 110 has used the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, and the prediction precondition is a high probability status Means that the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is used to look ahead. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, by referring to the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is obtained by using the main control device 110 using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 You can determine the

  Further, as described above, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the big hit lottery is performed based on the data stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110. In this embodiment, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110 and each area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a in the voice lamp control unit 113. Therefore, when the big hit lottery is performed in main controller 110, the pre-reading information corresponding to the big hit lottery performed in main controller 110 is stored in the execution area of pre-reading information storage area 223a in voice lamp control device 113. Ru. Therefore, by referring to the prediction preconditions of the prefetching information stored in the execution area of the prefetching information storage area 223a, in the prefetching performed corresponding to the jackpot lottery performed by the main control device 110, which jackpot random number table 202a1 and 202a2 can be used to determine whether a prediction result has been obtained.

  Further, as described above, the gaming state flag 223 j is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state or in the high probability state (during a definite change), and the gaming state flag 223 j is off The case indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state. Therefore, if a big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, it means that the big hit lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 in the main control device 110. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 223 j is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, so if a big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the main control device 110 for high probability time The jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to, which means that a jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 110 based on the state of the gaming state flag 223j.

  Therefore, in the process of S3803 described above, the jackpot random number used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information with the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j. It can be compared whether the main control unit 110 matches the tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present big hit lottery.

  Then, in the process of S3803, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803: Yes), this is the jackpot lottery In this case, the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the corresponding pre-reading and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the present jackpot lottery. Therefore, since the values of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for the comparison are the same, the comparison results match each other. The main control device 110 matches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as credible.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3803, when the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), it is used in the prefetch corresponding to the present jackpot lottery In this case, the main controller 110 does not match the determined jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present jackpot lottery. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, there is a possibility that the comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result It becomes unclear whether or not the main controller 110 matches. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can not trust the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

  In the process of S3803, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803: Yes), as described above, in S3801. It is a prediction result acquired by processing, and it is a case where a prediction result of a big hit lottery performed this time in main controller 110, and a lottery result of this big hit lottery are in agreement in main controller 110. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, the current setting is maintained and the present process is ended so that the continuous advance notice effect is executed in the current change effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3803, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), as described above, In the main control unit 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the pre-reading corresponding to the jackpot lottery of and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery do not match. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of this big hit lottery and the lottery result of this big hit lottery correspond in the main control device 110, in this case, even with the voice lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, the big hit The prediction result of the lottery can not be relied upon, and it will refrain from using the prediction result.

  However, as described in the first embodiment, the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery may be exceptionally treated as credible, so the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is It is determined whether it is a jackpot (S3804).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 do not become overlapping values. As such, each hit value is set. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the preread information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the present jackpot lottery Even if the main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is a jackpot, the lottery result falls out in the present jackpot lottery. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery coincide with each other in the main control unit 110, and it is uniquely determined that they are out. The lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of this jackpot lottery as credible.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the numerical value which is the winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes the outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but the outlier in the one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 It is unknown whether the numerical value which becomes is a win value or an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and even if the result is determined to be out of order, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the main control unit 110 determines that the result is a big hit or it is determined that the result is out of order. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  In the process of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is the jackpot (S3804: Yes), as described above, exceptionally, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out Since the case can be treated as credible, in this case, the current setting is maintained and the present process is ended so that continuous advance notice effects are executed in the current change effects.

  As described above, in the case of the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, even the prediction result treated as being unreliable may be treated as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled. Further, in this case, the setting is maintained so that the continuous advance notice effect is executed in the current fluctuation effect, so that the opportunity to execute the continuous advance notice effect can be increased.

  Further, in the process of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is out (S3804: No), the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state flag 223j This is the case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state shown. In this case, as described above, the prediction result corresponding to the present jackpot lottery can not be trusted, and it becomes unclear whether the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery will be the jackpot or the jackpot.

  Therefore, in this case, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is scheduled to execute the continuous notice effect in the fluctuation effect Change the status to indicate that it was canceled. As a result, when the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set in the above-described fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the process branches to S3706: No. You can cancel the execution.

  According to the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A shown in FIG. 61 above, in the process of S3803, comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information with the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, this time It is possible to compare whether the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery of and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the present jackpot lottery.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the pachinko machine is executed before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 When the gaming state of 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the present jackpot lottery Become. Therefore, in this case, since there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control device 110, the conventional lamp ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine Treated the lottery prediction results as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223 j are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery It can always be determined whether 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present jackpot lottery. Therefore, the main controller 110 may or may not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery, Even in the case where the pachinko machine is unknown, the determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, when the respective big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, both the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison become the same, so the respective comparison results In the main control device 110, the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery coincide with each other. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery as credible. As described above, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible, so the present embodiment In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  In addition, as described above, in the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, it is used in the prefetching corresponding to the current jackpot lottery In this case, the main control unit 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present jackpot lottery. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of this big hit lottery and the lottery result of this big hit lottery correspond in the main control device 110, in this case, even with the voice lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, the big hit The prediction result of the lottery can not be relied upon, and it will refrain from using the prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning values stored in the low probability large jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning values stored in the high probability large jackpot random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j are different, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the present jackpot lottery If the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot in the process of S3804, the prediction result is In the corresponding actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery coincide with each other in the main control unit 110, and it is determined uniquely as outliers. In the audio lamp control device 113 according to the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  Therefore, if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as the credible one, the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment may be able to handle the prediction result which is treated as being unreliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and in the process of S3804, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is not For example, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result becomes unknown.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is finished.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of this big hit lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next big winning lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next big winning lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about the big hit lottery after next time.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is changed to It changes to the status which shows that it was planned to perform continuous notice production in, but was canceled. As a result, when the fluctuation display setting process described above (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set, it is possible to branch to S3706: No. It is possible to cancel the execution of the advance presentation.

  That is, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery is the jackpot or the jackpot, it is possible to cancel the execution of the continuous advance notice effect for the fluctuation change which is executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A described above, in the process of S3803, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states, (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is the jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be trusted As a thing, you may comprise so that it may transfer to the process of S3805, without performing the process of S3804.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is executed when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the voice lamp control device 113 and the variation display is started in the third symbol display device 81. Be done. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed at the end of the change effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is performed between the start of the change effect and the time immediately before the end of the change effect. If it is executed, it may be executed at any time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the "chance of chance" at the end of the change effect is the continuous advance notice effect, but an image different from the normal is displayed during the change effect or a sound different from the normal is displayed. An effect of emitting noise may be used as a continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed during the change effect, or may be performed during the change effect and at the end of the change. Then, in the case where the continuous advance notice effect is performed during the change effect, as in the present embodiment, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A may be executed when the change effect is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A will be described. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A.

  In FIG. 62, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, a variable effect is newly executed based on the start winning prize held, and two starting winning prizes are performed separately from the starting winning prize. Indicates a pending status. In addition, in each of the fluctuation effects of the fluctuation effect to be newly executed and the fluctuation effects corresponding to the two starting winning prizes being held, it is shown that execution of the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the gaming state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and as shown in FIG. 62 (b-1), the prefetching information is stored in the execution area of the prefetching information storage area 223a. As the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is the high probability state, and data of the status value “1” is stored as the continuous notice execution status.

  In addition, in the first reserve area, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is usually big hit as prediction information, the prediction result of fluctuation pattern type is special reach, the prediction precondition is high probability state, and the status value “1 as continuous notice execution status” "" Is stored. In addition, in the second area for reserve, the prediction result of the big hit lottery as the pre-reading information is the probability variation big hit, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is the special reach, the prediction precondition is the low probability state, and the status value “11” as the continuous notice execution status "" Is stored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to clearly show the continuous advance notice execution status in the drawings (FIG. 62, FIG. 64, FIG. 66, and FIG. 68), not the status value but the presence or absence of the flag, the shape of the flag, And, it shows by falling over which the flag stands. Specifically, when the status value is “0”, the flag is not described, when the status value is a positive number, a flag is displayed, and when the status value is a negative number, the flag is displayed. Also, when the status value is "1", it is indicated by a triangular white flag. Similarly, if the status value is "11", the flag is filled with triangles, if the status value is "2", the flag is blank, and if the value is "12", the flag is filled with squares. A value of “3” is an open flag with a V-shaped break in the square, and a status value of “13” is a black flag with a V-shaped cut in the square, respectively. Show.

  When continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A (see FIG. 61) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-1), first, from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction The precondition is acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j. However, in this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, and furthermore, the acquired lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out, the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and It becomes unclear whether the main controller 110 matches the actual jackpot lottery result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can not trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery, that is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery to be executed this time.

  In this case, the process proceeds to S3805, and the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area is attached with a minus sign. As a result, the status value is changed to "-1", and the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuation effect Is scheduled to run but is changed to a status indicating that it has been discontinued. Then, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is ended.

  Then, after the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is completed, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the continuous notice execution status Since the status value is “−1”, the process branches to S3706: No, and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 as it is Be done. As a result, in the present variation production, the execution of the continuous advance presentation production is stopped, and the normal stop display is performed.

  As described above, when it is not possible to trust the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect can be canceled for the fluctuation effect to be executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  Then, when the current fluctuation effect is finished and the next fluctuation effect is executed, as described above, it is stored in each area (execution area, holding first area to holding fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Shift processing is performed to shift the data being processed to the execution area side. Specifically, the prefetch information in each area is shifted in such a way as to reserve first area → execution area, reserve second area → reserve first area, and the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-2).

  Here, when the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) is executed, as in the previous time, first, from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are The acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223 j are compared in the acquired and processing of S 3802.

  In this comparison, although the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery is usually the jackpot. As described above, even if the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot, in the actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result Will come off.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large falling random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is a big hit when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state is out when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state. Similarly, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is the jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state is out when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading information is not unknown, and it is uniquely determined when the lottery result is out. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to regard the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery as a deviation.

  As described above, in the case of the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery match, and the prediction result has been treated as unreliable However, since the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be treated as credible, the present embodiment can suitably handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  Then, in this case, the process proceeds to the process of S3804: Yes, the current state is maintained, and the second successive announcement execution status confirmation process A ends. Then, after the second consecutive notice execution status confirmation process A is ended, in the case where the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed for the second time is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the continuous notice Since the status value of the execution status is “1”, the process branches to S3706: Yes, and “Chance chance” is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, a continuous advance notice effect is performed in the current change effect, and a "chance of chance" is displayed in the change effect.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment can not trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery if it is the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, and the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuation effect is canceled. At 113, the setting can be maintained to execute the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Therefore, the opportunity which can perform continuous notice production can be increased.

  Then, when the second fluctuation presentation ends and the next fluctuation presentation is executed, each area (execution area, holding first area to holding fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a as in the previous time. A shift process is performed to shift the data stored in the area to the execution area side, and the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-3) is obtained.

  Here, when the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) is executed, as in the previous time, first, from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are The acquired forecast precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223 j are compared in the acquired and processing of S 3802.

  In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition matches the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j, the main jack 110 in the main control 110 determines the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery result. Match Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process shifts to the process of S3804: Yes, the current state is maintained, and the third successive announcement execution status confirmation process A ends.

  However, the continuous advance notice execution status indicates that the status value is “11” and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a trigger of the continuous advance notice effect. In other words, the third change effect is the last change effect for executing the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, after the third consecutive announcement execution status confirmation process A is completed, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed for the third time is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), S3706: No The process branches to a stop type command instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, and the stop type is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the present variation production, the execution of the continuous advance presentation production is stopped, and the normal stop display is performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a trigger of the continuous notice effect, and the change effect to be executed is the final change effect for executing the continuous notice effect, the main control device The stop type instructed by the stop type command from 110 is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and as a result, it is suggested to the player that the continuous advance notice effect is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, continuous notice execution status confirmation process B will be described, which is a modification of continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status check process B which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status check process A described above.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A described above, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is credible, and if it is unreliable, it is executed this time. It is set to stop the execution of the continuous advance notice effect for the fluctuation effect. On the other hand, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process B, the continuous advance notice effect is executed over the respective change effects from the change effect to be executed this time to the last change effect to be executed. Set to cancel.

  The continuous notice execution status confirmation process B is executed instead of the continuous notice execution status A described above. That is, in the case of causing the third symbol display device 113 to newly start the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, continuous notice in the fluctuation effect It is executed if it is set to execute the effect.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process B, the following process is executed instead of the process of S3805 described above. That is, a minus sign is given to the continuous advance notice execution status of all areas (execution area, holding first area to holding fourth area) in the pre-reading information storage area 223a in which the prediction result of the big hit lottery (that is, pre-reading information) is stored. Is added (S3901), and the continuous notice execution status of each is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be performed in the change effect but was canceled.

  As a result, in the above-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the process is branched to S3706: No every time the stop type of each variation effect which was scheduled to be subjected to the continuous advance presentation effect is set. The execution of the continuous advance notice effect can be stopped for all of the fluctuation effects intended to be performed.

  According to the continuous advance notice execution status B shown in FIG. 63, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information differs from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and in the process of S3804, In addition to the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a when the forecast result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is out of place and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the forecast result becomes unknown Also, a minus sign can be attached to the continuous advance notice execution status of all the pending areas (pending first area to pending fourth area) in which the prefetch information is stored.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is finished.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of this big hit lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next big winning lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next big winning lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about the big hit lottery after next time. That is, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery is the jackpot or the jackpot, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery after the next time is also unknown.

  Therefore, in the continuous advance notice execution status processing B, fluctuation effects are produced not only for the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, but also for the continuous notice execution status stored in all pending areas. It was changed to the status which shows that it was planned to perform continuous notice production in, but was discontinued. Thereby, the above-mentioned fluctuation display setting process (refer to FIG. 60) is executed, and for the fluctuation effect scheduled to be subjected to the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to branch to S3706: No every time the stop type is set. The execution of the continuous advance notice can be stopped in each of the variable effects for which the continuous advance notice is scheduled to be performed. Therefore, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery after this time becomes unknown, continuous notice effect is executed for the dark clouds, and there is a problem that the continuous notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed. It can be suppressed.

  Further, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process B described above, in the process of S3803, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is the jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be trusted As a thing, you may comprise so that it may transfer to the process of S3901 without performing the process of S3804.

  Also in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B described above, as in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B is performed immediately before the change effect is started and immediately before the end of the change effect. If it is executed, it may be executed at any time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the "chance of chance" at the end of the change effect is the continuous advance notice effect, but an image different from the normal is displayed during the change effect or a sound different from the normal is displayed. An effect of emitting noise may be used as a continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed during the change effect, or may be performed during the change effect and at the end of the change. Then, in the case where the continuous advance notice effect is performed during the change effect, as in the present embodiment, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process B may be executed when the change effect is started.

  Here, referring to FIG. 64, continuous notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, hold first area to hold fourth area) of prefetch information storage area 223 a by continuous notice execution status check process B. An example of the flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B.

  In FIG. 64, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the fluctuation effect is newly executed based on the start winning prize held, and, apart from the starting winning prize, two starting winning prizes Indicates a pending status. In addition, in each of the fluctuation effects of the fluctuation effect to be newly executed and the fluctuation effects corresponding to the two starting winning prizes being held, it is shown that execution of the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the gaming state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is on, and as shown in FIG. 64 (b-1), the prefetching information is stored in the execution area of the prefetching information storage area 223a. As the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a low probability state, and data of status value “1” is stored as the continuous notice execution status.

  In addition, in the first reserve area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is long, the prediction precondition is the low probability state, and the status value “1” as the continuous notice execution status Data is stored. In addition, in the second area for reserve, the prediction result of the big hit lottery as the pre-reading information is the probability variation big hit, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is the super reach, the prediction precondition is the high probability state, and the status value “11 "" Is stored.

  In the state shown in FIG. 64 (b-1), when the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process B (see FIG. 63) is executed, first, from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction The precondition is acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j. However, in this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, and furthermore, the acquired lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out, the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and It becomes unclear whether the main controller 110 matches the actual jackpot lottery result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can not trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery, that is, the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the process proceeds to S3901, and all areas (execution area, holding first area to holding fourth area) in the pre-reading information storage area 223a in which the prediction result of the big hit lottery (that is, pre-reading information) is stored. A minus sign is attached to the continuous advance notice execution status of. As a result, the status values of both the execution area and the pending first area are changed to “−1”, and the status value of the pending second area is changed to “−11”, and continuous notice effect is executed in the fluctuation effect. It is changed to a status indicating that it was planned but has been cancelled. And this continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B is ended.

  Then, after the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process B is ended, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), Since the status value is “−1”, the process branches to S3706: No, and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 as it is Be done. As a result, in the present variation production, the execution of the continuous advance presentation production is stopped, and the normal stop display is performed.

  Then, even when the second variation effect is executed after the current variation effect is finished, and also when the third variation effect is executed, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 60) When the stop type of each variation effect is set, the status of the continuous advance notice execution status is “−11”, and the process is instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 to branch to S3706: No. The type is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is canceled and the normal stop display is performed over the respective change effects from the current change effect to the last change effect which is scheduled to be performed.

  As described above, when it is not possible to trust the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery, the continuous notice effect over the respective change effects from the current change effect to the last change effect which was scheduled to be performed for the continuous advance notice effect You can cancel Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, continuous notice execution status check process C will be described which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status check process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status check process C which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status check process A described above.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processes A and B described above, only with respect to the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the area can be trusted. In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C, whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in the area can be trusted not only for the execution area but also for all the holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) It is determined whether or not.

  Furthermore, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C, if it is determined that the prediction result stored in any area is not credible, the continuous advance notice effect is generated from the fluctuation effect corresponding to the prediction result determined to be unreliable. It is set to stop the execution of the continuous advance notice effect over the respective change effects until the last change effect which was scheduled to be executed.

  The continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is executed instead of the continuous notice execution statuses A and B described above. That is, in the case of causing the third symbol display device 113 to newly start the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, continuous notice in the fluctuation effect It is executed if it is set to execute the effect.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C, the processes of S3801 to S3803 are executed, and in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the preread information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j have the same gaming state. If it is indicated (S3803: Yes), it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is a jackpot (S4001).

  Here, when it is determined that S4001: Yes, the prediction precondition acquired in the process of S3801 matches the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j, and the prediction of the jackpot lottery acquired in the process of S3801 Since the result and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery match in the main control unit 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted. Furthermore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery acquired in the process of S3801 is a jackpot, after the current fluctuation presentation ends, it always becomes the same jackpot as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result.

  And, as described above, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery is a big win, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is new according to the big hit type at the big hit end. Set to Therefore, after becoming the same jackpot as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the same jackpot type indicated by the jackpot indicated by the prediction result. Therefore, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, and further, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot, the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined from the jackpot type indicated by the prediction result. it can.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot in the processing of S4001 (S4001: Yes), the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k of the RAM 223, pachinko machine at the end of the jackpot The gaming state set to 10 is set (S4002). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to ON, and if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is usually a large win, the effect execution time game state flag 223k Set to off. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery can be indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S4004.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is out (S4001: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4003. Further, in the process of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), the prefetch information storage area 223a It is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot (S3804).

  In the process of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is the jackpot (S3804: Yes), as described above, exceptionally, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out Since this is a case that can be treated as credible, the process moves to the processing of S4003. As described above, in the case of the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, even the prediction result treated as being unreliable may be treated as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  In the process of S4003, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, that is, the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k of the RAM 223 (S4003). Specifically, when the gaming state flag 223j is on, the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k is also set on, and when the gaming state flag 223j is off, the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k is also off Set

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the present big hit lottery is a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type at the end of the big hit. In other words, while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out of game, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. Therefore, if the prediction result of the current big hit lottery is out, by setting the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, the jackpot random number table 202a1, which is used in the next big hit lottery 202a2 can be indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S4004.

  In the process of S3804, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is out (S3804: No), the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, and the game indicated by the gaming state flag 223j This is a case different from the state, and further, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is deviated. In this case, as described above, the prediction result corresponding to the present jackpot lottery can not be trusted, and it becomes unclear whether the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery will be the jackpot or the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the process of S3901 is performed, and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), It shifts to the processing of S3804 and determines whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is the jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the processing of S3804 is regarded as the jackpot lottery result being unreliable. It may be configured to shift to the processing of S3901 without performing.

  In the process of S4004, the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S4004), and it is determined whether the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S4005) . In the process of S4005, when the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b is 0 (S4005: No), the main control unit 110 does not hold any big hit lottery, so this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4005, when the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S4005: Yes), since one or more jackpot lottery is held in the main control unit 110, From the earlier held order of pending jackpot lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery are checked one by one. Specifically, among the reserve areas (preserve area 1 to reserve area 4) of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserve area in order from the reserve area with the smallest area number Check one by one. The smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning combination that is older in time is stored.

  First, a variable i is set to 1 (S4006), and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S4007). Then, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in the reserve i area is compared with the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k (S4008), and as a result of the comparison, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition It is determined whether the game state indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k indicates the same game state (S4009).

  Here, the state of the flag 223k is such that the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k indicates the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery by the process of S4002 or the process of S4003 described above. It is set. Specifically, when the effect execution time game state flag 223k is off, the main control unit 110 refers to the low probability time jackpot random number table 202a1 and indicates that the next jackpot lottery is to be performed. On the other hand, when the effect execution time game state flag 223k is on, the main control unit 110 refers to the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 and indicates that the next big hit lottery is to be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, of the reserve areas (preserve area 1 to reserve area 4) of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning combination older in time is stored. Therefore, at this point in time, the prefetch information corresponding to the next jackpot lottery is stored in the pending first area.

  Therefore, in the process of S4007 described above, by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information with the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, it is used in the prefetching corresponding to the next jackpot lottery It can be compared whether the main control unit 110 matches the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next big hit lottery.

  Then, in the process of S4009, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k indicate the same gaming state (S4009: Yes), the next time In the case where the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the next jackpot lottery.

  Therefore, since the values of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same, the comparison results match each other, and the next jackpot lottery prediction result and the next The main control device 110 matches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery as credible.

  Therefore, in the process of S4009, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k indicate the same gaming state (S4009: Yes), a jackpot lottery Since it is possible to trust the prediction result of the next, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the pending i-th area is a jackpot (S4010).

  In the process of S4010, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserve i-th area is a jackpot (S4010: Yes), the effect execution time game state flag 223k, when the jackpot is finished in the pachinko machine 10 The gaming state to be set is set (S4011). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to ON, and if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is usually a large win, the effect execution time game state flag 223k Set to off. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery can be indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k. Then, the process proceeds to step S4014.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4010, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is out (S4010: No), the process of S4011 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4014. As described above, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out, the jackpot scheduled to be used in the jackpot lottery The random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 also do not change. Therefore, while the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out, by maintaining the state of the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery, This can be indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k.

  In the case of S4010: No, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, that is, the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be set in the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k. Specifically, when the gaming state flag 223j is on, the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k is also set on, and when the gaming state flag 223j is off, the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k is also off Set

  And, in the process of S4009, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k indicate different gaming states (S4009: No), as described above In the main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in prefetching corresponding to the next jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the next jackpot lottery do not match in the main control unit 110. .

  Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the next big hit lottery and the lottery result of the next big hit lottery match in the main control unit 110, in this case, even the voice lamp control device 113 of this embodiment is a big hit The prediction result of the lottery can not be relied upon, and it will refrain from using the prediction result.

  However, as described above, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be exceptionally treated as credible, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is the jackpot (S4012). As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 do not become overlapping values. As such, each hit value is set. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the preread information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the next jackpot lottery and the next time Even if the main jack 110 does not match the planned jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the jackpot lottery of the next, if the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery is the jackpot, the lottery result is the next jackpot lottery It comes off. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery are identical in the main control unit 110, and it is uniquely determined that they are out. The lamp control device 113 can handle the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery as credible.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the numerical value which is the winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes the outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but the outlier in the one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 It is unknown whether the numerical value which becomes is a win value or an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and even if the result is determined to be out of order, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the main control unit 110 determines that the result is a big hit or it is determined that the result is out of order. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  In the process of S4012, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserve i-th area is the jackpot (S4012: Yes), as described above, exceptionally, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order and can be trusted In the case where it can be treated as, the processing shifts to the processing of S4014. As described above, in the case of the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, even the prediction result treated as being unreliable may be treated as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled. In that case, as described later, the processing returns to S4014 and the repetition processing of S4007 to S4015 can be continued and executed, and if there is an unreliable one among the prediction results of the jackpot lottery there By the process of S4013, which will be described later, it is possible to stop the continuous advance notice effect over the respective change effects from the change effect to the last change effect which was scheduled to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  In the process of S4014, 1 is added to the variable i (S4014), and it is determined whether the value of the variable i is less than or equal to the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b (S4015). In the process of S4015, when the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b (S4015: Yes), the prefetch information is stored also in other reserve areas in the prefetch information storage area 223a Since it is the case, the process returns to the process of S4007 to confirm the prefetch information stored in the other hold area. In addition, after returning to the process of S4007, each process of S4007-S4015 mentioned above is repeated, and the gaming state shown by the prediction precondition stored in the other hold area (hold 2nd area-hold 4th area) The comparison with the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k is performed in ascending order of the area number.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4015, when the value of the variable i exceeds the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b (S4015: No), the prefetch information stored in the reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a All confirmed. In this case, since there is no more preread information to be confirmed, this processing ends.

  Further, in the process of S4012, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserve i-th area is out (S4012: No), the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, and the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k This is the case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state. In this case, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be trusted, and it becomes unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result will be the jackpot or the jackpot.

  Therefore, in this case, the process does not return to the processes of S4007 to S4015, but proceeds to the process of S4013 and holds the i-th hold of the hold areas (the first hold area to the fourth hold area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A minus sign is added to the continuous advance notice execution status stored in each of the reserve areas from the area to the reserve M area (S4013), and this process is ended.

  That is, in the process of S 4013, the continuous advance notice execution status indicating that continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the change effect is changed to a status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled to be performed in the change effect but is canceled. . As a result, in the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60), the process branches to S3706: No each time the stop type of the change effect corresponding to the prefetch information from the reserve i area to the reserve M area is set. Therefore, it is possible to stop the execution of the continuous advance notice effect over the respective variable effects corresponding to the pre-reading information from the hold ith area to the hold M area.

  That is, when an unreliable item is found in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, over the respective fluctuation effects from the fluctuation production corresponding to the prediction result to the last fluctuation production intended to execute the continuous advance notice production, Continuous notice production can be canceled. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  In addition, as described above, in the continuous run execution status confirmation process C, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is the jackpot or the jackpot, it is not returned to each processing of S4007 to S4015, and the remaining It is configured not to confirm the pre-reading information of. This is because one of the prediction results is obtained when the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery are checked one by one from the earlier held order of the jackpot lottery held in the main control unit 110. If unknown, the remaining prediction results will also be unknown.

  That is, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of this big hit lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next big winning lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next big winning lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about the big hit lottery after next time.

  And since the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction result of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted later than the prediction result also becomes unknown. . Therefore, when confirming the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. But there is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  According to the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C shown in FIG. 65, in the process of S4008, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is compared with the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k. The main control unit 110 compares whether the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery after next time and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery after next time it can.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the pachinko machine is executed before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 When the gaming state of 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery.

  As described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the gaming state at the next jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about the big hit lottery after next time.

  Therefore, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control unit 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after next time and the lottery of the next jackpot lottery Since there is a possibility that the result may be different from the result, the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery not only this time but also the next time as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the prediction precondition and the effect execution time game state flag 223k are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery from next time onwards. , 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotterys can always be determined. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main control is the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery after the next time and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the jackpot lottery after the next time Even in the case where it is unclear in the device 110 whether or not they match, this determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, when the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as credible. As described above, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible, so the present embodiment In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  In addition, as described above, in the process of S4012, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, the prefetching corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery In the main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery do not match. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the big hit lottery after the i-th and the lottery result of the big hit lottery after the i-th match in the main control device 110, in this case, the voice lamp control device of this embodiment Even in the case of 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after the i-th round can not be relied upon, and it is refrained from using the prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning values stored in the low probability large jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning values stored in the high probability large jackpot random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, in the process of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, and the jackpot random number table used in the prefetching corresponding to the i th jackpot lottery Even if the main control unit 110 does not match 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th big hit lottery, the predicted result of the big hit lottery in the prefetch information is the big hit in the processing of S4012. If there is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result will be out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the i-th big-hit lottery and the i-th big-luck lottery result match in the main control unit 110, and it is decided uniquely as outliers. In the voice lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  Therefore, if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as the credible one, the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment may be able to handle the prediction result which is treated as being unreliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, and in the process of S4012, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetched information is If it is not, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result becomes unknown. In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is finished.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the (i + 1) -th jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the subsequent jackpot lottery also becomes unknown.

  Therefore, when confirming the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. But there is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the process branches to S4012: No, and the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Also, in such a case, in the continuous advance notice execution status check process C, of the hold areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the continuous advance notice stored in the respective hold areas from the hold i area to the hold M area A minus sign is attached to the status, and the continuous advance notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect was scheduled to be performed in the change effect but was canceled.

  As a result, when the fluctuation display setting process described above (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set, it is possible to branch to S3706: No. It is possible to cancel the execution of the advance presentation. Therefore, when it is not possible to trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark cloud and the continuous advance notice effect irrelevant to the actual lottery result is performed.

  In the present embodiment, in the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), It shifts to the processing of S3804 and determines whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is the jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the processing of S3804 is regarded as the jackpot lottery result being unreliable. It may be configured to shift to the processing of S3901 without performing.

  Further, in the continuous advance execution status confirmation process C described above, in the process of S4009, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the presentation state game state flag 223k. In the case (S4009: No), the process proceeds to S4012 to determine whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot, but in the case of S4009: No, the jackpot lottery It may be configured to shift to the process of S4013 without performing the process of S4012, assuming that the prediction result is not credible.

  Further, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C described above is executed when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the voice lamp control device 113 and the change effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 Be done. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed at the end of the change effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is performed between the start of the change effect and the time immediately before the end of the change effect. If it is executed, it may be executed at any time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the "chance of chance" at the end of the change effect is the continuous advance notice effect, but an image different from the normal is displayed during the change effect or a sound different from the normal is displayed. An effect of emitting noise may be used as a continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed during the change effect, or may be performed during the change effect and at the end of the change. Then, in the case where the continuous advance notice effect is performed during the change effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C may be executed when the change effect is started as in the present embodiment.

  Moreover, although the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C mentioned above is performed when a fluctuation production is started in the 3rd symbol display device 81, it replaces with the case where a fluctuation production is started, and is performed during a big hit It may be configured as follows. By being configured to be executed during the jackpot, the number of times of execution of the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C described above, it is confirmed by the process of S4010 among the repetitive processes of S4007 to S4015 whether or not the prediction result of the big hit lottery in the held i area is a big hit, If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the i-th area is a jackpot, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be regarded as unreliable, and the processing may be repeatedly interrupted there.

  Here, referring to FIG. 66, continuous notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, hold first area to hold fourth area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status check process C. An example of the flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C.

  In FIG. 66, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, a variable effect is newly executed based on the start winning prize held, and three starting winning prizes are performed separately from the starting winning prizes. Indicates a pending status. In addition, in each of the fluctuation effects of the fluctuation effect to be newly executed and the fluctuation effects corresponding to the three start winning prizes being held, a state where execution of the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled is shown.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the gaming state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is used as prefetch information. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a low probability state, and data of status value "3" is stored as the continuous notice execution status.

  In addition, in the first reserve area, the prediction result of the big hit lottery as the pre-reading information is the probability variation big hit, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is the super reach, the prediction precondition is the low probability state, and the status value “3 "" Is stored. In addition, in the second reserve area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is super reach, the prediction precondition is the low probability state, and the status value "3" as the continuous notice execution status. Data is stored. In addition, in the reserved fourth area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as prefetching information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is super reach, the prediction precondition is a low probability state, and the status value "13" as continuous notice execution status. Data is stored.

  In the state shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C (see FIG. 65) is executed, first, from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition Is acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223j are compared.

  In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition matches the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j, the main jack 110 in the main control 110 determines the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery result. Match Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the processing of S4001 is executed, S4001: No, and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j in the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, that is, the gaming state of the current pachinko machine 10 Is set.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while it is determined that the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out. Therefore, by setting the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the effect execution time game state flag 223k, showing the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next big hit lottery by the effect execution time game state flag 223k Can.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the acquired prediction precondition and effect execution time game state flag 223k in the process of S4008. And are compared. In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition matches the gaming state of the effect execution time game state flag 223k, the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery result are main control A match is made in device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process branches to S4009: Yes, the process of S4010 is executed, and it is determined whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot, the process branches to S4010: Yes, and in the effect execution time game state flag 223k, the play state at the end of the big hit, ie It is set. Specifically, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to on. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery can be indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved second area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the acquired prediction precondition and effect execution time game state flag 223k in the process of S4008. And are compared. However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k are different, and further, since the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the acquired jackpot lottery It is unclear whether the prediction result and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can not trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the processing proceeds to step S4013, and a minus sign is attached to the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the respective pending areas from the pending second area to the pending third area among the pending areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a. And the continuous advance notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect was scheduled to be performed in the change effect but was canceled. Specifically, the status value of the pending second area is changed to "-3", the status value of the pending third area is changed to "-13", and it is planned to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the change effect, but it is canceled It is changed to the status indicating that it has become. Then, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is ended.

  Then, after the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process C ends, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the status of the continuous notice status Since the value is "3", the process branches to S3706: Yes, and "chance" is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, a continuous advance notice effect is performed in the current change effect, and a "chance of chance" is displayed in the change effect.

  Then, even when the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed for the second time is set, the status value of the continuous advance notice status is "3", so the process branches to S3706: Yes, and the fluctuation in the third symbol display device 81 As the stop type of the effect, the "chance eye" is set. As a result, a continuous advance notice effect is performed in the current change effect, and a "chance of chance" is displayed in the change effect.

  However, when the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed for the third time is set, the status value of the continuous advance notice status is “-3”, so the process branches to S3706: No and the stop from the main control device 110 The stop type instructed by the type command is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the third variation production, the execution of the continuous advance presentation production is stopped, and the normal stop display is performed.

  Further, when the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed for the fourth time is set, since the status value of the continuous advance notice status is “−13”, the process branches to S3706: No and the stop from the main control device 110 The stop type instructed by the type command is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the fourth variation production, the execution of the continuous advance presentation production is stopped, and the stop display as usual is performed.

  As described above, when an unreliable item is found in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the respective fluctuation effects from the fluctuation production corresponding to the prediction result to the last fluctuation production scheduled to be performed for the continuous advance notice production are You can cancel the continuous notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status check process D which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status check process A described above.

  In addition, although continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, and C which were mentioned above were performed when starting a fluctuation production in the 3rd symbol display device 81, continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D mentioned the continuous notice mentioned above It is executed when it is determined in the determination process (see FIG. 59) that the continuous advance presentation effect is to be executed.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D, substantially the same process as the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is performed. The point different from the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C is that there are no steps of S4004 and S4005 and that steps of S4101 to S4104 are added.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D, first, it is judged whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S4101), and if it is not in the jackpot (S4101: No), the processing proceeds to S3801 and S3801-3804 Processing, processing of S3901, and processing of S4001 to S4003 are executed. Then, when the process of S4002 or the process of S4003 ends, the process proceeds to S4006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if the jackpot is in progress (S4101: Yes), the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game status flag 223c in the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, ie, the pachinko machine when the current jackpot is over Set 10 game states (S4102). Shifts to the process of S4006. In the process of S4102, specifically, if the after-big-play game state flag 223c is on, then the effect-on-play game state flag 223k is also set on, and if the after-big play state flag 223c is off, the effect is on execution The game state flag 223k is also set to off.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot can be determined based on the jackpot after-game state flag 223c. Therefore, after the present jackpot is completed, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 can be determined based on the state of the jackpot after-game state flag 223c. Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are set in the effect execution time game state flag 223k by setting the game state indicated by the big hit after game state flag 223c in the effect execution time game state flag 223k. Can be shown.

  Then, the processing of S4006 to S4015 is executed, and in the processing of S4015, if the value of the variable i is less than or equal to the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b (S4015: Yes), or the processing of S4013 is completed. Then, it is determined whether the value of variable i is 2 or less (S4103). In the process of S4103, when the value of the variable i is 3 or more (S4103: Yes), the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is performed although the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed over a plurality of fluctuation effects There is not, and continuous notice production does not continue for a long time. So, in this embodiment, when continuous notice production does not continue for a long time, it is constituted so that execution of a continuous notice production may be canceled. As a result, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, since the continuous advance notice effect continues for a long time, it is possible to give the player a long sense of expectation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Specifically, in the process of S4103, if the value of the variable i is 2 or less (S4103: Yes), of the hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a, A minus sign is added to all the continuous advance notice execution statuses, which is the number of (S4104), and this process is ended. That is, in the process of S4104, the continuous advance notice execution status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the change effect is changed to a status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled to be performed in the change effect but is canceled. .

  As a result, in the above-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), when the stop type of the variation effect corresponding to the prefetching information from the holding i area to the holding m area is set, the process branches to S3706: No Therefore, it is possible to stop the execution of the continuous advance notice effect over the respective variable effects corresponding to the pre-reading information from the hold ith area to the hold M area. As a result, the continuous advance notice production itself is stopped, and the continuous advance notice production is not executed even once. On the other hand, in the process of S4103, when the value of the variable i is 3 or more (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  According to the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D shown in FIG. 67 described above, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the continuous advance notice determination process (see FIG. 59) described above, It is possible to determine whether the prefetch information stored in the hold area (hold first area to hold fourth area) can be trusted. And when a thing which can not be trusted among pre-reading information is found, from the fluctuation production corresponding to the pre-reading information to each fluctuation production from the last fluctuation production which was scheduled to execute consecutive announcement production, it is continuous You can cancel the advance production.

  Furthermore, when the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed is 2 or less, although the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed over a plurality of fluctuation effects, the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is performed is small. , The continuous advance notice itself is canceled, and the continuous advance notice is not executed even once. However, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, since the continuous advance notice effect continues for a long time, it is possible to give the player a long sense of expectation that the game state shifts to the advantageous gaming state. In the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D, if the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed is 2 or less, the continuous notice effect itself is canceled, but the number of times is not limited to 2 and may be set arbitrarily. .

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous advance presentation status confirmation process D described above is to execute the continuous advance presentation effect in the above-described continuous advance notice determination process (see FIG. 59), the above-described continuous advance execution status check process Similar to A, B, and C, the third symbol display device 81 may execute the change effect when it is started. In addition, it may be performed any time between the start of the change production and the time immediately before the end of the change production. In addition, it may be performed during the fluctuation production, may be performed during the fluctuation production and at the end of the fluctuation, or may be performed during the big hit.

  Here, referring to FIG. 68, the continuous advance notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, hold first area to hold 4th area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status check processing D. An example of the flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D.

  In FIG. 68, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a state of large probability hit, when the gaming state is a low probability state, four start winning combinations are held. In addition, for each of the variable effects corresponding to the four start winning prizes being held, it is shown that execution of continuous advance notice effects is scheduled.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the gaming state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and the jackpot after gaming state flag 223c is on. Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), the prediction area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a is the pre-reading information, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is a probability change big hit, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is special reach, the prediction precondition Is a low probability state, and data of a status value "0" is stored as a continuous advance notice execution status.

  In addition, in the first reserve area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is the high probability state, and the status value "2" as the continuous notice execution status. Data is stored. In addition, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is usually big hit as the pre-reading information in the second reserved area, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is the super reach, the prediction precondition is the high probability state, and the status value “2 "" Is stored.

  In addition, in the reserved third area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is the high probability state, and the status value "2" as the continuous notice execution status. Data is stored. Also, in the reserved fourth area, as prediction information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is usually a big hit, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is special reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value “12 as a continuous notice execution status "" Is stored.

  When the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), first, in the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress. Here, since it is a probability change big hit, S4101: It branches to Yes, and the state of the big hit after game state 223c is set to the effect execution time game state flag 223k. Specifically, since the current jackpot type is a probability change jackpot, the jackpot after game state 223c is set to ON, and the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to ON as in the jackpot after game state flag 223c. Ru.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the acquired prediction precondition and effect execution time game state flag 223k in the process of S4008. And are compared. In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition matches the gaming state of the effect execution time game state flag 223k, the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery result are main control A match is made in device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process of S4010 is executed to determine whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of step, the process branches to S4010: No, and the state of the effect execution time game state flag 223k is maintained as it is. As described above, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out. Therefore, while the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out, by maintaining the state of the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery, when the effect is executed It can be indicated by the gaming state flag 223k.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved second area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the acquired prediction precondition and effect execution time game state flag 223k in the process of S4008. And are compared. In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition matches the gaming state of the effect execution time game state flag 223k, the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery result are main control A match is made in device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process of S4010 is executed to determine whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is usually a jackpot, S4010: branch to Yes, the gaming state flag at the end of the big hit in the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, ie, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the normal big hit It is set. Specifically, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to off. As a result, the effect execution time game state flag 223k indicates the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the second jackpot lottery.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved third area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the acquired prediction precondition and effect execution time game state flag 223k in the process of S4008. And are compared. However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k are different, and further, since the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the acquired jackpot lottery It is unclear whether the prediction result and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can not trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the processing proceeds to step S4013, and a minus sign is attached to the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the respective pending areas from the pending third area to the pending fourth area among the pending areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The continuous notice execution status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the change effect is changed to a status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled to be performed in the change effect but has been canceled. Specifically, the status value of the pending third area is changed to "-2", the status value of the pending fourth area is changed to "-12", and it is planned to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the change effect, but it is canceled It is changed to the status indicating that it has become.

  Here, among the continuous notice execution statuses stored in the hold first area to the hold fourth area, the continuous notice execution status, which is a positive number, is stored in the hold first area and the hold second area There are two. Therefore, in the process of S4103, the process branches to S4103: Yes, and a minus sign is also attached to the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the pending first area and the pending second area.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 68 (b-2), the status values of all the pending first area to the pending third area are changed to "-2", and the status value of the pending fourth area is changed to "-12". The status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is to be performed in the change effect is all changed to the status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled to be performed in the change effect but has been canceled. Then, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D is ended.

  Then, after the current successive notice execution status confirmation process D is completed, that is, after the probability variation jackpot under execution is finished, the variable display setting process (refer to FIG. 60) is executed by the first to fourth times. Since the status value of the continuous notice status is "-2" or "-12" every time the stop type of the fluctuation effect is set, the process branches to S3706: No, and instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 The determined stop type is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result, in each of the first to fourth variation effects, the execution of the continuous advance presentation effect is stopped, and the normal stop display is performed. That is, the continuous advance notice effect itself is cancelled, and the continuous advance notice effect is not executed even once. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed is 2 or less, although the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed over a plurality of fluctuation effects, the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Because the number of times the event is performed is small, the continuous advance notice itself is stopped, and the continuous advance notice is not executed even once. However, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, since the continuous advance notice effect continues for a long time, it is possible to give the player a long sense of expectation that the game state shifts to the advantageous gaming state.

  The above is the description of the second embodiment. As described above, in the second embodiment, as an example capable of suitably handling the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is suitably handled in the processing related to the continuous advance presentation effect, The example which performs continuous notice production has been described.

  That is, according to the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processing A to D (see FIG. 61, FIG. 63, FIG. 65, and FIG. 66) described above, in the processing of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state By comparing it with the gaming state indicated by the flag 223j, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the present jackpot lottery The main controller 110 can compare whether they match.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the pachinko machine is executed before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 When the gaming state of 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the present jackpot lottery Become. Therefore, in this case, since there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control device 110, the conventional lamp ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine Treated the lottery prediction results as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223 j are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery It can always be determined whether 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present jackpot lottery. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery Even in the case where it is unclear whether or not it is possible to perform the determination in the present embodiment.

  Then, when the respective big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, both the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison become the same, so the respective comparison results In the main control device 110, the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery coincide with each other. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery as credible. As described above, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible, so the present embodiment In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  In addition, as described above, in the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, it is used in the prefetching corresponding to the current jackpot lottery In this case, the main control unit 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present jackpot lottery. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of this big hit lottery and the lottery result of this big hit lottery correspond in the main control device 110, in this case, even with the voice lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, the big hit The prediction result of the lottery can not be relied upon, and it will refrain from using the prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning values stored in the low probability large jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning values stored in the high probability large jackpot random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j are different, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the present jackpot lottery If the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot in the process of S3804, the prediction result is In the corresponding actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery coincide with each other in the main control unit 110, and it is determined uniquely as outliers. In the audio lamp control device 113 according to the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  Therefore, if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as the credible one, the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment may be able to handle the prediction result which is treated as being unreliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and in the process of S3804, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is not For example, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result becomes unknown. In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is finished.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of this big hit lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next big winning lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next big winning lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about the big hit lottery after next time.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is changed Change to a status indicating that it was planned to perform continuous advance notice effects in the effect, but was canceled. As a result, when the fluctuation display setting process described above (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set, it is possible to branch to S3706: No. It is possible to cancel the execution of the advance presentation. That is, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery is the jackpot or the jackpot, it is possible to cancel the execution of the continuous advance notice effect for the fluctuation change which is executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  On the other hand, in such a case, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processes B, C and D, not only the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a but also stored in all pending areas. The continuous advance notice execution status is also changed to a state indicating that the continuous advance notice effect was scheduled to be performed in the change effect, but was canceled. Thereby, the above-mentioned fluctuation display setting process (refer to FIG. 60) is executed, and for the fluctuation effect scheduled to be subjected to the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to branch to S3706: No every time the stop type is set. The execution of the continuous advance notice can be stopped in each of the variable effects for which the continuous advance notice is scheduled to be performed. Therefore, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery after this time becomes unknown, continuous notice effect is executed for the dark clouds, and there is a problem that the continuous notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed. It can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C, D (see FIG. 65, FIG. 67) described above, in the process of S4008, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetched information and the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k By comparing it with the gaming state shown, the main control is the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery after the next time and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery after the next time A match can be compared at device 110.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the pachinko machine is executed before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 When the gaming state of 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery.

  As described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the gaming state at the next jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about the big hit lottery after next time.

  Therefore, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control unit 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after next time and the lottery of the next jackpot lottery Since there is a possibility that the result may be different from the result, the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery not only this time but also the next time as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the prediction precondition and the effect execution time game state flag 223k are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery from next time onwards. , 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotterys can always be determined. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main control is the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery after the next time and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the jackpot lottery after the next time Even in the case where it is unclear in the device 110 whether or not they match, this determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, when the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as credible. As described above, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible, so the present embodiment In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  In addition, as described above, in the process of S4012, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, the prefetching corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery In the main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery do not match. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the big hit lottery after the i-th and the lottery result of the big hit lottery after the i-th match in the main control device 110, in this case, the voice lamp control device of this embodiment Even in the case of 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after the i-th round can not be relied upon, and it is refrained from using the prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning values stored in the low probability large jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning values stored in the high probability large jackpot random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, in the process of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, and the jackpot random number table used in the prefetching corresponding to the i th jackpot lottery Even if the main control unit 110 does not match 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th big hit lottery, the predicted result of the big hit lottery in the prefetch information is the big hit in the processing of S4012. If there is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result will be out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the i-th big-hit lottery and the i-th big-luck lottery result match in the main control unit 110, and it is decided uniquely as outliers. In the voice lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  Therefore, if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as the credible one, the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment may be able to handle the prediction result which is treated as being unreliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, and in the process of S4012, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetched information is If it is not, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result becomes unknown. In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is finished.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the (i + 1) -th jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the subsequent jackpot lottery also becomes unknown.

  Therefore, when confirming the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. But there is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the process branches to S4012: No, and the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Also, in such a case, in the continuous advance notice execution status check process C, of the hold areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the continuous advance notice stored in the respective hold areas from the hold i area to the hold M area A minus sign is attached to the status, and the continuous advance notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect was scheduled to be performed in the change effect but was canceled.

  As a result, when the fluctuation display setting process described above (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set, it is possible to branch to S3706: No. It is possible to cancel the execution of the advance presentation. Therefore, when it is not possible to trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark cloud and the continuous advance notice effect irrelevant to the actual lottery result is performed.

  Also, according to the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67), the execution area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a when it is determined to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the continuous notice determination process described above (see FIG. 59). Alternatively, it can be determined whether or not the prefetch information stored in the hold area (hold first area to hold fourth area) can be trusted. And when a thing which can not be trusted among pre-reading information is found, from the fluctuation production corresponding to the pre-reading information to each fluctuation production from the last fluctuation production which was scheduled to execute consecutive announcement production, it is continuous You can cancel the advance production.

  Furthermore, when the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed is 2 or less, although the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed over a plurality of fluctuation effects, the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is performed is small. , The continuous advance notice itself is canceled, and the continuous advance notice is not executed even once. However, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, since the continuous advance notice effect continues for a long time, it is possible to give the player a long sense of expectation that the game state shifts to the advantageous gaming state.

  The "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "special game state" described in the claims, and the "probability information" described in the claims is the "chance" described in the embodiments. Corresponds to Also, the "high probability state or high probability jackpot random number table 202a2" described in the above embodiment corresponds to "an example of a plurality of lottery conditions" described in the claims, and "low" described in the above embodiment The probability state or low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 corresponds to “an example of a plurality of lottery conditions” described in the claims. The "bit value indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "determination result information" described in the claims, and the "prefetch command" described in the above embodiment The bit value indicating the prediction precondition included in the "corresponds to the" determination information "described in the claims, and is set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot included in the" fanfare command "described in the above embodiment. The “bit value indicating the playing state” corresponds to the “condition information” described in the claims.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, and it is easy to be able to various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate It can be guessed.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the "chance of chance" at the end of the change effect is a continuous advance notice effect, but during the change effect, an image different from normal is displayed or a sound different from normal is displayed. An effect such as emitting noise may be used as a continuous advance notice effect. If configured in this manner, the stop type of each of the variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect does not have to be changed to "chance", and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is. it can. In addition, since the continuous advance notice effect can be performed also in the last variation effect for executing the continuous advance notice effect, the number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of giving the player a sense of anticipation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Moreover, when performing continuous advance notice production over a plurality of change effects, the effect contents may be changed for each change effect, or the effect contents may be changed for only some of the change effects. In addition, if the prediction result that triggered the continuous advance presentation effect is a big hit and the prediction result is credible, the continuous advance notification that suggests a big hit decision with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2) You may comprise so that presentation may be performed. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed during the change effect, or may be performed during the change effect and at the end of the change. In the case where the continuous advance notice effect is performed during the change effect, as in the present embodiment, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processes A, B, C, and D may be executed when the change effect is started.

  Also, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) described above, in the process of S3803, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the preread information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j are different from each other. If it is (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the jackpot lottery It may be configured to shift to the process of S3805 without performing the process of S3804, assuming that the prediction result is not credible.

  Further, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processing B, C, D (see FIG. 63, FIG. 65, and FIG. 67) described above, in the processing of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state flag 223 j If the game state shown is different from the game state (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot, but S3803 In the case of No, it may be configured to shift to the processing of S3901 without performing the processing of S3804, assuming that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is not credible.

  Further, in the above-mentioned continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, C (see FIG. 61, FIG. 63, FIG. 656), the variation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 is received by It is executed when the fluctuation effect is started in the 3 symbol display device 81. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed at the end of the change effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is performed between the start of the change effect and the time immediately before the end of the change effect. , B and C may be executed at any time. Then, in the case where the continuous advance notice effect is performed during the change effect, as in the present embodiment, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processes A, B, and C may be executed when the change effect is started.

  Also, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C, D (see FIG. 65, FIG. 67) described above, in the process of S4009, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, and the game indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k If the game state is different from the game state (S4009: No), the process proceeds to S4012, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserve i-th area is a jackpot, but S4009 In the case of No, it may be configured to shift to the process of S4013 without performing the process of S4012 on the assumption that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is not credible.

  Moreover, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processing C and D (refer to FIG. 65 and FIG. 67) mentioned above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserve i area is the jackpot by the processing of S4010 among the repetition processing of S4007 to S4015. If it is confirmed that there is a jackpot lottery prediction result in the pending i-th area is a jackpot, the jackpot lottery prediction result may be regarded as unreliable, and processing may be repeatedly interrupted there. good.

  Further, although the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process C (see FIG. 65) is executed when the fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, instead of the case where the fluctuation effect is started, the big hit It may be configured to be executed during. By being configured to be executed during the jackpot, the number of times of execution of the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67), if the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed is 2 or less, the continuous notice effect itself is canceled, but the number of times is not limited to 2. And may be set arbitrarily.

  Further, in the above-mentioned continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, C, D (see FIG. 61, FIG. 63, FIG. 65, FIG. 67), when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is unreliable, it corresponds to the unreliable prediction result The continuous advance notice execution status is changed to a state indicating that the continuous advance notice effect was scheduled to be performed in the change effect but was canceled. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is unreliable, not only the unreliable prediction result but also the continuous notice execution status corresponding to the credible prediction result is scheduled to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuation effect. You may change the status to indicate that it has been canceled.

  Further, although the above-mentioned continuous notice execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67) is executed when it is judged that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the above-mentioned continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59), the third symbol display The apparatus 81 may be configured to be executed when the fluctuation effect is started. In addition, it may be performed any time between the start of the change production and the time immediately before the end of the change production. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may be performed during a jackpot. By being configured to be executed during the jackpot, the number of times of execution of the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D can be suppressed.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the above-described continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59) that the continuous notice effect is to be performed, the hold area (hold 1 area to hold 4 area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The status of “1, 2, 3, 12, 11, 12,” which indicates that the continuous advance notice execution status of each reserve area in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored is temporarily executed in the fluctuation effect. It is set to 13 ". After that, the continuous advance notice execution status in each pending area in which the unreliable prediction result is stored is scheduled to be executed in the change presentation by the continuous advance notice status confirmation processing A, B, C, D. However, the status has been changed to "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13" indicating that it has been canceled. On the other hand, in each of the holding areas in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored in the above-described continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59), the fluctuation effect is produced only in the holding area in which the credible prediction result is stored. In the above, the status "1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13" may be set to indicate that continuous advance presentation effects are to be executed.

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment, a gaming state flag 223 j configured similarly to the gaming state flag 203 a of the main control device 110 is provided. As described above, in the main control device 110, when the jackpot lottery is preread when the gaming state flag 203a is off, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability is referred to, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is Read ahead. On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery is pre-read when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched. Then, when pre-reading of the big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery is immediately notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by the pre-reading command. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the prefetch command is received, any jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 is used by referring to the state of the game state flag 223j configured similarly to the game state flag 203a. As a result, it is possible to determine whether the pre-reading has been performed in the main control unit 110 and to determine the prediction precondition. Therefore, since the prediction precondition can be stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the prefetch information storage area 223a, when the main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 of the prefetch command, the prediction precondition is stored therein. You do not need to include it. As described above, in the main control unit 110, when the jackpot lottery is read during the jackpot, the jackpot after the jackpot indicating the gaming state at the time of the jackpot end based on the jackpot state gaming state flag 203d, It is determined whether to refer to the random number table 202a1 or to refer to the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2. The voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a jackpot after game state flag 223 c configured similarly to the jackpot after game state flag 203 d of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the pre-reading command is received during the jackpot, it is possible to refer to the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c configured similarly to the jackpot after game state flag 203d. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 are used to allow the main control unit 110 to determine whether prefetching has been performed during a jackpot. Accordingly, since the prediction precondition can be stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a prediction precondition storage area 223a3, when the main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the prefetch command, the prediction precondition is included therein. It does not have to be. That is, with this configuration, the main controller 110 can use the conventional one as it is. Therefore, the development cost of the gaming machine and the burden on the designer can be reduced.

  Further, in the variation process (see FIG. 21) of the above embodiment, the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S314, and then the jackpot flag 203e is set on in the process of S315. As described above, when the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S314, when the jackpot control process (S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, S901: to Yes (see FIG. 27) Branch. Therefore, in the jackpot control process, when the processing branches to S901: Yes, the jackpot flag 203e may be set to ON. That is, as long as the flag 203e is set to ON before the start of the jackpot, any processing may be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the setting of the state of the big hit post game state flag 203d (S410 and S411 in FIG. 22) is performed in the change start process (see FIG. 22). In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) to be described later, the process of S902 is executed and referred to when a fanfare command is generated. Therefore, it may be set at any timing before the process of S902 is performed.

  In the above embodiment, the big hit medium winning flag 203g is provided. However, when each process is executed in the single task method in the main control unit 110, the big hit middle winning flag 203g may not be provided. When the big hit middle winning flag 203 g is not provided, the big hit middle flag 203 e is referred to in place of the big hit middle winning flag 203 g. When execution of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started by the single task method, another process (main process, other interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process is completed. Because there is not, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of execution of the above-mentioned start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetch process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the big hit medium flag 203e, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data acquired along with the start winning combination is obtained along with the big start winning combination.

  In the above embodiment, the winning game state flag is provided. However, when each process is executed in the single task mode in the main control device 110, the winning game state flag may not be provided. When the winning game state flag is not provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to in place of the winning game state flag. As described above, the winning game state flag is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the start winning, and when the ball starts winning to the first ball entrance 64, each counter C1 to C1 at the timing when the starting win is made. The values of C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired. Then, the gaming state flag 203a acquired here is set as a winning game state flag. Therefore, if the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning is the high probability state, and if the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, the pachinko at the time of starting winning Indicates that the gaming state of the machine 10 is in a low probability state. When execution of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started by the single task method, another process (main process, other interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process is completed. Because there is not, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a does not change from the start of execution of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetch process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning can be determined by referring to the gaming state 203a. In addition, since it is not necessary to execute the processing of S207 in the above-described start winning processing (see FIG. 20) when the winning game state flag is not provided, the burden on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the winning game state storage area 203b5 in the holding ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  Also, in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) of the above embodiment, for those that start winning during the big hit, pre-reading is performed with the gaming state at the end of the big hitting as a prediction precondition, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result is I am improving. As described above, since the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot, after that determination, it is possible to pre-read the gaming state at the jackpot end as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in addition to the winning combination during the big hit, after the big hit classification is determined in the big hit lottery, for the starting winning until the big hit is started, the prefetching is made with the gaming state at the big hit end as a prediction precondition You may do so. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance that the main control device 110 matches the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the predicted result. Therefore, since the number of prediction results treated as credible in the voice lamp control device 113 can be further increased, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be more suitably used.

  In the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) of the above embodiment, the big hit medium winning flag 203g is provided, but when each process is executed in the single task method in the main control unit 110, the big hit middle winning flag 203 g You do not have to When the big hit middle winning flag 203 g is not provided, the big hit middle flag 203 e is referred to in place of the big hit middle winning flag 203 g. When execution of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started by the single task method, another process (main process, other interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process is completed. Because there is not, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of execution of the above-mentioned start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetch process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the big hit medium flag 203e, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data acquired along with the start winning combination is obtained along with the big start winning combination.

  In addition, although the game condition flag at the time of winning is provided in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) of the above embodiment, when each process is executed in the single task method in the main control unit 110, the game condition flag at the time of winning You do not have to When the winning game state flag is not provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to in place of the winning game state flag. As described above, the winning game state flag is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the start winning, and when the ball starts winning to the first ball entrance 64, each counter C1 to C1 at the timing when the starting win is made. The values of C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired. The game state flag 203a acquired here is set as a winning game state flag. Therefore, if the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning is the high probability state, and if the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, the pachinko at the time of starting winning Indicates that the gaming state of the machine 10 is in a low probability state. When execution of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started by the single task method, another process (main process, other interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process is completed. Because there is not, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a does not change from the start of execution of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetch process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning can be determined by referring to the gaming state 203a. In addition, since it is not necessary to execute the processing of S207 in the above-described start winning processing (see FIG. 20) when the winning game state flag is not provided, the burden on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the winning game state storage area 203b5 in the holding ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command, but the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit In this case, the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 whether the present jackpot is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot by the above-described stop type command. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, it is not necessary to include in the fanfare command the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command, but instead of the fanfare command, fluctuation The main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by another command such as a pattern command, stop type command, round number command or ending command. You may. That is, after the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot in the main control unit 110 and the jackpot type is determined, the main control unit is determined until the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the sound lamp control unit 113. As long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by the audio lamp control device 113, any command may be used for notification. In addition to the fanfare command, a new command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit is provided, and the new command causes the pachinko machine 10 to be set at the end of the current big win. The gaming state may be notified from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113. When a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command may not include information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit.

  Further, when the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the voice lamp control device 113 of the above embodiment extracts the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit from the fanfare command. And, according to the game state, the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set. However, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 110 is a jackpot, the main lamp control device from the main control unit 110 determines whether the present jackpot is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot by the stop type command described above. 113 is notified. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, when the stop type command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, if the stop type command indicates a big hit type, the big hit after game state flag 223c is set according to the big hit type. It is good. In this case, it is not necessary to include in the fanfare command the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit.

  Moreover, although the ending effect determination process (refer FIG. 33) of the said embodiment is comprised so that it may be performed when the ending command transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 is received, the ending effect determination process is an ending effect. Since the processing is to determine the display mode of, it may be performed and finished before the ending effect is started. That is, it may be executed any time as long as it is finished before the ending effect is started after the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like, the information indicating the prediction precondition is further included in the prefetch command. However, the information included in the prefetch command is not limited to the information indicating the prediction precondition, and the voice lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was obtained using Any information may be used as long as it is information. For example, information indicating which table 202a1 or 202a2 the prediction result of the jackpot lottery has been obtained may be included in the prefetch command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the process of determining the display mode of the ending effect is taken as an example and described as an example that can appropriately handle the prediction result of the big hit lottery in the voice lamp control device 113. If it is a process to be used, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled, as in the process of determining the display mode of the ending effect. For example, also in the case of setting the display mode of the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to preferably handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In the above embodiment, although the fanfare command includes information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, but instead of the fanfare command. The other commands may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 including information indicating the state of skill set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. For example, it may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 including information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the round number command or the ending command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the ending command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received by the voice lamp control unit 113, the ending effect determination process is executed in the voice lamp control unit 113, but the pachinko machine 10 is hit big The ending effect determination process may be performed any time before the end effect is performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control device 110 transmits the fanfare command to the voice lamp control device 113 including the information indicating the gaming state set to the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command. The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state at the end of the jackpot from the received fanfare command. On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the gaming state to be set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the stop type command. You may. In other words, if the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command is a probability change jackpot, it is determined that the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is a high probability state, and the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command If is usually a big hit, it is determined that the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present big hit is a low probability state. In such a case, the main control device 110 does not need to include the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command, and thus the main control device The control burden of 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control unit 110 transmits the prefetch command to the voice lamp control unit 113 including the prefetch precondition of the prefetch in the prefetch command. It may be included in the hold number command and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, after the pre-reading is completed, the pending number command is generated.

  Further, in the ending effect determination process of the above embodiment, while acquiring the prefetching information stored in the hold area of the prefetching information storage area 223a one by one in the order of the stored order, the prediction precondition of the prefetching information And the jackpot after the jackpot gaming state flag 223c is compared, and each indicates the same gaming state, it is confirmed whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is a jackpot, First of all, it is checked whether there is something indicating that the lottery result is a big hit among the prefetching information stored in the reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and it is shown that the lottery result is a big hit If there is a prediction condition of the pre-read information and the gaming condition indicated by the jackpot after game condition flag 223c, it is good. .

  Further, in the ending effect determination process of the above embodiment, while the prefetching information stored in the hold area of the prefetching information storage area 223a is acquired one by one in the order of the stored order, the prediction precondition of the prefetching information and If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information indicates a jackpot when the game state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c is compared and each indicates the same game state, the display of the ending effect It is comprised so that it may be decided whether it will set "the fixed effect display" as an aspect. On the other hand, while the prefetching information stored in the hold area of the prefetching information storage area 223a is acquired one by one regardless of the stored order, the prediction precondition of the prefetching information and the big hit after-game status flag 223c If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information indicates a jackpot when the game state indicated by is compared and each indicates the same game state, the "display effect display" as the display mode of the ending effect It may be configured to determine whether to set. As described above, when the prediction precondition of the prefetch information matches the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c, the prediction result corresponding to the prediction precondition is the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery And likely to match. Therefore, even though the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, It can suppress that the problem that a lottery result does not become a jackpot actually generate | occur | produces. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the player from disappointing by giving the player a sense of useless expectation, and thus it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the possibility that the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game can be increased.

  Further, in the main control device 110 of the above embodiment, when pre-reading for the start winning is performed, information indicating the prediction precondition of the pre-reading, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the variation pattern type Information is included in the prefetch command and the prefetch command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, but without transmitting the prefetch command, information indicating the prediction precondition of prefetching, and the jackpot lottery The information indicating the prediction result and the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type may be included in the pending ball number command and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. By configuring in this way, both the number of holding balls and the prediction result of the pre-reading (appropriate, stop type, variation pattern type) are included in the number-of-hold-balls command. Therefore, when the holding lamp number command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, the correspondence between the holding ball number and the prediction result of the pre-reading becomes clear. That is, the correspondence between the number of holding balls and the prediction result of prefetching is always correct without being careful about the timing of receiving the command and acquiring the number of holding balls and the prediction result of prefetching from the RAM. Such processing can be performed accurately. In addition, when pre-reading for the start winning is performed, part of information indicating the prediction precondition of the pre-reading, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type The rest may be included in the pending ball number command and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the ending effect determination process of the above embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information indicates the jackpot In this case, the "fixed effect display" is set as the display mode of the ending effect with a probability of 1/3, but the probability of setting the fixed effect display may be appropriately determined.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect, the main control device 110 transmits a change pattern command and a stop type command, and as a result, in the third symbol display device 81 , Fluctuation representation according to the fluctuation pattern command is started. Thereafter, when it is time to execute the variation effect execution time, the stop symbol of the stop type corresponding to the stop type command is displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, a command (for example, a confirmation command) instructing the stop display of the stop symbol is newly provided, and until the confirmation command is transmitted from main control device 110, the execution time of the scheduled fluctuation effect is scheduled Even if it finishes, you may comprise so that the fluctuation production may be continued.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control unit 110 performs pre-reading for the start winning combination, but the voice lamp control device 113 may perform pre-reading for the starting winning combination. In that case, when the start winning combination is detected in main controller 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, and pachinko at the time of winning The gaming state of the machine 10 (in addition, during the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by a prefetch command. Then, in the voice lamp control device 113, the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, the low probability big hit random number table 202a1, etc., so that the lottery result of the big hit lottery can be read ahead. Each table such as a jackpot type table (not shown) is stored in the voice lamp control device ROM 222, respectively. Also, the prefetching process (see FIG. 23) executed by the main control unit 110 is stored in the ROM 222 so that it can be executed by the audio lamp control unit 113. If configured in this way, when the read ahead command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, the voice lamp control unit 113 extracts various counter values from the read ahead command, and a lottery for a big hit lottery You can look ahead to the results. As a result, since the main control device 110 does not have to look ahead to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be further alleviated, and transition should be made based on entering the first ball entrance 64. It is possible to concentrate on the lottery process for lottery the gaming state. However, since important random number values such as the random number value of the jackpot may be discovered unfairly, notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the lottery result (success or failure), the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are included in the prefetch command. Is preferred. For example, it can be prevented that the signal output from the main control device 110 is illegally stolen and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are analyzed. Moreover, it can prevent that important random number values, such as a random number value which determines whether it is a big hit, from the signal output from the main control apparatus 110 is analyzed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether to start the continuous advance notice effect (continuous notice determination process in FIG. 32) or determines the display mode of the ending effect (FIG. 33). In the display control device 114, these processing may be executed. In that case, a program for executing each process so that the display control apparatus 114 can execute the continuous notice determination process shown in FIG. 32 and the ending setting process of FIG. 33, and the continuous notice determination table 222a. It is stored in the character ROM 234 (for example, the second program area 234a1). In the work RAM 233, the above-mentioned prefetch information storage area 223a, reserved ball number counter 223b, big hit after game status flag 223c, ending mode counter 223f, continuous notice lottery counter 223g, continuous notice frequency counter 223h, big notice flag after notice 223i, etc. Provide each memory of. Then, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the command as it is to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the pre-read command, the display control device 114 executes a process of determining whether or not to start the continuous advance presentation effect (continuous advance notification determination process of FIG. 32). Further, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command from the main control device 110, it is configured to transmit the command as it is to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command, the display control device 114 executes a process of determining the display mode of the ending effect (the ending setting process of FIG. 33).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, you may integrate each apparatus 113,114 instead and may provide them as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when a command is received by the audio lamp control unit 113, the audio lamp control unit 113 transmits it to the display control unit 114. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is configured to be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, when the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 and the command is received by the display control unit 114, the display control unit 114 determines the command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113. After that, the display control device 114 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, it is determined that the image controller 237 accesses the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (that is, using) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from the image controller 237 as needed. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or a notification from the image controller 237 whether the scan is in a blank period or not. If the scan state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 235, 236 is not in use. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is not in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Also, in this case, the MPU 231 transfers data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since a predetermined address is defined, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, drawing of the sprite is performed. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for the above can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading out image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, transfer processing of image data can be executed using time during which important processing in the display control apparatus 114 such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing is not performed. In addition, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed prior to the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the video RAMs using the addresses held by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or regular video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but merely designates the address, and The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the regular video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the specification. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as an information indicating the storage destination of the data of the sprite, without using the storage RAM type, simply using the address set in the common address system. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be connected directly to 237. Also, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. It is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise of using a general mask ROM as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to be able to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and is configured by a large capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit, for example, a hard disk It may be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 causes the image to be displayed without any problem at the time when it is desired to display by using the configuration described in the above embodiment. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after releasing the system reset in the first program storage area 234d1. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first cancels the system reset in that area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the character ROM 234 and a first program storage area is provided thereon. It may store part of the boot program to be executed first.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program to be executed first in the area after releasing the system reset in the MPU 231 Is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can be read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a. The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset release in the MPU 231 may be stored in the memory. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like may be provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided thereon. A part of the boot program to be executed first after system reset release may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when it is detected in the ROM controller 234b that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When it is detected that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated "0000H" in the ROM controller 234b, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line You may output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can.

  When ROM controller 234 b detects that the address designated by internal bus (bus line 240) designates a control program stored in first program storage area 234 d 1, first program storage area 234 d 1 is detected. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read out from the memory and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can. In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by connecting to the image controller 237 has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. An internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234 and the image controller 237 are connected It may be provided directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. When the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is not necessary even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  Although the above embodiment describes the case where the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more may be provided. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be made resident, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by the DRAM of one port type (one input / output port) is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A type of RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn, it is read from the character ROM 234 The process of writing the processed image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The contents may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least for residence in response to a received command received from the main control unit 110 or the audio lamp control unit 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably, it is resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is partially transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident is described, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 You may In this case, since the image data stored in the nonresident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 If the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is largely different based on the command received from the image, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined timing. Good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept updated in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it. In addition, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while not in use (ie, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). Image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 according to data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (ie, while image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) You may do it.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the content of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the above embodiment, after all image data to be resident is made resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when power failure is eliminated. Before the transfer of the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is started in the display main process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control unit 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, this means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, and thus the image data transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be made non-execution by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for the power failure recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data if the data of the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary stop or the like. Since time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Alternatively, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

  In the above embodiment, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a has been described as one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. However, the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a buffer period (blank period) during scanning on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed A data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 may be used as the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 generated in this blank period. .

  Although the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from the other buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while an area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since processing can be performed, the time taken for the processing can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thereby, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power on of the power-on main image and image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image Although the case of transferring to 235 b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on. Thus, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the image at power-on, while using the character ROM 234. The image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data corresponding to the image data, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on, and power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the hour main image, etc., Image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 through the buffer RAM 237a, the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power activation fluctuation. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235 b has been described, while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. Directly transfer image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and power-on fluctuation image from character ROM 234 directly to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on fluctuation image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without passing through buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power stored in the normal video RAM 236 While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 If the image data is not read out from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the contents of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10, and change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 From the resident area, the back image can be displayed immediately using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

  In addition, the display control device 114 may change the rear surface image in accordance with the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the back image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the vibration error is detected by the audio lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 The controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main controller 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114. Then, when an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and sends an error command for further notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of the vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 47). The warning image setting process (see FIG. 48) may be performed when it is determined, to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 was described in the said embodiment, it replaces with the vibration sensor or with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 It is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress that the flow of the ball is changed by the magnetic field such as a magnet and the ball is intentionally entered into the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is An error command to be transmitted may be sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 via the audio lamp control unit 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that indicates an error may be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident in the error message pictorial area 235 f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113 The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving an error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 to transmit the magnetic field error. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. Thereby, the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, or recognizes the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is not It can be suppressed.

  When the drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of one presentation is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is represented as one unit, and the change in the sprite It may define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452 d and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If color information to be displayed is specified, color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information specified by the additional drawing content of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 In correspondence with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying is displayed as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and the new It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 displays the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. It may include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data which is required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may configure it.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer image data of a sprite used in drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, effects to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table May be This makes it possible to easily identify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table is defined not only for the additional drawing content but also including transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. This makes it possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition The processing load required for the specification can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start", "high speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation production, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the fluctuation production specified are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, in the display data table and the transfer data table, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f using the common pointer 233f has been described. Alternatively, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame for ending the drawing processing (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interruption signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed every display of an image of one frame By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Has been described and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 is a frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded each time the drawing list is received. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  In the above embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main display unit 110 is notified via the audio lamp control device 113 until the finalized display effect is finished. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the case of setting the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect to the display data table buffer 233 d Although this has been described, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233 d again. Also, in this case, until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is Each time the process is ended, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, the finalized display effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiment, a case was described where the demonstration effect was to change the back image and to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers from "0" to "9". The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol including the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image after power-on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and power on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on after the transfer is completed, transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control means 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power on after power on from the character ROM 234 to the power on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 at power on after power transfer is completed. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be checked in the operation check in the player, the person in charge of the hall, or the factory at the time of manufacture. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b. Thereby, when the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b and the display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after that, the display fluctuation pattern command is received. Based on the above, it is possible to display a simple variation display on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b be performed immediately after displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display by the power-on fluctuation image.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should be transferred to the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) or to that time, corresponding to the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit. Although the case of defining the information (transfer data information) of the image data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table, as a sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, an address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. May be defined. The display control device 114 reads the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233 j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored. Although the case has been described, in place of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data It may be determined whether or not it has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of that predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the case where the MPU 231 performs the process of disabling the transfer process has been described. The process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233 j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. Also, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in a work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in this case, the MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where only the image data corresponding to “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear surface images is made to reside in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, transfer processing of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the back image of super reach expected to have a high or high frequency of occurrence resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case of controlling the image controller 237 to transfer the image data instructed in step from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. The MPU 231 describes information on the type of sprite required in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, in the back surface C that is the back image of the "island stage", the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time is described, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time Good. In addition, not only images that scroll with time or changes in color tone as back images, but instead of such back images, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time It may be moving or changing.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 81 in which the fluctuation effect is performed, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 and the third symbol display device 81 Is provided with another fourth symbol display device, and combined with the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, even if continuous notice effect is executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device Good. In this case, control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, an award winning feature may be provided in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various effects, and the bonus item may be combined with the fluctuation effect and actuated in a predetermined mode to perform continuous advance notice effect. In addition, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by causing the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 to output the sound for the continuous advance announcement effect by the control of the audio lamp control device 113, and the electric decoration portion of the pachinko machine 10 Continuous advance notice effects may be performed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the change effects.

  Thereby, every time when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the prize is operated in a predetermined mode Alternatively, the player can be made to have a feeling of jackpot expectation by outputting a voice from the voice output device 226 or lighting or blinking the lighting units 29 to 33. In addition, the player usually pays attention to the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed and continues playing the game, but the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 Since the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the action of the special effects, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, a different effect is produced to the player. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effects can be easily and easily continued by simple control such as display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, activation of characters, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33. An advance notice can be made.

  In addition, if the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice lamp control device 113, so The main control unit 110 causes the main control unit 110 to perform a determination of acceptance or rejection at the start of the change, causes the voice lamp control unit 113 to perform continuous advance notice effects, and causes the display control unit 114 to perform change effects. In the case of performing the advance presentation, each control device can share each processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so it is possible to suppress the performance required for the MPU of each control device.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the character in the predetermined mode, the voice from the voice output device 226 Continuous advance notice effects may be performed by combining at least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and interlockingly controlling them. As a result, it is possible to execute a more diverse continuous notice effect. In addition, execution method of continuous announcement production (the indication with the 3rd symbol display 81, the indication with the 4th symbol display, the action of the special feature, the voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the electric decoration 29-33) Or, even by preparing a plurality of continuous notice effect modes to be selected according to the gaming state (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time junior high hit, disconnection) after the continuous advance notice effect is finished by changing the combination thereof. Good.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the image for continuous notice effects other than a fluctuation production was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, when continuous notice effects are performed, it is necessarily limited to this. Instead of the above, continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called "chance", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the change effect is finished. In this case, in the stop type command processing (refer to FIG. 37) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on and other stop symbol determination The flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process, so the chance symbol is set as a stop pattern instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command, so the fluctuation stop Sometimes you can see the chance eyes fixed. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as the stop symbol for each of the fluctuation effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

  Further, in the audio lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined by the continuous advance notification determination process (S1211) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 31), and the continuous advance presentation effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in response to the reception of this command. It is also good. As a result, transfer of image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode can be started from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the start of the change effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the display control device 114 may store the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect in the sub-area dedicated to the continuous advance notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect from being overwritten by another image data, so the image data corresponding to the desired continuous advance image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 The probability can be increased. Thus, it is possible to suppress repeated transfer of image data used in continuous advance notice effects.

  In addition, the stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect. Thus, since the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous advance notice effect is the last, while the continuous advance notice effect is being performed, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used for the continuous advance notice effect. When control is performed so that image data is not overwritten, cancellation of the overwrite control can be easily performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the information about the execution of continuous notice effect and the continuous notice image type is included in the display change pattern command, the display data table not corresponding to the continuous notice image for each change pattern, and each continuous The display control device 114 prepares a display data table corresponding to each notice image type, and the display control device 114 displays a corresponding display data table according to the change pattern indicated by the display change pattern command and the continuous notice image type. It may be set to 233 d. That is, the display data table may include the drawing content corresponding to the fluctuation pattern and the drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, setting of the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type is not necessary. Therefore, since the data table to be set can be reduced, the increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the transfer instruction of the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be performed in accordance with the reception of the display variation pattern command. As a result, one transfer data table may be prepared for each fluctuation pattern, and therefore, an increase in data tables can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the stop symbol of the change effect for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is a voice lamp control device based on the stop symbol (long reach, reach other than forward or backward, complete miss reach) determined by the main controller 110. Although the case where it was set by 113 was explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided by the sound lamp control device 113, the stop symbol of the last fluctuation effect that has been held is If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be replaced with the stop symbol of the reach aspect out of reach, instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control unit 110. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol defined by the main control unit 110, but is always an out-of-front reach, giving the player a high sense of expectation. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, when performing continuous advance notice effects along with all of the pending change effects, each change effect is performed in an effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each change, but in this case It may be configured to change the effect mode of change effects other than the last change effect on hold, to out-of-change effects. The variation pattern is changed according to the setting condition of the continuous advance presentation effect and the number of times of the continuous advance presentation effect executed by the process of generating the display change pattern command in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1504 in FIG. 38). May be In addition, when the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the change effect is displayed based on the change pattern determined by the main control unit 110 without updating the effect mode of the change effect. May be Here, even if continuous notice effects are continuously performed, the player's sense of expectation if the situation where the jackpot does not appear as a result continues even though the mode of the corresponding change effect is, for example, the super reach change effect. There is a risk that they will move backwards, but with the continuous advance notice effect being performed continuously, the fluctuation effect other than the change effect performed last is performed finally by being performed by the change effect continuously. It is possible to give the player a higher expectation for the fluctuation effect.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, when execution of continuous notice production was decided, although a case where continuous notice production was always performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81 was explained, it is not necessarily restricted to this, for example, continuous notice When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player in a situation where the execution of the effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed when performing variation effects. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced in size so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow-noise-like images in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly.

  In the above-described embodiment, although the case where one first entrance 64 is arranged in the game board 13 where the lottery of the big hit is started when the ball enters the ball has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entry ports where entry is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when there is a hold at each first entrance indicates which first entrance is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started, information indicating which of the first ball entry is the fluctuation effect reserved by the first ball entrance is included. Good. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the reserved ball number command If you set the number of holding balls in the number of holding balls counter for the mouth and receive the fluctuation pattern command, if you decrease the number of holding balls counter for the first entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command by 1, the first ball entrance The number of holding balls can be counted every time.

  In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect when the ball holding ball number command is received, all the first ball entrances are performed at that time. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed over the fluctuation effect (hold ball) held by the mouth. In addition, in pachinko machines that are provided with a plurality of first ball entrances and preferentially execute the fluctuation effects reserved in one first ball entrance, the fluctuation effects are preferentially executed. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only when the ball enters the first ball entrance. As a result, since the continuous advance notice effect is not started for the fluctuation effect held at the first entrance with low priority, the continuous announcement effect for the fluctuation effect held at the first entrance with low priority It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where continuous advance notice effects are not easily finished when the fluctuation effect is continuously suspended at the first entrance with high priority.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control unit 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the main control unit 110 holds the holding ball number command. Although the case of transmitting to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only when the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203c is increased in the main controller 110, the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, when the voice pattern control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is reduced by one. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the ball holding ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ball holding ball number command can be reduced respectively. The control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be alleviated.

  In the above embodiment, when the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined in the voice lamp control device 113 when the pre-reading command is received, the continuous advance presentation effect is executed for all the fluctuation effects pending at that time. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each of further variation effects. As a result, since the continuous advance notice effect does not appear or does not appear for each of the fluctuation effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous advance effect, and perform the effect that does not make the player bored. Can. In this case, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated every time the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and a counter for determining whether to perform the continuous notice effect in each variation effect is selected. You may provide. Then, in the continuous advance notice determination process, when performing continuous advance notice effects (S 1316: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effects in each variation effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous notice effect may be started. Further, in this case, the number (range) of the predetermined value of the counter for setting the continuous advance notice effect execution for the corresponding fluctuation effect may be changed according to the condition. As this condition, for example, the value of the holding ball number counter 223b at the time of judging whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous advance notice effect, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect for which judgment is performed, a series The game state (15 probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15 normal big hit, out) after the continuous advance notice effect of, or a combination of two or more of these, etc. may be mentioned. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in each of the change effects is changed according to the condition, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each change effect. .

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and the voice lamp control unit 113 instructs the display control unit 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing output of each sound and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of the command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 such as an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114, a continuous notice flag or an error occurrence Various flags such as flags are generated, and based on the flags, display data table and transfer data table are set in display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as warning image are generated. Alternatively, it may set an instruction to transfer necessary image data.

  In the above embodiment, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times. It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown. In a random number information storage unit that acquires random number information when a predetermined start condition is met, a random number information storage unit that stores random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition unit, and a random number information storage unit A lottery for determining, from stored random number information acquired by the stored information acquiring unit, stored information acquiring means for acquiring one stored random number information, and a lottery result under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions A main player having a main control related to the game while having a determination means and a lottery condition setting means for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended. A control means, first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special gaming state, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information are reported. Game machine having a notification means and an auxiliary control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. In the first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the player and the lottery conditions acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means, the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery conditions is the lottery judgment means Determination that includes lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result in the case of being determined, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub control means, the sub control means being transmitted by the determination information transmission means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information, and condition information of the main control means Condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Comparison means for comparing with a condition, and, when notification by the notification means is performed, the first suggested information and the second indication based on the comparison result by the comparison means A gaming machine A1 comprising: notification control means for controlling the notification means such that one of the information and the insulting information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the random number information associated with the establishment is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery result under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is selected from the random number information. The game is judged by the judging means, and it shifts to the special game state according to the lottery result. Further, one of the first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special gaming state is ended. When it is determined that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means is acquired by the first drawing condition acquiring means, and the drawing result judging means acquires the drawing under the acquired drawing conditions. A lottery result in the case where random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means is determined. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information and the judgment condition information are associated with each other. It is stored in the determination information storage means. In addition, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The lottery condition indicated by is compared by the comparison means. And when alerting | reporting by alerting | reporting means is performed, based on the comparison result of a comparison means, it controls by an alerting | reporting control means so that one of 1st suggestion information and 2nd suggestion information may be alert | reported by alerting | reporting means. For example, when notifying one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information on the basis of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used Since it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means if this is refrained, the notification by the notification means is suppressed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine A1, the first suggested information and the second based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended. The notification means can notify one of the suggestion information. Therefore, even when it is refrained from utilizing the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, since notification by the notification means can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determination It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means becomes useless. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.

  In the gaming machine A1, as a result of comparison by the comparison means, the notification control means includes lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and condition information received by the condition information receiving means. A gaming machine A2 that controls the notification unit so that the second suggestion information is notified when the lottery condition to be indicated is not identical.

  According to the gaming machine A2, as a result of comparison by the comparison means, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means do not match the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means. In this case, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the second suggestion information is notified. When the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means do not match, the lottery result is obtained even if the random number information used for each determination is the same. Since there is a risk that the lottery result determined by the determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted. According to the gaming machine A2, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means are different, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted , The second suggestion information can be reported to the notification means. Therefore, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted, the second suggestion information can be notified by the notification means regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the use of the unreliable lottery result, it is possible to more suitably handle the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means.

  In the gaming machine A2, the notification control means, as a result of comparison by the comparison means, lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and condition information received by the condition information receiving means If the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates the lottery result for transitioning to the special gaming state when the lottery conditions indicated by the match, the first suggested information is notified A game machine A3 for controlling the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, as a result of comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means In this case, if the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates a lottery result to shift to the special game state, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the first suggestion information is notified. Ru. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery condition of the determination made by the lottery determination means, and further, if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination means Since the lottery result determined by the above-mentioned method matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be trusted. According to the gaming machine A3, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be trusted In this case, if the credible lottery result indicates the lottery result for transitioning to the special game state, it is possible to notify the notification means of the first suggestion information. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, the notification means can notify using the reliable lottery result. That is, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, those that can be trusted can be used, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more suitably handled.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. The comparison means acquires, among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, those for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means When the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the judgment result information acquiring means and the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is discontinued. The determination condition information acquired by the determination result information acquisition unit, indicating the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order; And drawing conditions, the gaming machine is characterized in that to compare the drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination result of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information is not determined by the lottery determination means and acquired by the determination result information acquisition means. Then, with respect to the obtained judgment condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit in order from the oldest reception order, by the comparison unit, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the first comparison cancellation means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result performed first by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving means. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in the descending order of reception order. Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received, and the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means are determined by the lottery determination means while the respective lottery conditions match. It is likely to be consistent with. On the other hand, when the comparison is made, if there is a mismatch between the respective lottery conditions, there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means. In the subsequent comparisons, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, even if the respective lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine A4, the comparison by the comparing means can be continued while the possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determining means is high, and each lottery If the results are unknown or not consistent, the comparison can be aborted. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when the comparison by the comparison means is meaningless, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. The comparison means acquires, among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, those for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means In the comparison by the comparison result determination means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and is associated with the judgment condition information in which the lottery conditions coincide. And second comparison stopping means for stopping comparison by the comparing means when the determination result information being displayed indicates the lottery result for transition to the special game state. Among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order, and the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means A game machine A5 characterized by comparing.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, those for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information is not determined by the lottery determination means are acquired by the determination result information acquisition means. Then, with respect to the acquired judgment condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit in order from the oldest reception order, by the comparison unit In the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the determination result information correlated with the determination condition information matched by the lottery condition changes to the special gaming state When the selected lottery result is indicated, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the second comparison cancellation means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result performed first by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving means. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in the descending order of reception order. Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received, and the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means are determined by the lottery determination means while the respective lottery conditions match. It is likely to be consistent with. According to the gaming machine A5, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is In the case of showing the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be canceled even when the determination condition information to be compared of the lottery conditions remains. Therefore, since the number of comparisons by the comparison means can be suppressed, the control burden can be further reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the comparison means stores the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means, and the determination information storage means A game machine A6 characterized by comparing with the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means immediately before the notification is performed by the notifying means Are compared by the comparison means. Therefore, when performing comparison by the comparison means, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means without performing comparison immediately, so that the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, since the opportunity which can perform comparison by a comparison means can be increased, the opportunity which can perform the process which uses the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  In a random number information storage unit that acquires random number information when a predetermined start condition is met, a random number information storage unit that stores random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition unit, and a random number information storage unit A lottery for determining, from stored random number information acquired by the stored information acquiring unit, stored information acquiring means for acquiring one stored random number information, and a lottery result under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions A main player having a main control related to the game while having a determination means and a lottery condition setting means for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended. A control means, first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special gaming state, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information are reported. Game machine having a notification means and an auxiliary control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. In the first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the player and the lottery conditions acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means, the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery conditions is the lottery judgment means Determination that includes lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result in the case of being determined, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub control means, the sub control means being transmitted by the determination information transmission means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information, and condition information of the main control means Condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Comparison means for comparing with a condition, and, when notification by the notification means is performed, the first suggested information and the second indication based on the comparison result by the comparison means A gaming machine B1 comprising: notification control means for controlling the notification means so that one of the information and the insulting information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the random number information associated with the establishment is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery result under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is selected from the random number information. The game is judged by the judging means, and it shifts to the special game state according to the lottery result. Further, one of the first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special gaming state is ended. When it is determined that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means is acquired by the first drawing condition acquiring means, and the drawing result judging means acquires the drawing under the acquired drawing conditions. A lottery result in the case where random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means is determined. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information and the judgment condition information are associated with each other. It is stored in the determination information storage means. In addition, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The lottery condition indicated by is compared by the comparison means. And when alerting | reporting by alerting | reporting means is performed, based on the comparison result of a comparison means, it controls by an alerting | reporting control means so that one of 1st suggestion information and 2nd suggestion information may be alert | reported by alerting | reporting means. For example, when notifying one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information on the basis of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used Since it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means if this is refrained, the notification by the notification means is suppressed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to gaming machine B1, the first suggested information and the second based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended. The notification means can notify one of the suggestion information. Therefore, even when it is refrained from utilizing the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, since notification by the notification means can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determination It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means becomes useless. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.

  In any of gaming machine B1 and gaming machines A1 to A6, the lottery condition setting means sets the lottery condition of the lottery judgment means to a predetermined lottery condition when shifting to the special gaming state, and the lottery judgment The means is configured to hold the determination of the random number information from the transition to the special game state until the end, and the main control means is configured to hold the predetermined start condition. When it is determined by the gaming state determination means that determines whether or not the special gaming state is the special gaming state by the gaming state determination means, setting by the lottery condition setting means after the special gaming state is ended And third lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the selected lottery conditions, and the lottery result judging means is determined to be the special gaming state by the gaming state judging means, 3 lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means are characterized in that the lottery result is determined when the random number information acquired with the establishment of the predetermined starting condition is determined by the lottery judging means. Game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when transitioning to the special gaming state, the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means are set to the predetermined lottery conditions by the lottery condition setting means, and the transition from the transition to the special gaming state to the end The judgment of the random number information by the lottery judgment means is put on hold. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, it is determined by the game state determination means whether or not the special game state is determined, and if it is determined that the special game state is selected, a lottery is made after the special game state is ended. The lottery conditions set by the condition setting means are acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. In addition, if it is determined that the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means, the random number information acquired upon establishment of the predetermined start condition is the lottery determination means under the lottery conditions acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. The lottery result in the case where the determination is made is determined by the lottery result determination means. Since the determination by the lottery determination means is suspended during the special gaming state, when a predetermined start condition is established between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the determination of the random number information accompanying the establishment is It is made after the special gaming state is over. According to the gaming machine B2, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special game state and the termination, the special game condition is not set but the special game condition set during the special game state. It is possible to determine the lottery result of the random number information accompanying the establishment of the predetermined start condition by the lottery condition set for the lottery determination means after the state is ended. Therefore, even when the predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the lottery result of the determination performed by the lottery determination means can be accurately determined along with the establishment, so the correct lottery can be performed. The possibility of determining the result can be increased. Therefore, the opportunity which can handle suitably the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  In a random number information storage unit that acquires random number information when a predetermined start condition is met, a random number information storage unit that stores random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition unit, and a random number information storage unit A lottery for determining, from stored random number information acquired by the stored information acquiring unit, stored information acquiring means for acquiring one stored random number information, and a lottery result under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions A main player having a main control related to the game while having a determination means and a lottery condition setting means for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended. A control means, first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special gaming state, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information are reported. Game machine having a notification means and an auxiliary control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. In the first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the player and the lottery conditions acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means, the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery conditions is the lottery judgment means Determination that includes lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result in the case of being determined, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub control means, the sub control means being transmitted by the determination information transmission means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information, and condition information of the main control means Condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Comparison means for comparing with a condition, and, when notification by the notification means is performed, the first suggested information and the second indication based on the comparison result by the comparison means A gaming machine C1 comprising: notification control means for controlling the notification means such that one of the information and the insulting information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the random number information associated with the establishment is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery result under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is selected from the random number information. The game is judged by the judging means, and it shifts to the special game state according to the lottery result. Further, one of the first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special gaming state is ended. When it is determined that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means is acquired by the first drawing condition acquiring means, and the drawing result judging means acquires the drawing under the acquired drawing conditions. A lottery result in the case where random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means is determined. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information and the judgment condition information are associated with each other. It is stored in the determination information storage means. In addition, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The lottery condition indicated by is compared by the comparison means. And when alerting | reporting by alerting | reporting means is performed, based on the comparison result of a comparison means, it controls by an alerting | reporting control means so that one of 1st suggestion information and 2nd suggestion information may be alert | reported by alerting | reporting means. For example, when notifying one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information on the basis of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used Since it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means if this is refrained, the notification by the notification means is suppressed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine C1, the first suggested information and the second based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended. The notification means can notify one of the suggestion information. Therefore, even when it is refrained from utilizing the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, since notification by the notification means can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determination It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means becomes useless. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.

  In any one of the gaming machine C1, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, each of the plurality of lottery conditions is determined by the lottery determination unit according to the random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition unit. The random number information for indicating the lottery result to be determined and for which the lottery result to be shifted to the special game state is determined is configured to be different for each lottery condition, and the comparison means is configured to determine the determination condition information The lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information for each of the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match The lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means is compared, and in the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the condition When the lottery conditions indicated by the information do not match, it is determined whether the determination result information related to the determination condition information that the lottery conditions do not match indicates the lottery result to shift to the special game state The comparison control which controls the comparison means to continue the comparison when it is determined that the determination result information determination means and the determination result information determination means indicate the lottery result to shift to the special game state And the notification control means, as a result of comparison by the comparison means, includes lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and condition information received by the condition information receiving means. If the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates a lottery result for transitioning to the special gaming state when the selected drawing condition matches, the above-described first Gaming machine C2, which suggests information is characterized in that for controlling the informing means so as to broadcast.

  According to the gaming machine C2, each of the plurality of lottery conditions indicates the lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination means according to the random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition means, and shifts to the special gaming state The random number information for which the lottery result is determined is configured to be different for each lottery condition. Then, until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information becomes unmatched by the comparison means, the judgment condition information for each of the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means The lottery condition indicated by is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. In the comparison by the comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information indicating that the lottery condition does not coincide is It is determined by the determination result information determination means whether it indicates a lottery result to shift to the special gaming state. Here, if it is determined that the result indicates a lottery result for transitioning to the special game state, the comparison means is controlled by the comparison control means to continue the comparison. Then, when the result of the comparison by the comparison means indicates that the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means, the determination If the determination result information associated with the condition information indicates a lottery result for transitioning to the special gaming state, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the first suggestion information is notified. Since the random number information for which the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state is determined is different for each of a plurality of lottery conditions, the random number information is determined under a certain lottery condition, and the lottery result is shifted to the special gaming state Then, even if the random number information is determined under another lottery condition, the lottery result does not become the lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means are different, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is shifted to the special game state If it is a lottery result to be played, the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means can be regarded as a lottery result different from the lottery result transitioning to the special gaming state. According to the gaming machine C2, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination means are different, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery determination means If the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means can be considered to be another lottery result different from the lottery result transitioning to the special gaming state, even if there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by will be different The comparison can be continued. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is different from the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination means, the comparison result is simply determined by the comparison means regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means. Compared with the case where the comparison is ended, the opportunity to perform the comparison by the comparison means can be increased. Therefore, the opportunity which can handle suitably the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C2, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, the determination information storage means determines the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and the determination condition. Information is stored in association with the reception order of the determination information, and the comparison means is a lottery result corresponding to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. In the comparison by the comparison means, the determination condition information acquiring means for acquiring one that is not determined by the lottery determination means, and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison means And the first comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the comparing means, and the determination condition information acquired by the determination result information acquiring means, Gaming machine C3 which characterized in that a comparison between sequentially drawing condition indicated by the determination condition information to old signal sequence, and a drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in the determination information storage means, the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information are stored in association with the reception order of the determination information Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination result of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information is not determined by the lottery determination means and acquired by the determination result information acquisition means. Then, with respect to the obtained judgment condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit in order from the oldest reception order, by the comparison unit, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the first comparison cancellation means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result performed first by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving means. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in the descending order of reception order. Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received, and the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means are determined by the lottery determination means while the respective lottery conditions match. It is likely to be consistent with. On the other hand, when the comparison is made, if there is a mismatch between the respective lottery conditions, there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means. In the subsequent comparisons, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, even if the respective lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine C3, the comparison by the comparing means can be continued while the possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determining means is high, and each lottery If the results are unknown or not consistent, the comparison can be aborted. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when the comparison by the comparison means is meaningless, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, gaming machines A1 to A6, and gaming machines B1 to B2, the determination information storage means determines the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and the determination condition. Information is stored in association with the reception order of the determination information, and the comparison means is a lottery result corresponding to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. In the comparison by the comparison means, the determination condition information acquiring means for acquiring one that is not determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information, and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information And, when the determination result information associated with the determination condition information matching the lottery condition indicates the lottery result for transitioning to the special gaming state, the comparison is made. And second comparison stop means for stopping comparison by the second row, wherein, among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in the descending order of the reception order; A gaming machine C4 characterized by comparing with a lottery condition indicated by condition information received by the condition information receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, those for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information is not determined by the lottery determination means are acquired by the determination result information acquisition means. Then, with respect to the acquired judgment condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit in order from the oldest reception order, by the comparison unit In the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the determination result information correlated with the determination condition information matched by the lottery condition changes to the special gaming state When the selected lottery result is indicated, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the second comparison cancellation means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result performed first by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving means. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in the descending order of reception order. Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received, and the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means are determined by the lottery determination means while the respective lottery conditions match. It is likely to be consistent with. According to the gaming machine C4, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is In the case of showing the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be canceled even when the determination condition information to be compared of the lottery conditions remains. Therefore, since the number of comparisons by the comparison means can be suppressed, the control burden can be further reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, the comparison means is a condition received by the condition information reception means immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by comparing a lottery condition indicated by information with a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit Are compared by the comparison means. Therefore, when performing comparison by the comparison means, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means without performing comparison immediately, so that the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, since the opportunity which can perform comparison by a comparison means can be increased, the opportunity which can perform the process which uses the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  In a random number information storage unit that acquires random number information when a predetermined start condition is met, a random number information storage unit that stores random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition unit, and a random number information storage unit A lottery for determining, from stored random number information acquired by the stored information acquiring unit, stored information acquiring means for acquiring one stored random number information, and a lottery result under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions A main player having a main control related to the game while having a determination means and a lottery condition setting means for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended. A control means, first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special gaming state, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information are reported. Game machine having a notification means and an auxiliary control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. In the first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the player and the lottery conditions acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means, the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery conditions is the lottery judgment means Determination that includes lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result in the case of being determined, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub control means, the sub control means being transmitted by the determination information transmission means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information, and condition information of the main control means Condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Comparison means for comparing with a condition, and, when notification by the notification means is performed, the first suggested information and the second indication based on the comparison result by the comparison means A game machine D1 comprising: notification control means for controlling the notification means so that one of the information and the insulting information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the random number information associated with the establishment is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery result under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is selected from the random number information. The game is judged by the judging means, and it shifts to the special game state according to the lottery result. Further, one of the first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special gaming state is ended. When it is determined that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means is acquired by the first drawing condition acquiring means, and the drawing result judging means acquires the drawing under the acquired drawing conditions. A lottery result in the case where random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means is determined. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information and the judgment condition information are associated with each other. It is stored in the determination information storage means. In addition, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The lottery condition indicated by is compared by the comparison means. And when alerting | reporting by alerting | reporting means is performed, based on the comparison result of a comparison means, it controls by an alerting | reporting control means so that one of 1st suggestion information and 2nd suggestion information may be alert | reported by alerting | reporting means. For example, when notifying one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information on the basis of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used Since it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means if this is refrained, the notification by the notification means is suppressed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine D1, the first suggested information and the second based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended. The notification means can notify one of the suggestion information. Therefore, even when it is refrained from utilizing the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, since notification by the notification means can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determination It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means becomes useless. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.

  In any of the game machine D1, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the determination information storage means determines the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means. And the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information, and the comparison means corresponds to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. Judgment result information acquiring means for acquiring the judgment result of the lottery result to be undecided by the lottery judgment means, and the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison means And the determination result information associated with the determination condition information matching the lottery condition indicates the lottery result for transition to the special game state Of the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest one of the reception order among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The condition and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means are compared, and the notification control means determines the determination information stored in the determination information storage means as a result of the comparison by the comparison means. When the lottery condition indicated by the condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information is shifted to the special gaming state A gaming machine D2 that controls the notification means so as to notify the first suggestion information if it indicates a lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, those for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information is not determined by the lottery determination means are acquired by the determination result information acquisition means. Then, with respect to the acquired judgment condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit in order from the oldest reception order, by the comparison unit In the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the determination result information correlated with the determination condition information matched by the lottery condition changes to the special gaming state When the selected lottery result is indicated, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the second comparison cancellation means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result performed first by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving means. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in the descending order of reception order. Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received, and the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means are determined by the lottery determination means while the respective lottery conditions match. It is likely to be consistent with. According to the gaming machine D2, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is In the case of showing the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be canceled even when the determination condition information to be compared of the lottery conditions remains. Therefore, since the number of comparisons by the comparison means can be suppressed, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D2, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the comparison means receives the condition information immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means. A gaming machine D3 characterized by comparing a lottery condition indicated by condition information received by the means with a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means immediately before the notification is performed by the notifying means Are compared by the comparison means. Therefore, when performing comparison by the comparison means, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means without performing comparison immediately, so that the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, since the opportunity which can perform comparison by a comparison means can be increased, the opportunity which can perform the process which uses the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  Random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, random number information storage means for storing a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means, and the random number information storage Memory information acquiring means for acquiring one piece of random number information stored in the means, and lottery results under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions based on random number information acquired by the memory information acquiring means Lottery determination means for determining the lottery conditions, lottery condition setting means for setting the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means, and the subsequent lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended Main control regarding the game while having lottery control means for controlling so that the determination by the above is performed under the predetermined lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means It has main control means for controlling, notification means for notifying suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special game state, and sub control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means is a first lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the first lottery conditions Lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result when random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination means under the lottery condition acquired by the acquisition means, and the lottery result determination means A determination information transmitter that transmits determination information including determination result information indicating the determined lottery result and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result to the sub control means And second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and condition information for indicating the lottery conditions acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means to the sub control means Information transmission means, the sub control means being transmitted by the condition information reception means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmission means of the main control means, and by the determination information transmission means of the main control means A determination information receiving unit for receiving the determination information, a determination information storage unit for storing the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit, and the determination condition information in association with each other, and the storage in the determination information storage unit Comparing means for comparing the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information being carried out with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means; and the judgment information Notification setting means configured to set the notification information to be notified by the notification means based on the determination result information of the determination information received by the receiving means, and the indication information by the notification means according to the setting by the notification setting means A game machine E1 comprising: notification control means for controlling whether or not the indication information is to be notified by the notification means based on the comparison result by the comparison means when the information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, random number information is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit based on the establishment and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the plurality of random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is performed based on the random number information. The result is determined by the lottery determination means, and transition to the special game state is made according to the lottery result. In addition, the notification means notifies the suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state, and when the special gaming state is ended, the subsequent determination by the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means It is controlled by the lottery control means so as to be performed under a predetermined condition. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, information for determining the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means is acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means, and is acquired by the lottery result judgment means The lottery result in the case where the random number information acquired along with the information of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determined by the lottery information is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means. Then, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the judgment information and the judgment condition information are correlated and stored in the judgment information storage means Be done. Further, based on the determination result information of the received determination information, it is determined by the notification determination means whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means, and when it is determined to notify the suggestion information, the condition information receiving means The lottery condition indicated by the received condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means by the comparison means. And based on the comparison result, it is controlled by the notification control means whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means.

  When a lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting means, there is a possibility that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means will change. Temporarily, if the lottery condition changes, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means before the change of the lottery condition disagrees with the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means after the change of the lottery condition. And there is a possibility that the respective lottery results do not match. Therefore, when the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means may not be used as being unreliable. In such a case, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is not used and is wasted. According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the notification information is notified of the suggestion information based on the relationship between the drawing condition of the drawing result determined by the drawing result judging means and the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means. It can be done. Therefore, even when using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means is refrained, using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means, the notifying means is notified of the suggestion information it can. Accordingly, since it is possible to suppress that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.

  In any one of the game machine E1, the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the notification control means determines the result of comparison by the comparison means. A gaming machine E2 that is controlled such that the notification information is notified by the notifying unit when a lottery condition indicated by the condition information matches a lottery condition indicated by the condition information.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the notification control means is configured to notify the suggestion information by the notification means when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information as a result of the comparison by the comparison means. Control is performed. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery condition of the determination made by the lottery determination means, and further, if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination means Since the lottery result determined by the above-mentioned method matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be trusted. According to the gaming machine E2, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be trusted In this case, the notification means can be notified of the suggestion information by using the credible lottery result. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, those that can be trusted can be used, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be handled more suitably.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E2, the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the notification control means is a result of comparison by the comparison means, A gaming machine E3 that is controlled such that the notification information is not notified by the notification unit when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the notification control means is configured so that the notification information is not notified by the notification means when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of comparison by the comparison means. Control is performed. When the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means do not match, the lottery result is obtained even if the random number information used for each determination is the same. Since there is a risk that the lottery result determined by the determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted. According to the gaming machine E3, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means are different, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted In this case, the unreliable lottery result can be used to prevent the notification means from notifying the suggestion information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the use of unreliable ones among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more suitably handled.

  In any of gaming machines E1 to E3, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, identification is made based on the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification setting means includes a plurality of display results based on the determination result information of the determination information. The information processing apparatus further comprises a notification determination unit that determines whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification unit in the fluctuation effect, and when it is determined by the notification determination unit to notify the suggestion information, the determination made by the lottery determination unit The notification in each of the variation effects performed based on the lottery result of the determination according to the lottery result indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. When the indication information is set to be notified by the row, and the notification control means makes a comparison between the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match A game machine E4 that is controlled such that the indication information is not notified by the notification means in each of the variable effects performed by the display means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, when the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification determining means determines whether to notify the suggestion information by the notifying means in the plurality of fluctuation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information. It is judged. Here, if it is determined to notify the suggestion information, among the determinations made by the lottery determination means, based on the lottery results of the determinations of the lottery results indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means The notification setting unit sets the notification information so that the notification unit notifies the suggestion information in each of the variation effects to be performed. Then, when the result of the comparison by the comparison means does not match the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the notification means does not notify the suggestion information in each of the variable effects performed by the display means Control is performed by the notification control means. If the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means Because there is a possibility of becoming, it is not possible to trust the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means. Then, when it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, there shifts to the special gaming state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, and thereafter, the lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting means There is also a possibility that the lottery condition of the determination means may be changed. Therefore, also in the next comparison, it becomes unclear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the comparison thereafter is also similarly unclear. If it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the result judging means, then it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result judged by the lottery result judging means. According to the gaming machine E4, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information become different in the comparison by the comparison means, and thereafter the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted In addition, it is possible that notification information is not notified by the notification unit in each of the variable effects. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, it is possible to further suppress the use of unreliable ones, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be handled more suitably.

  In any of gaming machines E1 to E3, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, identification is made based on the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means The display apparatus is provided with display means on which a variable effect including dynamic display of information is performed, and the judgment information storage means judges the judgment information of the judgment information received by the judgment information reception means and the judgment condition information. When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification setting means causes the notification in a plurality of variation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information. In the case where it is determined that the indication information is to be notified by the notification judgment means, the lottery judgment is provided. Among the determinations made by the means, the notification means is notified of the suggestion information in each of the variable effects performed based on the lottery result of the determination of the lottery result indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means Of the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest one of the reception order, and the condition The notification control means compares the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information as a result of the comparison by the comparison means. And in the case of each variation effect subsequent to that including the variation effect performed corresponding to the determination result information that becomes mismatched Gaming machine E5, wherein the suggesting information is used to control so as not to be notified by.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information are stored in the determination information storage means in association with the reception order of the determination information. When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification determination means determines whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means in the plurality of fluctuation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information. Here, if it is determined to notify the suggestion information, among the determinations made by the lottery determination means, based on the lottery results of the determinations of the lottery results indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means The notification setting unit sets the notification information so that the notification unit notifies the suggestion information in each of the variation effects to be performed. Then, among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means in order from the oldest reception order. A comparison is made by the means, and as a result of the comparison, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the variation effect to be performed corresponding to the mismatched determination result information is included. Control is performed by the notification control unit so that the notification unit does not notify the suggestion information in each of the subsequent variable effects. If the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means Because there is a possibility of becoming, it is not possible to trust the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means. Then, when it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, there shifts to the special gaming state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, and thereafter, the lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting means There is also a possibility that the lottery condition of the determination means may be changed. Therefore, also in the next comparison, it becomes unclear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the comparison thereafter is also similarly unclear. If it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the result judging means, then it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result judged by the lottery result judging means. According to the gaming machine E5, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted It is possible to prevent notification information from being notified by the notification means in each of the subsequent variable effects including the fluctuation effect performed corresponding to the judgment result information that becomes unmatched. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, it is possible to use the ones that can be relied upon and the ones that can not be relied upon to be used more, so the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means It can be handled suitably.

  In any one of the game machine E5, the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the comparison means determines the determination condition information in comparison by the comparison means. A game machine E6 comprising a first comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the comparing means when there is a mismatch between the lottery conditions indicated by and the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information.

  According to the gaming machine E6, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the first comparison cancellation means. Therefore, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, and thereafter the lottery result judged by the lottery result judgment means can not be trusted You can cancel the comparison. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when the comparison by the comparison means is meaningless, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any one of the game machines E5 to E6, the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the notification control means is a result of comparison by the comparison means, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates the lottery result to be transferred to the special game state For example, the gaming machine E7 is characterized in that control is performed such that the notification information is not notified by the notification means in each of the variable effects performed after the special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine E7, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information as a result of comparison by the comparison means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information is a special game If it indicates a lottery result to shift to the state, control is performed by the notification control means such that the notification information is not notified by the notification means in each of the variable effects performed after the special gaming state. When transitioning to the special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means after the special game state is ended. Therefore, the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means may be changed. Therefore, in the next comparison, it becomes unclear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the comparison after that also similarly becomes unknown. If it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the judging means, then the lottery result judged by the lottery result judging means can not be trusted. According to the gaming machine E7, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates the special gaming state It is possible to prevent notification information from being notified by the notifying means in each of the variable effects when the lottery result determined to be shifted to the lottery result can not be trusted after that from the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the use of unreliable ones among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more suitably handled.

  In any of the game machine E7, the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the comparison means determines the determination condition information in comparison by the comparison means. The lottery conditions indicated by the match the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information, and the determination result information associated with the determination condition information corresponding to the lottery conditions indicates the lottery result for transition to the special game state A game machine E8 characterized by comprising second comparison stop means for stopping the comparison by the comparison means, if any.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in the comparison by the comparison means, the determination result in which the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information and is associated with the determination condition information in which the lottery conditions coincide. When the information indicates the lottery result for transition to the special game state, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the second comparison cancellation means. Therefore, in the comparison by the comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information shifts to the special game state In the case where the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted thereafter, the comparison by the comparison means can be stopped. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when the comparison by the comparison means is meaningless, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any one of the game machine E5, the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the comparison means determines the determination condition information in comparison by the comparison means. The determination result information associated with the determination condition information matching the drawing condition indicates the drawing result transitioning to the special gaming state when the drawing condition indicated by the condition and the drawing condition indicated by the condition information match. When it is determined that the determination result information indicates the lottery result for transitioning to the special game state by the transition determination means for determining whether there is any, and the transition determination means, the special game state is ended after the end Lottery condition determination means for determining the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and when the lottery conditions are determined by the lottery condition determination means, the condition information Gaming machine E9, characterized in that instead of drawing conditions, the comparison means by lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determining means comprises a first comparator control means for controlling to continue the comparison shown.

  According to the gaming machine E9, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison means, the determination result information correlated with the determination condition information corresponding to the lottery condition is It is determined by the transition determination means whether it indicates a lottery result for transitioning to the special gaming state. Here, if it is determined that the lottery result for transitioning to the special game state is indicated, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is determined by the lottery condition determination means after the special game state is ended, and the condition is set. Control is performed by the first comparison control means such that the comparison means continues comparison based on the lottery conditions determined by the lottery condition determination means instead of the lottery conditions indicated by the information. When transitioning to the special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means after the special game state is ended. . Therefore, after the special gaming state ends, it becomes unclear whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. According to the gaming machine E9, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is determined by the lottery condition determination unit after the special gaming state is ended, and is changed to the lottery condition indicated by the condition information and determined by the lottery condition determination unit Control is performed such that the comparison means continues comparison based on the selected lottery conditions. Therefore, since it becomes clear whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information even after the special gaming state has ended, the lottery result determined by the lottery result judging means It can distinguish whether it can be trusted or not. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, those that can be trusted can be increased, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more suitably handled.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E9, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, each of the plurality of lottery conditions is the memory information acquisition means Shows the lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination means in accordance with the random number information acquired by the random number information for which the lottery result to be transferred to the special game state is determined to be different for each lottery condition The comparison means stores the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match. Each time the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, the comparison by the comparison means is performed. If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicating that the lottery condition does not match is the special game state In the case where it is determined by the determination result information determination means that determines whether or not to indicate the lottery result to be transferred to, and the determination result information determination means indicates the lottery result to transition to the special gaming state, A game machine E10 comprising: second comparison control means for controlling the comparison means to continue comparison.

  According to the gaming machine E10, each of the plurality of lottery conditions indicates a lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination means in accordance with the random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition means, and shifts to the special gaming state The random number information for which the lottery result is determined is configured to be different for each lottery condition. Then, until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information becomes unmatched by the comparison means, the judgment condition information for each of the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means The lottery condition indicated by is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. In the comparison by the comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information indicating that the lottery condition does not coincide is It is determined by the determination result information determination means whether it indicates a lottery result to shift to the special gaming state. Here, if it is determined that the result indicates a lottery result for transition to the special game state, control is performed by the second comparison control means such that the comparison means continues the comparison. Since the random number information for which the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state is determined is different for each of a plurality of lottery conditions, the random number information is determined under a certain lottery condition, and the lottery result is shifted to the special gaming state In this case, even if the random number information is determined under another lottery condition, the lottery result is not the lottery result for transition to the special game state. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means do not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is the special game state If it is a lottery result to shift to, it can be considered that the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means is a lottery result different from the lottery result transitioning to the special gaming state. According to the gaming machine E10, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means does not match the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery determination Even if there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the means may not match, if it can be considered that the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means will be another lottery result than the lottery result transitioning to the special gaming state, The comparison by the comparison means can be continued. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination means do not match, the comparison is simply made regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means Compared with the case where the comparison by means is ended, the opportunity which can be compared by the comparison means can be increased. Therefore, the opportunity which can handle suitably the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  In any one of game machines E1 to E10, game machines D1 to D3, game machines A1 to A6, game machines B1 to B2, and game machines C1 to C5, the lottery condition setting means shifts to the special game state In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set to a predetermined lottery condition, and the lottery determination means suspends the determination of the random number information from the transition to the special gaming state until the process is ended. The main game control unit is in the special game state by the game state determination unit that determines whether or not the special game state is established when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the main control means is in the special game state by the game state determination unit And third lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means after the special game state is ended, the lottery result judging means comprising If it is determined that the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means, the random number information acquired with the establishment of the predetermined start condition under the lottery condition acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means is the lottery A game machine E11 characterized by judging a lottery result in the case of being judged by the judging means.

  According to the gaming machine E11, when transitioning to the special gaming state, the drawing condition setting means sets the drawing condition of the drawing determination means to a predetermined drawing condition, and from the transition to the special game state to the end The judgment of the random number information by the lottery judgment means is put on hold. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, it is determined by the game state determination means whether or not the special game state is determined, and if it is determined that the special game state is selected, a lottery is made after the special game state is ended. The lottery conditions set by the condition setting means are acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. In addition, if it is determined that the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means, the random number information acquired upon establishment of the predetermined start condition is the lottery determination means under the lottery conditions acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. The lottery result in the case where the determination is made is determined by the lottery result determination means. The determination by the lottery determination means is suspended during the special gaming state, so if the predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the determination of the random number information accompanying the establishment is , It is made after the special game state ends. According to the gaming machine E11, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special game state and the end, the special game condition is not set but the special game condition set during the special game state. It is possible to determine the lottery result of the random number information accompanying the establishment of the predetermined start condition by the lottery condition set for the lottery determination means after the state is ended. Therefore, even when the predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the lottery result of the determination performed by the lottery determination means can be accurately determined along with the establishment, so the correct lottery can be performed. The possibility of determining the result can be increased. Therefore, the opportunity which can handle suitably the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E11, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparison means immediately before notification by the notification means A gaming machine characterized by comparing the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means with the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means. E12.

  According to the gaming machine E12, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means immediately before the notification is performed by the notifying means Are compared by the comparison means. Therefore, when performing comparison by the comparison means, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means without performing comparison immediately, so that the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, since the opportunity which can handle the lottery result determined by the lottery result judging means can be increased by the comparing means, the opportunity which can suitably handle the lottery result judged by the lottery result judging means can be increased.

  A gaming machine F1 characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine has an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine F3 characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (informing means, display means)
110 Main control unit (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of sub control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub control means)
203b Holding sphere storage area (random number information storage means)
223a Pre-reading information storage area (decision information storage means)
S206 random number information acquisition means S207 first lottery condition acquisition means S209 gaming state determination means S210, S211, S503 to S506 third lottery condition acquisition means S401 stored information acquisition means S402 to S405 lottery judgment means S409 to S411, S915, S916 lottery conditions Setting means, lottery control means S501, S502, S505 to S507 Lottery result judgment means S511, S513 Judgment information transmission means S902 Second lottery condition acquisition means S903 Condition information transmission means S1209 Judgment information reception means S1211 Notification setting means S1212 Condition information reception means S1316 notification determination means S1404 determination result information acquisition means S1405 first comparison means S1406 first notification control means S3704 second notification control means S3802, S4008 second comparison means S4010 transition determination means 4011 lottery condition determiner S4011, S4014, S4015: Yes first comparison control means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-333089

When the game ball to the startup port newly prize, the jackpot lottery is pending, then the predicted draw results jackpot lottery accompanying the new winning from the jackpot lottery pending is executed , The actual jackpot lottery with the new winning is performed. Therefore, if the pending jackpot lottery is executed and any lottery result becomes a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set at the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, so the jackpot of The gaming state may change before and after.

However , when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result do not match, when effect (pre notice effect) is performed using the prediction result, the lottery of the actual jackpot lottery There was a possibility that the possibility that the effect unrelated to the result would be executed would be high .

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably handling the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this purpose, the random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information when a predetermined starting condition is established, stores the random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means and random number information storage means for the storage information acquiring means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storing means, using one of the drawing condition of the plurality of lottery conditions set in advance, The lottery determination means for determining the lottery result of the random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the variation type determination means for determining the type of the fluctuation game to be executed based on the lottery result of the lottery determination means, a lottery condition setting means special game state to migrate in response to the lottery result lottery determining means sets the drawing condition of the lottery determination means in the case of completion, have a mainly performing main control regarding the game And control means performs a variable display by the variation type determination means determined variation game by type, and controls the variable display means for displaying a predetermined suggestion information for performing a predetermined suggestions to the player, the main control unit a sub-control means controlled by the instruction from, which was equipped with the main control means determines drawing condition that the predetermined starting condition is when a condition is satisfied, and is set by the drawing condition setting means and, using the discriminated lottery condition, the lottery result estimated means to estimate the lottery result when the random number information is determined by the lottery determining means, it is estimated by its lottery result estimation unit the estimation result indicating lottery results using a predetermined drawing condition in order to determine the sub-control means is, the estimated information transmission means for transmitting the estimated information to the sub-control means, set by the drawing condition setting means A condition information transmitting means for transmitting the condition information indicating a drawing condition which is to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means receives the estimate information transmitted by the estimation information transmission means of said main control means and a result information storage means for storing the lottery results are shown result information of the random number information using the predetermined drawing conditions determined from the received estimated Teijoho, it transmits the condition information transmission means of said main control means receive condition information, and the drawing condition information storage means for storing a drawing condition indicated by the received condition information, and drawing conditions used to determine the result information stored in the result information storage means, the lottery Means for controlling the variable display means so that the predetermined suggestion information is not displayed when lottery conditions different from the lottery conditions stored in the condition information storage means are obtained, and the lottery If the estimation result estimated by the result estimation means is to shift to the special gaming state, the estimation information transmitted by the estimation information transmitting means to the sub control means is the type of the special gaming state to be shifted. At least information that can be estimated is included.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect , the random number information acquiring means for acquiring the random number information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the random number information storing means for storing the random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means Using stored information acquisition means for acquiring one of the random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and one lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions set in advance Lottery determination means for determining the lottery result of the random number information to be acquired, fluctuation type determination means for determining the type of the fluctuation game to be executed based on the lottery result of the lottery determination means, and lottery result of the lottery determination means Main control means for performing main control relating to a game, including lottery condition setting means for setting lottery conditions of the lottery determination means when the special gaming state transitioning according to the game is ended The variable display means performs variable display according to the type of the variable game determined by the type determination means, and controls the variable display means for displaying predetermined suggestion information for performing predetermined suggestion to the player, and is controlled by the instruction from the main control means Sub-control means, and the main control means determines the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the distinction is made. A lottery result estimation means for estimating a lottery result when the random number information is determined by the lottery determination means using a lottery condition, and a lottery result using a predetermined lottery condition estimated by the lottery result estimation means In order to cause the sub-control means to determine the estimation result indicating the above, the estimated information transmitting means for transmitting the estimated information to the sub-control means, and the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means Means for transmitting the condition information to the sub-control means, the sub-control means receiving the estimation information transmitted by the estimation information transmission means of the main control means, and from the received estimation information Receiving result information storing means for storing result information indicating the lottery result of the random number information using the predetermined lottery condition to be determined, and condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means; Lottery condition information storage means for storing the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information, the lottery conditions used for determination of the result information stored in the result information storage means, and the lottery condition information storage means A variable control unit configured to control the variable display unit so that the predetermined suggestion information is not displayed when the random selection condition is different from the random selection condition; The estimation information transmitted by the estimation information transmission unit to the sub control unit when the estimation result to be estimated is the transition to the special game state is information capable of estimating the type of the special gaming state to be shifted There is an effect that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled, because

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the flow of jackpot production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the model which showed typically the structure of various counters and a holding ball storage area. FIG. 5 is a schematic view schematically showing data included in a prefetch command. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the data contained in fanfare command. It is the model which showed the structure of the prefetch information storage area typically. It is the model which showed the content of the continuous advance notice determination table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the ending production decision processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow by which the display mode of an ending production is determined in an ending production determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow by which the display mode of an ending production is determined in an ending production determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow by which the display mode of an ending production is determined in an ending production determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow by which the display mode of an ending production is determined in an ending production determination process. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the boot processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing fanfare command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which generate | occur | produces when determining the display mode of an ending production based only on the prediction result obtained by pre-reading. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which generate | occur | produces when determining the display mode of an ending production based only on the prediction result obtained by pre-reading. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which generate | occur | produces when determining the display mode of an ending production based only on the prediction result obtained by pre-reading. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the prefetch information storage area in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing of the voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing of the voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing of the voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow to which continuous notice execution status is changed by continuous notice execution status confirmation process A. FIG. It is the flow chart which showed continuation notice execution status confirmation processing B which is a modification of continuation notice execution status confirmation processing A performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice execution status check process D which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status check process A performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with entering the first ball entry port 64 described later (start winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage It is done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage" → → "island stage" → "in the city stage" → ... It changes repeatedly in the following order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  Although details will be described later, in this pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination), the lottery of the first symbol (special symbol) is performed, and whether it is a jackpot or not Judgment (big hit lottery) is performed. In this jackpot lottery, when it is determined to be a jackpot, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 2R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared.

  The “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state when the jackpot of the maximum round number 15 ends, “2R probability variation jackpot” is When the jackpot of 2 rounds of the maximum round number is finished, it is a probability change jackpot that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a state in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a low probability state when the jackpot of the maximum round number 15 ends, and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation times) ) Is a jackpot that becomes a short time condition.

  And "high probability state" refers to a state where the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (due to probability change), in other words, transition to the special game state jackpot It is a state of easy playing. The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the first ball entry 64 by increasing the probability of hitting the second symbol.

  On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability is not in a definite state, and means a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability state. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the “low probability state”, the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the hitting probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball enters the first entrance 64. It refers to the state of easy-to-ball game. In addition, while the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot, a jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased during or during a definite change, but instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Alternatively, the opening time of the motorized accessory (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64 or the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory associated with one jackpot may be changed.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. A plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not they are in the process of being fluctuated along with the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (start winning), or stop symbols after the end of fluctuation As the first symbol according to the result of the lottery that is performed for the starting winning combination is shown by the lighting state, or the ball that has not been executed among the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 The number of holding balls which is the number of) is shown by the lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors reduces the various gaming states (high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 with fewer LEDs. It is possible to display low probability state, middle hit, etc.). In addition, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, not the stop symbol indicating only the jackpot or the jackpot but the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed on the LED 37a.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that performs the fluctuation display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 by using the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”), and a second symbol symbol composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of the second entry port 67 A display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state is performed by the first symbol display device 37 in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 described later, while the third symbol display device 81 is a display of the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the display. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a jackpot, a variation display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed A jackpot is generated after the variable display ends. In the case of shifting to a high probability state (probability state) after the end of the jackpot, variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low probability state after the big hit ends, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to the "low probability symbols") to which the even number is added is aligned is performed.

  More specifically, if the lottery result is "15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot", the variation display in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added is aligned When the lottery result is "15R normal jackpot", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" which is an even number are added are aligned. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out, there is a case where a continuous advance notice effect is performed to suggest (high notice) that the possibility of becoming a jackpot is high, In that case, when the variable display is performed, a combination of predetermined main symbols (for example, on the effective line L1, the combination of the main symbols is "3" "4" "1" in order from the left symbol row Z1) The so-called "chance" is always displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 and scrolled from top to bottom (Y direction indicated by an arrow) with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 Display is done. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. A notice effect production is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball (start winning combination) to the 1st ball entrance 64 could be hold | held to a maximum of 4 times, the maximum number of holding balls is limited to 4 times Alternatively, it may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is different by the number of number-hold balls. (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Continuously, with reference to FIG. 5, the jackpot effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 5 (a) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot effect, and FIGS. 5 (b) and 5 (c) are display screens displayed in the ending effect which is a part of the jackpot effect. FIG.

  In the main control unit 110, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning combination), a big hit lottery is performed using it as a trigger, and thereafter, the first symbol (special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 Variable display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and as a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the first symbol display device In accordance with the change display of 37, the change display of the third symbol is performed.

  When variable display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, first, high-speed variable display of the third symbol is started, and thereafter, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds, etc.) When has passed, it switches to the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further switches to the low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, stop display in which the main symbols (third symbol) of the same number are aligned is performed, and the fluctuation effect is ended, and then the jackpot effect is started. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out, the stop display where the main symbol (third symbol) of the same number is not aligned is performed and the fluctuation effect is ended, if there is a start winning prize held, While the next jackpot lottery is performed, the next fluctuation production is started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the fanfare effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. The fanfare production is a production for notifying the player that the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit from now on, and enhances the player's sense of expectation. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on while blessing the jackpot. Further, the ending effect informs the player that the lottery result will be the big win in any of the big win lottery if the big win lottery is carried out based on the start winning prize being held with the big win ending (decisive effect display Or simply notifying the player that the jackpot has ended (normal display is performed).

  If the "finalized display" is performed in the ending effect, if the jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning after the jackpot is completed, the lottery result will be the jackpot in any jackpot lottery A sense of expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, after the jackpot is finished, the player can be made to rejoice every time the jackpot lottery based on the pending start winning is performed until the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result becomes the jackpot. In addition, even if the lottery result is out, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot is increased, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  When the jackpot effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, first, according to the timing when the stop display of the third symbol is made, the sound lamp control from the main control device 110 A fanfare command is transmitted to the device 113. Although details will be described later (see FIG. 9), the fanfare command includes information indicating the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. When the fanfare command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 starts the fanfare effect following the fluctuation effect.

  Next, at the timing when the fanfare effect ends, the main controller 110 transmits a round number command indicating the first round to the audio lamp control device 113. When the number-of-rounds command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the first round is started following the fanfare effect. In this embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot state is continued until the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated the number of times (two rounds or fifteen rounds) according to the jackpot type.

  After the first round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds has elapsed or 10 balls have been won) has elapsed. At the same time, the first round is over. Then, immediately after the start timing of the second round, the main controller 110 transmits a round number command indicating the second round to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started following the round effect corresponding to the first round. When the second round is started, as in the case of the first round, opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. After that, every time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. To be done. Thereby, each round presentation from the 1st round to the round (2 rounds or 15 rounds) according to jackpot classification is performed in order.

  Then, the ending command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening and closing of the specific winning combination opening 65a is all finished. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect. As described above, in the ending effect, when the jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning with the jackpot ending, the player is informed that the lottery result will be the jackpot in any jackpot lottery The player is informed (or the display is normally performed) that the jackpot is to be performed (the final effect display is performed) or that the jackpot is simply ended. Although details will be described later, it is determined in the sound lamp control device 113 whether “finalized display” or “normal display” is performed in the ending effect.

  When "normal display" is performed in the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), "Mot ne!" Is displayed in the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Ru. This screen means that the jackpot ends. Since the player can recognize that the jackpot ends when this screen is displayed, the player can prepare to return to the normal game.

  On the other hand, when "confirmed effect display" is performed in the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5C, "super chance!" In the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. This screen means that if any of the held jackpot lotterys is made, the lottery result will always be a jackpot.

  When this screen is displayed, it is possible for the player to recognize that the lottery result will be a jackpot if any lottery among the held jackpot lotterys is made after the jackpot is finished, so that the player can be assured It is possible for the player to have a feeling of expectation of becoming a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, it is possible to bring the player to a standstill every time a held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes a jackpot. In addition, even if the lottery result is out, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot is increased, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery of the second symbol performed in conjunction with the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67 is being executed by the lighting state, As the stop symbol after the end, the second symbol according to the lottery result of the second symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. It becomes a state (it is open | released), and as a result, it is comprised so that it may be in the state which a ball | bowl easily enters into the 1st ball entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. Ru. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 37 and the third symbol other than the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment. It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second ball entry port 67 is not limited to 4 times the maximum number of holding balls, similarly to the first ball entry port 64, not more than 3 times, or 5 times or more (for example, , 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. As described above, the first inlet 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  Therefore, when the time is short and the number of balls entering the first entrance 64 increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases accordingly, and as a result, even if the player plays a game, it is difficult to lose balls. Or, the balls will not be reduced. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state, the player can obtain a feeling that a big hit can be obtained in a state in which the balls are difficult to reduce or in a state in which the balls are not reduced. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and if the lottery result is a jackpot, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned to a stop symbol for the jackpot after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while being lighted, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a jackpot in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. At this jackpot, the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of jackpot which is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the award of gaming value. It will be.

  The special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, since the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a special winning opening 65a during the jackpot, a large number of balls enter the first ball entrance 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is making a big hit, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, a jackpot is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time a predetermined number of times is formed as a big hit as the opportunity for the ball to be won into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may do so.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are set by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to set the display of the big hit lottery, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display of the second symbol display device 83. used.

  In the jackpot lottery, and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, and the first hit type counter used for selection of the jackpot symbol C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS1 used to select a change pattern are used. The second random number counter C4 is used to set the display of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 26). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, a holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas) is provided in the RAM 203, and each of these areas is provided with a holding ball storage area 203b. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are respectively stored according to the timing of entering the first entrance 64 into the ball.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and then reached 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), Is stored in any one of the first to fourth areas for holding provided in the holding ball storage area 203b. The value of the jackpot random number is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the jackpot random number for the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches with the value (hit value), it is determined that the jackpot. The jackpot random number table 202a includes a jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (period in which the probability change is not in progress) Two types of jackpots for the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 used for high probability state (during definite variation) are prepared, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. As described above, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time and the high probability time by changing the number of random numbers to be jackpots.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (per wins) that will be the big wins at low probability is 3 and the value “7, 307, 582” is stored in the low probability big hit random number table 202a 1 ing. On the other hand, the number of random numbers (hit value) that will be a big hit in high probability is 30, the value “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390 , 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored in the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 .

  In the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 do not have overlapping values, Each has a set value. Here, regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, if there is a value that becomes a winning value, the value is easily predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of being jackpotted illegally may be increased. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, according to the low probability state or high probability state), by changing the value of the random number that will be the jackpot Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, And, each counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired, and then a big hit lottery is performed based on each obtained counter value, but the lottery result is predicted prior to the big hit lottery. It is done. Thereafter, prior to the jackpot lottery, it is described that the lottery result is predicted by predicting the lottery result. In this pre-reading, each counter value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is used to predict the success or failure of the jackpot lottery and the type thereof. The fluctuation pattern type is predicted by using the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thereafter, the success or failure of the jackpot lottery and the result of predicting the type thereof will be described as the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the result of predicting the fluctuation pattern type will be described as the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type.

  When the success or failure of the jackpot lottery is predicted in the pre-reading, similarly to the case of the jackpot lottery, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot random number set by the jackpot random number table 202a (hit value) A comparison with is made. Specifically, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of winning is a low probability state, while the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability time is referred to, while if the gaming state is a high probability state, for high probability time The jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to. Then, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 thus acquired matches the value (hit value) of the random number stored in the referred table, the lottery result is predicted (judged) as a big hit. .

  Then, after the pre-reading (in some cases, after a time interval is open), the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game of the pachinko machine 10 when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the counter value is started A jackpot lottery is performed based on the state. In the present embodiment, when the ball wins the first ball entry 64 (start winning) during the execution of the fluctuation effect or during the big hit, the winning (first winning) for the first ball entrance 64 is suspended The hold is done up to 4 times.

  And, when the fluctuation effect and the big hit which is under execution ends, if the starting winning a prize is suspended, one of the oldest among the jackpot lottery with the starting winning a prize which is on hold is executed. Similarly, while the starting winning combination is suspended, one big hit lottery with the starting winning combination being held is executed one by one each time the variable effect being executed and the big hit end.

  Therefore, if the start winning is already suspended when the ball newly wins at the first entry slot 64 (start winning), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning is pre-read, By the time the jackpot lottery with the new starting winning combination is performed, the already held jackpot lottery is performed. Even if the jackpot lottery already held is performed, if the lottery result is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the jackpot type, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes Sometimes. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, a jackpot lottery with a new start winning is performed in the gaming state after the change, so the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to at the time of prefetching and at the time of lottery are one. Even if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the predicted result does not match the actual lottery result.

  The first collision type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing) and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in any one of the holding areas of the first to fourth holding areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is not a large random number, that is, if it is a random number falling out, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of removal. In this case, the stop type at the time of removal is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area, and the change pattern at the time of removal is the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and It is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that makes a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the type of stop in the change production become the one at the big hit . In this case, the stop type at the time of the big hit is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same hold area, and the change pattern at the time of the big hit is the first hit type stored in the same hold area It is determined based on the values of the counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1.

  The value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first collision type counter C 2 and the jackpot type table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot “15R probability variation jackpot”, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot and 100 During the number of times of fluctuation, there are "15R normal jackpots" that are short-lived, and there are "2R probability variation jackpots" in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpots.

  In the jackpot type table, each jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, the value "0 to 39" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit, and the value "40 to 79" of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to the 15R normal jackpot. The value "80 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is "20" If the 15R normal jackpot is determined, and the value of the first collision type counter C2 is "90", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected with a probability of 40% when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R regular jackpot is selected with the probability of 40 percent, and the 2R probability variation jackpot is selected with the probability of 20%. . The probability that each jackpot type is selected when it is a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first collision type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type displayed at the third symbol display device 81 at the time of detachment, and after reach is generated, the final stop symbol shifts by only one before and after the reach symbol. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in any one of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C 3, a plurality of stop type selection tables (not shown) are provided in the ROM 202 that differ for each table in the range of random number values for which the stop type is selected. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is selected so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated. It becomes easy to be selected as "complete removal". In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, a table with a narrow range of random numbers from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is selected to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64. And it becomes difficult to select "completely out". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than back and forth deviation" is wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than back and forth deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines fluctuation patterns such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach and the like by the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the reach type or the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Determine the variation mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a variation pattern table, a variation pattern table for big hit used at the time of big hit and a variation pattern table for removal used at the time of removal are prepared. Also, as a variation pattern table for removal, the variation pattern for removal (probability variation) depending on whether the gaming state is a short time state or a high probability state at a definite change, or a normal low probability state excluding a time reduction state. A table and an off (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table are prepared.

  For example, the jackpot variation pattern table is divided into groups based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is divided into 15R jackpot common to be referred to when the 15R probability variable jackpot and 15R regular jackpot are determined as the jackpot type, and 2R probability variable jackpot dedicated to be referred to when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined. There is. The values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are associated with the divided groups. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value (per-hit value) that makes a big hit, the hold area according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same hold area The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the is determined from the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

  There are various normal reach, various super reach, and various special reach in 15R jackpot common, and correspondence with the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for normal reach, 11 to 99 for various super reach, and various special reach It is 100 to 198. The Norlech variety is a reach where the fluctuation time is short, and after the short reach, the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned (so-called, the symbol is aligned with a stop at the bitter end). This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than normal reach (for example, reach extending from long reach or normal reach), and various special reach variations are longer than super reach. It is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the time reach (for example, a reach that develops further after a super reach or a special reach where a destination from a normal reach differs from a super reach). Since the 15R jackpot common table is selected in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot, in order to give the player a sense of expectation, it is easy to select the special reach. However, by configuring so that various types of normal reach and various types of super reach are selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  In addition, "reach various" means that there are many things that effect contents differ also in each reach, for example, in the super reach, the reach which changes the back image rapidly and is displayed, and a certain character There is a reach to be displayed suddenly, etc. In addition to that, there are multiple reach with different effects, such as the one to which a notice effect before the start of fluctuation is added, and the one to which a jackpot effect by re-change is added.

  2R fluctuations A to C are provided exclusively for 2R probability variation jackpots, and 2R fluctuation A is 0 to 99, 2R fluctuation B is 100 to 149, and 2R fluctuation C is associated with the value of fluctuation type counter CS1. It is 150 to 198. Note that 2R fluctuation A is, for example, an effect that the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops with a specific symbol with "chicken", and 2R fluctuation B does not normally appear " It is an effect that the final first symbol (or the third symbol) stops with a specific symbol with the girl 'and the 2R fluctuation C is the final first symbol with the lighting of the above-mentioned one-shot notification lamp. It is an effect that the symbol (or the third symbol) is stopped at a specific symbol.

  In addition, although the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, it may be determined by another fluctuation type counter whether or not to add a notice effect for giving notice of the start of a jackpot or reach effect before the start of a change or during a change effect, or when reach is established, The number of first symbols (or third symbols) to be stopped may be determined by shifting the number of symbols and stopping (for example, one symbol offset or the like).

  Then, for example, the out-of-order (normally) fluctuation pattern table is a complete out-only only to be referred to when the complete out is determined as the out type of stop at the out, and a case other than the front and back out of reach and the front and back out of reach. It is divided into groups (groups) based on reach common referred to and stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the first random number counter C1 is not a jackpot value (hit value), that is, it is a value that is out, and the gaming state is in the normal low probability state excluding the time saving state, According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the first random number counter C1, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is It is determined from the outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern.

  For complete dedication only, there are short deviances in which the fluctuation ends in a short time and reach does not hold, and long deductions that cause a longer fluctuation time than the short declination, but with a value of fluctuation type counter CS1. As for the correspondence, the short gap is 0 to 148, and the long gap is 149 to 198. Also, common to reach, the reach is established but the fluctuation time is short, and the normal reach which is short and the fluctuation time which is longer than the normal reach, the various super reach which is longer than the various There are various reach types, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 148 for out-of-normal reach types, 149 to 190 for out-of-order super reach types, and 191 to 198 for out-of-order special reach types.

  In addition, the out-of-order (probability change) fluctuation pattern table is referred to when the complete outfall is determined as the stop type at the same time as the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table. Referenced when out-of-bound and out-of-front and out-of-front and out-of-front non-reach reach is determined, based on reach common with out-of-bounds normal reach, out-of-bounds super reach and out-of-back special reach, and based on exit type Are divided into groups (groups), and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that does not make a big hit, that is, it is a value that comes off, and the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of definite variation, it is stored in the same holding area According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is determined from the out-of-order (probable change) change pattern.

  The correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the complete deviation exclusive use is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. Further, the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in common to reach is 0 to 148 for various types of out-of-normal reach, 149 to 190 for various types of out-of-super reach, and 191 to 198 for various types of out-of-order special reach.

  This out-of-order (probable change) fluctuation pattern table is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is in a short time state or a high probability state at the time of definite change, so that the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64 Become. Therefore, if a long interval is frequently performed while in the time saving state or the high probability state, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, giving the player a waiting state, which gives the player an unpleasant feeling. there is a possibility. In addition, it is not preferable because the operation rate decreases as a hole. Therefore, when the gaming state is a short time state or a high probability state at the time of definite variation, the short gap is configured to be more easily selected than in the other cases, and the game is started by performing the next variable display early. Can reduce the possibility of giving discomfort to people. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

  Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination (selection of presence / absence of advance notice, etc. may be selected). Also, although the selection of the outlier type is divided into the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table and the outlier (probability change) fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of holding balls (for example, even if the gaming state is normal) In the case of a maximum of four, three or more) may end the fluctuation display early, so it may be selected by referring to the out-of-order (probability change) fluctuation pattern table, or the number of holding balls It may be configured to prepare a variation pattern table for normal use or probability variation corresponding to.

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned variation pattern table for each deviation, if short deviation and long deviation are simply regarded as deviation, and the deviation is selected, the other table is referred to, and the short deviation and the long deviation have a predetermined probability. It may be configured to select at. Of course, also in this case, a table corresponding to the number of holding balls may be prepared.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right. It is acquired when it is done. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, it is determined to be won when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5-153", and the symbol "o" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) in the second symbol display device 83. Is lighted and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. Note that the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and setting of display on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Referring back to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 26), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes a gaming state flag 203a, a holding ball storage area 203b, a holding ball number counter 203c, a large hitting after game state flag 203d, a big hitting middle flag 203e, a prefetch execution flag 203f, and a big hitting middle winning flag 203g. And at least.

  The gaming state flag 203a is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or in a high probability state (during a definite change). If the gaming state flag 203a is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, and if the gaming state flag 203a is on, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state Indicates This gaming state flag 203a refers to the above-mentioned high probability large hitting random number table 202a1 or the high probability large hitting random number table 202a1 when performing a big hit lottery or when prefetching a lottery result of the big hit lottery It is used by the MPU 201 to determine whether to do so.

  Specifically, when the jackpot lottery is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is off, the jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1. On the other hand, when the jackpot lottery is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the jackpot random selection table 202a2 for high probability is referred to, and the jackpot lottery is performed. Although details will be described later, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is read ahead, not only the state of the gaming state flag 203a but also the state of the big hit after-game state flag 203d and the big hit middle winning flag 203g described later are added. It is determined whether to refer to the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 or to refer to the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2, and the determined tables 202a1 and 202a2 are referred to, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is Read ahead.

  The gaming state flag 203a is set to off by the initial setting process (see S714 of FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Also, when a jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10, it is set to off (see S316 in FIG. 21). Then, a jackpot lottery is performed, and when the lottery result becomes a probability variation jackpot, when the jackpot ends, the gaming state flag 203a is set to ON (see S916 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, even if the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is a jackpot, if the jackpot type is normally a jackpot, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is not changed even if the jackpot ends (FIG. See S915: No). Further, even when the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is out, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is not changed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is normally a jackpot, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is not changed even if the jackpot is completed. However, the game state flag 203a may be set to OFF (overwrite) when the jackpot is finished (see S915 in FIG. 27: No). That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a may be updated (re-set) each time the jackpot lottery is performed.

  The holding ball storage area 203b is configured of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas) (see FIG. 7). In each of these areas, a first per-random-number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the first per-random-number counter C1 and a first per-class counter storage area 203b2 for storing the first per-class counter C2; A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a game state flag 203a at the time of winning are stored as a winning game state flag The game condition flag storage area 203b5 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, the change type counter storage area 203b4, and the winning game condition flag storage Although the area 203b5 is provided in one holding ball storage area 203b, a plurality of holding ball storage areas are provided, and each of the five areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4, 203b5 is used as a holding ball storage area It may be provided in

  As described above, when the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing of the winning, and they are held by the holding ball storage area 203b. It is stored in the area. In addition to this, in the present embodiment, the gaming state flag 203a is acquired at the winning timing, and the gaming state flag 203a is stored as the winning game state flag, and the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored. It is stored in the pending area. Here, the value stored in the reserve area is used in the case of prefetching the lottery result of the big hit lottery and in the case of performing the big hit lottery. The pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery will be described later.

  In this holding ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the winning game state flag) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is maximum It is stored up to 4 times. In addition, when data is stored, the data is sequentially arranged from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserve areas (first to fourth reserved areas). It is memorized. That is, as the area number decreases, data corresponding to the start winning combination that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data that corresponds to the oldest starting winning combination in time is stored. When data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored even if the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning).

  Then, when the MPU 201 determines that it has come to the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, the data stored in the holding first area of the holding ball storage area 203b (the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the game upon winning) The status flag is shifted (moved) to each of the execution areas 203b1 to 203b5. Then, the data shifted to the execution area is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22), and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a fluctuation effect is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and the stop type.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Here, the details of the data shift will be described. If the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start the execution of the variation effect, it shifts the random number value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area to the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the execution area. Similarly, the random number value of the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the hold first area is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the execution area, and the randomness of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the hold first area The numerical value is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the execution area, the random number value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 of the hold first area is shifted to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 of the execution area, and the hold first area The state of the winning game state flag storage area 203b5 is shifted to the winning game state flag storage area 203b5 of the execution area.

  Then, when the shift of each data to the execution area is completed, the pending first area becomes empty, so the data stored (held) in the other pending areas (pending 2nd area to 4th pending area) is stored. , Shift processing is performed to pack in a small holding area (holding first area to holding third area) with a small area number. In the present embodiment, in the holding ball storage area 203b, data shift is performed only for the holding areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held).

  For example, it is assumed that data is stored in all the holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) in the holding ball storage area 203b when it is determined that the start of the variation effect is performed (the holding ball number counter described later The value of 203c becomes “4”). In this case, when the data of the holding first area is shifted to the execution area and the holding first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 respectively displays the data of the other holding areas (the holding second area to the holding fourth area). , Shift the area number to one smaller holding area (holding first area to holding third area). That is, the data of the holding second area is shifted to the holding first area, the data of the holding third area is shifted to the holding second area, and the data of the holding fourth area is shifted to the holding third area.

  Also, for example, when data is stored only in the two holding areas of the first holding area and the second holding area when the judgment of the start of the change effect is performed (the value of the holding ball number counter 203c described later) Becomes “2”), the MPU 201 shifts only the data of the reserved second area to the reserved first area to complete the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift process is not performed for the holding area (hold third area to hold fourth area) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. Control burdens can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the hold area (hold second area to hold fourth area) may be configured to be shifted to a hold area with a smaller area number, respectively. In that case, since the determination as to whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (the holding second area to the holding fourth area) is unnecessary, the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the program can be reduced, and the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  The holding ball number counter 203c is a variation effect (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waits) up to four times. The holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S613 in FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, one is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S204 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation effect is newly executed (see S306 in FIG. 21).

  The value of the holding ball number counter 203c (that is, the holding ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 20). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the starting winning is detected and the holding ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the value of the number of holding times of the fluctuation effect itself held by the main control unit 110 by the holding ball number command. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can manage the number of holdings of the variable effect without accessing the main control device 110. Also, every time when the start winning is detected, the main ball controller 110 transmits a ball number command for holding balls to the sound lamp control device 113 so that the number of holding balls of the fluctuation effect managed in the sound lamp control device 113 is noise. Even if the main ball control unit 110 deviates from the actual number of balls held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of the etc., it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the ball number command received next.

  The jackpot after game state flag 203d is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or a high probability state when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot and the jackpot ends. If the jackpot after game state flag 203d is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in the low probability state when the jackpot is finished, if the jackpot after game state flag 203d is on, the jackpot ends When it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be a high probability state.

  The jackpot after game state flag 203 d is used by the MPU 201 when a jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10. Although the details will be described later, when the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 transmits a fanfare command for notifying the start of the jackpot or the like to the audio lamp control device 113. In that case, the MPU 201 generates the fanfare command based on the jackpot after game state flag 203d. Although details will be described later, the jackpot after game state flag 203d is also read ahead when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched based on the data stored in the hold area of the hold ball storage area 203b described above. It is used by MPU201 that the data used as a target of was acquired with the starting winning combination during a big hit.

  The jackpot after game state flag 203d is set to an initial value as an initial value by an initial setting process (see S714 of FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Further, the jackpot after game state flag 203d is set to ON when it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the jackpot type is determined to be a probability variation jackpot (see S410 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the big hit post game state flag 203d is set to off when it is determined that the big hit type is normally a big hit (see S411 in FIG. 22). When it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the state of the flag 203d does not change.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is determined to be a probability variation jackpot, or when the jackpot type is determined to be a normal jackpot, it is configured to set the state of the jackpot after gaming state flag 203d The state of the flag 203d may be set before the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot type is determined.

  The jackpot middle flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot. When the big hit flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in big hit, and when the big hit flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is big hit. The jackpot flag 203 e is used to determine whether the winning has occurred during the jackpot or outside the jackpot when the ball has won (start winning) at the first entrance 64. Used by

  In the present embodiment, when the big winning flag 203e is on when the ball is won (start winning) at the first ball entry port 64, it is assumed that the winning occurred during the big hit, and the ball enters the first ball. When the jackpot 64 is a prize (start prize) and the jackpot middle flag 203e is off, it is assumed that the prize has occurred other than during a jackpot.

  The jackpot flag 203e is set to an initial value as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S714 of FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. The jackpot flag 203d is set to ON when jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10 (see S315 in FIG. 21), and is set to OFF when the jackpot is ended (see S914 in FIG. 27).

  The prefetch execution flag 203 f is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched for the new entering ball when the ball newly enters the first entrance 64. When the prefetch execution flag 203f is on, it indicates that the lottery result of the big hit lottery is prefetched for the new entering ball, and when the prefetch execution flag 203f is off, the lottery result of the big hitting lottery is about the new entering ball. Indicates not to read ahead.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of holding times of winnings (starting winnings) to the first entrance 64 has reached the maximum value (four times in the present embodiment), the ball enters the first entering. Even if a new ball enters the ball mouth 64, no further start winnings are held. That is, even if the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the counter value etc. associated with the ball (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a) are not acquired, and they are It does not hold in the holding ball storage area 203b.

  The prefetch execution flag 203 f is used by the MPU 201 to determine whether or not to prefetch the lottery result of the big hit lottery for a new entering ball when the ball newly enters the first entrance 64. Then, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, except for the new ball entry, if the above-mentioned holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (ie, it is not the maximum value), pre-reading The execution flag 203f is set to on (see S210 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, except for the new ball entry, if the above-mentioned holding ball number counter 203c is 4 (ie, if it is the maximum value), pre-read execution is performed The flag 203 f is kept off (see S 203 in FIG. 20: No). In addition, after the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to ON, when prefetching of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is ended, it is set to OFF (see S516 in FIG. 23).

  In this embodiment, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set. However, in the state of the flag 203f, the ball enters the first entry. It may be configured to be set after entering the ball opening 64 until the prefetch execution process (see S107 in FIG. 19) described later is executed.

  In the big hit medium winning flag 203g, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and a winning game state flag) obtained in conjunction with a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 is a big hit It is a flag indicating whether it has been acquired by the start winning combination in the middle, or acquired or obtained by the winning combination other than the jackpot.

  When the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on, it indicates that the data acquired in conjunction with the first entry ball slot 64 winning start (start winning combination) is obtained by the big hit starting winning combination, the big hit When the middle prize flag 203g is off, it indicates that the data acquired as a result of winning (start winning) at the first ball entry port 64 is obtained by a starting winning other than during a big hit. When the jackpot result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched, the jackpot flag 203g refers to the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability or performs the prefetch referring to the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability. It is used by the MPU 201 to determine what to do.

  The MPU 201 determines the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to in the prefetching, based on the state of the above-mentioned winning-time gaming state flag (that is, the winning-time gaming state flag 203a) when the big hit medium winning flag 203g is off. On the other hand, when the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to in the pre-reading are determined based on the state of the big hit after-game status flag 203d described above.

  More specifically, if the winning game state flag is off when the big hit medium winning flag 203g is off, while the low probability time jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to, the big hit middle winning flag 203g is off In this case, if the winning game state flag is on, the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 is referred to, and the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is performed.

  Also, when the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on, if the big hit after game state flag 203d is off, while the low probability time big hit random number table 202a1 is referenced, if the big hit middle winning flag 203g is on, If the jackpot-after game state flag 203d is on, the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to, and prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In this big hit middle winning flag 203g, when the ball newly enters the first entrance ball slot 64, except for the new entering ball, the above-mentioned holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (i.e., If the jackpot flag 203e is on (that is, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot), it is set to ON (see S210 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 anew, except for the new ball entry, the above-mentioned holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (that is, unless it is the maximum value) Further, if the big hit medium flag 203e is off (ie, the pachinko machine 10 is not big hit), it is set to off (see S211 in FIG. 20). In addition, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 anew, except for the new ball entry, if the number of balls holding counter 203c is 4 (ie, if it is the maximum value), during a large hit The state of the winning flag 203g is not changed (see S203: No in FIG. 20).

  In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, it is configured to set the state of the big hit medium winning flag 203g, but in the state of the flag 203g, the ball is the first It may be configured to be set after entering the ball entrance 64 and before the pre-reading execution process (see S107 in FIG. 19) described later is executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Next, the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed in the main control unit 110 and the prefetching command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 when the prefetching is performed will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball wins to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the gaming state flag 203a (that is, the winning game state flag) Is acquired and stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern type are prefetched prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data.

  If the result of the lottery is predicted, first, one of the two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 is used for prediction, and thereafter, as in the case of the jackpot lottery, the acquired first The value of the random number counter C1 per 1 is compared with the value (percent value) of the random numbers stored in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prediction, and if any matches, it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit It is predicted (judged).

  In the present embodiment, if the data acquired as a result of the start winning is obtained by a start winning other than a big hit, it may be determined whether the gaming state at the time of the winning was a low probability state or a high probability state. Whether or not it is determined is determined, and if the gaming state at the time of winning is in the low probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability time is used to predict success or failure. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning is in the high probability state, the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 is used to predict the success or failure.

  More specifically, when the jackpot middle winning flag 203g is off, if the winning at game state flag in the data acquired along with the winning is off, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability is used If the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability is used to predict the success or failure.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the data acquired in connection with the start winning is obtained by the start winning during the big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the end of the big hit. It is determined whether it is set or set to a high probability state, and if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a low probability state at the end of the jackpot, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability time is used to predict success or failure Be done. On the other hand, if the gaming state is in a high probability state at the end of the big hit, the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is used to predict whether it is acceptable or not.

  More specifically, if the jackpot after game flag 203g is on, if the jackpot after game state flag 203d is off, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability is used to predict success or failure, and after the jackpot game If the state flag 203d is on, the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 is used to predict whether it is acceptable or not. In addition, the reason why the method of determining the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is changed depending on whether the data acquired along with the starting winning combination is acquired by the starting winning combination during the big hit or the winning combination other than the big hitting among the winning combinations Will be described later.

  Then, the success or failure of the lottery result is predicted, and as a result, when the jackpot is predicted, the jackpot type is further predicted. When the jackpot type is predicted, as in the case of the jackpot lottery, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the jackpot type table (not shown). And the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is determined (predicted). On the other hand, when it is predicted that the lottery result is out of order, the type of stop at the time of out is predicted. Even when the stop type at the time of disconnection is predicted, the value of the acquired stop pattern selection counter C3 and the value of the random number stored in the stop type selection table (not shown) as in the case of the jackpot lottery And the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is determined (predicted).

  Also, even when the variation pattern type is predicted, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the variation pattern table, as in the case of the big hit lottery, and the variation type The fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the value of the counter CS1 is determined (predicted).

  Then, as described above, when prefetching is executed in main controller 110 and the yes / no and its type and variation pattern type are predicted, the prefetch command including the prediction result is voiced from main controller 110 The lamp controller 113 is notified. The prefetch command will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect with respect to the series of fluctuation effects pending at that time. Then, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be performed, setting of an aspect of the continuous advance notice effect is also performed.

  Here, the continuous advance notice effect will be described. The continuous advance notice effect is a type of advance notice effect that indicates that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed with the winning (opening start) to the first entrance 64 is likely to be a jackpot (notice), It is an effect that a chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the fluctuation effect over all the fluctuation effects held at the time of winning. If this continuous advance notice effect is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the pending variable effects, the player is expected to feel a big hit after all the pending changed effects are finished. It can be held against. In the present embodiment, when continuous notice effects are performed over all the change effects pending at the time of winning, the chance eyes are displayed in each change effect, but the same character or the same in each change effect You may comprise so that the character relevant to a character may be displayed. In addition, the number of the same character or the number of characters related to the same character may be displayed so as to be increased each time the variation effects are performed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that a change effect different from the normal one has been performed, and therefore can recognize that a continuous advance notice effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation to be a big hit after all the suspended change effects are finished.

  In the present embodiment, when execution of continuous advance notice effects is set for the pending change effects, the chance symbol (for example, a figure as a stop symbol when the change effects are finished in the third symbol display device 81) On the effective line L1 shown in 4, “3”, “4” and “1”) are displayed in order of the combination of main symbols from the left symbol row Z1. Then, among the series of fluctuation effects for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, for the last fluctuation effect, the display of the chance eye is not performed as the stop symbol, and the original stop symbol is displayed as it is.

  In general, the player pays attention to the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to play a game, so by displaying the chance eyes continuously as a stop symbol appearing after stopping the fluctuation effect. The player can easily recognize that the continuous advance presentation effect has been performed. In addition, even if the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot does not appear as the stop symbol, the chance eye is displayed, thereby providing the player with an expectation that the jackpot will be a jackpot after the continuous advance notice effect is finished. You can have it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the prefetch command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is prefetched in the main controller 110 will be described. The prefetch command is the prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by the prefetching (the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type in the case of jackpot, the stop classification when outliers, the variation pattern type), and the lottery result in the prefetching In the command to notify the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control unit 110 the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as "prediction assumption"), which is the precondition for the prediction when predicting is there.

  In this embodiment, when the prediction precondition is the low probability state, it indicates that the lottery result is predicted under the precondition that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state. Specifically, it means that the lottery result is predicted by using the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 in the main control device 110. On the other hand, when the prediction precondition is the high probability state, it indicates that the lottery result is predicted under the precondition that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state. Specifically, it means that the lottery result is predicted by using the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 in the main control device 110.

  FIG. 8 is a schematic view schematically showing data included in the prefetch command. In FIG. 8, the left direction in the drawing is the upper bit direction of data, and the right direction is the lower bit direction of data. In this embodiment, each command is composed of 2 bytes regardless of the type of command, and in the upper 1 byte, data indicating the type of the command is stored, and in the lower 1 byte , And data to be parameters of the command are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, data indicating that the command is a prefetch command is stored in the upper 1 byte of the prefetch command, and data that is a parameter of the prefetch command is stored in the lower 1 byte. It is done.

  Specifically, the prediction precondition for read ahead is indicated by the most significant bit of the 8 bits constituting the lower 1 byte. Also, the lower 3 bits following the most significant bit indicate the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the lower 3 bits following the 3 bits indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicate the variation pattern type prediction result Indicated. Other information is shown for the least significant 1 bit.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b1), if “0” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, the prediction precondition for read ahead indicates that the state is a low probability state, and the most significant bit of the lower byte is If "1" is stored, it indicates that the state is a high probability state. In other words, if the most significant bit of the lower byte is “0”, this means that the lottery result is predicted in main controller 110 using jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability, and the lowermost byte has the highest value. When the upper bit is “1”, it means that the lottery result has been predicted by using the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 in the main control device 110.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine, based on the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command, which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to perform the prediction result indicated by the prefetch command.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b 2), the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “complete out of reach” which does not become reach if “000” is stored in the lower 3 bits following the most significant bit of the lower byte, as shown in FIG. Show. Similarly, if "001" is stored, it indicates that it is a "back and forth" that causes the back and forth reach, and if "010" is stored, and that if it is "back and forth" that causes a reach other than "back and forth" Indicates that it is "other reach", "01 1" indicates that it is "15R normal jackpot" if it is stored, and "100" indicates that it is "2 probability variation jackpot" if it is stored. If "101" is stored, it indicates "15R probability variation jackpot".

  As the prediction result of the variation pattern type, as shown in FIG. 8 (b3), among the lower 1 byte of the prefetch command, “000” is stored in the lower 3 bits following 3 bits indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. If it does, it indicates that it is off (short out). Similarly, if "001" is stored, it indicates that it is out (long out), and if "010" is stored, it indicates that it is normal reach, and if "011" is stored, it is super reach And “100” is stored to indicate that it is a special reach.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when start winning is detected, the pre-reading process is executed by the main control unit 110, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern judgment predicted by the pre-reading is included in the pre-reading command By transmitting to the lamp control device 113, more versatile control can be realized in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the normal reach, the super reach and the special reach are configured to include both the jackpot case and the outlier case, but each reach in the case of the jackpot and each reach in the case of the outfall And may be divided. Each reach in the case of the jackpot and each reach in the case of disengagement are separately configured, and further, the execution judgment of the continuous advance presentation effect in the audio lamp control device 113 is also considered in consideration of the prediction result of the variation pattern type If configured to be performed, it is possible to perform the execution judgment of the continuous advance presentation effects on finer conditions by increasing the types of the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type notified by the prefetch command. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the control requiring the pre-reading, the control in the audio lamp control device 113 can be performed more variably.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 does not notify the voice lamp control unit 113 from the pre-read command only whether it is simply a loss or a jackpot as a prediction result of the jackpot lottery, but in the case of a miss, "" Reach before or after "outside back", "not reach back and forth outside" notification, in the case of the jackpot, "15R regular jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" or "15R probability variation jackpot" to notify There is. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform the execution judgment of the continuous advance presentation effect, which will be described later, in more detailed conditions, as compared with the case of notifying whether it is simply a loss or a jackpot as a prediction result of the jackpot lottery. It is possible to diversify the control that requires pre-reading, for example. Therefore, control in the audio lamp control device 113 can be performed more colorfully.

  In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the main controller 110 is notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by dividing into 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and 15R probability variation jackpot. Of course, the prefetch command may be configured to simply notify that it is a jackpot. In addition, according to the maximum number of rounds that occur in the big hit, “15R big hit” (15R normal big hit and 15R probability variation big hit correspond) and “2R big hit” (2R probability variation big hit corresponds), main controller 110 The preread command may be configured to notify the sound lamp control device 113 from the above. Alternatively, depending on whether the gaming state to be transferred after the big hit is a high probability state, divided into "probably big hit" (15R positive variation big hit and 2R positive variation big hit are applicable) and "normal big hit" (15R normal big hit is applicable) The pre-read command may be configured to notify the audio lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out, the main control unit 110 is notified from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 by dividing it into complete out, back and forth reach, and back and forth out of reach. Of course, the pre-read command may be configured to notify that it is simply out. Also, the read ahead command may be configured to be divided into off reach generation and complete off. If the information content to be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 is reduced as compared with the case of the present embodiment by configuring in this manner, the audio lamp control device 113 performs processing based on the jackpot lottery prediction result of the present embodiment. It can be simplified than in the case. Therefore, in this case, while making the voice lamp control device 113 perform control relating to pre-reading, it is possible to suppress an increase in control burden relating to pre-reading and make the processing capacity of the voice lamp control device 113 directed to other control. . Therefore, while performing control by prefetching, it is possible to achieve diversification of effects that do not require prefetching.

  Further, if the information content to be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 in the jackpot lottery prediction result of the pre-read command is simply reduced to a "big hit" or "out", the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Then, the process based on the jackpot lottery prediction result can be simplified as compared to the case of the present embodiment. Therefore, in this case, while making the voice lamp control device 113 perform control relating to pre-reading, it is possible to suppress an increase in control burden relating to pre-reading and make the processing capacity of the voice lamp control device 113 directed to other control. . Therefore, while performing control by prefetching, it is possible to achieve diversification of effects that do not require prefetching.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the fanfare command transmitted from main controller 110 to audio lamp control device 113 when the lottery result of the big hit lottery in main controller 110 is a big win will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic view schematically showing data included in the fanfare command. As in the case of FIG. 8, in FIG. 9, the left direction in the drawing is the upper bit direction of data, and the right direction is the lower bit direction of data. Further, in the upper one byte of the two-byte command, data indicating the type of the command is stored, and in the lower one byte, data serving as a parameter of the command is stored.

  As described above, the fanfare command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110 of the start of the fanfare effect and the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit . Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, and then the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare command is sent from the main control device 110 It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this embodiment, the fanfare command includes information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fanfare command from the fanfare command. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the present jackpot is acquired. Although the details will be described later, the gaming state acquired here is referred to when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode as to whether to perform “finalized display” or “normal display” in the ending effect. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the upper 1 byte of the fanfare command stores data indicating that the command is a fanfare command, and the lower 1 byte stores data serving as a parameter of the fanfare command. It is done.

  Specifically, the gaming state to be set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is indicated by the most significant bit of the 8 bits constituting the lower 1 byte. That is, the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present jackpot is shown. Other information is indicated in the other lower 7 bits following the most significant bit. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), if "0" is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the "low probability state" at the end of the current big hit. If “1” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “high probability state” at the end of the current big hit.

  Then, when the fanfare command is generated in the main control unit 110, if the above-mentioned big hit after game state flag 203d is off, "0" is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, and the big hit after game state flag 203d Is on, “1” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command, but instead of the fanfare command, the variation is changed. The main controller 110 may notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit by the pattern command, stop type command, round number command, or ending command. . That is, after the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot in the main control unit 110 and the jackpot type is determined, the main control unit is determined until the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the sound lamp control unit 113. As long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by the audio lamp control device 113, any command may be used for notification. In addition to the fanfare command, a command to notify the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is provided, and the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command, but When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command notified from the control device 110, it is set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on what the stop type indicated by the stop type command is. The sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine the playing state.

  That is, in the main control device 110, when the jackpot lottery is performed, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern and the determined stop type A stop type command indicative of is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, when the stop type corresponding to the lottery result is determined, if the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, the big hit type is determined, so whether the present big hit is a probability change big hit by the stop type command It is indicated whether it is a jackpot. Therefore, when the stop type command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on what the stop type indicated by the stop type command is. .

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 at least stores a continuous advance judging table 222a. Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the holding ball number counter 223b, the big hit after game state flag 223c, the change start flag 223d, the stop type selection flag 223e, the ending mode counter 223f, a continuous notice lottery counter 223g, a continuous notice frequency counter 223h, and a after-notice jackpot flag 223i are provided. For convenience of explanation, the description of the continuous notice determination table 222a of the ROM 222 will be made after the continuous notice lottery counter 223g of the RAM 223 is described.

  The prefetch information storage area 223a is an area for storing various information (predicting preconditions for prefetching, prediction results of jackpot lottery, prediction results of variation pattern type) notified from the main control device 110 by the above-described prefetch command. is there.

  Here, details of the pre-reading information storage area 223a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the pre-reading information storage area 223a. The prefetch information storage area 223a has five areas of one execution area and four reserve areas (preserve first area to reserve fourth area). In each of these areas, at least a big hit lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, a variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and a prediction precondition storage area 223a3 are provided.

  The jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 is an area for storing information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery described above, and the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 is information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type described above It is an area for storing. The prediction precondition storage area 223a3 is an area for storing information indicating the above-described prediction precondition of the prefetching. Each area of the pre-read information storage area 223a is initialized in the process of setting the initial value of the RAM (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is cleared to 0.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110, various information (prefetch preconditions, jackpot lottery prediction results, and variation pattern type prediction results) from the prefetch commands are received. Is extracted as prefetching information, and the extracted prefetching information is stored in the prefetching information storage area 223a.

  Although details will be described later, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the main control device performs prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, only the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are voice lamp control The device was not notified. However, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 110 performs prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, in addition to the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type, further, the prediction precondition of prefetching Is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113, and each information is stored in the same hold area in the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Therefore, referring to the data stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 for each reserve area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the same reserve area and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are It is possible to determine what kind of prediction preconditions have been read ahead. That is, it is possible to determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 the prefetching has been performed in the main control device 110.

  When the extracted prefetch information is stored in the hold area, the area numbers (first to fourth) of the vacant areas of the four hold areas (first to fourth hold areas) are stored. Data is stored in order from the small area. That is, as the area number decreases, data corresponding to the start winning combination that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data that corresponds to the oldest starting winning combination in time is stored.

  More specifically, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 stores the same data (see FIG. 8 (b2)) as the data indicating the jackpot lottery prediction result included in the prefetch command. Specifically, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the pre-reading command is completely out, "000" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1. Similarly, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of back and forth reach, "001" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and the jackpot lottery prediction result is the reach other than back and forth, the jackpot lottery If "010" is stored in the prediction result storage area 223a1 and the prediction result of the big hit lottery is 15R normal big hit, "011" is stored in the big hit lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and the prediction result of the big hit lottery is In the case of 2R probability variation jackpot, "100" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 is "101" when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is 15R probability fluctuation jackpot Is stored.

  Similarly, in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, the same data (see (b3) in FIG. 8) as the data indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type included in the prefetch command is stored. Specifically, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the pre-read command is out (short), "000" is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2. Similarly, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is out (long), "001" is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, "010" is stored in the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and "011" is stored in the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 when the variation pattern type prediction result is super reach, and the variation pattern is stored. When the prediction result of the type is the special reach, “100” is stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2.

  Then, in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3, the same data (see FIG. 8 (b1)) as the data indicating the prediction precondition included in the prefetch command is similarly stored. Specifically, when the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command is in the low probability state, “0” is stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3. Similarly, when the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command is in the high probability state, “1” is stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  In the present embodiment, the same data as the data indicating the jackpot lottery prediction result included in the prefetch command in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and the prediction precondition storage area 223a3. The same data as the data indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, the same data as the data indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetching, the information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery, the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, the prediction of prefetching Although stored as information indicating preconditions, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command, data indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, prediction precondition of prefetching Conversion of the data shown to another data, As the information indicating the prediction result of the lottery, the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetching, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, the prediction precondition storage It may be stored in the area 223a3.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it shifts (moves) each data stored in the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a to the execution area. . Specifically, the information indicating the jackpot lottery prediction result stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 of the reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 of the execution area. Similarly, the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 of the holding first area is shifted to the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 of the execution area, The prediction preconditions stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the area are shifted to the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the execution area.

  Then, when the shift of data to the execution area is completed, the hold first area becomes empty, so the data stored in the other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is the area number 1 Shift processing is performed to pack in a small reserved area (pending first area to pending third area). In the present embodiment, in the pre-reading information storage area 223a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift process is not performed for the holding area (hold third area to hold fourth area) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. Control burdens can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the hold area (hold second area to hold fourth area) may be configured to be shifted to a hold area with a smaller area number, respectively. In that case, since the determination as to whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (the holding second area to the holding fourth area) is unnecessary, the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the program can be reduced, and the free space of the ROM 222 can be increased.

  Further, as described above, in the pre-read information storage area 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, one execution area and four suspension areas (storage first area (storage first area), similarly to the suspension ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 ~ Hold 4th area) is provided. This is for storing mutually corresponding data in each area of the holding ball storage area 203b and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. That is, in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prefetch information corresponding to the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b is stored. Similarly, the prefetch first information corresponding to the reserve first area of the reserve ball storage area 203b is stored in the reserve first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the reserve ball in the reserve second area of the prefetch information storage area 223a The prefetch information corresponding to the reserved second area of the storage area 203b is stored, and the prefetched information corresponding to the reserved third area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the reserved third area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, Prefetching information corresponding to the reserved fourth area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the reserved fourth area of the information storage area 223a.

  Although the details will be described later, when the ball is newly awarded to the first entrance (start winning), data associated with the new starting winning is acquired in main controller 110, and the data is stored in storage ball storage area 203b. As well as being newly stored in the reserved area, the pre-reading for the start winning is performed. Then, a prefetch command including various information (prediction result of jackpot lottery, prediction result of variation pattern type) obtained by the prefetching and prediction precondition of prefetching is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 Ru. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command, various information and prediction preconditions are extracted as prefetch information from the prefetch command, and the prefetch information is newly stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. (See S1210 in FIG. 31). Thus, every time the ball newly wins to the first entrance (start winning), the data associated with the starting winning is the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 and the voice lamp control device The information is stored in the hold area of the preread information storage area 223 a 113.

  Further, when the jackpot lottery is newly started in main controller 110, shift processing is performed for each area of holding ball storage area 203b (see 307 in FIG. 21). Then, in the main control device 110, when the big hit lottery is performed, the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 along with the big hit lottery. When the variation pattern command is received by the voice lamp control device 113 and setting for variation display is performed, shift processing is performed for each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (see S1506 in FIG. 38). Thus, each time the main controller 110 performs a big hit lottery, each area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110 and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the audio lamp control apparatus 113 Shift processing is performed. Therefore, mutually corresponding data is stored in each area of the holding ball storage area 203 b in the main control unit 110 and each area of the pre-reading information storage area 223 a in the audio lamp control unit 113.

  The previously read information storage area 223a described above is referred to when it is determined whether or not to perform continuous advance notice effects. When the voice lamp control device 113 stores new prefetch information in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in response to the reception of the above-mentioned prefetch command, the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a will be described later. Based on the value of the holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g, it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect for a series of fluctuation effects pending at that time.

  Further, the prefetch information storage area 223a is also referred to when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit. When the audio lamp control device 113 performs ending effect which is a part of the above-described jackpot effect, the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the contents of the hold area of the preread information storage area 223a and the state of the after-succeeding game state flag 223c described later. It is determined whether "finalized display" or "normal display" is to be performed in the ending effect.

  The holding ball number counter 223b is, similarly to the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the control device 110 up to four times. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the holding ball number counter 223b. There is.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls in the variable display is added by entering the first entry ball 64, a holding ball number command indicating the value of holding ball number counter 203c after addition is added. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command, and holds It stores in the counter 223b (see S1208 in FIG. 31).

Further, in the main control device 110, when a new variation display is started in the first symbol display device 37, the value of the holding ball number counter 203c is subtracted, and furthermore, the variation display to be started in the third symbol display device 81 The variation pattern command indicating the aspect of is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and sets the mode of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 in response to the reception, the value of the holding ball number counter 223b 1 is subtracted (see S1505 in FIG. 38)
As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 or the variation pattern command, so the holding ball number of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203c.

  Further, the value of the holding ball number counter 223 b is used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the holding ball number counter 223b and displays the value of the holding ball number counter 223b after storage in response to the reception of the holding ball number command. In order to notify the control device 114, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when this display ball holding number command for display is received, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number pattern for the value of the holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the holding ball number counter 203 c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The jackpot after game state flag 223c, like the jackpot after game state flag 203d of the main control device 110, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot in the special game state, when the jackpot is finished, the game of the pachinko machine 10 It is a flag indicating whether the state is in the low probability state or the high probability state. If the jackpot after game state flag 223c is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be a low probability state when the jackpot is finished, if the jackpot after game state flag 223c is on, the jackpot ends When it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be a high probability state.

  The jackpot after game state flag 223c is set to an initial value as an initial value by an initial value setting (see S1010 in FIG. 28) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Further, the state of the big hit post game state flag 223c is set when the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1214 in FIG. 31). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes the jackpot, and then the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare is made. A command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113. In that case, in the main control device 110, a fanfare command including information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is generated, and the generated command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 .

  In the sound lamp control device 113, when the fanfare command is received, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is extracted from the fanfare command. That is, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is extracted. Then, if the extracted gaming state is the "low probability state", the big hit after game state flag 223c is set to be off, and if it is the "high probability state", the big hit after game state flag 223c is set to be on Be done.

  The jackpot after game state flag 223c is used by the MPU 221 when ending effect determination processing (S1221 in FIG. 31) described later is executed. Although the details will be described later, when the ending effect which is a part of the jackpot effect described above is performed, based on the content of the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a described above and the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c, It is determined whether "finalized display" or "normal display" is to be performed in the ending effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set based on the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110, but instead of the fanfare command, the main control device 110 is used. The state of the jackpot after-game state flag 223c may be set based on the stop type command transmitted from the. That is, in the main control device 110, when the jackpot lottery is performed, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern and the determined stop type A stop type command indicative of is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, when the stop type corresponding to the lottery result is determined, if the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, the big hit type is determined, so whether the present big hit is a probability change big hit by the stop type command It is indicated whether it is a jackpot. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the stop type command is received, it is possible to set the state of the jackpot after-game state flag 223c based on what the stop type indicated by the stop type command is.

  Specifically, if the stop type indicated by the stop type command is a probability change big hit, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit can be determined to be a high probability state, so the big hit after game state flag 223c is turned on. Set to On the other hand, if the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command is normally a jackpot, it can be determined that the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present jackpot is a low probability state, so the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set off. Do. When setting the state of the big hit after-game status flag 223c by the stop type command, the fanfare command does not include the information indicating the playing status set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. good.

  In addition to the fanfare command, a command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit is newly provided, and the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113. Make it up. Then, based on a new command transmitted from the main control device 110, the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c may be set. The method of setting the jackpot after game state flag 223c is omitted because it may be performed in the same manner as the fanfare command described above. When a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command may not include information indicating the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fanfare command is received, the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set, but the state of the flag 223c will be described later after the fanfare command is received. The setting may be made before the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is started. In addition, even if it is configured to set the state of the jackpot after-game state flag 223c when the stop type command is received, the state of the flag 223c is an ending effect determination process described later after receiving the stop type command. It should be configured to set it before it starts. Also, a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, and when the new command is received, the state of the flag 223c is that the state of the flag 223c is set even if it is set to set the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c It may be configured to be set after reception of a new command and before start of ending effect determination processing described later.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1202 in FIG. 31) and turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1502 in FIG. 38). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1205 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1508 in FIG. 38). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type) extracted from the received stop type command and the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h. It is determined whether to set the stop type to the chance type.

  More specifically, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “big hit”, the extracted stop type is set as it is (see S1512 in FIG. 38). In addition, even when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “off” and the consecutive notice number counter 223 h is less than 2, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S 1512 in FIG. 38). reference). On the other hand, if the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “off” and the number of consecutive notices counter 223 h is 2 or more, the chance is the stop type instead of the extracted stop type. It is set (see S1513 in FIG. 38).

  The ending mode counter 223 f is a counter used to determine the display mode in the ending effect, and is updated once every execution of the main process (see FIG. 29) of the audio lamp control device 113. The updating of the ending mode counter 223f is performed, for example, by sequentially incrementing by one within the range of 0 to 3 and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 3).

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit and determines the display mode in the ending effect, the value of the ending mode counter 223f and the ending mode selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 222 It is compared and it is determined whether the value of the ending mode counter 223f is a value (for example, 3) predetermined in the ending mode selection table.

  Although details will be described later, in the audio lamp control device 113, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit and immediately before starting the ending effect described above, the content of the holding area in the prefetch information storage area 223a described above and Based on the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c, it is determined whether to obtain the value of ending mode counter 223f. Here, when the value of the ending mode counter 223 f is not acquired, the display mode is determined such that “normal display” is performed in the ending effect.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is acquired, if the value of the ending mode counter 223f is a value (for example, 3) previously determined in the ending mode selection table, "confirmed effect display" is displayed. As performed, the display mode of the ending effect is set (see S1414 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, if the value of the ending mode counter 223f is other than the value (for example, 3) predetermined in the ending mode selection table, the display mode of the ending effect is set such that "normal display" is performed. (See S1415 in FIG. 33). That is, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is acquired, the display mode is determined such that the "fixed effect display" is performed with a probability of 1/3, and the "normal display" with the remaining 2/3 probability. The display mode is determined so that

  When the display mode of the ending effect is set, a display ending command indicating the display mode (“normal display” or “finalized effect display”) of the ending effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, when the display ending command is received, display control is performed so that the ending effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode indicated by the received display ending command.

  The continuous notice lottery counter 223g is a counter used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect, and is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. The update of the consecutive notice lottery counter 223g is performed, for example, by sequentially adding one by one within the range of 0 to 127, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command from the main control device 110, based on the prediction result of the current prefetch, the jackpot type of the held jackpot, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g, etc. The start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined (see FIG. 32).

  The value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g is compared with the continuous advance notice determination table 222a (see FIG. 11) described next, and the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g is within a predetermined range in the continuous advance notice determination table 222a. Is determined. Then, when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is within a predetermined range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S1315 and S1316 in FIG. 32).

  When the advance notice command is received from main controller 110, continuous notice determination table 222a satisfies a predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see the continuous notice determination process in FIG. 32)). If it is, it is a table for setting "the continuous notice determination probability". Here, the continuous advance notice determination probability is a probability to determine to cause the third symbol display device 81 to start the continuous advance notice effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the details of the continuous notice determination table 222a will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the continuous notice determination table 222a. As shown in FIG. 11, the continuous advance judgment table 222a has two tables of a continuous advance judgment table 222a1 at the time of big hit and a continuous advance judgment table 222a2 at the time of disconnection. When the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the prefetch command received from the main control unit 110 is "big hit", the voice lamp control device 113 selects the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of jackpot, and the jackpot lottery prediction result If “off” is selected, the continuous advance notice determination table 222a2 at the time of out is selected. In this way, it is possible to change the continuous advance notice determination probability in accordance with the gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect (whether it is a "big hit" or "out").

  Each of the consecutive notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of removal is each value “1” that can be taken by the number-of-holds ball counter 223b (number of holding times N of variable display) The range of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g (hereinafter referred to as "the continuous notice determination range") for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is respectively defined in association with "4".

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the holding ball number counter 223b, and the holding ball number counter Define "0 to 15" as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "2" of 223b, and associate "0 to 39" as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "3" of the holding ball number counter 223b. It prescribes | regulates, it matches with the value "4" of the number holding ball counter 223b, and prescribes | regulates "0-63" as a continuous notice determination range.

  Further, the continuous advance notice determination table 222a2 at the time of disconnection is associated with the value "1" of the holding ball number counter 223b, defines "0" as the continuous advance notice determination range, and is set to the value "2" of the holding ball number counter 223b. Correspondingly, "0 to 9" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range, and "0 to 25" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in correspondence to the value "3" of the holding ball number counter 223b. In association with the value "4" of the counter 223b, "0 to 39" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 satisfies the predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see continuous notice determination process in FIG. 32)). If so, as a table for setting the continuous advance notice determination probability, one of the continuous advance judgment table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous advance judgment table 222a2 at the time of out is selected. Then, from the selected continuous notice determination table, the continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the holding ball number counter 223b at that time is specified, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g at that time becomes the continuous notice determination range. If it is included, decide the start of the continuous advance presentation effect.

  By the way, in the example of FIG. 11, the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of out are both defined such that the continuous notice determination range becomes wider as the value of the holding ball number counter 223b becomes larger. However, if the continuous advance notice determination range is wide, it becomes easy to be determined to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice determination probability becomes high. Both of the tables 222a2 mean that the larger the value of the holding ball number counter 223b (the number N of holdings of the variable display), the higher the probability of determining the continuous advance notice is defined. Here, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed over all the fluctuation effects that are being held when the continuous advance notice effect is determined, it is possible to set the continuous advance notice determination probability higher as the number of holding times is larger. There is a high possibility that the number of fluctuation effects included in the continuous advance notice effects of will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect is performed as the continuous advance notice effect is performed over many continuous fluctuation effects, so that the player is made special. It can give you a sense of expectation. In addition, since the number of holding times of the variable display generally has a small value in many cases, when the number of holding times is small, it can be suppressed so that continuous advance presentation effects are not performed frequently, while the number of holding times is small. When it becomes large, it can be made easy to perform continuous notice production.

  Further, when the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the big hit in the example of FIG. 11 and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of out are compared, the continuous notice determination range associated with the same value of the holding ball number counter 223b is It is defined that the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of jackpot is the same as or wider than the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of removal. That is, the continuous advance notice determination probability in the case where the gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "big hit" is the same as the continuous advance notice determination probability in the case where the game state after the end of the continuous advance effect is "off" Is also set to be high. Thereby, when the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it can be suggested to the player that there is a high possibility that the gaming state will be a "big hit" after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. The player can have a high sense of expectation. Also, the probability that the gaming state after completion of the continuous advance notice effect (i.e., the result of the lottery performed when the ball is won to the first entrance 64) will be the "big hit" is the probability of being "off" Is also set to a small size, so when the gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "off", it can be suppressed so that the continuous advance notice effect is not performed frequently, but in the case of "big hit" , It can be made easy to perform continuous advance notice production.

  Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, not only the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the prefetch command received from the main control device 110 is "big hit", but also the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is "off" and Also in the case where the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is "long reach out of reach", the permission judgment of the continuous advance notice effect is performed. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous advance presentation effects even when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is "long reach out" etc. Can be done with Therefore, when continuous advance notice effects are performed, it is possible to give the player various expectations. In addition, even when the game is continuously lost as a result of the lottery, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed, it is possible to give the player a high sense of expectation and prevent the player from being bored. be able to.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. The continuous notice frequency counter 223 h is a counter that counts the number of times the continuous notice effect is performed. The initial value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is set to 0, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined when the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the holding ball number counter 223b at that time is determined. The value of is stored (see S1317 in FIG. 32).

  The value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223 h is referred to when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110. At this time, first, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command. Then, if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is a value of 2 or more, the chance is set as the stop type instead of the extracted stop type (see S1513 in FIG. 38), and the set stop type The display control device 114 is notified by the display stop type command. Further, the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is decremented by 1 (see S1516 in FIG. 38).

  The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. In addition, when the chance eye is set as the stop type, for example, on the effective line L1 shown in FIG. 4, the combination of the main symbols stops in sequence from the left symbol row Z1 to “3” “4” “1” The symbol is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 38), and the set stop is performed. The type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. The value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is maintained at 0 (see S1515: No in FIG. 38). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  In addition, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1, it is the last fluctuation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, so it is used as the stop type As in the case where the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 32), and the set stop type is the display stop type without setting the chance item. The display control device 114 is notified by the command. However, the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is decremented by 1 (see S1516 in FIG. 32).

  As described above, while the value of the consecutive notice number counter 223h is 2 or more, every time the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, a chance is set as the stop type, and the set is performed. A display stop type command indicating the stop type is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, in the display control device 114, when the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 ends, a stop symbol as a chance is displayed.

  Here, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the value of the holding ball number counter 223b at that time is stored, and thereafter, every time when the stop type command is received If the value is one or more, the value is decremented by one. Therefore, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the stop symbol serving as the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for all the fluctuation effects reserved in the main control device 110. That is, the stop symbol which becomes a chance eye is displayed continuously.

  Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the continuous advance notice effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chance eyes as the stop symbol of the change effect which is most closely watched during the game. In addition, even if the stop symbol according to the big hit is not shown as the stop symbol, the chance eye is displayed, and the player has a feeling of expectation that the big hit will be obtained after the continuous advance notice effect is finished. You can

  Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command, the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is referred to in order to determine whether the execution of the continuous notice effect has already been set (FIG. 32). See S1305). Then, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 0 (see S1306: Yes in FIG. 32), the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set in all the fluctuation effects suspended by the main control unit 110, Of the predetermined conditions described above, it is determined that the condition (condition 1) is satisfied, and the start of continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the processing relating to the continuous advance presentation effect, the main control device 110 does not determine whether to start the continuous advance presentation effect or not, and the winning of the first ball entrance 64 Based on data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 and winning game state flag) acquired according to (start winning), the lottery result of the big hit lottery is pre-read, and various information obtained by the pre-reading ( The voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type) and the prediction precondition of the prefetching in the prefetching command. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information from the pre-reading command, stores them as pre-reading information in the pre-reading information storage area 223a, and determines the start of continuous notice effect start according to the contents of the pre-reading information storage area 223a. to decide. Then, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the setting of the stop type is also performed for each of the fluctuation effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Therefore, by causing the sound lamp control device 113 to perform complicated processing, the main control device 110 can concentrate the processing on the lottery processing.

  The after-announcement big-hit flag 223i is stored in the continuous announcement frequency counter 223h by storing the value of the holding ball number counter 223b, so that after execution of all continuous announcement effects set for a plurality of fluctuation effects is performed It is a flag which shows the game state after the fluctuation production. If the value of the jackpot flag 223i after this notice is on, it indicates that the gaming state after the fluctuation effect after the execution of all the successive notice effects is performed will be the "big hit" state, and the jackpot flag 223i of after the notice If the value is off, it indicates that the gaming state after the variation effect after the execution of all the continuous advance notification effects is "out". Incidentally, the fluctuation effect after the execution after all the continuous notices is the fluctuation effect performed when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223 h is one.

  When the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined on the basis of the pre-reading command received from the main control unit 110 in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot after jacking flag 223i is the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the pre-reading command If the "big hit" is set to ON (see S1319 in FIG. 32), if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the pre-read command is "off" is set to off (see S1320 in FIG. 32). Then, the value is held until the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 refers to the after-notification jackpot flag 223i when it is determined that the continuous advance presentation effect is being executed when the pre-read command is received (see S1307 in FIG. 32). Then, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is on (see S1307 in FIG. 32: Yes), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set Since the state is the "big hit" state, 2 further between the variation effect (hold ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last variation effect (hold ball) for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set It is judged whether or not the above-mentioned fluctuation effect (holding ball) exists (that is, the difference between the value of the holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 3 or more), and the above-mentioned predetermined It is determined whether (condition 2) is satisfied among the conditions of (see S1309 in FIG. 32).

  On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is off (see S1307 in FIG. 32: No), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is the "out" state, it is further determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery newly notified by the prefetch command is the "jackpot", and among the predetermined conditions described above (condition 3) Is determined (see S1311 in FIG. 32).

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to start at the timing of the new starting winning. The game state flag 203a (ie, the winning game state flag) is acquired. Then, when the acquired data is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data The type is prefetched in main controller 110. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, together with the various information (the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type) obtained by the pre-reading, the prediction precondition is the voice lamp control device from the main controller 110 by the pre-reading command 113 is notified. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-reading command, it extracts various information from the command as pre-reading information and stores it in the hold area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a. The preread information stored here is used when the display mode of the ending effect is set in the sound lamp control device 113 or when it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notification effect.

  However, as will be described later, in either the pachinko machine 10 or the conventional pachinko machine, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by prefetching and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are the main control unit 110 May differ. This is the case where there is a start winning on hold and the jackpot lottery with the start winning on hold is made when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning). The lottery result is a big hit, and is generated by the change of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before and after the big hit.

  That is, the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10 are configured such that winnings (start winnings) at the first ball entry port 64 are held a plurality of times (up to 4 times in the pachinko machine 10) In the main control unit 110, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), if there is a starting winning on hold, the lottery of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning After the results are pre-read, the jackpot lottery with the new starting winning combination is performed after all the jackpot lotterys with each starting winning combination that were on hold at the time of the new starting winning combination are finished.

  Then, when the main control unit 110 executes a jackpot lottery with each starter prize that has been on hold at the time of the new starter prize, if any lottery result becomes a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot end. The game state of is newly set. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start winning combination does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the big hit lottery with the new starting winning combination I will.

  In the main controller 110 of the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning game, The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used are configured to be determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery.

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the new start winning and the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the big hit lottery accompanying the new starting win do not match, it was used in the prefetch of the lottery result of the big hit lottery The main control device 110 disagrees between the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, since the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are different, there is a high possibility that the comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery The main control device 110 may sometimes differ from the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result.

  In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start winning matches the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the big hit lottery accompanying the new starting win, it is used in prefetching The main control device 110 matches the determined jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, since both the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are the same, the respective comparison results match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result The main control device 110 matches the actual jackpot lottery result.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed, and the prediction result of which table 202a1,1 is obtained. It was not configured to be able to determine whether it was obtained using 202a2. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, also in the sound lamp control unit 113, it is determined which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result. could not.

  However, even with the conventional pachinko machine, since the main control unit 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big hit lottery, while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change, both the pre-reading of the big win lottery result and the big hit lottery It is performed in the same gaming state in the main control device 110. Therefore, in main controller 110, jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Match Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot selection lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, in the voice lamp control unit 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, The prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as credible.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the main control unit 110 performs prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes It becomes unclear in which gaming state the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was made. Therefore, the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. It will be unclear. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in main controller 110, in voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot lottery is performed. It treats the forecast result of as unreliable.

  And, in the conventional sounding machine control device 113 for pachinko machines, when it is not possible to trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, a process not related to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery (for example, It was suppressed that the continuous advance notice effect, the ending effect etc.) were performed. Therefore, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot effect and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery were wasted.

  On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to use all the prediction results of the obtained jackpot lottery, for example, so that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained in the main control device 110 is not wasted, As described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, there arises a problem that processing unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is performed. In this case, as described above, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), there is a starting winning on hold, and the starting is on hold. When a jackpot lottery with a prize is made, the lottery result becomes a jackpot, and occurs before and after the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes.

  Here, with reference to each of FIGS. 53 to 55, a problem that arises when the display mode of the ending effect which is a part of the jackpot effect is determined using the prediction result of the jackpot lottery will be described. The determination of the display mode of the ending effect is performed based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery immediately before the ending effect is started. Also, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, here, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, “decision effect display” is always selected in the ending effect, and the prediction precondition is the same as the conventional pachinko machine It is assumed that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning is selected.

  Each of FIGS. 53 to 55 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined based on the prediction result of the large winning lottery during the large hitting effect. First, an example of the problem will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 53 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is usually determined to be a jackpot, and the fluctuation effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed, and further, the fluctuation effect Shows the state where start winnings A and B have occurred during execution of. It should be noted that in the big hit lottery accompanying the starting prize A, the lottery result is out regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine, and in the jackpot lottery accompanying the starting prize B, the pachinko machine If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change jackpot, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result will be out.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), when the starting winning combination A occurs during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the prefetching A of the lottery result is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. Since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a high probability state when the start winning combination A occurs, the high probability state is selected as the prediction precondition of the prefetch A. As a result, when the look-ahead A of the lottery result is performed for the start winning combination A, the prediction result of the look-ahead A is out. In addition, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a high probability state as in the case of the start prize A when the start prize B is generated, the high probability state is selected as the prediction precondition of the prefetch B. As a result, when the look-ahead B of the lottery result is performed for the starting winning combination B, the prediction result of the look-ahead B becomes a probability variation jackpot.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot effect starts, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state. Since the jackpot of this time is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine continues to be in a low probability state even after the jackpot effect is finished. And, when the jackpot effect is finished, first, the jackpot lottery with the start winning prize A is performed, the fluctuation presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the starting prize B is performed, the jackpot The fluctuation effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning combination A is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state.

  Therefore, although the high probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the pre-reading A is performed, the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning prize A is performed in the low probability state, so the prediction result of the pre-reading A and the actual drawing result It is likely to be different. However, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), for the starting winning combination A, both the prediction result of the prefetch A and the actual lottery result are out of coincidence, and therefore, the respective lottery results coincide.

  Further, similarly to the case of the start prize A, the jackpot lottery accompanying the start prize B is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state. Therefore, in this case also, although the high probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead B is performed, the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning B is performed in the low probability state. The possibility of being different from the lottery result is high. And, in this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), although the prediction result of the pre-reading B is a probability change jackpot, the actual lottery result is out, and the respective lottery results are not coincident.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is configured to merely determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the prefetching, the prediction result of the prefetching B is a big hit, so the pending jackpot lottery Among them, it is determined that there is a lottery result to be a big hit, as a result, in the ending effect, "confirmed effect display" is performed. As described above, in the "confirmed effect display", the player is notified that the lottery result will be the big hit in the large hit lottery being held with the end of the big hit, so that "fixed effect display" is performed The player has an expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot if any of the held jackpot lotterys is made after the jackpot is over.

  However, since the jackpot result (offing effect) is ended after that and the actual jackpot lottery with start winnings A and B held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out, It doesn't actually make a big hit. Therefore, even though the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, In fact, there is a problem that the lottery result will not be a big hit. That is, there arises a problem that a process (for example, effect, etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the player is given a sense of useless expectation to disappoint the player, and the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  Subsequently, the problem will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 54 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in a low probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a probability variation jackpot, and a fluctuation effect corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is executed, and further, the fluctuation effect Shows the state where start winnings C and D have occurred during execution of. It should be noted that in the big hit lottery accompanying the starting prize C, regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine, the lottery result shall be out, and in the jackpot lottery accompanying the starting prize D, the pachinko machine If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result is out, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result is usually a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the starting winning combination C occurs during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the prefetching C of the lottery result is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. Since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state when the start winning combination C is generated, the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition of the look-ahead C. As a result, when the pre-reading C of the lottery result is performed for the starting winning combination C, the prediction result of the pre-reading C is out of order. Further, when the start winning combination D occurs, as in the case of the starting winning combination C, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition of the prefetch D. As a result, when the pre-reading D of the lottery result is performed for the start winning D, the prediction result of the pre-reading D usually becomes a jackpot.

  After that, even if the jackpot effect is started, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is originally a low probability state, it continues to be a low probability state. In addition, since the present jackpot is a probability change jackpot, when the jackpot effect is finished, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state. And, when the jackpot effect is finished, first, the jackpot lottery with the start winning prize C is performed, the fluctuation presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the starting prize D is performed, and the jackpot The fluctuation effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the jackpot lottery accompanying the starting winning combination C is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state.

  Therefore, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the pre-reading C is performed, the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the starting winning combination C is performed in the high probability state. It is likely to be different. However, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), for the starting winning combination C, since both the prediction result of the prefetch C and the actual lottery result are out of coincidence, the respective lottery results coincide.

  Further, similarly to the case of the start winning D, the jackpot lottery accompanying the starting winning D is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state. Therefore, even in this case, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead D is performed, the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning combination D is performed in the high probability state. The possibility of being different from the lottery result is high. And, in this case, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), although the prediction result of the pre-reading D is usually a jackpot, the actual lottery result is out, and each lottery result is not coincident.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is simply configured to determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the prefetching, the prediction result of the prefetching D is a big hit, so the pending jackpot lottery Among them, it is determined that there is a lottery result to be a big hit, as a result, in the ending effect, "confirmed effect display" is performed. As described above, in the "confirmed effect display", the player is notified that the lottery result will be the big hit in the large hit lottery being held with the end of the big hit, so that "fixed effect display" is performed The player has an expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot if any of the held jackpot lotterys is made after the jackpot is over.

  However, since the jackpot result (offing effect) is ended after that, even if the actual jackpot lottery with start winnings C and D held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out, It doesn't actually make a big hit. Therefore, even though the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, In fact, there is a problem that the lottery result will not be a big hit. That is, there arises a problem that a process (for example, effect, etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the player is given a sense of useless expectation to disappoint the player, and the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  Subsequently, the problem will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which start winnings E and F are generated when the pachinko machine is a big hit and the big hit effect accompanying the big hit is being executed, and further, at the timing when the big hit ends, It shows a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine changes from the low probability state to the high probability state. As described above, while the pachinko machine is in the jackpot, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in the low probability state. In addition, in the jackpot lottery with the start winning E, regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine (low probability state, high probability state), the lottery result shall be out, in the jackpot lottery with the starting prize F, of the pachinko machine If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result will be out, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the start winning combination E occurs during execution of the jackpot effect, the prefetch E of the lottery result is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. Since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the low probability state when the start winning prize E occurs, the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition of the prefetch E. As a result, when the look-ahead E for the starting winning combination E is performed, the prediction result of the look-ahead E is not. Further, when the start winning prize F occurs, as in the case of the starting winning prize E, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is the low probability state, the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition of the prefetch F. As a result, when the look-ahead F of the lottery result is performed for the starting winning combination F, the prediction result of the look-ahead F becomes a probability variation jackpot.

  After that, when the jackpot effect ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state. And, first, the big hit lottery with starting winning E is done, fluctuation production with that big hitting lottery is executed, subsequently, the big winning lottery with starting winning F is done, the fluctuation production with that big hitting lottery To be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning combination E is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state.

  Therefore, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the prefetching E is performed, the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning E is performed in the high probability state, so the prediction result of the prefetch E and the actual lottery result are It is likely to be different. However, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), for the start winning combination E, since both the prediction result of the prefetch E and the actual lottery result are out of coincidence, the respective lottery results are identical.

  Further, similarly to the case of the start winning F, the jackpot lottery accompanying the starting winning F is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in the high probability state. Therefore, even in this case, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead F is performed, the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning F is performed in the high probability state. The possibility of being different from the lottery result is high. And, in this case, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), although the prediction result of the pre-reading F is a probability change jackpot, the actual lottery result is out, and each lottery result is not coincident.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is configured to merely determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the prefetching, the prediction result of the prefetching F is a big hit, so the pending jackpot lottery Among them, it is determined that there is a lottery result to be a big hit, as a result, in the ending effect, "confirmed effect display" is performed. As described above, in the "confirmed effect display", the player is notified that the lottery result will be the big hit in the large hit lottery being held with the end of the big hit, so that "fixed effect display" is performed The player has an expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot if any of the held jackpot lotterys is made after the jackpot is over.

  However, since the jackpot result (offing effect) is ended after that, even if the actual jackpot lottery with start winnings E and F held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out, It doesn't actually make a big hit. Therefore, even though the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, In fact, there is a problem that the lottery result will not be a big hit. That is, there arises a problem that a process (for example, effect, etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the player is given a sense of useless expectation to disappoint the player, and the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to use all the prediction results of the jackpot lottery so that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is not wasted, the actual jackpot lottery There arises a problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result is executed. As described above, in any case, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), there is a pending starting winning, and the jackpot associated with the pending starting winning In the lottery, the lottery result is a big hit, and occurs before and after the big hit when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes.

  That is, as described above, in the main control device 110, when there is a start winning on hold when the start winning is newly made, after the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning is pre-read, After all the big hit lottery with each starting winning combination which has been on hold at the time of the new starting winning combination is finished, the big winning pulling lottery with the new starting winning combination is done. Therefore, when the main control unit 110 executes a jackpot lottery with each starter prize that has been on hold at the time of the new starter prize, if any lottery result becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type at the jackpot end In accordance with the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start winning combination does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the big hit lottery with the new starting winning combination I will.

  And, as described above, in the main control device 110 of the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning game. Furthermore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are configured to be determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the new start winning and the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the big hit lottery accompanying the new starting win do not match, it was used in the prefetch of the lottery result of the big hit lottery The main control device 110 disagrees between the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading.

  Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, since the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are different, there is a high possibility that the comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery There are cases where the main control device 110 may differ from the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result. Then, when such a prediction result is notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and used in the voice lamp control device 113, a process (for example, an effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery Problems occur, etc.).

  Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 Treated the lottery's predicted result as unreliable and refrained from using that predicted result. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.

  In order to solve this, it is conceivable, for example, to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, when the main control device 110 performs the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202 a 1 and 202 a 2 are obtained using both the big hit random number tables 202 a 1 and 202 a 2, and further It is conceivable to notify the voice lamp control device 113 so as to make it possible to determine which table corresponds to the two prediction results.

  According to this configuration, when using the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the voice lamp control device 113, one of the two prediction results can always be treated as credible. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using this credible prediction result, it is possible to suppress the problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed.

  However, as described above, when prefetching the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the main control unit 110, as in the case of the big hit lottery, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 are stored. A process is performed to compare one by one with the current hit value. Therefore, the process of comparing the value of the first random number counter C1 with the winning value stored in each of the two big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 one by one each time a new starting winning combination occurs, It has to be repeated up to 33 times. Therefore, every time a new start winning combination occurs, the comparison process may take a long time, and time may be wasted.

  Further, although the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 are both obtained in the main control device 110 using the two big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is used in the voice lamp control device 113 In the case, only one prediction result is used. Therefore, the comparison processing which may take time in the main control device 110 is partially wasted. In addition, although the main controller 110 obtains two prediction results each time a new start winning is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses only one of the prediction results, so that useless prediction results are always generated. Therefore, the number of useless prediction results increases more than in the case of the conventional pachinko machine.

  Further, since the audio lamp control device 113 stores the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively, a storage area larger than that of the conventional one is required. Further, since main controller 110 notifies prediction results corresponding to each of two tables 202a1 and 202a2 to audio lamp controller 113, data to be transmitted from main controller 110 to audio lamp controller 113 is increased. Therefore, there is a possibility that data etc. desired to be transmitted preferentially can not be transmitted, and the control burden on the main control device 110 also increases. Further, since the data to be received also increases in the audio lamp control device 113, the control load increases.

  As described above, in the case where the main control device 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 are obtained using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 so as to make it possible to determine which table the two prediction results respectively correspond to, the credit in the voice lamp control device 113 Although it can handle more predictions that can be made, other problems occur, such as an increase in processing time and control burden.

  Also, apart from this, for example, it is also conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control unit 110 and the lottery result becomes the jackpot, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit, the main control unit 110 uses the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the current big hit, and pre-reads each pending start winning combination It is conceivable that the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of each prediction result obtained by the re-doing and re-doing.

  According to this configuration, the main control device 110 changes the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed. As a result, even if the voice lamp control device 113 can not trust the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change, the prediction of the jackpot lottery notified again from the main control device 110 instead. The results can be used as credible.

  The prediction result of the jackpot lottery to be notified again is obtained by the main controller 110 in the same tables 202a1 and 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot end. is there. Therefore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified again and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result coincide with each other in the main control device 110, in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery Can be treated as credible. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using this credible prediction result, it is possible to suppress the problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10, every time the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the pre-reading for each start winning combination pending in the main controller 110 is re-done, and each prediction result obtained by the re-do The control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 again. Therefore, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery which has become the target of the retrial and the prediction result are wasted.

  Therefore, unnecessary processing is performed in the main control device 110, which imposes a control burden. Also, since the voice lamp control device 113 receives the useless prediction result and stores it in the RAM 223, useless processing is performed in the voice lamp control device 113 and the control load Hangs. Further, data to be transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 is increased. Therefore, there is a possibility that data etc. desired to be transmitted preferentially can not be transmitted, and the control burden on the main control device 110 also increases. Further, since the data to be received also increases in the audio lamp control device 113, the control load increases.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 hits the jackpot, the main control unit 110 uses the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the present jackpot to hold each start winning prize on hold When the pachinko machine 10 is configured to reread the pre-reading for each and to notify each of the prediction results obtained by the re-reading to the voice lamp control device 113, the credit in the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Although it can handle more prediction results that can be done, other problems occur such as unnecessary processing and increased control burden.

  Also, apart from this, for example, it is also conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control unit 110 and the lottery result becomes the jackpot, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the main control unit 110 normally does not pre-read the lottery result of the big hit drawing, and only when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, the main control unit 110 in the big hit random number table corresponding to the gaming state at the big hit end. It is conceivable to pre-read each pending start winning combination using 202a1 and 202a2 and to notify each sound lamp control device 113 of each prediction result from the main control device 110.

  If configured in this way, it is possible to pre-read each pending start winning combination only when the main control device 110 makes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big hit and there is a high possibility that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes. . The prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by this pre-reading is obtained by the main controller 110 in the same table 202a1, 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 scheduled to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot end. . Therefore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result coincide with each other in the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery It can be treated as Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using this credible prediction result, it is possible to suppress the problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed.

  However, since the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot in the main control device 110, the number (frequency) of prefetching decreases. Then, the number of jackpot lottery prediction results notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 is also reduced, so the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction result in the voice lamp controller 113 decreases, and the above-described continuous Opportunity to carry out the preview production is reduced. Therefore, the amusement of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

  As described above, the main controller 110 does not usually pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and only when the pachinko machine 10 hits the jackpot, the main controller 110 copes with the gaming state at the time of the jackpot end When the pachinko machine 10 is configured to pre-read each pending start winning combination using the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and to notify each prediction result from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 The audio lamp control device 113 can handle more credible prediction results, but the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction results decreases, which may lower the interest of the pachinko machine 10, and other problems. Will occur.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 stores the prediction preconditions and corresponds to the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the prefetching It was comprised so that discrimination | determination with the jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 of the plan to be used by the actual jackpot lottery to be performed can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to handle more credible prediction results without causing problems such as unnecessary processing and increased control burden, and a problem that the frequency of using the prediction results of the jackpot lottery decreases.

  That is, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored, when the main control device 110 performs prefetching of the lottery result of the big hit lottery, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes It becomes unclear in which gaming state the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was made. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. It could not be determined whether or not there was a match. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in main controller 110, in voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot lottery is performed. It treats the forecast result of as unreliable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the prediction precondition and the jackpot after game state flag 223c are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table 202a1, which is used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery The voice lamp control device 113 can always determine whether the main control device 110 matches the 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Even in the case where it is unclear in the main control device 110 whether or not they coincide, the determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the main control device 110 is highly likely to match the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the prediction result. it is conceivable that. Therefore, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible in this embodiment. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  More specifically, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), data associated with the new starting winning is acquired in the main control unit 110, and the data is stored in the holding ball storage area 203b. As well as being newly stored in the reserved area, the pre-reading for the start winning is performed. Then, a prefetch command including various information (prediction result of jackpot lottery, prediction result of variation pattern type) obtained by the prefetching and prediction precondition of prefetching is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 Ru.

  Then, when the pre-reading command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, various information (prediction result of big hit lottery, prediction result of fluctuation pattern type) and pre-reading prediction precondition are extracted as pre-reading information from the pre-reading command The pre-read information is newly stored in the hold area of the pre-read information storage area 223a. Thereby, when using the pre-reading information in the voice lamp control device 113, by referring to the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is obtained by the pre-reading based on which gaming state Can determine if it is a thing. That is, the main control device 110 can determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In addition, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery becomes the big hit in the main control device 110, the start of the fanfare effect and the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit are voice lamps from the main control device 110 by the fan fare command. The control device 113 is notified. Therefore, when there is a possibility that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, the newly set gaming state can be notified again to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fanfare command.

  Then, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the fanfare command is received, the gaming state is extracted from the fanfare command, and the state of the big hit after-game state flag 223c is set according to the gaming state. As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set when the jackpot ends in the main control device 110 can be determined based on the jackpot after game state flag 223c. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to determine the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery newly executed in the main control unit 110 after the present jackpot is finished.

  As described above, since the prediction precondition and the big hit after-game status flag 223c are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, when using the pre-reading information in the voice lamp control device 113, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery It can be determined whether the main control unit 110 matches the used jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Even in the case where it is unclear in the main control device 110 whether or not they coincide, the determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the main control device 110 is highly likely to match the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the prediction result. it is conceivable that. Therefore, even in the conventional pachinko machine, even if the prediction result treated as unreliable may be treated as credible in the pachinko machine 10, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled in the present embodiment. . Therefore, it is possible to use the prediction result of the jackpot lottery more frequently than the conventional pachinko machine, and to increase the opportunity to improve the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the voice lamp control device 113 according to this embodiment, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number table 202a1 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. , 202a2 match in the main control unit 110, and as a result, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result Treat the jackpot lottery predictions as unreliable because they are likely to be different. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to preferably handle the prediction result of the big hit lottery, and it is also possible to suppress problems such as execution of processing (for example, effects etc.) unrelated to the actual lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the main control unit 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is not necessary to obtain both of the prediction results corresponding to each of the two tables 202a1 and 202a2. Further, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control device 110 is a jackpot, it is not necessary to re-read the pre-reading for each pending start winning. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled without causing problems such as increase in processing time and control load, and problems such as useless processing and increase in control load.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like in the prefetch command, the main control device further includes information indicating the prediction precondition of prefetching. Although transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 from 110, the information indicating the prediction precondition of this pre-reading is only 1 bit. In addition, the main control unit 110 sends information to the voice lamp control unit 113 from the main control unit 110 including information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit this time in the fanfare command, but at the time of the big hit Information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 is also only one bit. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, compared with the conventional pachinko machine, the amount of data processed in MPU201, 221 hardly changes. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 is small, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, even if Pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big win and the number of prize balls paid out in one big win are different models, the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the same specification. Since there are models, the display control device 114 is made into a common part and cost reduction is achieved.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 39) executed after the boot process (see S1601 in FIG. 39) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 18) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1603 and S1604 in FIG. 39).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 13, while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after the power is turned on, the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of power on as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in Fig. 13 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" is shown at the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on, as shown in FIG. The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. If the result is judged as “big hit”, the image shown in FIG. 13 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the fluctuation production, and if it is “displaced”, the image shown in FIG. Display for a fixed period of time after stopping.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Referring back to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the range of the back surface image stored in the back surface image area 235c among the back surface image and the back surface image will be described. FIGS. 14 and 15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining three types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. 14 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage" while Fig. 15 shows the back surface C corresponding to the "island stage". Are shown respectively.

  Of the back faces A to C, the back face images corresponding to the back faces A and B are, as shown in FIG. 14, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "image for scrolling") are configured such that the back surface images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "at-the-city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between position a and position a 'of the corresponding back image first. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the back image on the back C is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... Of FIG. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, in the back surface C, the image of the mountain that soars on the island, the image of the sandy beach that spreads to the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island, the third pattern It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the image of the sky that spreads over the mountain changes its color tone over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the player operating the frame button 22, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface C. In the rear surface image shown in FIG. 15A, an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15 (b), a bright blue sky indicating day is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black as time passes, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 15C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and gradually to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back surface image shown to Fig.15 (a), and the back surface image of Fig.15 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the stage in the city, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the stage in the city displayed frequently is the back image area By being resident on 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage has a partial area of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b Is stored in the rear image area 235c of In addition, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 15 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing. In order to change the back image instantly, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but in such a case, it becomes very useful as the resident video RAM 235. A large amount of RAM must be used, which may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a 'or in the range of FIG. The image data between the position a and the position b including the initial position and the image corresponding to the image between FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (b) are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 is changed when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range image is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surface C displays the images of FIGS. 15A and 15B using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 15 (a) so that transfer of the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. 15 (b)-(c) and 15 (c)-(a) can be completed from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. Thus, while displaying the images of FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 15 (b) to 15 (c) and FIGS. Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 15A and 15B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 15 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 15 (c) to 15 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time using the image data corresponding to the back image. be able to.

  In the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 12) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back surface B, an image corresponding to an image between the position b ′ and the position b in the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Referring back to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) having the numerals "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a fanfare data transfer flag 223 i, at least a stored image data determination flag 233 j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233 k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects and fanfare effects Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is 15R probability variation hit, 2R If it is a probability variation big hit, either of 15R normal big hit, the stop design which shows each big hit is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The fanfare production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the jackpot and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is repeatedly opened from now on, and the round production congratulates the jackpot It is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect informs the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the big win lottery being held with the end of the big win (performs a fixed effect display), or simply gives the player that the big win is finished. It is an effect for informing (normal display).

  By performing a confirmed effect display in the ending effect, the player will be a jackpot result if any lottery among the jackpot lottery held at the time of the jackpot end is made after the jackpot is finished Can recognize. Therefore, since the player can be made to have a feeling of expectation that the player will definitely win a jackpot, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, it is possible to bring the player to a standstill every time a held jackpot lottery is performed from the end of the jackpot until the lottery result becomes a jackpot. In addition, even if the lottery result is out, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot is increased, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage," "empty stage" and "island stage") is displayed Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table “0000H” describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 16) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (the address “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 17 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 17).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 17) In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 17, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  Referring back to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1605 in FIG. 39). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3205 in FIG. 50 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S1901 in FIG. 41B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S1908 in FIG. 41 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 41B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 41 (b) (see S1909) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 42 to 46) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 47 to 49) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3101 in FIG. 50A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 50B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 18) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d according to the command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command etc. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later (see FIG. 18) describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. In S1903), the pointer update process (see S2805 in FIG. 47) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 18), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 18, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third symbol (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S2807 in FIG. 47). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j is generated by an initial setting process (see S 1602 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233 j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236 a.

  Then, the stored image data determination flag 233 j is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3317 in FIG. 51). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3318 in FIG. 51). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is 1. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3402 in FIG. 52).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 41B) is performed (see S3402 of FIG. 52).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated with power on and a main process executed after the start-up process, and activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be performed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interruption process, first, a reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the acquired ball number to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, when the external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process described later is executed, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values. When ((in the present embodiment, 899, 99, 99, 198, and 250, respectively) are reached, they are cleared to 0, respectively. When the value of the first random number counter C1 reaches the maximum value (one rotation), the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is set as the first value of the first random number counter C1. When the value of the second random number counter C4 reaches the maximum value (one revolution), the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting the variation pattern type of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the first ball entry is performed. The start-up winning process accompanying the winning on the mouth 64 is executed (S105). The details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the start winning process is executed, it is determined whether there is a ball entry to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and if there is a start winning, the ball is excluded If the number of balls held is less than the maximum value (four balls), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired at the timing when the start winning is achieved, and Stored. In addition, based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) newly stored in the holding ball storage area 203b, the prefetch execution flag is used to prefetch the lottery result of the big hit lottery 203f is set to on.

  Then, when the start winning process is completed, it is next determined whether the prefetch execution flag 203f is on (S106), and if the prefetch execution flag 203f is on (S106: Yes), the prefetch process is executed (S106) S107), for the data newly stored in the holding ball storage area 203b by the start winning process described above (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1, the winning game state flag), the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is performed . The details of the prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the prefetch execution flag 203f is off (S106: No), the process of S107 is skipped. Next, launch control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the Then, when the ball firing is on, the information of the ball firing signal is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball firing signal to the firing control device 112. Thus, when the external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process described later is executed, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 20, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process, it is judged whether or not there is a ball entry to the first entrance 64 (start winning), and if there is a starting winning, each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1, gaming state flag 203a and Is stored in the holding ball storage area 203b (pending), and further, for the pending data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the winning game condition flag), the lottery result of the big hit lottery is read ahead In order to do this, processing is performed to set the prefetch execution flag 203 f on.

  In the start winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S201). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 The ball number N) is acquired (S202), and it is determined whether the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S203).

  Then, whether there is no winning on the first ball entry 64 (S201: No) or if there is a winning on the first ball entering 64, the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203c is 4 or more If there is (S203: No), the start winning process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the first entrance 64 (S201: Yes), and the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S203: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (Pending ball number N) is incremented by 1 (S204), and the pending ball number command indicating the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (pending ball number N) after addition is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, The ball number command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S205). As a result, when the external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process described later is executed, the ball holding ball number command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are read out from the counter buffer, and the hold ball number storage area 203b of the RAM 203 is provided The first per random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter 203b3 of the areas corresponding to the value (N) indicated by the holding ball number counter 203c among the 1 area to the 4th holding area And each is suspended (stored) in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 (S206).

  Specifically, if the value of the holding ball number counter 203c after the addition in the process of S204 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the first holding area. . In addition, if the value of the holding ball number counter 203c after the addition is "2", each storage area of the holding second area is stored, and if the value of the holding ball number counter 203c after addition is "3," the holding third area If the value of the holding ball number counter 203c after the addition is "4" in each of the storage areas, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the holding fourth area.

  Next, using the gaming state flag 203a as the winning game state flag, the value corresponds to the value (N) indicated by the holding ball number counter 203c among the holding first area to the holding fourth area provided in the holding ball storage area 203b. The game state flag storage area 203b5 of the area to be stored is stored (S207). That is, in the process of S207, the winning game state flag is stored in the same hold area as the hold area in which the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the process of S206.

  When the MPU 201 detects that the variable presentation execution start timing has come, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b and the winning-time gaming state flag are It shifts to the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b, the jackpot lottery, the determination of the variation pattern type, and the like are executed. As described above, the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the holding ball storage area 203b is used in the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect, the determination of the variation pattern type, and the like.

  Next, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to ON (S208). Here, when the pre-reading execution flag 203 f is set to ON, pre-reading processing (see FIG. 23) to be described later is executed, and as a result, the data stored in the holding ball storage area 203 b by the processing of S206 and S207 (each For each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched. That is, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) stored in the holding ball storage area 203b are also used for the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  Next, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203e is on (S209). As described above, if the jackpot flag 203e is on, then the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot and if the jackpot flag 203e is off, then the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (during a high probability state or a jackpot) Low probability state except). If the jackpot flag 203e is on (S209: Yes), it means that the start winning prize this time is a jackpot during a jackpot, so the jackpot flag 203g is set to ON (S210), The start winning process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the big hit flag 203e is off (S209: No), it means that the current start winning is a win in the normal state, so the big hit flag 203g is set off (S211) ), This start winning process ends, and returns to the timer interrupt process.

  The MPU 201 pre-reads the jackpot lottery result of the data stored in the holding ball storage area 203b (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) by the processing of S206 and S207. The state of the jackpot middle winning flag 203g is referred to. As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot, although the jackpot lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state. That is, the gaming state flag 203a is off during the jackpot. Therefore, when each ball C1 to C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired at the timing of the start winning when the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning) during the big hit, The state of the gaming state flag 203a is always off (low probability state), and as a result, the winning game state flag is always off.

  Therefore, if the data targeted for pre-reading is acquired along with the winning prize during the big hit, and if the lottery result is predicted according to the winning-time gaming state flag in the data, the pre-condition for pre-reading prediction However, the prediction result is less likely to match the actual lottery result, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result is degraded. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, if the data targeted for pre-reading is acquired along with the start winning in the big hit, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit It is constituted so that a lottery result may be predicted according to a state. In the processing of S209 to S211, when the prefetching process (see FIG. 23) to be described later is executed, it is determined whether or not the data acquired with the start winning is obtained with the large winning start winning. As possible, the state of the jackpot middle winning flag 203 e is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the variation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S104). The variation process (S104) is to control variation effects performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit medium flag 203e is on and the big hit is currently going on (S301). The jackpot includes the middle of a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. The jackpot flag 203e is set to ON at the timing when the jackpot start is set by the processing of S315 described later, and then the timing when the jackpot ends by the processing of S914 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 27) described later. Is set to off.

  If the result of the determination in S301 is that the big hit medium flag 203e is on and the big hit is in progress (S301: Yes), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203e is off and not jackpot (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), the first symbol display If the display mode of the device 37 is not changing (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: No), the present process is ended as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 only for a predetermined time, so the player can be made to visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation stop (S303: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (the holding ball number N of the fluctuation display being held in the main controller 110) Is determined (S304), and it is determined whether the value (N) of the acquired holding ball number counter 203c exceeds 0 (S305). As a result, if the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (the holding ball number N) exceeds 0 (S305: Yes), it is judged that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, first, the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (The holding ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S306). This is because one pending variable effect is started by the variation start process (S308) described later, and as a result, the number of holding balls decreases by one.

  Next, the data stored in the holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S307). The data shift process performed in the process of S307 is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the pending first area to the pending fourth area of the pending ball storage area 203b toward the area with a smaller area number. Specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data

  When the processing of S307 is finished, next, fluctuation start processing for starting fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S308), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (the holding ball number N) is 0 (S305: No), a demonstration effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81 It is determined whether or not the demonstration is under way (S309). In the process of S309, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the value of the holding ball number counter 203c (holding ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0 Determine the interval between demonstrations.

  When it is determined that the demo is not underway (S309: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S310), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is being performed (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process as it is. The demonstration command set in the process of S310 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is output when an external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process described later is executed It is transmitted to the control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with this demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demonstration command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the change stop. Therefore, after the fluctuation stop, if the fluctuation display is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined in the process of S302 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S311). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern type selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed If not (S311: No), the process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S311: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set to the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is preset by the fluctuation start process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. Although the details will be described later, in the variation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c is determined. The stop symbol (big hit type) is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the stop symbol (big hit type) or the 2R positive variation big hit (the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds), which will be a 15 R probability variation big hit after a big hit (a maximum variation may shift to a high probability state after 15 round hits). A stop symbol (big hit type) that shifts to a high probability state after a big hit or a stop symbol (big hit type that a maximum round number shifts to a low probability state after a big hit of 15 rounds) or a 15R normal big hit ) Is determined.

  Then, in the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot after the big hit, the red LED is lit in the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the red LED in the 15R regular jackpot And turn on the blue LED. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that each LED is released from lighting when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for several seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  When the process of S312 is finished, next, it is determined whether the lottery result corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is a big hit (S313), If the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation display is out (S313: No), the fluctuation processing is ended and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is a big hit (S313: Yes), the start of the big hit is set (S314). Here, when the start of the jackpot is set, if the jackpot control processing (S803) of the main processing (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, the processing branches to S901: Yes (refer to FIG. 27) and fanfare command Is set. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  When the process of S314 ends, next, the big hit flag 203e is set to ON (S315), the gaming state flag 203a is set to OFF (low probability state) (S316), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, the gaming state flag 203a is off (low probability state) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit. It should be noted that if the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a probability change jackpot, when the jackpot ends, the gaming state flag 203a is set ON, while the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is usually a large jackpot If there is, even if the jackpot ends, the state of the gaming state flag 203a is maintained off.

  In the variation processing described above, the start of the jackpot is set in the processing of S314, and then the jackpot flag 203e is set on in the processing of S315. As described above, when the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S314, when the jackpot control process (see S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, the process proceeds to S901: Yes (see FIG. 27). ) Branch. Therefore, in the jackpot control process, when the processing branches to S901: Yes, the jackpot flag 203e may be set to ON. That is, any process may be performed as long as the flag 203e is set to ON by the start time of the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a variation start process (S308) which is one process of the variation process performed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S308). In this variation start process (S308), based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit" or "out of place" is performed. At the same time, an effect pattern (variation pattern type) or the like of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the fluctuation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b Acquire (S401). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state flag 203a is on (high probability state) (S402). If the state of the gaming state flag 203a is on (S402: Yes), two types of jackpot random number tables are prepared. Among 202a, high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 is acquired (S403). On the other hand, if the state of the gaming state flag 203a is off (S402: No), among the jackpot random number table 202a prepared two types, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability is acquired (S404).

  Then, the jackpot random number table acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 (S405). As described above, three random number values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low probability big-hit random number table 202a 1 as random number values (hit values) that become big hits at low probability. Further, in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2, 30 random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276” are used as random number values (winning value) that become large hitting at high probability. 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 656, 716, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored. In the process of S405, the random number value (per hit value) stored in the obtained big hit random number table is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401, and when they match, the big hit It is determined that

  Then, it is determined whether the result of the comparison in the process of S405 is a big hit (S406), and if it is determined that a big hit (S406: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 And a display mode at the time of big hit is set based on the above-mentioned big hit type table (S407).

  In the process of S407, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 in the jackpot type table, that is, the maximum number of rounds transitions to the high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds. It is determined whether the 15R probability variation jackpot, the maximum round number transitions to the low probability state after the 15 round jackpot, or the 2R probability variation jackpot maximum number transitions to the high probability state after the 2 round jackpot. And the display mode (lighting state of LED37a) at the time of the big hit in the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is set based on the determined big hit type.

  In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, by setting the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) directly as the stop type 3 The display mode at the time of a big hit in the symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 and the above-described fluctuation pattern table for jackpot, the fluctuation pattern type at the time of jackpot is determined (S408). In the process of S408, among the various types of normal reach, various super reach, various special reach, 2R fluctuations A to C, the jackpot type determined in the process of S407 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401. A corresponding jackpot fluctuation pattern type is determined. When the variation pattern type is set in the process of S408, the variation time is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The relationship between the variation pattern type and the variation time is previously defined by a table or the like.

  When the process of S408 is completed, it is next determined whether the jackpot type determined in the process of S407 is a probability variation jackpot (S409). In the process of S409, when the jackpot type is a definite variation jackpot (S409: Yes), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low probability state at the timing when the jackpot is started, and then at the timing when the jackpot ends. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the high probability state. Therefore, in this case, the jackpot after game state flag 203d indicating the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to ON (S410), and the process proceeds to S414. On the other hand, in the process of S409, if the jackpot type is normally a jackpot (S409: No), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low probability state at the timing when the jackpot is started, and then the jackpot ends. Even then, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained at a low probability state. Therefore, in this case, the jackpot after game state flag 203d indicating the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to OFF (S411), and the process proceeds to S414.

  In the process of S406, when it is determined that the jackpot is not the jackpot (S406: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S412). In the process of S412, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is disengaged and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401. As the type of stop to be displayed in, one of the front and back out of reach, reach other than back and forth out of reach, complete out of the set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type is in accordance with whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state. The table is set to be different.

  Next, the variation pattern type at the time of out of step is determined (S413), and the process proceeds to the process of S414. In the process of S413, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the disconnected symbol is determined. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the normal time except the short state, based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table for deviation (usually) described above, short deviation, long deviation, various types of normal reach out, out Out of the various types of super reach and out-of-order special reach, a change pattern type at the time of removal associated with the stop type set by the processing of S412 and the change type counter CS1 acquired by the processing of S401 is determined.

  In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state or a high probability state at the time of definite change, short out, long out, various out-of-normal reach various out-of-range super reach based on the deviation pattern table for deviation (probability change) described above. Out of various types of out-of-order special reach types, the out-of-side fluctuation pattern type associated with the stop type set in the process of S412 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 is determined. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relation between the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation time which is previously defined by a table or the like.

  In the processing of S414, based on the fluctuation pattern type determined by the processing of S408 and S413, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern type via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S414) . Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S407 or S412 via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S415), and the process returns to the variation process. The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when the external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process described later is executed, A command is sent to the voice lamp controller 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command based on that, and transmits it to the display control device 114.

  In the present embodiment, setting of the state of the big hit post game state flag 203d (S410 and S411) is performed in the variation start process, but this big hit post game state flag 203d is a big hit control process described later (FIG. In the reference), the process of S902 is executed, and is referred to when a fanfare command is generated. Therefore, it may be set at any timing before the process of S902 is performed.

  Next, the prefetching process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S107) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19). In this pre-reading process, data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) associated with the detection of starting winning is newly acquired in the above-mentioned starting winning process (see FIG. 20), and pre-reading execution flag This processing is executed when the 203 f is set to ON, and prefetches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the newly acquired data.

  In this pre-reading process, first, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the change type counter CS1, and the winning game state flag stored in the holding ball storage area 203b lastly Is read out (S501). The data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) finally stored in the holding ball storage area 203b are specified based on the holding ball number counter 203c. Specifically, when the value of the holding ball number counter 203c is 1, the data stored in the holding first area is specified as the data finally stored in the holding ball storage area 203b. Similarly, when the value of the holding ball number counter 203c is 2, the data stored in the holding second area is; when the value of the holding ball number counter 203b is 3, the data stored in the holding third area is When the value of the ball number counter 203b is 4, the data stored in the reserved fourth area is specified as the data finally stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Next, it is determined whether the winning-time gaming state flag acquired in the process of S501 is on (high probability state) (S502). In the process of S502, when the winning game state flag is on (S502: Yes), when the prediction precondition of the prefetch is to be the high probability state, that is, the premise that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability This is a case where pre-reading is performed under conditions. Therefore, in this case, of the two types of jackpot random number tables 202a prepared, the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to the processing of S507. On the other hand, in the process of S502, when the winning game state flag is off (S502: No), it is determined whether the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on (S503).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, when the data targeted for the pre-reading is acquired along with the start winning during the big hit, the winning game state flag in the data always indicates the low probability state. Therefore, when the lottery result is predicted according to the winning game state flag in the data, the prefetching precondition is always in a low probability state, and the prediction result is unlikely to coincide with the actual lottery result. And the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result will be worse.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, with regard to the start winning during the big hit, prefetching is performed with the gaming state at the end of the big hit as the prediction precondition, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result is improved. That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 110 is a jackpot, it is further determined what the jackpot type is, and thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a jackpot. Then, when the big hit ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the present big hit type. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined in the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot. Therefore, the gaming state at the end of the big hit can not be determined until the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the main control device 110 becomes the big hit, but when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the playing state at the big hit is already decided The main control unit 110 can determine the gaming state at the end of the jackpot.

  And, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot is finished, if there is a jackpot lottery being held in the main control unit 110, the jackpot lottery being held is one by one in the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot end The main control unit 110 sequentially executes them. Therefore, the jackpot lottery held in the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot.

  Therefore, when pre-reading for the start winning during the jackpot, it is better to set the prediction precondition as the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, rather than always setting the prediction precondition to the low probability state, with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery It is possible to improve the possibility that the main controller 110 matches the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result. Therefore, since the number of prediction results that can be treated as credible in the voice lamp control device 113 can be increased, in the present embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used.

  Specifically, in the process of S503, when the jackpot middle winning flag 203g is off and winning is made in the normal state (S503: No), the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, in the process of S503, when the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on, and when the start winning is done during the big hit (S503: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit after game state flag 203d is on (high probability state) (S504). As described above, the jackpot after game state flag 203d is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot, the variation start process (see FIG. 22) described above is executed, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot If it is determined that the flag 203d is set, the state of the flag 203d is set. Therefore, the state of the jackpot after game state flag 203d is already set before the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot. Therefore, when there is a starting winning combination in the jackpot, it is possible to predict the prefetching of the starting winning on the basis of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot (the state of the jackpot later gaming state flag 203d).

  And, in the process of S504, if the jackpot after game state flag 203d is on (S504: Yes), start winning during the jackpot, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot is high probability Since this is the case, the process proceeds to the process of S505, the jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to the process of S507. In addition, in the process of S504, when the jackpot after game state flag 203d is off (S504: No), although the start winning during the jackpot, but the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot becomes a low probability Since this is the case, the process proceeds to the process of S506. In the process of S506, the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is acquired (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

  In the process of S507, the jackpot random number table acquired in the process of S505 or S506 is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S501 to predict whether the result is yes or not (S507). As described above, three random number values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low probability big-hit random number table 202a 1 as random number values (hit values) that become big hits at low probability. Further, in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2, 30 random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276” are used as random number values (winning value) that become large hitting at high probability. 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 656, 716, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored. In the process of S405, the random number value (per hit value) stored in the obtained big hit random number table is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401, and when they match, the big hit Predict that

  Then, if the result of the comparison in the process of S507 is that the jackpot is predicted (S508: Yes), the jackpot type and the variation pattern type are predicted (S509), and the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S509, first, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot) associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S501 in the jackpot type table described above Predict. Next, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table described above, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type (normal reach various, corresponding to the jackpot type predicted earlier and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S501). Super reach various, special reach various, 2R fluctuation A-C) is predicted.

  If it is predicted that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the process of S508 (S508: No), the stop type at the time of disconnection and the fluctuation pattern type are predicted (S510), and the process proceeds to the process of S511. In the process of S510, first, the type of stop (long reach, reach other than the previous or later, complete drop) is predicted based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S501. In the present embodiment, as described above, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type The table is set so that the range is different.

  Next, when the winning game state flag acquired in the process of S501 is on, or when the large hit medium winning flag 203g is on and the large hit after game state flag 203d is on, the above Out of the forecasted stop types among the short out, long out, out of range normal reach, out of range super reach, out of range special reach, and the variation obtained in the process of S501 based on the out-of-order (probability change) change pattern table The variation pattern type at the time of deviation associated with the type counter CS1 is predicted.

  On the other hand, when the winning game state flag obtained in the process of S501 is off and the big hit medium winning flag 203g is off, or the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on, and the big hit after game state flag When 203d is off, based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table for deviation (normal), it is predicted earlier among the short deviation, long deviation, out-of-normal reach various, out-of-super reach various, and out-of-special reach various The variation pattern type at the time of deviation associated with the stop type and the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S501 is predicted.

  In the process of S511, a prefetch command is generated based on the various prediction results predicted in the processes of S507 to S510 (S511). Here, among the prefetch commands described with reference to FIG. 8, the upper 1 byte indicating the command type and each bit value other than the most significant bit in the lower 1 byte are set. That is, a bit value indicating that the command is a prefetch command, a bit value indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and a bit value indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type are set.

  Next, it is determined whether the big hit medium winning flag 203g is on (S512). In the process of S512, if the jackpot middle winning flag 203g is on (S512: Yes), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched with the gaming state at the end of the jackpot as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in this case, according to the state of the jackpot after game state flag 203d indicating the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, a bit value indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command is set, and further, the prefetch command is the voice lamp control device 113 In order to transmit the pre-read command, the pre-read command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S513).

  Specifically, if the jackpot after game status flag 203d is off, the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command (the most significant bit of the lower 1 byte) is set to a bit value "0", and the jackpot after game status flag If 203 d is on, the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command is set to the bit value “1”. Then, when the process of S513 is finished, next, the jackpot middle winning flag 203g is set to OFF (S514), and the process proceeds to the process of S516.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110, only information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by the prefetch command. It had been. That is, no prediction preconditions were notified. Therefore, even if the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the prediction result of the jackpot lottery from the prefetch command, it can not be determined which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used for the prediction result.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 110 prefetches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetching is prefetched The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a command.

  As described above, when the prediction precondition is the low probability state, the main controller 110 uses the low probability big-hit random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, while the prediction precondition is the high probability state. The pre-reading is performed using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result indicated by the prefetch command based on the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command.

  In the process of S512, when the big hit medium winning flag 203g is off (S512: No), it is a case where the lottery result of the big hit lottery is prefetched with the gaming state at the time of winning as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in this case, according to the state of the winning game state flag indicating the gaming state at the time of winning obtained in the process of S501, set a bit value indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command, and further, voice the prefetch command In order to transmit to the lamp control device 113, the pre-read command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S515).

  Specifically, if the winning game state flag is off, the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command (the most significant bit of the lower 1 byte) is set to the bit value "0", and the winning game state flag is If it is on, a bit value "1" is set to the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command. When the processing of S513 or S515 described above is executed and the prefetch command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, the external output processing (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main processing to be described later If executed, a pre-read command is sent to the audio lamp controller 113. Then, when the process of S515 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S516. In the process of S516, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to OFF (S516), the prefetch execution process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  When prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control 110 by the prefetching process shown in FIG. 23 above, the prediction preconditions capable of discriminating the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching are prefetched. The obtained prediction result can be included in the prefetch command and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result indicated by the prefetch command based on the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is read ahead in the main control unit 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed, and the prediction result uses either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. It was not configured to be able to determine if it was obtained. That is, no prediction precondition was stored. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by the pre-read command, also in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result is obtained using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. I could not tell if it was a thing.

  However, as in the conventional pachinko machine, even if the prediction preconditions are not stored, while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change after the prefetching of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110 Both the pre-reading of the jackpot result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot lottery are performed in the same gaming state in the main control device 110. Therefore, in main controller 110, jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Match Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot selection lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, in the voice lamp control unit 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, The prediction result of this jackpot lottery was treated as credible.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction preconditions are not stored, until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in main controller 110 When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. It will be unclear. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot selection lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine may be different. So, I was treating the prediction result of this jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the prediction precondition and the jackpot after game state flag 223c are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery , 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading can always be determined. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Even in the case where it is unclear in the main control device 110 whether or not they coincide, the determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the main control device 110 is highly likely to match the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the prediction result. it is conceivable that. Therefore, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible in this embodiment. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  In addition, since the prefetching process shown in FIG. 23 described above is performed with the gaming condition at the end of the big hit as the prediction precondition for the start winning during the big hit, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, when the data targeted for the pre-reading is acquired along with the start winning during the big hit, the winning game state flag in the data always indicates the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the lottery result is predicted according to the winning game state flag in the data, since the prediction precondition of the look-ahead is always in the low probability state, the prediction result is unlikely to coincide with the actual lottery result. And the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result will be worse. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the big hit can not be determined until the lottery result of the big hit lottery becomes the big hit, but when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the big hit is already finished Since the gaming state of is determined, the main control device 110 can determine the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot is finished, if there is a jackpot lottery pending in the main control unit 110, the jackpot lottery that was on hold is one in the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot termination The main control unit 110 sequentially executes them one by one.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery held in the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when there is a start winning in the big hit, when performing pre-reading for that starting winning, it is the jackpot that made the prediction precondition the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, rather than always making the prediction precondition a low probability state It is possible to improve the possibility that the main controller 110 matches the predicted result of the lottery and the actual lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the predicted result. Therefore, since the number of prediction results that can be treated as credible in the voice lamp control device 113 can be increased, in the present embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used.

  In the prefetching process shown in FIG. 23 described above, with regard to those that start winning during the big hit, pre-reading is performed with the gaming state at the end of the big hitting as a prediction precondition, and the accuracy of the lottery result prediction is improved There is. As described above, since the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot, after that determination, it is possible to pre-read the gaming state at the jackpot end as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in addition to the winning combination during the big hit, after the big hit classification is determined in the big hit lottery, for the starting winning until the big hit is started, the prefetching is made with the gaming state at the big hit end as a prediction precondition You may do so. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance that the main control device 110 matches the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the predicted result. Therefore, since the number of prediction results treated as credible in the voice lamp control device 113 can be further increased, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be more suitably used.

  In the pre-read process shown in FIG. 23 described above, the big hit medium winning flag 203g is provided, but when each process is executed in the single task method in main controller 110, the big hit middle winning flag 203 g is not provided. It is good. When the big hit middle winning flag 203 g is not provided, the big hit middle flag 203 e is referred to in place of the big hit middle winning flag 203 g. When execution of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started by the single task method, another process (main process, other interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process is completed. Because there is not, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of execution of the above-mentioned start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetch process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the big hit medium flag 203e, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data acquired along with the start winning combination is obtained along with the big start winning combination.

  Further, in the pre-reading process described above, the winning game state flag is provided, but when each process is executed in the single task method in the main control device 110, the winning game state flag may not be provided. When the winning game state flag is not provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to in place of the winning game state flag. As described above, the winning game state flag is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the start winning, and when the ball starts winning to the first ball entrance 64, each counter C1 to C1 at the timing when the starting win is made. The values of C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired. Then, the gaming state flag 203a acquired here is set as a winning game state flag. Therefore, if the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning is the high probability state, and if the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, the pachinko at the time of starting winning Indicates that the gaming state of the machine 10 is in a low probability state. When execution of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started by the single task method, another process (main process, other interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process is completed. Because there is not, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a does not change from the start of execution of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetch process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning can be determined by referring to the gaming state 203a. In addition, since it is not necessary to execute the processing of S207 in the above-described start winning processing (see FIG. 20) when the winning game state flag is not provided, the burden on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the winning game state storage area 203b5 in the holding ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S701). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (the sub controller such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, the wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S703).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S704), and if it is turned on (S704: Yes), the process proceeds to S712. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), it is further judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S705). If not stored (S705: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S712 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S706), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S712. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S813 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub control device (sub control device) (S712). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S713, S714) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S713, S714) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S713, S714) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S713, S714), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S714). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S710.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S705: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S707: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S708). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (sub controller) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of the driving power shutoff is transmitted (S709), and the process proceeds to S710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls. In the process of S710, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S710), and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S711), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up processing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, pre-read processing, counter update processing, and power-off processing are executed roughly divided. As a summary, each process of S801 to S807 is executed as a periodic process of 4 m second cycle, and the counter update process of S809 and S810 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S801). Specifically, the prize ball command set in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Further, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the pre-reading command set in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, in the last 4 ms cycle, a fanfare command, a round number command, and an ending command set by the jackpot control processing described later are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormal signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S802), and then, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect, the variable winning device 65 A jackpot control process is executed to open or close the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of (step S803). The jackpot control process will be described in detail later, but in the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, or the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or the specific winning opening 65a Determine if the ball has won the specified number. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  When the jackpot control processing is completed, next, the motor-operated part opening / closing processing is performed to perform the opening / closing control of the motorized part attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S804). In the opening and closing process of the electric combination, the opening pattern of the electric combination is set as the winning of the second symbol, or the lottery result of the large winning drawing is usually the large opening, the opening time and opening of the combination. When the number of times is set, the motorized part is opened and closed according to the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S805). In the first symbol display update process, when the change pattern type is set by the process of S408 or the process of S413 of the change start process (see FIG. 22), the change display corresponding to the change pattern type is displayed as the first symbol Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type set by the process of S408 or the process of S413 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) ends, and as a result, the fluctuation process (FIG. 21) When the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set by the process of S312 of reference), the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and S407 of the variation start process (see FIG. 22) The stop symbol (the first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of step S412 or the processing of step S412.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S806). In the second symbol display updating process, when the second symbol lottery is executed and the variation time of the second symbol is set, the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol display mode in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the second symbol lottery. The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 83.

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S 807), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S 807: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S808) If the predetermined time has already passed (S808: Yes), the process proceeds to S801, and the above-described S801 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process of this time (S 808: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, ie, until the execution timing of the next main process 1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S809, S810).

  First, the first initial random number counter CINI1 and the second initial random number counter CINI2 are updated (S809). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S810). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S801 to S807 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S807, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S807: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 24 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S811 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S811), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (a sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 or the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S812). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S813), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S814), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S 807 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S 801 to S 806, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S 809 and S 810 performed within the remaining time It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S801. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S801. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S801. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  In the present embodiment, in the main processing, the winning ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading processing (S802), the jackpot control processing (S803), the electric combination opening / closing processing (S804), the first symbol control processing (S805), the second Although the symbol control process (S806) is executed, a part or all of these processes may be configured to be executed in the timer interrupt process instead of the main process.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S803) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S803). This jackpot control process (S803) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, a specific winning opening (large jackpot Opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot is started (S901). Specifically, the process of S314 of the variation process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot is set, it is determined that the jackpot is started. In the process of S901, when the jackpot is started (S901: Yes), the gaming state at the time of jackpot end in the fanfare command is set based on the state of the jackpot after game state flag 203d (S902).

  In the process of S902, among the fanfare commands described with reference to FIG. 9, the upper 1 byte indicating the command type and the most significant bit in the lower 1 byte are set. Specifically, first, a bit value indicating that the command is a fanfare command is set, and then, if the jackpot after game state flag 203d is off, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot among the fanfare commands. If the bit value “0” is set to the bit indicating the (lower 1 byte most significant bit) and the big hit after game state flag 203d is on, the bit indicating the game state at the end of the current big hit among fanfare commands Set the bit value "1" to. Then, a fanfare command is set (S903), and this processing ends.

  The fanfare command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the received fanfare command. Also, upon receiving the fanfare command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display fanfare command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the fanfare effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot is not started in the process of S901 (S901: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203e is on and the jackpot is now (S904). The jackpot includes the middle of a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As described above, the jackpot flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, and the start of the jackpot is set by the process of S315 in the above-described variation process (see FIG. 21). The timing is set to ON, while the processing in S914 of the jackpot control process is set to OFF at timing when the jackpot ends.

  In the process of S904, the jackpot middle flag 203e is off, and if the jackpot is not medium (904: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S904, if the big hit medium flag 203e is on and the big hit (S904: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S905). If it is the start timing of a new round (S905: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S906), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S907). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S905, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S905: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S908). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls are present. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S908, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S908: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S909), and this processing is ended. Do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S908: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S910).

  In the process of S910, when it is the start timing of ending effect (S910: Yes), an ending command is set (S911), and this process is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the pre-reading information stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223 a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the selected display mode of the ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the process of S910, when it is not the timing to start the ending (S910: No), it is determined whether the present jackpot is ended (S912).

  In the process of S912, in the case of terminating the current jackpot (S912: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S913), and the jackpot flag 203e is set to OFF (S914). Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot after game state flag 203d is on (high probability state) (S915). As described above, the jackpot after game state flag 203d indicates whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state or the high probability state when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the jackpot and ends. It is a flag. It is to be noted that, when the big hit after game state flag 203d is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes high probability state at the current big hit end, and when the flag 203 d is off, the current big hit ends Sometimes it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state.

  In the process of S 915, when the after-big hit gaming state flag 203 d is off (S 915: No), this processing is ended without doing anything and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is kept in the low probability state. As described above, since the gaming state flag 203a is off during the jackpot, the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to set the flag 203a off again at the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S915, when the large hitting after game state flag 203d is on (S915: Yes), the game state flag 203a is set to ON (high probability state) (S916), and this process is ended. Here, by turning on the gaming state flag 203a, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a high probability state at the end of the jackpot.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the jackpot after game state flag 203 d is off in the process of S 915 (S 915: No), this process ends without doing anything, but the game state flag The processing may be ended by setting 203 a to OFF (low probability state).

  When transmitting a fanfare command to the voice lamp control device 113 by the jackpot control processing shown in FIG. 27 described above, the fanfare command includes information indicating the gaming state to be set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot of this time. It can be sent including. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the received fanfare command. Then, as described above, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the jackpot lottery. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery newly executed in the main control unit 110 after the present jackpot is finished based on the received fanfare command. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command, but the big hit lottery If the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 whether the present jackpot is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot by the above-described stop type command. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, it is not necessary to include in the fanfare command the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command, but instead of the fanfare command, the variation is changed. The main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by another command such as a pattern command, stop type command, round number command or ending command. You may. That is, after the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot in the main control unit 110 and the jackpot type is determined, the main control unit is determined until the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the sound lamp control unit 113. As long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by the audio lamp control device 113, any command may be used for notification. In addition to the fanfare command, a new command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit is provided, and the new command causes the pachinko machine 10 to be set at the end of the current big win. The gaming state may be notified from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113. When a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command may not include information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 28, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1119 (see FIG. 29) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is determined whether or not it is started during the execution of step S1002). As described later with reference to FIG. 29, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1116 in FIG. 29), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing of S1119. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1119 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1119 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is judged that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1119 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the start of the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223. Therefore, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1002: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1119, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in this case, the process proceeds to S1004 to initialize the RAM 223.

  In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1119 is performed (see S1118 in FIG. 29). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1119 is executed, the process of S1008 is instantaneous when the power-off flag is turned on until the processing of S1008 is performed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010). The permission is set (S1011), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, since the start-up processing this time is started after the power is completely shut off, the processing of S1004 through S1006 is performed It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010). Then (S1011), it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that, when the process of S1008 is performed via the processes of S1004 to S1006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S1101 was performed last time (S1101), and one millisecond If the above has not elapsed (S1101: No), the processing proceeds to S1112 without performing the processing of S1102 to S1111. In the process of S1101, it is a process regarding display (rendering) to determine whether 1 millisecond has elapsed or not, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1112 and the command determination process of S1113 in a short cycle. By performing the process of S1112 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform the setting relating to the variable effect without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. In addition, since the process of S1113 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception failure of the command transmitted from the main control device 110.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), first, various commands set by the processes of S1103 to S1113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 in the previous 1 millisecond cycle (S1102) . Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1109 described later (S1103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1104) . The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the pending number display updating process, a process of lighting the pending lamp 285 is performed according to the value of the pending ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and the rear surface image change for the display control device 114 is changed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process ends, a vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S1108). The vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S1151), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is a predetermined level or more. (S1152). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1152: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1152: Yes), it is determined that vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10, and setting is made to output an alarm sound from the audio output device 226 (S1153) An error command for notifying the control device 114 of the occurrence of the vibration error is set (S1154), and the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 29). Thereby, in the display control device 31, a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image notifying of a vibration error is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 29, the description of the main processing is continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) is ended, next, a lamp editing process is executed (S1109), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1110). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 30) (see S1153), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by the sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is a voice It is output from the output device 226.

  After the process of S1110, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1111), and the process shifts to the process of S1112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1109 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1110 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1112, in order to display the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation display setting process, the command determination process is performed to perform the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1113). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S1113 is finished, the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is updated (S1114), and the updating process of the ending mode counter 223f is executed (S1115). The continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g is updated by one each in the range of 0 to 127 each time the update process is performed, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). Further, the updating of the ending mode counter 223f is performed by incrementing one by one within the range of 0 to 2 each time the updating process is performed, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 2). The value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g updated by the update process of S1114 is referred to by the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 32) described later, and is used to determine the execution of the continuous notice effect. Further, the value of the ending mode counter 223f is referred to by an ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) described later, and is used to determine whether the display mode of the ending effect is a normal display or a fixed effect display.

  When the process of S1115 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1116 (S1116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1118), and the power-off process is executed (S1119). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1120), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1116 (S1116: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1117) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1117: No), the process returns to S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1117: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the main processing is not executed when the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the command determination processing (S1113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1113). This command determination process (S1113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In this process, when the prefetch command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the ending command is received from the main control device 110, the ending is performed. Set the display mode in the effect.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110 It is determined whether or not (S1201). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1202), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1203), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1204). When the stop type command is received (S1204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1206). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1207). When the ball holding ball number command is received (S1207: Yes), the value contained in the received ball holding ball number command, that is, the value of the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110 (the fluctuation display is held The number of times N) is extracted and stored in the holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1208). Further, in the process of S1208, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated holding ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1208 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), the voice in the processing of S1208 every time the starting winning is detected. The value of the holding ball number counter 223b of the lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the holding ball number counter 223b can be corrected to match the value of the holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110.

  In the process of S1207, when the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1207: No), it is next determined whether or not the pre-read command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1209). Then, when the prefetch command is received (S1209: Yes), from the received prefetch command, the prediction precondition of the prefetch, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are extracted, and they are prefetched As information, it stores in the reservation area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S1210). Then, the continuous advance notice determination process is executed (S1211), and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 in the main control unit 110 and the gaming state flag 203a The acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired are stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b, and the acquired gaming state flag 203a serves as a winning game state flag, and each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the same hold area as the stored hold area. Then, when data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) are stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110, separately from the original big hit lottery The various information obtained when the original big hit lottery is performed from the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserve area and the winning game state flag (probability, stop type, change pattern type) Are read ahead (predicted).

  Then, when the pre-reading ends in the main control unit 110, a pre-reading command indicating various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern type) obtained by the pre-reading and the prediction precondition of the pre-reading is an audio lamp from the main control unit 110 It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, it extracts from the prefetch command the prediction precondition of the prefetch, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and prefetches them as prefetch information. It stores in the reservation area of the information storage area 223a.

  As described above, when the prediction precondition is the low probability state, the main controller 110 uses the low probability big-hit random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, while the prediction precondition is the high probability state. The pre-reading is performed using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 for high probability. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the prefetch information based on the prediction precondition of the prefetch information.

  In the continuous advance notice determination process, the change pending at that time based on the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a lastly, the value of the hold ball number counter 223b, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g It is determined whether or not to perform a series of successive announcement effects for the effect.

  In the process of S1209, when the prefetch command is not received (S1209: No), it is then determined whether the fanfare command is received from the main control device 110 (S1212). When the fanfare command is received (S1212: Yes), the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is extracted from the received fanfare command (S1213), and the extracted gaming state is set. Based on the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set (S1214). In the process of S1214, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot extracted from the fanfare command is the "low probability state", the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set to OFF, and the jackpot end time extracted from the fanfare command If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high probability state", the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set to on.

  As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 which is set at the end of the jackpot in the main control device 110 based on the jackpot after game state flag 223c.

  Then, as described above, in the main control device 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the jackpot is completed and then a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the new jackpot lottery are based on the gaming state set at the time of jackpot termination. Is determined. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, by referring to the after game condition flag 223c, after the current big hit is finished, the big hit random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the big hit lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 Can be determined.

  Next, a display fanfare command for starting the jackpot effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S1215), and the process returns to the main processing. The display fanfare command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S1102) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a fanfare effect.

  On the other hand, if the fanfare command has not been received in the process of S1212 (S1212: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1216). When the round number command is received (S1216: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1217), and the display round number command according to the extracted round number is set ( S1218), the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1216 (S1216: No), it is then determined whether the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1219). When the ending command is received (S1219: Yes), the ending setting process for setting the display mode and the like of the ending effect is executed (S1221), and this process is ended. In the ending setting process, it is determined based on the pre-reading information stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223a whether the display mode of the ending effect is to be a normal display or a fixed effect display, and for display according to the determination Ending command is set. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect of the display mode according to the ending command for display.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1219, when the ending command is not received (S1219: No), it is determined whether or not other commands are received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1220). ), Return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  As described above, when the fanfare command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received, the voice lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment determines the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit from the fanfare command. The game state of is extracted, and the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set according to the game state. However, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 110 is a jackpot, the main lamp control device from the main control unit 110 determines whether the present jackpot is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot by the stop type command described above. 113 is notified. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, when the stop type command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, if the stop type command indicates a big hit type, the big hit after game state flag 223c is set according to the big hit type. It is good. In this case, it is not necessary to include in the fanfare command the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the continuous advance notice determination process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice determination process (S1211). The continuous advance notice determination process (S1211) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1211 in FIG. 31), and as described above, the prefetch command is received. When it is determined, it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notice effect.

  In this continuous advance notice determination process, first, it is determined whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) which is a predetermined condition to be described later is satisfied, and any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, next, it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notice effect. If it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is started here, the continuous advance notice effect is started. S1302 to S1310 described later are processes for determining whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, and S1311 to S1316 described later start continuous notice effects. It is the process for determining whether to do.

  Note that (Condition 1) means that execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set, and (Condition 2) becomes a "big hit" when all the set continuous advance notice effects are finished, and additionally, Two or more change effects (hold balls) exist between the change effects (hold balls) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last change effects (hold balls) for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set (hold balls) That is, the difference between the value of the holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 3 or more), and (condition 3) is “when all the continuous notice effects set have been completed. In addition, of the pre-reading information extracted from the newly received pre-reading command, the success or failure in the lottery result of the big hit lottery is “big hit”.

  In the continuous advance notice determination process, first read out the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a last (that is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the prediction precondition of prefetch) (S1301) . The pre-reading information finally stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223a is specified based on the holding ball number counter 223b. That is, when the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is 1, the pre-reading information stored in the first holding area is specified as the pre-reading information finally stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223a. Similarly, when the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is 2, the prefetching information stored in the holding second area is; when the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is 3, the prefetching information stored in the holding third area is When the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is 4, the prefetching information stored in the holding fourth area is specified as the prefetching information stored in the prefetching information storage area 223a last.

  Next, among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301, it is determined whether the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is "big hit" (S1302), and the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is "big hit" (S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery prediction result is "outside" (S1302: No), it is determined whether the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type read out in the processing of S1301 is "back and forth reach" (S1303) ). In the process of S1303, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is "reach before and after" (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is not the “back and forth out of reach” but the other fluctuation pattern type (S1303: No), this processing is ended.

  In the process of S1304, the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is substituted into the variable A (S1304), and then the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is substituted into the variable B (S1305). Then, it is judged whether the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 223h) is 0 (S1306), and if the value of the variable B is 0 (S1306: Yes), the continuous notice effect is executed Since the setting is not made and the above (condition 1) is satisfied, the process proceeds to the process of S1311, and it is determined by the processes after S1311 whether to start the continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1306, when the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous announcement frequency counter 223h) is not 0, that is, 1 or more (S1306: No), execution of continuous announcement effect is already set. Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the after-prediction jackpot flag 223i is on (S1307). As described above, when the value of the after-notice jackpot flag 223i is on, the gaming state after the change effect after the continuous advance effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set If the value of the jackpot flag 223i after notification is OFF, then the gaming state after the variation effect is performed in all the variation effects for which the continuous notification effect is set Indicates that it will be in the "out" state.

  Then, in the process of S1307, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is ON (S1307: Yes), it becomes a "jackpot" when all the set continuous announcement effects are finished, so that a variable The difference between the value of A (i.e., the reserved ball number counter 223b) and the value of the variable B (i.e., the consecutive announcement number counter 223h) is calculated, and the difference is substituted for the variable C (S1308). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable C is 3 or more (S1309). As a result, when the variable C is 3 or more (S1309: Yes), the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received prefetch command (pending It can be determined that two or more variable effects (held balls) exist between the ball) and the last variable effects (held balls) for which execution of the continuous advance notice effect is currently set. Therefore, since it can be determined that the above (condition 2) is satisfied from the results of the processing of S1306, the processing of S1307, and the processing of S1309, the processing shifts to the processing of S1311 and continuous notice effect starts by the processing of S1311 and subsequent Decide whether to

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1309, when the variable C is not 3 or more (that is, less than 3) (S1309: No), the fluctuation effect (hold ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command is continuous at this time Since two or more change effects (hold balls) do not exist between the last change effect (hold ball) for which the execution of the advance notice effect is set, the process of S1306, the process of S1307, and the process of S1309 From the results, it can be determined that none of the above (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining the start of the continuous advance presentation effect.

  In the process of S1307, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is on (S1307: Yes), it becomes a "jackpot" when all the set continuous announcement effects are finished, so this "jackpot" As a result, the sense of expectation by the continuous notice effect held by the player is interrupted once. However, if (condition 2) is satisfied, that is, between the fluctuation effect (hold ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last fluctuation effect (hold ball) for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set If two or more variable effects (holding balls) exist, it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notification effect. Therefore, only in such a case, if the start of continuous notice effects is determined with a predetermined probability, it is possible to always display a chance symbol as a stop symbol in two or more change effects performed after the “big hit”. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous advance notice effect, and to strengthen the expectation which the player feels to the continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1307, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is off (S1307: No), it becomes "out" when all the continuous notice effects set have ended, so Among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not the yes or no in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is the "big hit" (S1310). And, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit" (S1310: Yes), since the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery among the pre-reading information read out in the process of S1301 is "big hit" From the results of the process of S1306, the process of S1307, and the process of S1309, it can be determined that the above (Condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to the process of S1311, and it is determined by the processes after S1311 whether to start the continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1310, when the judgment result of the jackpot lottery is "outside" (S1310: No), the process of S1307, the process of S1308 and the process of S1311 mentioned above It can be determined that none of the conditions 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining the start of the continuous advance presentation effect. Here, if the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is off (S1307: No), it becomes "out" when all the set continuous notice effects are finished. In such a situation, the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined with a predetermined probability only when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery among the prefetched information extracted from the newly received prefetch command is "big hit". As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect in progress from being completed and becoming "off", and subsequently, the continuous notice effect being performed to be "off" again. Therefore, it can suppress that the state which becomes "off | omission" is complete | finished after completion | finish of continuous prior announcement production | generation. In addition, it is possible to give the player a strong sense of anticipation to be a "big hit" when the continuous notice effect is "off" after the end of the continuous notice effect, and the game is continued to the player. Can be motivated to

  As described above, in the processing of S1302 to S1310, it is determined whether or not any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) described above is satisfied, and any of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is If not satisfied, the continuous advance notice determination process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process. As a result, when none of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, the processing after S1311 for determining the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is not executed. It is possible not to be Moreover, since the process after S1311 is abbreviate | omitted, the increase in the processing load in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 can be suppressed.

  Next, in the processing of S1311 to S1313, it is used to determine the start of continuous preview effect from among two continuous preview determination tables 222a (continuous preview determination table 222a1 for big hit or continuous preview determination table 222a2 for out) The continuous advance notice determination table (see FIG. 10) to be selected is selected.

  First, in the process of S1311, it is determined whether the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery among the pre-reading information read in the process of S1301 is a "big hit" (S1311). Then, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery is "big hit" (S1311: Yes), the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit is selected as a continuous notice determination table used to determine the start of continuous notice effect start (S1312 ). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery prediction result is "out" (S1311: No), the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of out is selected as the continuous notice determination table used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect (S1313). ).

  When the continuous notice determination table is selected by the process of S1311 to S1313, next, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is acquired (S1314). Then, the continuous advance notice determination table (the continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 at the big hit or the continuous advance decision table 222a2 at the time of disconnection) selected in the process of S1312 or the process of S1313 and the value of the holding ball number counter 223b (variation display The continuous advance notice determination range is specified based on the hold frequency N), and the continuous advance notice determination range is compared with the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g (S1315).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous advance notice determination range, and it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notice effect (S1316). In the process of S1316, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is not included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is not started (S1316: No), the process after S1317 is skipped and the command determination process is performed. Return to That is, the setting of the continuous notice frequency counter 223 h is held as it is. Therefore, if there is a holding ball for which the setting for performing the fluctuation production advance notice is present, the continuous advance notice effect is performed on the holding ball, and if such a retention ball does not exist, the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Absent.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1316 that the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous advance notice determination range and it is determined to start the continuous advance notice effect (S1316: Yes), the hold ball number counter 223b is stored in the continuous advance notice counter 223h. The value of is set (S1317). Here, by setting the value of the holding ball number counter 223b in the continuous notice frequency counter 223h by the process of S1317, all the fluctuation effects previously held before the fluctuation effect corresponding to the prefetch command received this time are continuously performed. The execution of the notice effect is set. In other words, it is possible to display the chance symbol on the third symbol display device 81 over all the fluctuation effects corresponding to the holding balls held before the holding balls corresponding to the prefetch command received this time.

  Next, it is determined whether the yes or no in the prediction result of the big hit lottery among the pre-reading information read out in the process of S1301 is the “big hit” (S1318). Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery prediction result is "jackpot" (S1318: Yes), the after-notice jackpot flag 223i is set to ON (S1319), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery prediction result is "off" (S1318: No), the after-announce jackpot flag 223i is set to OFF (S1320), and the process ends.

  When all the set continuous announcement effects are finished by the process of S1319 or S1320, it is possible to set the jackpot flag 223i after the advance notice as to be the "big hit" or the "out". . As a result, when the continuous advance notice determination process is executed again and the process of S1307 is executed, the above-described (condition 2) or (condition 3) is performed using the value of the after-announcement big hit flag 223i set here. It can be judged whether or not it is satisfied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an ending setting process (S1221) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S1221). This ending setting process (S1221) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1221 in FIG. 31), and an ending effect is produced when the ending command is received. It is a process for determining the display mode of.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result is determined to be "big hit" in the big hit lottery in the main control device 110, the pachinko machine 10 goes to the big hit when the variation effect corresponding to the "big hit" is finished. While shifting, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the fanfare effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, first, the fanfare effect is performed, and it is informed to the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the jackpot from this. Next, as the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a jackpot, round effects are started, and the number of rounds of this time is notified to the player each time a new round is started. Then, when the jackpot (2 rounds or 15 rounds) is finished, an ending effect is performed finally, and the player is notified of the termination of the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, when this ending effect is performed, the final effect display for notifying the player that the lottery result will be the big win in the big win lottery held with the big win ending, or simply the big win A normal display is performed to inform the player that the end of the event has ended.

  In the ending setting process, first, the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S1401), and it is determined whether the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 ( S1402). In the process of S1402, when the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b is 0 (S1402: No), it is the timing to start the ending effect, but at the main control unit 110, one big hit lottery is held Since there is no case, the process proceeds to the process of S1415.

  In the process of S1402, when the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S1402: Yes), since one or more jackpot lottery is held in the main control unit 110, the hold is held. From the earlier held order of the jackpot lottery, check the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one.

  Specifically, among the reserve areas (preserve area 1 to reserve area 4) of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserve area in order from the reserve area with the smallest area number Check one by one. The smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning combination that is older in time is stored.

  Therefore, first, 1 is set to the variable i (S1403), and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S1404). Then, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in the reserve i-th area is compared with the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c (S1405), and as a result of the comparison, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition It is determined whether or not the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c indicates the same gaming state (S1406).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch is main control by the prefetch command The device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113. It should be noted that if this prediction precondition is a low probability state, this means that the main controller 110 has used the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, and the prediction precondition is a high probability status Means that the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is used to look ahead.

  Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the prediction precondition for prefetching, the prediction result of the big hit lottery, etc. are extracted as prefetching information from the prefetch command, and the reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a Stored. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, by referring to the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is obtained by using the main control device 110 using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 You can determine the

  Further, as described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 becomes the jackpot, and thereafter, when it is the start timing of the jackpot, the fanfare command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 . In that case, in the main control device 110, a fanfare command including information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is generated, and the generated command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 . In the sound lamp control device 113, when the fanfare command is received, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit is extracted from the fanfare command, and the big hit after game state flag 223c is The state is set. As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set when the jackpot ends in the main control device 110 can be determined based on the jackpot after game state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the main control unit 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the jackpot lottery, but when the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot, At the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main control 110 after the jackpot end, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot end. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the gaming state set at the end of the big hit can be determined based on the big hit after-game state flag 223c, it is newly executed in the main control device 110 after the current big hit is finished. The big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the big hit lottery can also be determined based on the big hit after game state flag 223c.

  Therefore, in the process of S1405 mentioned above, the jackpot used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information with the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c. It can be compared whether the main control unit 110 matches the random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the large hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading.

  And, in the process of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the gaming state indicated by the large hitting after game state flag 223c indicate the same gaming state (S1406: Yes), the jackpot lottery In the case where the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, since both the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are the same, the comparison results match each other, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result thereof The main controller 110 matches the corresponding actual jackpot lottery result. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as credible.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1406, when the prediction precondition in the preread information and the gaming state indicated by the big hit post game state flag 223c indicate different gaming states (S1406: No), the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery In the case where the main control unit 110 does not match the used jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, there is a possibility that the comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result It becomes unclear whether or not the main controller 110 matches. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can not trust the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

  In the process of S1406, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c indicate the same gaming state (S1406: Yes), as described above, In the case where the main control device 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery acquired in the process of S1404 and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is the jackpot (S1407).

  In the process of S1407, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is out (S1407: No), 1 is added to the variable i (S1409), and the value of the variable i is It is determined whether it is less than or equal to the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b (S1410). In the process of S1410, when the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b (S1410: Yes), the prefetching information is also stored in the other pending areas in the prefetch information storage area 223a Since it is the case, the process returns to the process of S1404 and confirms the prefetch information stored in the other hold area.

  In addition, after returning to the process of S1404, each process of S1404 to S1410 mentioned above is repeated, and the gaming state shown by the prediction precondition stored in the other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) The comparison with the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after-game state flag 223c is performed in ascending order of the area number.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when the value of the variable i exceeds the value (M) of the hold ball number counter 223b (S1410: No), the prefetch information stored in the reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a Although all confirmed, it is a case where the prediction results in each piece of prefetch information are all out of order. In this case, since there is no preread information to be confirmed, the process proceeds to the process of S1415.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a big hit (S1407: Yes), the process proceeds to S1411, and the finalized effect display is displayed as the ending effect display mode. Perform processing to determine whether to set. In the present embodiment, even if a plurality of prefetching information are stored in the reserve area of the prefetching information storage area 223a and each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, if the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit in the process of S1407. For example, the repetition of S1404 to S1410 is configured to be stopped there. That is, the processing does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  This is because the "confirmed effect display" informs the player that the lottery result will be the big win in the big win lottery being held with the big win ending, so the big win lottery held in the main control device 110 Among them, if there is at least one jackpot, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to confirm the read-ahead information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery.

  In addition, even if the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed here, if the jackpot lottery which has been held is executed and it becomes a jackpot again, the ending effect determination processing is executed during the second jackpot, Therefore, no problem occurs because the remaining prefetch information is confirmed.

  In addition, when there is something where the lottery result becomes a big hit among the big hit lottery held in main controller 110, after the running jackpot is finished, the big hit lottery that was on hold is in order 1 When executed one by one, the lottery result becomes a big hit in any of the big hit lottery, and becomes a big hit again. When the jackpot is over again, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the second jackpot by the fanfare command.

  As described above, when the fanfare command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit from the received fanfare command. The state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set according to the game state. Therefore, when there is something that the lottery result becomes a big hit among the big hit lottery held in the main control unit 110 and it becomes a big hit again, if it becomes the big win again, the big hit after the game state The state of the flag 223c may change. Therefore, for the big hit lottery which is executed after the big hit lottery where the lottery result becomes the big hit among the big hit lottery held in the main control device 110, the comparison process of S1405 is performed using the big hit after game state flag 223c Even I can not trust the comparison result. Therefore, it does not make sense to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the confirmation of the prefetched information is unnecessary, the confirmation is not performed, so that the execution of the unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  And, in the process of S1406, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c indicate different gaming states (S1406: No), as described above The main control unit 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching That's the case. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110, in this case, the voice lamp control device of this embodiment Even in the case of 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be relied upon, and it is refrained from using the prediction result.

  However, as described later, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be exceptionally treated as credible, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is the jackpot (S1408). As described above, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c indicate different gaming states. (S1406: No), it proceeds to the process of S1408, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserve i area is a jackpot, but in the case of S1406: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery It may be configured to shift to the process of S1415 without performing the process of S1408, as the one that can not be trusted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 do not become overlapping values. As such, each hit value is set. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the preread information is different from the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery Even if the main control unit 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the corresponding actual jackpot lottery, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot, it corresponds to the prediction result In the actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, and it is uniquely determined that it is an outlier. In the audio lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the numerical value which is the winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes the outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but the outlier in the one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 It is unknown whether the numerical value which becomes is a win value or an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and even if the result is determined to be out of order, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the main control unit 110 determines that the result is a big hit or it is determined that the result is out of order. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  In the process of S1408, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserve i-th area is the jackpot (S1408: Yes), as described above, exceptionally, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order and can be trusted In the case where it can be treated as, the processing shifts to the processing of S1409. As described above, in the case of the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, even the prediction result treated as being unreliable may be treated as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled. Also, in that case, the process can return to the process of S1409, and can repeat and execute the process of S1404 to S1410. Therefore, the opportunity which can set the display mode of an ending production to a "fixed production display" can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is out (S1408: No), the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game indicated by the large hit after-game state flag 223c This is a case different from the state, and further, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is deviated. In this case, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be trusted, and it becomes unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result will be the jackpot or the jackpot.

  Therefore, in this case, the process does not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410, but proceeds to the process of S1415, and performs the process of setting the normal display as the display mode of the ending effect. As described above, in the ending effect determination process, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is the jackpot or the outlier, it does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is confirmed It is configured not to.

  This is because one of the prediction results is obtained when the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery are checked one by one from the earlier held order of the jackpot lottery held in the main control unit 110. If unknown, the remaining prediction results will also be unknown.

  That is, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of this big hit lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next big winning lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next big winning lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about subsequent jackpot lotterys.

  As described above, since the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction result of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted after the prediction result It becomes unknown. Therefore, when confirming the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. But there is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In the process of S1411, the value of the ending mode counter 223f is acquired (S1411), and the acquired counter value is compared with an ending mode selection table (not shown) (S1412). Then, the acquired counter value is included in the range for selecting the execution of the fixed effect display, and when it is determined that the fixed effect display is to be performed (S1413: Yes), the process proceeds to S1414. In the process of S1414, the fixed effect display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1414), and the process proceeds to S1416. In the process of S1413, when the acquired counter value is included in the range for selecting the execution of the normal display and it is determined that the normal display is to be performed (S1413: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1415. In the process of S1415, the normal display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1415), and the process shifts to the process of S1416.

  In the process of S1416, based on the display mode set by the process of S1414 or the process of S1415, a display ending command for notifying the display control device 114 of the display mode of the ending effect is generated, and the command is displayed It is set for transmission to the control device 114 (S1416). In the display control device 114, when the display ending command is received, the ending of the display mode indicated by the display ending command is controlled to be displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

  According to the ending effect determination process shown in FIG. 33 above, in the process of S1405, the jackpot lottery is performed by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetched information with the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c. Whether the main controller 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery results with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching it can.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the pachinko machine is executed before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 When the gaming state of 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. It will be unclear. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot selection lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in main controller 110, the voice lamp control device of the conventional pachinko machine is used. In 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prediction precondition and the jackpot after game state flag 223c are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery It can always be determined whether the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Even in the case where it is unclear in the main control device 110 whether or not they coincide, the determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, when the respective big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, both the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison become the same, so the respective comparison results The main control unit 110 matches the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as credible. As described above, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible, so the present embodiment In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, according to the ending effect determination process, even if the plurality of pre-reading information is stored in the reserve area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a and each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, a large winning lottery is made in the process of S1407. If the prediction result is a big hit, it is possible to stop the repetition of each processing of S1404 to S1410 there. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is credible, and the prediction result is a jackpot, the processing does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  As described above, this is to notify the player that the lottery result will be the jackpot in the jackpot lottery being held with the termination of the jackpot, so that the main control unit 110 holds the hold. This is because if there is at least one jackpot among the jackpot lottery being performed, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to confirm the read-ahead information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery.

  In addition, even if the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed here, if the jackpot lottery which has been held is executed and it becomes a jackpot again, the ending effect determination processing is executed during the second jackpot, Therefore, no problem occurs because the remaining prefetch information is confirmed.

  In addition, when there is something where the lottery result becomes a big hit among the big hit lottery held in main controller 110, after the running jackpot is finished, the big hit lottery that was on hold is in order 1 When executed one by one, the lottery result becomes a big hit in any of the big hit lottery, and becomes a big hit again. When the jackpot is over again, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the second jackpot by the fanfare command.

  As described above, when the fanfare command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit from the received fanfare command. The state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set according to the game state. Therefore, when there is something that the lottery result becomes a big hit among the big hit lottery held in the main control unit 110 and it becomes a big hit again, if it becomes the big win again, the big hit after the game state The state of the flag 223c may change. Therefore, for the big hit lottery which is executed after the big hit lottery where the lottery result becomes the big hit among the big hit lottery held in the main control device 110, the comparison process of S1405 is performed using the big hit after game state flag 223c Even I can not trust the comparison result. Therefore, it does not make sense to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the confirmation of the prefetch information is unnecessary, the confirmation is not performed, so that the execution of the unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the ending effect determination process, when a plurality of prefetching information are stored in the reserve area of the prefetching information storage area 223a and each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, the prefetching information in the process of S1406 The gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the game differs from the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c (S1406: No), and in the processing of S1408, it is determined that the jackpot lottery prediction result in the prefetch information is the jackpot For example (S1408: Yes), it is possible to return to the process of S1409 and continue and repeat the process of S1404 to S1410.

  As described above, in the process of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c, the jackpot used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery This is the case where the main control device 110 does not match the random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110, in this case, the voice lamp control device of this embodiment Even in the case of 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be relied upon, and it is refrained from using the prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning values stored in the low probability large jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning values stored in the high probability large jackpot random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery And, even if the main jack 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading in the main control unit 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot If it is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result will be out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, and it is uniquely determined that it is an outlier. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Even if there is no match in the main control unit 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, it is possible to regard the prediction result as an outlier, return to the processing of S1409, and repeatedly execute each processing of S1404 to S1410. .

  Therefore, if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as the credible one, the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment may be able to handle the prediction result which is treated as being unreliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the big hit after-gaming state flag 223c If it is, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result will become unknown.

  In the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery If is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of this big hit lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next big winning lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next big winning lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about subsequent jackpot lotterys.

  As described above, since the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction result of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted later than the prediction result is also It becomes unknown. Therefore, when confirming the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. But there is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Specifically, in the ending effect determination process described above, when a plurality of pieces of pre-reading information are stored in the hold area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a and each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, the process of S1406 The gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the preread information is different from the gaming state indicated by the big hit after game state flag 223c (S1406: No), and further, in the processing of S1408, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prereading information is out of order If it is determined that there is (S1408: No), repetition of each processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped there. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is unknown and can not be trusted, the process does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information can not be trusted, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that the execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the ending effect determination process, when it becomes unclear whether the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery becomes a big hit or becomes out of the way, the normal display is set as the display mode of the ending effect . As a result, although the "finalized display" has been performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed. In fact, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of the problem that the lottery result is not a big hit.

  Further, although the ending effect determination process described above is executed when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is time to start the ending effect. Ru. Therefore, the ending effect determination process is not executed immediately after the jackpot effect is started, but is performed after waiting until immediately before the start of the ending effect. As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the jackpot, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is the maximum (four times), so it is executed at the timing when the jackpot ends. If the pre-reading information is acquired from the pre-reading information storage area 223a immediately before the start of the ending effect to be performed, in most cases, four pieces of pre-reading information can be obtained.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the ending effect determination process is executed immediately after the jackpot effect is started, there is a high possibility of acquiring a large amount of pre-reading information, so the possibility of branching to Yes in the process of S1407 is increased. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the opportunity for the "fixed effect display" to be performed in the ending effect, the lottery result is the jackpot when any lottery among the held jackpot lottery is made after the jackpot is finished. Can increase the chances of giving the player a sense of expectation that In addition, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, it is possible to increase the chances of having the player happy, and to increase the feeling of expectation that the player will be the big win next time, so the player's interest can be further enhanced. It can be enhanced.

  Further, although the ending effect determination process described above is configured to be executed when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the ending effect determination process is for determining the display mode of the ending effect. It is sufficient that the process is executed and finished before the ending effect is started. That is, it may be executed any time as long as it is finished before the ending effect is started after the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

  In addition, in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment, every time the jackpot lottery accompanying the entry into the first entrance 64 is suspended, the lottery result is pre-read and the lottery result obtained by the pre-reading ( A process of notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the prediction result is performed. Then, in the audio lamp control device 113, when it is just before starting the ending effect, “decisive effect display” is performed in the ending effect based on the prediction result obtained by the pre-reading in the main control device 110, or “ A complicated process such as a process of determining a display mode as to whether “normal display” is performed is performed. As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the jackpot lottery (that is, the jackpot lottery associated with entering the first ball entrance 64), which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10, By using the MPU 221 having high processing capability as the lamp control device 113, it is possible to easily set the determination condition of the display mode in the ending effect to various modes.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process will be described. Each of FIGS. 34 to 37 is a schematic view showing an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determining process. In the examples shown in FIGS. 34 to 37, the description is started on the assumption that the start winning is not suspended in the pachinko machine 10.

  In FIG. 34 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is normally determined to be a jackpot, and a fluctuation effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. It shows a state where start winnings G, H, I have occurred during the execution of the fluctuation effect. It should be noted that in the big hit lottery accompanying the start winning G, the lottery result is out regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10, and in the big hit lottery accompanying the starting winning H, pachinko machine If the gaming state of 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result is out, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change jackpot. Moreover, in the big hit lottery accompanying the start winning I, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result is out, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result is usually a big hit Shall be

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the start winning combination G occurs during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, but since it is not in the big hit When it is performed, the low probability state, which is the gaming state at the time of starting winning, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination G is out. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, the pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning combination G is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the big hit lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning H occurs, as in the case of the starting winning G, it is not a big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state. The low probability state which is the gaming state at the start winning is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination H becomes a probability variation big hit, and the pre-reading command corresponding to the starting winning combination H is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the prediction indicated by the pre-reading command The precondition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start winning I occurs, as in the case of the starting winning G, it is not a big hit, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state. The low probability state which is the gaming state at the start winning is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning I is usually a big hit, and the prefetch command corresponding to the starting winning I is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the prediction indicated by the prefetch command The precondition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot effect starts, the main control unit 110 transmits a fanfare command to the audio lamp control unit 113. Since the present jackpot is usually a jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the jackpot is completed, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is originally a low probability state, even if the jackpot effect is started, it continues to be a low probability state. Further, since the present jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continues to be in a low probability state even if the jackpot effect ends. And, when the jackpot effect is finished, first, the jackpot lottery with the start winning game G is performed, the fluctuation presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the starting prize H is performed, and the jackpot The fluctuation effect accompanying the lottery is executed. After that, a jackpot lottery with the start winning I is performed, and a fluctuation effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, among the reserved areas of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, it is acquired from the pre-reading information stored earlier, so first, in the first processing of S1404 The corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning combination G matches the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the prediction result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the starting winning combination G matches the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery .

  However, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), since the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination G is out, next, in the second processing of S1404, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting winning combination H The prediction precondition is acquired, and in the second process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the jackpot. Also in this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning combination H matches the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the prediction result of the big winning lottery corresponding to the starting winning combination H matches the lottery result of the actual big winning lottery . Here, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning H is a probability variation jackpot.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information indicates the jackpot In addition, it is configured to determine whether or not to set "confirmed effect display" as the display mode of the ending effect. Further, the other pre-reading information stored in the hold area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a is not confirmed. This is because the "confirmed effect display" informs the player that the lottery result will be the big win in the big win lottery being held along with the end of the big win, so at least during the big win lottery being held This is because if there is one jackpot, it is not necessary to check the lottery result for other pre-reading information.

  Therefore, in this case, as described above, the processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, the processing of S1411 is performed, and the processing of determining whether or not to set the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect is To be done. That is, in the ending effect determination process of this time, since the pre-reading information corresponding to the start winning combination I is not referred to, “decision effect display” can be performed in the ending effect, and unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the determined effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is ended, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is in order If it is done, it becomes a jackpot in any lottery. Therefore, although the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, It can suppress that the problem that a lottery result does not become a jackpot actually generate | occur | produces.

  Then, when the "decision effect display" is performed in the ending effect, the player becomes a big hit if the lottery is held after the big hit is finished and any lottery among the held big win lottery is made I can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a good remorse every time the held jackpot lottery is performed until the lottery result becomes the jackpot after the jackpot is finished. In addition, even if the lottery result is out, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot is increased, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  Next, FIG. 35 will be described. In FIG. 35 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is normally determined to be a jackpot, and the fluctuation effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. It shows a state in which start winnings J, K, L have occurred during the execution of the fluctuation effect. In the jackpot lottery with the start winning J, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result will usually be a jackpot, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result will be out In the jackpot lottery associated with the start-up winning character K, the lottery result is out regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the big hit lottery accompanying the start winning L, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change big hit, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result is out Shall be

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the start winning combination J occurs during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the jackpot is not in a big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state. The high probability state, which is the gaming state at the time of starting winning, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning J is usually a jackpot. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, the pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning combination J is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command and the prediction result of the big hit lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Further, even when the start winning K occurs, similarly to the starting winning J, it is not a big hit, and since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, when prefetching is performed for the starting winning K, as a prediction precondition The high probability state which is the gaming state at the start winning is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination K is out, and the pre-reading command corresponding to the starting winning combination K is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the prediction premise indicated by the pre-reading command The conditions, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second holding area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, even when the start winning L occurs, as in the case of the starting winning J, the jackpot is not in progress and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state. The high probability state which is the gaming state at the start winning is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning L becomes a probability variation jackpot, and the pre-reading command corresponding to the starting winning L is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the prediction indicated by the pre-reading command The precondition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot effect starts, the main control unit 110 transmits a fanfare command to the audio lamp control unit 113. Since the present jackpot is usually a jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the jackpot is completed, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from the high probability state to the low probability state when the jackpot effect is started. Further, since the present jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continues to be in a low probability state even if the jackpot effect ends. And, when the jackpot effect is finished, first, the jackpot lottery with the start winning J is performed, the fluctuation presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the starting prize K is performed, and the jackpot The fluctuation effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery with the start-up winning L is performed, and a variable effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, among the reserved areas of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, since it is acquired from the pre-reading information stored earlier, the start winning combination J in the first processing of S1404. The corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning J is different from the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the prediction result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the starting winning J does not match the actual lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  However, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), even if the prediction precondition and the gaming state at the end of the jackpot do not match, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning J is a jackpot. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the prediction precondition for prefetching does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot, in the actual jackpot lottery , The lottery result is out.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large falling random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is a big hit when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state is out when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state. Similarly, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is the jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state is out when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading information is not unknown, and it is uniquely determined when the lottery result is out.

  Therefore, in the ending effect determination process, next, in the second processing of S1404, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination K and the prediction precondition are acquired, and in the second processing of S1405, the acquisition The predicted preconditions that have been played are compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the jackpot. However, even in this comparison, the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning combination K does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. Furthermore, this time, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination K is out.

  As described above, when the prediction precondition for prefetching and the gaming state at the end of the jackpot do not match, and further, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is out, the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery It becomes unclear whether it will be a big hit or will come off.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process described above, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is the jackpot or the jackpot, it is not returned to the processing of S1404 to S1410, and the prediction result is unclear. It is configured not to confirm the pre-reading information of. Therefore, in this case, the process does not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410, but proceeds to the process of S1415, and performs the process of setting the normal display as the display mode of the ending effect. That is, in the ending effect determination process of this time, since the prefetch information corresponding to the start winning combination L is not referred to, it is possible to suppress the execution of the unnecessary process.

  Next, FIG. 36 will be described. In FIG. 36 (a), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot, and further, a start winning M, N, O occurs during execution of a jackpot effect according to the jackpot Shows the condition. It should be noted that, in the big hit lottery accompanying the starting winning M, the lottery result is out regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10, and in the big hitting lottery with starting winning N, pachinko machine If the gaming state of 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result is out, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result is usually a big hit. Moreover, in the big hit lottery accompanying start winning a prize O, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result will be a probability change big hit, but if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result is out Shall be As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the start winning combination M occurs during execution of the jackpot effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, but since the jackpot is in progress, prefetching is performed for the start winning combination M In this case, the high probability state, which is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination M is out. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, the pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning combination M is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the big hit lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In addition, even when the start winning N occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state as well as the starting winning M, but since it is a big hit, when prefetching is performed for the starting winning N, as a prediction precondition The high probability state which is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination N is out, and the pre-reading command corresponding to the starting winning combination N is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the prediction premise indicated by the pre-reading command The conditions, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second holding area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, even when the start winning prize O occurs, as with the starting winning prize M, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, but since it is a big hit, when prefetching is performed for the starting winning prize O, The high probability state which is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize O becomes a probability variation jackpot, and the pre-reading command corresponding to the starting winning prize O is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the prediction indicated by the pre-reading command The precondition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, the jackpot effect has already been executed, but before the jackpot effect is started, the fanfare command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113. Since the jackpot of this time is a probability change jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a high probability state at the end of the jackpot, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 . In the game state of the pachinko machine 10, during the jackpot effect, the jackpot lottery is not performed, but it is in a low probability state. Moreover, since the present jackpot is a probability change jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from the low probability state to the high probability state at the end of the jackpot effect. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, the jackpot lottery with the start winning M is performed, the fluctuation presentation with the jackpot lottery is performed, and subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the starting prize N is performed, and the jackpot The fluctuation effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery with the start-up winning a prize O is performed, and the fluctuation effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, among the reserved areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a, it is acquired from the earliest prefetch information stored in the stored order, so first in the first processing of S1404 The corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning M matches the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the prediction result of the big winning lottery corresponding to the starting winning M matches the lottery result of the actual big winning lottery .

  However, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), since the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning M is out, next, in the second processing of S1404, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting winning N The prediction precondition is acquired, and in the second process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) at the end of the jackpot. Also in this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning combination N matches the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the prediction result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the starting winning combination N matches the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery .

  However, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination N is out of the way, so next, in the third processing of S1404, the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting winning combination O The prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired, and in the third processing of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state (high probability state) at the end of the jackpot are compared. In this comparison as well, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize O matches the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting winning prize O matches the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery . At this time, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination O becomes the probability variation jackpot.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information indicates the jackpot In addition, it is configured to determine whether or not to set "confirmed effect display" as the display mode of the ending effect. Therefore, in this case, as described above, the processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, the processing of S1411 is performed, and the processing of determining whether or not to set the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect is To be done.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the determined effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is ended, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is in order If it is done, it becomes a jackpot in any lottery. Therefore, although the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, It can suppress that the problem that a lottery result does not become a jackpot actually generate | occur | produces.

  Then, when the "decision effect display" is performed in the ending effect, the player becomes a big hit if the lottery is held after the big hit is finished and any lottery among the held big win lottery is made I can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a good remorse every time the held jackpot lottery is performed until the lottery result becomes the jackpot after the jackpot is finished. In addition, even if the lottery result is out, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot is increased, so it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  Next, FIG. 37 will be described. In FIG. 37 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is normally determined to be a jackpot, and a fluctuation effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. It shows a state where the start winning combination P has occurred during the execution of the fluctuation effect. Also, the variation presentation corresponding to the big hit is finished, and the pachinko machine 10 becomes the big hit, and furthermore, it shows a state where the start winnings Q and R are generated during the execution of the big hit presentation accompanying the big hit. It should be noted that in the big hit lottery accompanying the start winning prize P, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result will usually be a big win, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result will be out In the jackpot lottery with the start winning Q, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result is out, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result Is supposed to be a jackpot. Further, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning R, the lottery result is out regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the start winning combination P occurs during the execution of the fluctuation effect, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the prediction premise is taken when prefetching is performed for the start winning combination P. A high probability state is selected as the condition, and its pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination P is usually a jackpot. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, the pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning combination P is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the big hit lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot effect starts, the main control unit 110 transmits a fanfare command to the audio lamp control unit 113. Since the present jackpot is usually a jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the jackpot is completed, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from the high probability state to the low probability state when the jackpot effect is started. Further, since the present jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continues to be in a low probability state even if the jackpot effect ends.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the start winning combination Q occurs during execution of the jackpot effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, but since the jackpot is in progress In this case, the low probability state, which is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, is selected as the prediction precondition, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination Q becomes a probability variable jackpot. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, the pre-reading command corresponding to the start winning combination Q is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-reading command It is stored in the second reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, even when the start winning R occurs, as with the starting winning Q, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, but since it is a big hit, when prefetching for the starting winning R is performed, The low probability state which is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is selected, and the pre-reading is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning R is out, and the pre-reading command corresponding to the starting winning R is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prediction premise indicated by the pre-reading command The conditions, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, first, the jackpot lottery with the start winning prize P is performed, the fluctuation presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, and subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the starting prize Q is performed, and the jackpot The fluctuation effect accompanying the lottery is executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery with the start-up winning R is performed, and the fluctuation effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, among the reserved areas of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, it is obtained from the pre-reading information stored earlier, so first, in the first processing of S1404 The corresponding jackpot lottery prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired. Then, in the first processing of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning combination P and the gaming state at the end of the big hit are different, the prediction result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the starting winning combination P does not match the actual lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  However, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), even if the prediction precondition and the gaming state at the end of the jackpot do not match, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination P is a jackpot. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the prediction precondition for prefetching does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot, in the actual jackpot lottery , The lottery result is out. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading information is not unknown, and it is uniquely determined when the lottery result is out.

  Therefore, in the ending effect determination process, next, in the second processing of S1404, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination Q and the prediction precondition are acquired, and in the second processing of S1405, the acquisition The predicted preconditions that have been played are compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the jackpot. In this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning game Q matches the gaming state at the end of the big hit, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the starting winning game Q matches the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery . At this time, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning combination Q becomes the probability variation jackpot.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot In the case of indicating “,” it is configured to determine whether or not “finalized effect display” is set as the display mode of the ending effect. In this case, the remaining prefetch information stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is not confirmed. This is because the "confirmed effect display" informs the player that the lottery result will be the big win in the big win lottery being held with the big win ending, so the big win lottery held in the main control device 110 Among them, if there is at least one jackpot, the lottery results of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to confirm the lottery results for the remaining prefetch information.

  Therefore, in this case, as described above, the processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, the processing of S1411 is performed, and the processing of determining whether or not to set the fixed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect is To be done. That is, in the ending effect determination process of this time, since the pre-reading information corresponding to the start winning combination R is not referred to, “decision effect display” can be performed in the ending effect, and unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the determined effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is ended, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is in order If it is done, it becomes a jackpot in any lottery. Therefore, although the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, It can suppress that the problem that a lottery result does not become a jackpot actually generate | occur | produces.

  Then, when the "decision effect display" is performed in the ending effect, the player becomes a big hit if the lottery is held after the big hit is finished and any lottery among the held big win lottery is made I can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a good remorse every time the held jackpot lottery is performed until the lottery result becomes the jackpot after the jackpot is finished. In addition, even if the lottery result is out, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot increases, so it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variable display setting process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1311). This variation display setting process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (ie, off) (S1706: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, it is determined whether the type of stop acquired in the process of S1708 is the type of stop corresponding to "big hit" (S1709). If the acquired stop type is a stop type corresponding to “big hit” (S1709: Yes), the process proceeds to S1711. On the other hand, if the acquired stop type is the stop type corresponding to “off” (S1709: No), it is further determined whether the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710: Yes), since the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the change effect, the chance eye is set as the stop type of the change effect (S1712), the processing proceeds to S1713. By this process of S1712, the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110, and the symbol on the middle line L2 is left It is set to "3" "4" "1" in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol which becomes a chance eye can be displayed at the time of a stop of change production in the third symbol display device 81 as a continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1710, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is less than 2 (S1710: No), when the last variation effect for which continuous notice effect is executed is executed (continuous notice frequency counter 223h Since the value is 1) or the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set (the value of the continuous advance frequency counter 223h is 0), the process proceeds to the process of S1711. In the process of S1711, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1711), and the process shifts to the process of S1713.

  If the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1 in the process of S1711, it is the last variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, so the chance type is not set as the stop type, and the continuous notice frequency is set. As in the case where the value of the counter 223h is 0, the type of stop notified from the main control device 110 is set.

  In the process of S1713, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1713). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714). If the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714: Yes), the continuous notice frequency counter The value of 223h is decremented by 1 (S1715), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 0 (S1714: No), the process of S1715 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variable display setting process (S1112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1112). This variation display setting process (S1112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1501: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1507. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). In the display control device 114, when the display variation pattern command is received, the third symbol display device 81 performs variation display of the third symbol in the third pattern display device 81 with the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command. , The display control of the fluctuation production is started.

  Next, the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1505), and the prefetching information (data) stored in the prefetching information storage area 223a is shifted (S1506). In the process of S1506, the prefetch information stored in the pending first area to the pending fourth area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift prefetch information. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1507.

  In the process of S1507, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1507). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S1507: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1507: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1508), and then in the process of S1206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1509).

  Next, it is determined whether the type of stop acquired in the process of S1509 is the type of stop corresponding to "big hit" (S1510). If the acquired stop type is a stop type corresponding to “big hit” (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the acquired stop type is the stop type corresponding to “disengagement” (S1510: No), it is further determined whether the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 2 or more (S1511).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 2 or more (S1511: Yes), the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the change effect, so the chance eye is set as the stop type of the change effect. (S1513), the process proceeds to S1514. By the process of S1513, the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110, and the symbol on the middle line L2 is left It is set to "3" "4" "1" in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol which becomes a chance eye can be displayed at the time of a stop of change production in the third symbol display device 81 as a continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1511, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is less than 2 (S1511: No), when the last variation effect for which continuous notice effect is executed is executed (continuous notice frequency counter 223h Since the value is 1) or the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set (the value of the continuous advance number counter 223h is 0), the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1512), and the process moves to S1514.

  If the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1 in the process of S1512, this is the last variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, so the chance eye is not set as the stop type, and the continuous notice frequency is set. As in the case where the value of the counter 223h is 0, the type of stop notified from the main control device 110 is set.

  In the process of S1514, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1514). . In the display control device 114, when the display stop type command is received, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1 or more (S1515). If the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 1 or more (S1515: Yes), the continuous notice frequency counter The value of 223h is decremented by 1 (S1516), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223h is 0 (S1515: No), the process of S1516 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 52. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1601), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S1601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S1701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1702). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1702, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1703). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after the other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S1704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S1601 in FIG. 39) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 39) (S1705), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is ended.

  As described above, when the boot process (S1601) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 40, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S1702. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1703 to S1705 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S1701. And after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1702, the processing of S1703 to S1705 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1703 to S1705 without performing the processes of S1701 and S1702. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1603). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1603, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1604). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1604, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S1605). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 50A) described later. The resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3102 in FIG. 50A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. As a result, during this time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (the main image at power-on or the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. 13 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41 (b)). A determination process (see S1908 in FIG. 41B) and a simplified display setting process (see S1909 in FIG. 41B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When the display variation pattern command is received through the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, Simple change effects can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1605, interrupt permission is set (S1606), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1606, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 41 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1801), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 41 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S1901: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S1902) is executed, and then a display setting process (S1903) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S1902), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46.

  In the display setting process (S1903), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S1902) or the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S1904). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S1903) or the simple display setting processing (S1909) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S1905). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S1906). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S1904), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S1905) The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1907). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S1907, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than the 15 probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, 15R normal big hit, front and back outreach, front and back out) The stop type table and stop type counter corresponding to the reach, complete deviance, chance eye) are compared with each other, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1901: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 13 on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S1908) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S1909) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S1902) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2001), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2001: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2001: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S1903) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S2002). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2003).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2004), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2004: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2005), the process returns to the process of S2001.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2005) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S2101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2101 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2101 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2103). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2103. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2104), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2105). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2106), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2105, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2101. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2102. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2104, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2004 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display suspension type command among the unprocessed commands (S2006). If there is a display type-of-stop command (S2006: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S2007), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2007) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, any chance eyes) Then, the stop type table corresponding to is determined (S2201), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41 (b)) is executed. Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2202).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to off (S2203).

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2202 is described. In the above-described task processing (S1904), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2202 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2203, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the processing of S2203, next, stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15 positive change big hit, 2R positive change big hit, 15R normal big hit, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, any chance eyes) It is determined whether the stop type of the jackpot (S2204), if it is the stop type of the jackpot (S2204: Yes), the transfer start of the image data to be used in the fanfare effect when the on state is normal image The fanfare data transfer flag 223i to be notified to the transfer setting process (S3103) is set to ON (S2205), the termination type command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if the stop type information is not a big hit stop type (S2204: No), the process of S2205 is skipped, the stop type command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on the fanfare data transfer flag 223i, while the fluctuation effect to be a big hit is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the video RAM 236 for normal use It can be transferred. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Since the display fanfare command instructing start of fanfare production is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in time with the end of the fluctuation production in the third symbol display device 81, the display fanfare command is received. From the above, if image data used in fanfare production is transferred from character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the fluctuation production to the start of the fanfare production, and the player There was a fear that they might not have stopped, or they might have a sense of discomfort.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device It is controlled so that transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished until the fluctuation effect which becomes the big hit at 81 is finished. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect to be a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 can immediately start the fanfare effect, so the player may not be aware that the operation has stopped. And, I will not give a sense of incongruity. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is used. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2201, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S2202.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to "big hit" is set, the stop symbol corresponding to "big hit" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually "off". As a result, the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "big hit", and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete removal is set, and in fact, if it is a "big hit", the complete removal stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Even so, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 will be a "big hit".

  Referring back to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the process of S2006, when it is determined that there is no display type command for display (S2006: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display fanfare command among the unprocessed commands (S2008). If there is a fanfare command for use (S2008: Yes), fanfare command processing is executed (S2009), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the fanfare command processing (S2009) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 (a) is a flowchart showing fanfare command processing. The fanfare command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fanfare command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fanfare command processing, first, the fanfare display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2301). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302).

  Then, based on the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ((0) S2304). Then, the demonstration display flag and the determination display flag are both set to OFF (S2305), the fanfare command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the fanfare command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2304, from the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301, At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is extracted by the processing of S2302 while extracting the drawing contents defined in the address shown by the pointer 233f. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the image data of the necessary sprites in the set fanfare display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 2. From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, when the fanfare command processing is executed, the fanfare transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, while the fanfare effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, image data necessary for round effect and ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (fanfare effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to transfer image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so the first round is shown. If the image data required for the round effect has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 since the command for the number of rounds for display has been received, there will be a lot of waiting before the start of the round effect after the fanfare effect is completed. There is a possibility that time will occur and the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation is stopped.

  In addition, the ending command for display which instructs the start of ending effect, from the sound lamp control device 113 according to the timing when all round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (15 rounds or 2 rounds) finished As it is sent, if image data required for ending effect is transferred from character ROM 234 to video RAM 236 for normal use after receiving the ending command for display, ending effect is started after round effect is completed. A lot of waiting time occurs, which may cause the player to feel uneasy or uncomfortable feeling that the operation has stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display fanfare command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and the variation display of the big hit is finished in the third symbol display device 81 It controls so that transfer of data required for round production and ending production ends. Thereby, when the fanfare effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds) Or, when ending for two rounds, since the ending effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation is stopped. There is no Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, It is controlled so that transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished before the variation effect which becomes the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect to be a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 can immediately start the fanfare effect, so the player may not be aware that the operation has stopped. And, I will not give a sense of incongruity. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  Referring back to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2008 that there is no display fanfare command (S2008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2010), and display is performed. If there is a command for the number of rounds (S2010: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S2011), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S2011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233 d is set (S 2401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2402).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2404). Then, the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are both set to OFF (S2405), the fanfare command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When it is determined in the process of S2010 that there is no display round number command (S2010: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2012). If there is an ending command for use (S2012: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2013), and the process returns to the process of S2001.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2013) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the process of S2501 is turned on, The data table determination flag corresponding to the other ending display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d corresponds to the display mode of which ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S 2503. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2405). Then, the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are both set to OFF (S2406), the fanfare command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2012 that there is no display ending command (S2012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2014), and the back image If there is a change command (S2014: Yes), the rear image change command processing is executed (S2015), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 46A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2015) will be described. FIG. 46 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3103) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S2601) . Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2602), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2601 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2602. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2602 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2602, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2014 that there is no rear image change command (S2014: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S2016). For example (S2016: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2017), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2017) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2701). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2702), and the error command is generated. The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2701, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2702, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2702, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2016 that there is no error command (S2016: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2018), and the process returns to S2001.

  In the process of S2001 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2001: Yes ), The processing of S2002 to S2018 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2001 to S2018 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2001 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S1909) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 13, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 43 (b)), which are processing corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2101. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2102, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S1903) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2801), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (S2801: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S2802 to S2804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2801: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S2802), S2803 to S2804. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of In the process of S2803, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S2803). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S2803: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S2804).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S2901).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters. Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2901, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2902), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S2804), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S2803, the process proceeds to S2805. At S2805, pointer update processing is executed (S2805).

  Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3001). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3001, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (S3002). As a result, if it is the End information (S3002: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3003). If it is the demonstration display data table (S3003: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3004), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3005), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3003 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3003: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3006), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3002, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3002: No), this processing is ended and the processing returns to the display setting processing.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2806). In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents acquired in the processing of S2806 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S2807), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S2808). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S2808: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S2808: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S2809).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S2809: No), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S2810), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2811). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S2812), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2813). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S2814), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S2815) Return to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2815 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S1904), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S2815, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is not on but is on in the process of S2809 (S2809: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S2816). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S2816: No), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 2817), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 2818). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S2819). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2820), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S2821), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, after the finalized display effect is finished, the third symbol display device 81 automatically performs the demonstration effect when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect start or the fanfare command is not received. The drawing contents can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S2816, if the demonstration display flag is on (S2816: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simple display setting process (S1909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 41B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting, in the display data table buffer 233d, a display data table which specifies to stop and display the image (FIG. 13 (b) or (c)) is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S1905) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 50 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3102), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3101, that is, if it is off (S3101: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3103), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3102), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S1905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 50 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3102).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3201), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3201: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer processing of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3202). In the process of S3202, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3202 (S3202: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to S3203. Further, as a result of the process of S3201, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3203.

  In the process of S3203, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3203), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3203: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3204), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing of S3203, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3203: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3205), and the resident image transfer setting processing is ended. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S1908 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting process (see S1909 in FIG. 41B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 42 to 46) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 47 to 49) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) (see S3101: No in FIG. 50A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a normal image transfer setting process (S3103) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S1905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3103).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S2805) of the display setting process (S1903) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3301). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3302), and if it is transfer data information (S3302: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3303), the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3304), and the process proceeds to step S3305.

  In the process of S3302, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data (S3302: No), the process of S3303 and S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. In the process of S3305, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S3305), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3305: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3306).

  In the process of S3306, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3306 (S3306: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3306: Yes), the process proceeds to S3307. Also, as a result of the process of S3305, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3305: No), the process proceeds to S3307.

  In the process of S3307, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3307), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3307: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3308), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3303 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3317. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3307: No), it is then determined whether the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309).

  When the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 42), and as a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is It means that it was determined that it is a jackpot stop type. Therefore, in this case, control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is completed until the third symbol display device 81 ends the variation effect which becomes a big hit. That is, if the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309: Yes), the fanfare data transfer flag is set to off (S3310), and the image data used in the fanfare effect is set as the transfer target image data (S3311). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data used in fanfare effect is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (video RAM 236 for normal use) are acquired. Then (S3312), the process proceeds to S3317.

  In the process of S3309, if the fanfare data transfer flag is not on but is off (S3309: No), it is then determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3313). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3313: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3313: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3314), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3315). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3316), and the process proceeds to S3317.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3315, if the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S3317, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3317). The determination in the process of S3317 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3317 (S3317: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3317 (S3317: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3318). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3318, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3319), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233 j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and the sub of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S1906) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S1905) (S3401). That is, in the processing of S3401, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S1904), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S1905), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3402). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3402, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S3403). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 k is performed by inverting the value, that is, by setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 41B) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main control unit 110 selects the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new starting winning. , CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a (ie, the winning game state flag) are acquired. Then, when the acquired data is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data The type is prefetched in main controller 110. Then, when the pre-reading is finished, various information (predicting result of big hit lottery, prediction result of fluctuation pattern type) obtained by the pre-reading and the prediction precondition of the pre-reading are voice lamp control The device 113 is notified.

  As described above, the prediction precondition included in the prefetch command indicates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that is the precondition of the prediction when the lottery result or the like is predicted in the prefetch. If this prediction precondition is a low probability state, this means that the main controller 110 has used the low probability big-hit random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, and the prediction precondition is a high probability status. The high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is used to mean that prefetching has been performed.

  Then, when the pre-reading command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, various information (pre-reading preconditions, big-win lottery prediction results, fluctuation pattern type prediction results) are extracted as pre-reading information from the pre-reading commands The prefetch information is newly stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. As described above, in the voice lamp control device 113, since the prediction precondition is stored as the prefetching information together with the prediction result of the big hit lottery, when using the prefetching information in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is By referring to it, it is possible to determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the main control unit 110 is a big win, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type when the big hit ends. And in the main control unit 110, since the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, after the jackpot is finished, the main controller 110 is newly added. When the jackpot lottery is performed, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state newly set at the end of the jackpot are used to perform the jackpot lottery.

  Then, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the start of the fanfare effect and the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit are voiced from the main control device 110 by the fanfare command. The lamp controller 113 is notified. In the sound lamp control device 113, when the fanfare command is received, the gaming state is extracted from the fanfare command, and the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set according to the gaming state. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the time of the big hit end can be determined in the main control device 110 based on the big hit after game state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the main control unit 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the jackpot lottery, but when the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot, At the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main control 110 after the jackpot end, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot end. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the gaming state set at the end of the big hit can be determined based on the big hit after-game state flag 223c, it is newly executed in the main control device 110 after the current big hit is finished. The big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the big hit lottery can also be determined based on the big hit after game state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment, when using the prefetch information, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching It can be determined whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the above.

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot corresponding to the prefetching are scheduled to be used In the main control apparatus 110, it can not be determined whether or not the large hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match with each other.

  That is, the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10 are configured such that winnings (start winnings) at the first ball entry port 64 are held a plurality of times (up to 4 times in the pachinko machine 10) In the main control unit 110, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), if there is a starting winning on hold, the lottery of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting winning After the results are pre-read, the jackpot lottery with the new starting winning combination is performed after all the jackpot lotterys with each starting winning combination that were on hold at the time of the new starting winning combination are finished.

  Then, when the main control unit 110 executes a jackpot lottery with each starter prize that has been on hold at the time of the new starter prize, if any lottery result becomes a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot end. The game state of is newly set. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, a jackpot lottery with a new start winning is performed in the changed gaming state, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new starting winning and its new The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning will not match.

  As described above, in the main control device 110 of the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning game, Furthermore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are configured to be determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start winning and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the big hit lottery accompanying the new starting win do not match, it is used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the big hit lottery In the main control unit 110, the determined big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the pre-reading do not match.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed, and the prediction result of which table 202a1, 202a2 It was not configured to be able to determine whether it was obtained by using it. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, also in the sound lamp control unit 113, it is determined which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result. could not.

  However, even with the conventional pachinko machine, since the main control unit 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big hit lottery, while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change, both the pre-reading of the big win lottery result and the big hit lottery It is performed in the same gaming state in the main control device 110. Therefore, in main controller 110, jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Match Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot selection lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, in the voice lamp control unit 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, The prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as credible.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction preconditions are not stored, until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in main controller 110 When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. It will be unclear.

  Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot selection lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in main controller 110, the voice lamp control device of the conventional pachinko machine is used. In 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as unreliable. And, in the conventional sounding machine control device 113 for pachinko machines, when it is not possible to trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, a process not related to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery (for example, It was suppressed that the continuous advance notice effect, the ending effect etc.) were performed. Therefore, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot effect and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery were wasted.

  In contrast to such a conventional pachinko machine, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, when using the pre-reading information in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. It can be determined whether the main control unit 110 matches the 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching Even in the case where it is unclear in the main control device 110 whether or not they coincide, the determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, as a result of the determination, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the main control device 110 is highly likely to match the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the prediction result. it is conceivable that. Therefore, even in the conventional pachinko machine, even if a prediction result treated as unreliable may be treated as a credible thing in the present pachinko machine 10, in the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery should be suitably handled. it can. As a result, it is possible to use the prediction result of the jackpot lottery more frequently than the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to increase the opportunity to improve the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device At 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as unreliable and he refrained from using the prediction result. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.

  When solving this by a method different from the present embodiment, for example, it is conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results.

  That is, when the main control device 110 performs the pre-reading of the lottery result of the big hit lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202 a 1 and 202 a 2 are obtained using both the big hit random number tables 202 a 1 and 202 a 2, and further It is conceivable to notify the voice lamp control device 113 so as to make it possible to determine which table corresponds to the two prediction results.

  According to this configuration, when using the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the voice lamp control device 113, one of the two prediction results can always be treated as credible. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using this credible prediction result, it is possible to suppress the problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed.

  However, as described above, when prefetching the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the main control unit 110, it is stored in the first hit random number counter C1 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 as in the case of the big hit lottery. A process of comparing the hit values one by one is performed. Therefore, each time a new start winning combination occurs, the process of comparing the first random number counter C1 with the winning values stored in the two big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 one by one is a maximum of 33. It has to be done repeatedly. Therefore, every time a new start winning combination occurs, the comparison process may take a long time, and time may be wasted.

  Further, although the main controller 110 obtains the prediction results corresponding to each of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 by using the two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2, both of the prediction results for the jackpot lottery in the audio lamp control device 113 are When used, only one prediction result is used. Therefore, the main control device 110 wastes the comparison process which may take time and may be performed. In addition, although the main controller 110 obtains two prediction results each time a new start winning is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses only one of the prediction results, so that useless prediction results are always generated. Therefore, the number of useless prediction results increases more than in the case of the conventional pachinko machine.

  Further, since the audio lamp control device 113 stores the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively, a storage area larger than that of the conventional one is required. Further, since main controller 110 notifies prediction results corresponding to each of two tables 202a1 and 202a2 to audio lamp controller 113, data to be transmitted from main controller 110 to audio lamp controller 113 is increased. Therefore, there is a possibility that data etc. desired to be transmitted preferentially can not be transmitted, and the control burden on the main control device 110 also increases. Further, since the data to be received also increases in the audio lamp control device 113, the control load increases.

  As described above, in the case where the main control device 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 are obtained using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 so as to make it possible to determine which table the two prediction results respectively correspond to, the credit in the voice lamp control device 113 Although it can handle more predictions that can be made, other problems occur, such as an increase in processing time and control burden.

  Further, when solving by another method, it is also conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows, for example, so as to handle more reliable prediction results in the audio lamp control device 113. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control unit 110 and the lottery result becomes the jackpot, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit, the main control unit 110 uses the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the current big hit, and pre-reads each pending start winning combination It is conceivable that the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of each prediction result obtained by the re-doing and re-doing.

  According to this configuration, the main control device 110 changes the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed. As a result, even if the voice lamp control device 113 can not trust the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change, the prediction of the jackpot lottery notified again from the main control device 110 instead. The results can be used as credible.

  The prediction result of the jackpot lottery to be notified again is obtained by the main controller 110 in the same tables 202a1 and 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot end. is there. Therefore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified again and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result coincide with each other in the main control device 110, in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery Can be treated as credible. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using this credible prediction result, it is possible to suppress the problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10, every time the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the pre-reading for each start winning combination pending in the main controller 110 is re-done, and each prediction result obtained by the re-do The control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 again. Therefore, the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery which has become the target of the retrial and the prediction result are wasted.

  Therefore, unnecessary processing is performed in the main control device 110, which imposes a control burden. Also, since the voice lamp control device 113 receives the useless prediction result and stores it in the RAM 223, useless processing is performed in the voice lamp control device 113 and the control load Hangs. Further, data to be transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 is increased. Therefore, there is a possibility that data etc. desired to be transmitted preferentially can not be transmitted, and the control burden on the main control device 110 also increases. Further, since the data to be received also increases in the audio lamp control device 113, the control load increases.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 hits the jackpot, the main control unit 110 uses the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the present jackpot to hold each start winning prize on hold When the pachinko machine 10 is configured to reread the pre-reading for each and to notify each of the prediction results obtained by the re-reading to the voice lamp control device 113, the credit in the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Although it can handle more prediction results that can be done, other problems occur such as unnecessary processing and increased control burden.

  Further, when solving by another method, it is also conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows, for example, so as to handle more reliable prediction results in the audio lamp control device 113. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control unit 110 and the lottery result becomes the jackpot, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the main control unit 110 normally does not pre-read the lottery result of the big hit drawing, and only when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, the main control unit 110 in the big hit random number table corresponding to the gaming state at the big hit end. It is conceivable to pre-read each pending start winning combination using 202a1 and 202a2 and to notify each sound lamp control device 113 of each prediction result from the main control device 110.

  If configured in this way, it is possible to pre-read each pending start winning combination only when the main control device 110 makes the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big hit and there is a high possibility that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes. . The prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by this pre-reading is obtained by the main controller 110 in the same table 202a1, 202a2 as the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 scheduled to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot end. . Therefore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result coincide with each other in the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery It can be treated as Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. In addition, by using this credible prediction result, it is possible to suppress the problem that processing (for example, effect etc.) unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is executed.

  However, since the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot in the main control device 110, the number (frequency) of prefetching decreases. Then, the number of jackpot lottery prediction results notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 is also reduced, so the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction result in the voice lamp controller 113 decreases, and the above-described continuous Opportunity to carry out the preview production is reduced. Therefore, the amusement of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

  As described above, the main controller 110 does not usually pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and only when the pachinko machine 10 hits the jackpot, the main controller 110 copes with the gaming state at the time of the jackpot end When the pachinko machine 10 is configured to pre-read each pending start winning combination using the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and to notify each prediction result from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 The audio lamp control device 113 can handle more credible prediction results, but the frequency of using the jackpot lottery prediction results decreases, which may lower the interest of the pachinko machine 10, and other problems. Will occur.

  As described above, the three solutions other than the above-described embodiment allow the voice lamp control device 113 to handle more reliable prediction results, but the main controller 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 The problem of processing time, wasteful processing, increase in control load, and other problems of the possibility of reducing the interest of the pachinko machine 10 arise.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like in the prefetch command, the information further includes the information indicating the prediction precondition of prefetching, Although transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, the information indicating the prediction precondition of this pre-reading is only one bit. In addition, the main control unit 110 sends information to the voice lamp control unit 113 from the main control unit 110 including information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit this time in the fanfare command, but at the time of the big hit Information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 is also only one bit. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, compared with the conventional pachinko machine, the amount of data processed in MPU201, 221 hardly changes. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 is small, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, as described above, even if the prediction result treated as unreliable in the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as credible in the present pachinko machine 10, in this embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is It can be handled suitably. Therefore, the frequency with which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be used is higher than that of the conventional pachinko machine, and the opportunity to improve the interest of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is preferable to handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery without causing problems such as increase in processing time and control load, and problems such as unnecessary processing and increase in control load. Further, the opportunity to improve the interest of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main control unit 110 checks the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new starting winning. , CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a (ie, the winning game state flag) are acquired. Then, when the acquired data is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern prior to the jackpot lottery based on the acquired data The type is prefetched in main controller 110.

  Then, when the pre-reading is performed in the main control device 110, if the data targeted for pre-reading is acquired along with the start winning other than during the big hit, then the winning game state flag is included in the data. Based on the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for the pre-reading, are determined. On the other hand, if the data targeted for pre-reading is acquired in accordance with the winning combination during the big hit, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for pre-reading are determined based on the big hit post game state flag 203d. . When the winning game state flag or the big hit after game state flag 203d is off (indicating a low probability state), the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 is selected, and the winning game state flag, after a big hit When the gaming state flag 203d is on (indicating a high probability state), the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 is selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, when the game state flag 203a is in the big hit, it is off, and the data targeted for pre-reading is acquired along with the winning game during the big hit, the game time flag in the data at that time is always off. . Therefore, when the tables 202a1 and 202a2 are determined based on the winning game state flag in the data, the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 is always selected. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is less likely to coincide with the actual lottery result, and the accuracy of the lottery result prediction becomes worse.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the data targeted for the pre-reading is acquired in association with the start winning during the big hit, the big hit random number table 202a1, which is used for the pre-reading based on the big hit post game state flag 203d. 202a2 has been determined. Thereby, the precision of prediction of a lottery result can be improved.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot. Therefore, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot can not be determined until the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes the jackpot, but when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, the gaming state at the jackpot end is already determined. The control device 110 can determine the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. And, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot is finished, if there is a jackpot lottery pending in the main control unit 110, the jackpot lottery that was on hold is one in the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot termination The main control unit 110 sequentially executes them one by one.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery held in the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when there is a start winning in the big hit, when performing pre-reading for that starting winning, it is the jackpot that made the prediction precondition the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, rather than always making the prediction precondition a low probability state It is possible to improve the possibility that the main controller 110 matches the predicted result of the lottery and the actual lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the predicted result. Therefore, since the number of prediction results that can be treated as credible in the voice lamp control device 113 can be increased, in the present embodiment, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 110 is a jackpot, the stop symbol indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a jackpot, In the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started. Then, when the jackpot effect ends, in the third symbol display device 81, an ending effect that is a part of the jackpot effect is performed.

  In this ending effect, if the jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning with the jackpot ending, whether the lottery result will be notified to the player that the lottery result will be a jackpot in any jackpot lottery ( The fixed effect display is performed) or the player is notified that the jackpot is simply ended (normal display is performed). It is determined in the audio lamp control device 113 whether “finalized display” or “normal display” is performed in the ending effect.

  Specifically, immediately before the ending effect is started, the above-mentioned ending effect determination process (refer to FIG. 33) is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, and the contents of the pre-reading information storage area 223a and the ending mode counter Whether the display mode of the ending effect is “fixed effect display” or “normal display” is determined based on the value of 223 f or the like. The prefetch information storage area 223a is provided with one execution area and four reserve areas (preserve first area to reserve fourth area), and the smaller the area number, the older the start in time The prefetch information corresponding to the winning is stored.

  When the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, among the hold areas of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the hold areas are sequentially stored in the hold area from the area with the smallest area number The read ahead information that is present is acquired one by one, and the prediction precondition in the read ahead information is compared with the gaming state indicated by the after-big play state flag 223c (see S1401 to S1410).

  Then, if it is determined in the process of S1406 that the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information matches the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c, as described above, by the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery In this case, the main control unit 110 matches the used jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading. Therefore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, the speech lamp control device 113 predicts the jackpot lottery prediction result in the prefetch information. Can be treated as credible. Therefore, in this case, in the process of S1407, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is the jackpot.

  Then, in the process of S1407, when it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out, another piece of prefetch information stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is confirmed. Specifically, each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1407 that the prediction result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, the process proceeds to S1411 without checking the remaining pre-reading information stored in the hold area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, A process of determining whether or not to set the display mode of the ending effect to "finalized effect display" is executed. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is credible, and the prediction result is a jackpot, the processing does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  As described above, this is to notify the player that the lottery result will be the jackpot in the jackpot lottery being held with the termination of the jackpot, so that the main control unit 110 holds the hold. This is because if there is at least one jackpot among the jackpot lottery being performed, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to confirm the read-ahead information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the confirmation of the prefetched information is unnecessary, the confirmation is not performed, so that the execution of the unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Further, the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) described above is executed, and it is determined in the process of S1406 that the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the gaming state indicated by the large hitting after game state flag 223c do not match. In this case, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching , And the main controller 110 do not match. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control device 110, in this case, the voice lamp control device of this embodiment Even in the case of 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be relied upon, and it is refrained from using the prediction result.

  However, as described above, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information may be treated as credible, next, whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot by the process of S1408 It is determined. Then, in the process of S1408, if it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the prediction result is credible and can be regarded as being out, so the process returns to S1409 and repeats each process of S1404 to S1410 Run it.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 do not overlap with each other. You have set a hit value. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery And, even if the main jack 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading in the main control unit 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot If it is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result will be out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, and it is uniquely determined that it is an outlier. In the audio lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit in the process of S1408, the prediction result can be regarded as a drop, so that the process returns to S1409 and repeatedly executes each process of S1404 to S1410. can do. As described above, in the case of the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, even the prediction result treated as being unreliable may be treated as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the big hit after-game state flag 223c, and in the processing of S1408 the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is out If so, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the predicted result will be unknown.

  And according to the ending effect determination process (refer to FIG. 33) mentioned above, when each process of S1404 to S1410 is being executed, in the process of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, and after the big hit If it is determined in the process of S1408 that the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223c is different (S1406: No) and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is out of place (S1408: No), S1404 to S1410 The repetition of each process of can be stopped there. That is, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual lottery result corresponding to the prediction result, and if the prediction result can not be trusted, the processing does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining It does not confirm pre-reading information. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information can not be trusted, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that the execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) described above, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery is a big hit or a drop, normal display is set as a display mode of the ending effect Are configured to As a result, although the "finalized display" has been performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed. In fact, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of the problem that the lottery result is not a big hit.

  Further, although the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) described above is executed when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the ending command is the ending effect. It is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when it is time to start. Therefore, the ending effect determination process is not executed immediately after the jackpot effect is started, but is performed after waiting until immediately before the start of the ending effect. As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the jackpot, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is the maximum (four times), so it is executed at the timing when the jackpot ends. If the pre-reading information is acquired from the pre-reading information storage area 223a immediately before the start of the ending effect to be performed, in most cases, four pieces of pre-reading information can be obtained.

  Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 113, there is a high possibility that more pre-reading information can be obtained as compared with the case where the ending effect determination processing is immediately executed after the jackpot effect is started. It is possible to increase the possibility of being Therefore, since it is possible to increase the opportunity for the "fixed effect display" to be performed in the ending effect, the lottery result is the jackpot when any lottery among the held jackpot lottery is made after the jackpot is finished. Can increase the chances of giving the player a sense of expectation that In addition, every time a jackpot lottery is performed, it is possible to increase the chances of having the player happy, and to increase the feeling of expectation that the player will be the big win next time, so the player's interest can be further enhanced. It can be enhanced.

  The above is the description of the first embodiment. As described above, in the first embodiment, the jackpot in the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) executed during the jackpot as an example capable of suitably handling the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the voice lamp control device 113. An example has been described in which the prediction result of the lottery is suitably handled, and it is determined whether the display mode of the ending effect is "fixed effect display" or "normal display".

  However, according to the present invention, not only the determination of the display mode of the ending effect but also the processing of dealing with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled. For example, as one of the processes for handling the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, there is a process relating to continuous notice effects. The present invention can also be applied to processing relating to this continuous advance presentation effect, and of course, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  Next, as a second embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to processing relating to continuous advance notice effects will be described. In the second embodiment, only parts different from the first embodiment will be described.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In addition to the counters 223b, 223f to 223h and the flags 223c to 223e, 223i described above, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is a prefetch information storage area in which a part of the configuration is added as compared with the first embodiment. It has at least 223a, a newly added gaming state flag 223j, and a newly added effect execution time gaming state flag 223k.

  Here, details of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic view schematically showing a configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment.

  The difference between the prefetching information storage area 223a in the second embodiment and the prefetching information storage area 223a (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment is that, in each of five areas from the execution area to the hold fourth area This is the difference between the presence or absence of the preliminary execution status area 223a4. As in the first embodiment, the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment also receives various information notified from the main control device 110 by the prefetch command (prediction of preconditioning for prefetching, prediction result of jackpot lottery, fluctuation This is an area for storing the prediction result of the pattern type).

  As shown in FIG. 57, the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment includes one execution area and four hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) as in the first embodiment. There are five areas, and each of these areas is provided with at least a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, a variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and a prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 is provided in each of five areas of the execution area to the hold fourth area. The continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is an area for storing the continuous notice execution status, and the continuous notice execution status corresponds to each area (execution area to hold fourth area) in which the status is stored. When the variable effect is executed, it indicates whether or not the continuous advance effect is executed in the variable effect.

  In the present embodiment, 13 types of continuous notice execution statuses are provided, and different status values are assigned to the respective statuses. Details will be described later, but there are six types of status indicating that continuous notice production is to be performed in the fluctuation production, and six types of status indicating that the continuous notice production is scheduled to be performed in the fluctuation production but are canceled In addition, there are 13 types of statuses including one type of status indicating that continuous advance presentation effects are not performed in the fluctuation effects.

  Regarding the status indicating that continuous notice effects are to be executed in the fluctuation production, the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect among the probability variation big hit, the normal big hit, and the out of the gap, the prediction that became the trigger of the continuous notice effect Status values of "1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13" are assigned so that it can be determined whether it is a result. In addition, the classification of the prediction result used as the opportunity of continuous notice production is the classification of the prediction result used for the judgment, when it is judged that execution of the continuous notice production is performed.

  The status value “1” indicates that although the type of the prediction result that has triggered the continuous advance presentation effect is a probability change jackpot, the prediction result is not an opportunity for the continuous advance presentation effect. Similarly, the status value "2" indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is usually a big win, and the status value "3" indicates the predicted result that became the trigger for the continuous notice effect. Although it shows that it is a deviation, each prediction result shows that it is not a trigger of continuous notice production.

  On the other hand, the status value “11” indicates that the type of the prediction result that is the trigger for the continuous advance notice effect is a probability change jackpot and that the prediction result is the trigger for the continuous advance notice effect. Similarly, the status value "12" indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous advance presentation effect is usually a big win, and the status value "13" indicates that the prediction result that became the trigger of the continuous advance presentation effect It indicates that the type is out, and further indicates that each prediction result is a trigger for continuous notice effects.

  On the other hand, with regard to the status indicating that it was planned to carry out continuous notice production in the fluctuation production but was canceled, the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice production out of the probability variation big hit, the normal big hit, and the out Also, status values of "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13" are assigned so that it can be determined whether or not it is a prediction result that has been a trigger for continuous advance notice effects.

  In the present embodiment, as status values, positive status values “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” and negative status values “−1, −2, −3, −11, −12 , -13 ", but the status values may be distinguished in another way. For example, when managing the status value with 1 byte or 2 bytes, the most significant bit may be changed to 0 or 1 to distinguish the status value. Specifically, when the most significant bit is 0, it indicates the above-mentioned positive number status value, and when the most significant bit is 1, it indicates the above-mentioned negative number status value. Note that other bits may be changed instead of the most significant bit. Also, the status value may be one of a positive number status value and a negative number status value, and each status value may be assigned such that each status value is different to distinguish the status values.

  The status value “−1” indicates that although the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous advance presentation effect was a probability change jackpot, the prediction result was not an opportunity of the continuous advance presentation effect. Similarly, the status value "-2" indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect was normally a big hit, and the status value "-3" is the prediction that triggered the continuous notice effect Although the result shows that it was dislocated, each predicted result shows that it was not a trigger for continuous notice effects.

  On the other hand, the status value “−11” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous advance presentation effect was a probability change jackpot and that the prediction result was an opportunity for the continuous advance presentation effect. Similarly, the status value "-12" indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect was usually a big win, and the status value "-13" became the trigger for the continuous notice effect It indicates that the type of the prediction result is out, and further indicates that each prediction result is a trigger for continuous notice effect. Then, a status value of “0” is assigned to the status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is not to be executed in the variable effect.

  One of the 13 types of status values is stored in the above-described continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4. As described in the first embodiment, in each of five areas from the execution area to the reserved fourth area in the prefetch information storage area 223a, the process of setting the initial value of the RAM (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed at power on. The initialization is performed, and the inside of each of five areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a is cleared to 0. That is, the status value of the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 is set to "0" when the power is turned on.

  In the status value of the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4, it is determined that the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-reading command and based on the pre-reading information extracted from the pre-reading command, it is determined to execute the continuous advance presentation effect. Be changed. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command, and various information (prefetch preconditions, jackpot lottery prediction results, fluctuation pattern type prediction results) are extracted as prefetching information from the prefetch commands. The pre-read information is newly stored in the hold area (one of the hold first area to the hold fourth area) of the pre-reading information storage area 223a.

  Then, a continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59) to be described later is executed, and it is determined whether to perform a continuous notice effect based on the pre-read information newly stored in the hold area. Here, if it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed, the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the holding area in which the prefetch information is newly stored indicates that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the change effect, and The status value (one of 11, 12, and 13) indicating that the prediction result of the pre-reading information is a trigger for continuous notice effects is set to one according to the type of the prediction result that is the trigger for continuous notice effects Be done.

  For example, if it is determined that the continuous preview effect is to be executed when the prediction result of the new prefetch information is a probability change jackpot, the positive change jackpot becomes the prediction result that became the trigger of the continuous preview effect, and as a result, continuous preview execution A status value "11" is set in the status storage area 223a4.

  Furthermore, for all pending areas having a smaller area number than the pending area where the prefetch information is newly stored, that is, all pending areas in which the prefetch information is already stored, the status is stored in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4. The value is set. In this case, although the status value set indicates that continuous advance notice effects are to be executed in the fluctuation effect, it is assumed that the pre-read information in the holding area in which the status values are set is not a trigger for continuous notice effects. One value (one of 1, 2, and 3) is set according to the type of the prediction result that is the trigger of the continuous advance notice effect.

  For example, in the case where the prediction result that triggered the continuous advance presentation effect is a probability variation jackpot, the status value "1" is stored in the continuous advance notification execution status storage area 223a4 for all the pending areas in which the prefetch information is already stored. It is set.

  Then, the continuous advance notice status stored in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the hold area is stored in the execution area and referred to by the MPU 221 when the change effect corresponding to the hold area is started. The details will be described later, but when the change effect is started, if the continuous advance notice execution status of the execution area is any of “1, 2, 3”, the continuous notice in the start of the change effect started If the effect is performed, and the status value is "0", "11, 12, 13" or "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13", the change effect to be started is In the above, no advance presentation is performed, and a normal fluctuation presentation is performed.

  Further, although details will be described later, it is determined that the prediction result of the prefetching information stored in the execution area of the prefetching information storage area 223a can not be trusted when the fluctuation effect scheduled to execute continuous notice rendering is started. Then, a status value is set in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area to indicate that the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled to be executed but has been canceled. Specifically, a minus sign is added to the positive number status value stored in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4, and the negative number is set.

  For example, when the fluctuation effect is started, it is determined that the status value in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area is "1" and the prediction result of the prefetch information stored in the execution area can not be trusted. Then, the status value "-1" is set in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area. As a result, even if the change presentation intended to execute the continuous advance presentation effect is performed, the continuous advance presentation effect is not performed, and the normal change presentation is performed.

  In this embodiment, in order to easily show the continuous advance notice execution status in the drawings to be referred (FIG. 62, FIG. 64, FIG. 66, and FIG. 68), not the status value but the presence or absence of the flag, the shape of the flag, and Indicate whether the flag is standing or falling. Specifically, when the status value is “0”, the flag is not described, when the status value is a positive number, a flag is displayed, and when the status value is a negative number, the flag is displayed. Also, when the status value is "1", it is indicated by a triangular white flag. Similarly, if the status value is "11", the flag is filled with triangles, if the status value is "2", the flag is blank, and if the value is "12", the flag is filled with squares. A value of “3” is an open flag with a V-shaped break in the square, and a status value of “13” is a black flag with a V-shaped cut in the square, respectively. Show.

  Here, the explanation will return to the explanation of FIG. The gaming state flag 223 j is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or a high probability state (during a definite change), similarly to the gaming state flag 203 a of the main control device 110. If the gaming state flag 223j is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, and if the gaming state flag 223j is on, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state Indicates

  The gaming state flag 223 j is set to off in the RAM initial value setting process (see S 1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Further, when the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10 and the jackpot ends (that is, when the ending effect is ended), the jackpot is set according to the jackpot type. Specifically, if the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, the gaming state flag 223 j is set to ON at the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, the gaming state flag 223j is set to off at the end of the jackpot.

  In addition, the gaming state flag 203a of the main control device 110 is set to off before the big hit start, and is set to on or off according to the big hit type after the big hit ends, but the playing state flag of the voice lamp control device 113 223 j is set to ON or OFF only after the end of the jackpot. This is because the voice lamp control device 113 does not refer to the gaming state flag 223 j during the jackpot, and there is no need to set it. The game state flag 223 j may also be set to off before the jackpot start, as with the game state flag 203 a.

  The gaming state flag 223 j is used by the MPU 221 to determine whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223 a is credible or credible. If the gaming state flag 223j is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, so if the main control device 110 is to perform a big hit lottery when the flag 223j is off, the main control device At 110, the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to, which means that a jackpot lottery is performed. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 223 j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, and therefore, if the main control device 110 is to perform a big hit lottery when the flag 223 j is on, the main control device 110 Means that the jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  Then, as described above, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the big hit lottery is performed based on the data stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110. In this embodiment, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110 and each area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a in the voice lamp control unit 113. Therefore, when the big hit lottery is performed in main controller 110, the pre-reading information corresponding to the big hit lottery performed in main controller 110 is stored in the execution area of pre-reading information storage area 223a in voice lamp control device 113. Ru.

  Also, as described above, in the execution area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a and each area of the hold area (hold first area to hold fourth area), the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type In addition, read-ahead prediction preconditions are also stored. Therefore, by referring to the data stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the execution area and the reserve area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the same area and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are It can be determined whether or not it is prefetched by such prediction preconditions. That is, it is possible to determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 of the tables 202a1 or 202a2 is used in the pre-reading performed in the main control device 110.

  Therefore, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the game state flag 223j is used in the present jackpot lottery by comparing the prediction precondition stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Whether the main controller 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 202 to be scheduled and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 202 used in the pre-reading of the present jackpot lottery can be determined in the voice lamp control unit 113.

  And, as a result of comparison, when the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 coincide with each other, the prediction result of the present big hit lottery and the lottery result of the present big hit lottery match in the main control unit 110, so the voice lamp control The apparatus 113 determines that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a can be trusted. On the other hand, when the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match, there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current big hit lottery and the current lottery result of the big hit lottery may be different in the main controller 110, so the voice lamp control device At 113, it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a can not be trusted.

  The effect execution time game state flag 223 k is a high probability state whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state when one target variable change effect is executed among the pending change effects. It is a flag indicating whether or not the

  If the effect execution time game state flag 223k is off, it indicates that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, when one of the target variable effects is performed. As described above, since the fluctuation effect is executed in conjunction with the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery is always performed before the fluctuation effect. Therefore, when the effect execution time game state flag 223k is off, the main control unit 110 refers to the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 when the target variation production is executed, and the big hit lottery Means to be done.

  On the other hand, if the effect execution time game state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, when one target variable change effect is performed. That is, when the effect execution time game state flag 223k is on, the main control unit 110 refers to the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 when the target variation production is executed, and the big hit lottery Means to be done.

  The effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to off in the process of setting the initial value of the RAM (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Although details will be described later, the gaming state flag 223 j is compared with the prediction preconditions stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223 a, and the jackpot random number tables 202 a 1 202 actually used in the jackpot lottery When the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202 used in the pre-reading of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and it is determined that the jackpot lottery prediction result stored in the execution area can be trusted If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored in the hold area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area .

  Specifically, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a jackpot, the state of the above-described jackpot after-game state flag 223c is set. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out, the state of the above-mentioned game state flag 223 j is set. In the case of setting the effect execution time game state flag 223k during the big hit, the state of the big hit after game state flag 223c is set without confirming the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the execution area. Also good.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the present big hit lottery is a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type at the end of the big hit. In other words, while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out of game, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. Therefore, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a jackpot and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes according to the jackpot type, the effect execution time game state flag 223k, after the jackpot game The state of the state flag 223c is set to set the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. Thus, the effect execution time game state flag 223k can be set to indicate the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery.

  On the other hand, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is out and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change, the state of the gaming state flag 223 j is set in the effect execution time gaming state flag 223 k The game state of the current pachinko machine 10 is set. Thus, the effect execution time game state flag 223k can be set to indicate the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery. As described above, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the effect execution time game state flag 223 k when the next big hit lottery is performed by the main control unit 110 (that is, when the next change effect is performed). Ru.

  The effect execution time game state flag 223 k is used by the MPU 221 to determine whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in the hold area of the pre-reading information storage area 223 a can be trusted or not. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area, then the effect execution time game state flag 223k And the prediction precondition stored in the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a are compared, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved first area can be trusted.

  Here, in the effect execution time game state flag 223k, as described above, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 when the next big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 is set. Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by comparing the effect execution time game state flag 223k with the prediction precondition stored in the reserved first area, and the It is possible to determine in the voice lamp control device 113 whether the main control device 110 matches the large hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 which are scheduled to be used in the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the pre-reading.

  Then, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the lottery result of the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main control unit 110, so the voice lamp control The device 113 can determine that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted.

  Here, if it is determined that the jackpot lottery prediction result can be trusted, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set based on the jackpot lottery prediction result, and the jackpot lottery prediction result is further determined. Similarly, while it is determined that the image can be trusted, the comparison is repeated in the order of the hold second area, the hold third area, and the hold fourth area. In the present embodiment, of the four reserve areas (preserve area 1 to reserve area 4) of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning combination older in time is stored, In the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest start winning in time is stored. Therefore, the main control is performed by setting the effect execution time game state flag 223k while determining the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the hold area in order from the first hold area to the fourth hold area. Whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted can be determined according to the order in which the jackpot lottery is performed in the device 110.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The same reference numerals are given to steps for executing the same processes as those of the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing main processing in the second embodiment. In the main processing, the processing of S1111 is executed, and when the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S3501). In the process of S3501, if it is the end timing of ending effect (S3501: Yes), the state of the jackpot after-game state flag 223c is set to the game state flag 223j of the RAM 223 (S3502).

  Specifically, when the jackpot after game state flag 223c is off and the jackpot is terminated when the jackpot is over, the game state flag 223j is also set to be off. On the other hand, when the jackpot after game state flag 223c is on and the jackpot is over when the jackpot is over, the game state flag 223j is also set to be on. If it is not the end timing of the ending effect in the process of S3501 (S3501: No), the process of S3502 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1112.

  Further, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S1101 was performed last time (S1101: Yes), S1102 to S1111. And S3501 are executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that one millisecond or more has not elapsed since the main processing was started, or if the processing of S1101 was performed last time (S1101: No), S1102 to S1111, and S3501. The processing proceeds to step S1112 without performing the processing of

  According to the main processing shown in FIG. 58, when the ending effect is ended (that is, when the big hit is finished), the gaming state flag 223 j indicates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the big hit is finished. You can set the state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the continuous advance notice determination process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice determination process (S1211) in the second embodiment. The continuous advance notice determination process (S1211) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1211 in FIG. 31), and as in the first embodiment, it is read ahead. When the command is received, it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notice effect.

  In the continuous advance notice determination process, in the process of S1302, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the big hit lottery among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301 is "big hit" (S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to S1312. . On the other hand, in the prefetched information read out in the process of S1301, if the result of the jackpot lottery prediction result is "out of place" (S1302: No), the prediction result of the variation pattern type read out in the process of S1301 is "super" It is determined whether it is "reach" (S3601).

  In the process of S3601, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is "super reach" (S3601: Yes), the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is not "super reach" but another fluctuation pattern type (S3601: No), this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1316 that the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is not included in the continuous notice determination range and it is determined that the continuous notice effect is not started (S1316: No), the process of S3602 and subsequent steps is skipped. The process ends and returns to the command determination process. That is, continuous advance presentation effects are not performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1316 that the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous notice determination range and it is determined that the continuous notice effect is started (S1316: Yes), the prefetch information read out in the process of S1301 It is determined what the success or failure of the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is (S3602). If the result of the jackpot lottery prediction result is "probable jackpot" (S3602: probability change jackpot), the prediction of the jackpot lottery among the reserved areas (hold 1st area to the hold 4th area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a The continuous advance notice execution status of all the pending areas in which the result is stored is set to "1" (S3603). That is, the status value is set to indicate that the type of the prediction result that is the trigger of the continuous advance notice effect is the probability variation jackpot.

  In addition, when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is "normal jackpot" (S3602: normal jackpot), the jackpot lottery among the reserved areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The continuous advance notice execution status of all the pending areas in which the prediction results of are stored is set to "2" (S3604). That is, the status value is set to indicate that the type of the prediction result that is the trigger of the continuous advance notice effect is usually a big hit.

  Moreover, when the yes or no in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is "outside" (S3602: out), the prediction of the jackpot lottery among the hold areas (hold 1st area-hold 4th area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The continuous advance notice execution status of all the pending areas in which the result is stored is set to "3" (S3605). That is, the status value is set to indicate that the type of the prediction result that has triggered the continuous advance presentation effect is out of order.

Next, among the reserve areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the last notice of the reserve area in which the prefetch information (that is, the prediction result of the big hit lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the prediction precondition of prefetching) is stored last "10" is added to the execution status (S3606)
In this embodiment, based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of the reserve area where the prefetch information is stored last, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect over a plurality of fluctuation effects, and the continuous advance notice effect When it is determined to start, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of the holding area in which the pre-reading information is stored last is the trigger. Therefore, when it is determined to start the continuous advance presentation effect, if "10" is added to the continuous advance notification execution status of the holding area where the prefetch information is stored last, the prediction result that became the trigger of the continuous advance presentation effect is stored The continuous advance notice status can be set to any one of "11, 12, 13" for the reserved area being held. Therefore, when referring to the continuous advance notice status of each hold area, it is determined based on the status value whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of the hold area is the prediction result which became the trigger of the continuous advance notice effect or is different. it can.

  According to the continuous advance notice determination process shown in FIG. 59 described above, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be started, the jackpot lottery among the hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The continuous advance notice execution status of the holding area in which the prediction result of is stored can be set to the status value “1, 2, 3” indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the change effect.

  In addition, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be started, the status value is increased by “10” for the pending area storing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the determination, and the continuous advance notification status is It can be set to any of "11, 12, 13". Therefore, when referring to the continuous advance notice status of each hold area, it is judged whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of the hold area is the prediction result which became the trigger of the continuous advance notice or the difference based on the status value. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the variable display setting process (S1112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1112) in the second embodiment.

  This variation display setting process (S1112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110. Further, in order to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuation effect, the display stop type command is set based on the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In the variable display setting process, when the process of S1506 is executed to shift the prefetch information (data) stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a, next, of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prefetch information by the process of S1506 is The reserved area that has become free due to the shift is cleared (S3701). Then, the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the preread information storage area 223a is acquired (S3702), and the acquired continuous advance notice execution status indicates that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the fluctuation effect. It is determined whether it is "1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13" (S3703).

  In the process of S3703, if the acquired continuous advance notice execution status is a status "1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13" indicating execution of continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuation effect (S3703: Yes), continuous The notice execution status confirmation process A is executed (S3702). Although details will be described later, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A is stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a when the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed in the change effect. By comparing the prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223j, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery prediction result stored in the execution area is credible or not, and depending on the judgment result, the fluctuation effect is continuously made It is a process for determining whether or not to execute the advance presentation effect.

  Further, in the process of S3703, if the acquired continuous advance notice execution status is other than the status "1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13" indicating that continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the fluctuation effect (S3703: No) The process skips the process of S3704 and shifts to the process of S1507. Then, the processing of S1509 is executed, and in the processing of S1206 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 31), when the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223, next, the prefetch information storage area 223a The continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of is acquired (S3705).

  Then, it is determined whether the continuous advance notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status "1, 2, 3" indicating that continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the fluctuation effect (S3706). In the process of S3706, if the continuous advance notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status "1, 2, 3" indicating that continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the change effect (S3706: Yes), The chance eye is set as the stop type (S3707), and the process proceeds to the process of S1514.

  By the process of S3707, the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110, and the symbol on the middle line L2 is left It is set to "3" "4" "1" in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol which becomes a chance eye can be displayed at the time of a stop of change production in the third symbol display device 81 as a continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3706, if the continuous advance notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is other than the status "1, 2, 3" indicating that continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the fluctuation effect (S3706: No), The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3708), and the process shifts to the process of S1514.

  By the process of S3708, the continuous advance notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status "11, 12, 13" indicating that continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the fluctuation effect, and the last to which execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set In the case of the fluctuation effect of, the chance eye is not set as the stop type. In addition, the status "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13" indicating that it was planned to perform continuous advance notice production in the change production has been canceled, and it is originally continuous in the change production The stop type notified from the main control device 110 is similarly set in the case of the status “0” indicating that the advance effect is not to be executed.

  According to the fluctuation display setting process shown in FIG. 60 described above, when setting the stop type of the current fluctuation effect, the stop type is determined based on the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Or a stop type instructed by the main control unit 110 can be set as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processing A (S3704) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A (S3704).

  The continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A (S3704) is executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is newly changed in the third symbol display device 113. When the effect is started, it is executed if it is set to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuation effect. Then, it is judged whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a is credible, and if it is not credible, execution of continuous notice effect for the fluctuation effect to be executed this time Set to cancel.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A, first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S3801). Then, the prediction precondition acquired in the process of S3801 is compared with the gaming state flag 223j (S3802). Then, as a result of comparison, it is determined whether the gaming state indicated by the predicted precondition and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223 j indicate the same gaming state (S 3803).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch is main control by the prefetch command The device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113. It should be noted that if this prediction precondition is a low probability state, this means that the main controller 110 has used the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, and the prediction precondition is a high probability status Means that the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is used to look ahead. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, by referring to the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is obtained by using the main control device 110 using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 You can determine the

  Further, as described above, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the big hit lottery is performed based on the data stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110. In this embodiment, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110 and each area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a in the voice lamp control unit 113. Therefore, when the big hit lottery is performed in main controller 110, the pre-reading information corresponding to the big hit lottery performed in main controller 110 is stored in the execution area of pre-reading information storage area 223a in voice lamp control device 113. Ru. Therefore, by referring to the prediction preconditions of the prefetching information stored in the execution area of the prefetching information storage area 223a, in the prefetching performed corresponding to the jackpot lottery performed by the main control device 110, which jackpot random number table 202a1 and 202a2 can be used to determine whether a prediction result has been obtained.

  Further, as described above, the gaming state flag 223 j is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state or in the high probability state (during a definite change), and the gaming state flag 223 j is off The case indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state. Therefore, if a big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, it means that the big hit lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 in the main control device 110. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 223 j is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, so if a big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the main control device 110 for high probability time The jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to, which means that a jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 110 based on the state of the gaming state flag 223j.

  Therefore, in the process of S3803 described above, the jackpot random number used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information with the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j. It can be compared whether the main control unit 110 matches the tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present big hit lottery.

  Then, in the process of S3803, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803: Yes), this is the jackpot lottery In this case, the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the corresponding pre-reading and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the present jackpot lottery. Therefore, since the values of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for the comparison are the same, the comparison results match each other. The main control device 110 matches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as credible.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3803, when the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), it is used in the prefetch corresponding to the present jackpot lottery In this case, the main controller 110 does not match the determined jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present jackpot lottery. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, there is a possibility that the comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result It becomes unclear whether or not the main controller 110 matches. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can not trust the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

  In the process of S3803, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803: Yes), as described above, in S3801. It is a prediction result acquired by processing, and it is a case where a prediction result of a big hit lottery performed this time in main controller 110, and a lottery result of this big hit lottery are in agreement in main controller 110. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, the current setting is maintained and the present process is ended so that the continuous advance notice effect is executed in the current change effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3803, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), as described above, In the main control unit 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the pre-reading corresponding to the jackpot lottery of and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery do not match. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of this big hit lottery and the lottery result of this big hit lottery correspond in the main control device 110, in this case, even with the voice lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, the big hit The prediction result of the lottery can not be relied upon, and it will refrain from using the prediction result.

  However, as described in the first embodiment, the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery may be exceptionally treated as credible, so the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is It is determined whether it is a jackpot (S3804).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 do not become overlapping values. As such, each hit value is set. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the preread information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the present jackpot lottery Even if the main control device 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is a jackpot, the lottery result falls out in the present jackpot lottery. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery coincide with each other in the main control unit 110, and it is uniquely determined that they are out. The lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of this jackpot lottery as credible.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the numerical value which is the winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes the outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but the outlier in the one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 It is unknown whether the numerical value which becomes is a win value or an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and even if the result is determined to be out of order, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the main control unit 110 determines that the result is a big hit or it is determined that the result is out of order. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  In the process of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is the jackpot (S3804: Yes), as described above, exceptionally, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out Since the case can be treated as credible, in this case, the current setting is maintained and the present process is ended so that continuous advance notice effects are executed in the current change effects.

  As described above, in the case of the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, even the prediction result treated as being unreliable may be treated as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled. Further, in this case, the setting is maintained so that the continuous advance notice effect is executed in the current fluctuation effect, so that the opportunity to execute the continuous advance notice effect can be increased.

  Further, in the process of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is out (S3804: No), the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state flag 223j This is the case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state shown. In this case, as described above, the prediction result corresponding to the present jackpot lottery can not be trusted, and it becomes unclear whether the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery will be the jackpot or the jackpot.

  Therefore, in this case, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is scheduled to execute the continuous notice effect in the fluctuation effect Change the status to indicate that it was canceled. As a result, when the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set in the above-described fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the process branches to S3706: No. You can cancel the execution.

  According to the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A shown in FIG. 61 above, in the process of S3803, comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information with the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, this time It is possible to compare whether the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery of and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the present jackpot lottery.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the pachinko machine is executed before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 When the gaming state of 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the present jackpot lottery Become. Therefore, in this case, since there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control device 110, the conventional lamp ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine Treated the lottery prediction results as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223 j are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery It can always be determined whether 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present jackpot lottery. Therefore, the main controller 110 may or may not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery, Even in the case where the pachinko machine is unknown, the determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, when the respective big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, both the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison become the same, so the respective comparison results In the main control device 110, the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery coincide with each other. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery as credible. As described above, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible, so the present embodiment In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  In addition, as described above, in the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, it is used in the prefetching corresponding to the current jackpot lottery In this case, the main control unit 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present jackpot lottery. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of this big hit lottery and the lottery result of this big hit lottery correspond in the main control device 110, in this case, even with the voice lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, the big hit The prediction result of the lottery can not be relied upon, and it will refrain from using the prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning values stored in the low probability large jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning values stored in the high probability large jackpot random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j are different, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the present jackpot lottery If the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot in the process of S3804, the prediction result is In the corresponding actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery coincide with each other in the main control unit 110, and it is determined uniquely as outliers. In the audio lamp control device 113 according to the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  Therefore, if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as the credible one, the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment may be able to handle the prediction result which is treated as being unreliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and in the process of S3804, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is not For example, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result becomes unknown.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is finished.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of this big hit lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next big winning lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next big winning lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about the big hit lottery after next time.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is changed to It changes to the status which shows that it was planned to perform continuous notice production in, but was canceled. As a result, when the fluctuation display setting process described above (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set, it is possible to branch to S3706: No. It is possible to cancel the execution of the advance presentation.

  That is, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery is the jackpot or the jackpot, it is possible to cancel the execution of the continuous advance notice effect for the fluctuation change which is executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A described above, in the process of S3803, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states, (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is the jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be trusted As a thing, you may comprise so that it may transfer to the process of S3805, without performing the process of S3804.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is executed when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the voice lamp control device 113 and the variation display is started in the third symbol display device 81. Be done. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed at the end of the change effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is performed between the start of the change effect and the time immediately before the end of the change effect. If it is executed, it may be executed at any time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the "chance of chance" at the end of the change effect is the continuous advance notice effect, but an image different from the normal is displayed during the change effect or a sound different from the normal is displayed. An effect of emitting noise may be used as a continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed during the change effect, or may be performed during the change effect and at the end of the change. Then, in the case where the continuous advance notice effect is performed during the change effect, as in the present embodiment, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A may be executed when the change effect is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A will be described. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A.

  In FIG. 62, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, a variable effect is newly executed based on the start winning prize held, and two starting winning prizes are performed separately from the starting winning prize. Indicates a pending status. In addition, in each of the fluctuation effects of the fluctuation effect to be newly executed and the fluctuation effects corresponding to the two starting winning prizes being held, it is shown that execution of the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the gaming state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and as shown in FIG. 62 (b-1), the prefetching information is stored in the execution area of the prefetching information storage area 223a. As the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is the high probability state, and data of the status value “1” is stored as the continuous notice execution status.

  In addition, in the first reserve area, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is usually big hit as prediction information, the prediction result of fluctuation pattern type is special reach, the prediction precondition is high probability state, and the status value “1 as continuous notice execution status” "" Is stored. In addition, in the second area for reserve, the prediction result of the big hit lottery as the pre-reading information is the probability variation big hit, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is the special reach, the prediction precondition is the low probability state, and the status value “11” as the continuous notice execution status "" Is stored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to clearly show the continuous advance notice execution status in the drawings (FIG. 62, FIG. 64, FIG. 66, and FIG. 68), not the status value but the presence or absence of the flag, the shape of the flag, And, it shows by falling over which the flag stands. Specifically, when the status value is “0”, the flag is not described, when the status value is a positive number, a flag is displayed, and when the status value is a negative number, the flag is displayed. Also, when the status value is "1", it is indicated by a triangular white flag. Similarly, if the status value is "11", the flag is filled with triangles, if the status value is "2", the flag is blank, and if the value is "12", the flag is filled with squares. A value of “3” is an open flag with a V-shaped break in the square, and a status value of “13” is a black flag with a V-shaped cut in the square, respectively. Show.

  When continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A (see FIG. 61) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-1), first, from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction The precondition is acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j. However, in this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, and furthermore, the acquired lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out, the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and It becomes unclear whether the main controller 110 matches the actual jackpot lottery result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can not trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery, that is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery to be executed this time.

  In this case, the process proceeds to S3805, and the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area is attached with a minus sign. As a result, the status value is changed to "-1", and the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuation effect Is scheduled to run but is changed to a status indicating that it has been discontinued. Then, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is ended.

  Then, after the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is completed, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the continuous notice execution status Since the status value is “−1”, the process branches to S3706: No, and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 as it is Be done. As a result, in the present variation production, the execution of the continuous advance presentation production is stopped, and the normal stop display is performed.

  As described above, when it is not possible to trust the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect can be canceled for the fluctuation effect to be executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  Then, when the current fluctuation effect is finished and the next fluctuation effect is executed, as described above, it is stored in each area (execution area, holding first area to holding fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Shift processing is performed to shift the data being processed to the execution area side. Specifically, the prefetch information in each area is shifted in such a way as to reserve first area → execution area, reserve second area → reserve first area, and the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-2).

  Here, when the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) is executed, as in the previous time, first, from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are The acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223 j are compared in the acquired and processing of S 3802.

  In this comparison, although the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery is usually the jackpot. As described above, even if the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot, in the actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result Will come off.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large falling random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is a big hit when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state is out when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state. Similarly, the random number value (the value of the counter C1) which is the jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state is out when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading information is not unknown, and it is uniquely determined when the lottery result is out. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to regard the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery as a deviation.

  As described above, in the case of the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery match, and the prediction result has been treated as unreliable However, since the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be treated as credible, the present embodiment can suitably handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  Then, in this case, the process proceeds to the process of S3804: Yes, the current state is maintained, and the second successive announcement execution status confirmation process A ends. Then, after the second consecutive notice execution status confirmation process A is ended, in the case where the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed for the second time is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the continuous notice Since the status value of the execution status is “1”, the process branches to S3706: Yes, and “Chance chance” is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, a continuous advance notice effect is performed in the current change effect, and a "chance of chance" is displayed in the change effect.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment can not trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery if it is the voice lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, and the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuation effect is canceled. At 113, the setting can be maintained to execute the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Therefore, the opportunity which can perform continuous notice production can be increased.

  Then, when the second fluctuation presentation ends and the next fluctuation presentation is executed, each area (execution area, holding first area to holding fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a as in the previous time. A shift process is performed to shift the data stored in the area to the execution area side, and the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-3) is obtained.

  Here, when the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) is executed, as in the previous time, first, from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are The acquired forecast precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223 j are compared in the acquired and processing of S 3802.

  In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition matches the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j, the main jack 110 in the main control 110 determines the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery result. Match Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process shifts to the process of S3804: Yes, the current state is maintained, and the third successive announcement execution status confirmation process A ends.

  However, the continuous advance notice execution status indicates that the status value is “11” and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a trigger of the continuous advance notice effect. In other words, the third change effect is the last change effect for executing the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, after the third consecutive announcement execution status confirmation process A is completed, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed for the third time is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), S3706: No The process branches to a stop type command instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, and the stop type is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the present variation production, the execution of the continuous advance presentation production is stopped, and the normal stop display is performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a trigger of the continuous notice effect, and the change effect to be executed is the final change effect for executing the continuous notice effect, the main control device The stop type instructed by the stop type command from 110 is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and as a result, it is suggested to the player that the continuous advance notice effect is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, continuous notice execution status confirmation process B will be described, which is a modification of continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status check process B which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status check process A described above.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A described above, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is credible, and if it is unreliable, it is executed this time. It is set to stop the execution of the continuous advance notice effect for the fluctuation effect. On the other hand, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process B, the continuous advance notice effect is executed over the respective change effects from the change effect to be executed this time to the last change effect to be executed. Set to cancel.

  The continuous notice execution status confirmation process B is executed instead of the continuous notice execution status A described above. That is, in the case of causing the third symbol display device 113 to newly start the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, continuous notice in the fluctuation effect It is executed if it is set to execute the effect.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process B, the following process is executed instead of the process of S3805 described above. That is, a minus sign is given to the continuous advance notice execution status of all areas (execution area, holding first area to holding fourth area) in the pre-reading information storage area 223a in which the prediction result of the big hit lottery (that is, pre-reading information) is stored. Is added (S3901), and the continuous notice execution status of each is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be performed in the change effect but was canceled.

  As a result, in the above-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the process is branched to S3706: No every time the stop type of each variation effect which was scheduled to be subjected to the continuous advance presentation effect is set. The execution of the continuous advance notice effect can be stopped for all of the fluctuation effects intended to be performed.

  According to the continuous advance notice execution status B shown in FIG. 63, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information differs from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and in the process of S3804, In addition to the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a when the forecast result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is out of place and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the forecast result becomes unknown Also, a minus sign can be attached to the continuous advance notice execution status of all the pending areas (pending first area to pending fourth area) in which the prefetch information is stored.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is finished.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of this big hit lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next big winning lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next big winning lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about the big hit lottery after next time. That is, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery is the jackpot or the jackpot, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery after the next time is also unknown.

  Therefore, in the continuous advance notice execution status processing B, fluctuation effects are produced not only for the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, but also for the continuous notice execution status stored in all pending areas. It was changed to the status which shows that it was planned to perform continuous notice production in, but was discontinued. Thereby, the above-mentioned fluctuation display setting process (refer to FIG. 60) is executed, and for the fluctuation effect scheduled to be subjected to the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to branch to S3706: No every time the stop type is set. The execution of the continuous advance notice can be stopped in each of the variable effects for which the continuous advance notice is scheduled to be performed. Therefore, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery after this time becomes unknown, continuous notice effect is executed for the dark clouds, and there is a problem that the continuous notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed. It can be suppressed.

  Further, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process B described above, in the process of S3803, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is the jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be trusted As a thing, you may comprise so that it may transfer to the process of S3901 without performing the process of S3804.

  Also in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B described above, as in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B is performed immediately before the change effect is started and immediately before the end of the change effect. If it is executed, it may be executed at any time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the "chance of chance" at the end of the change effect is the continuous advance notice effect, but an image different from the normal is displayed during the change effect or a sound different from the normal is displayed. An effect of emitting noise may be used as a continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed during the change effect, or may be performed during the change effect and at the end of the change. Then, in the case where the continuous advance notice effect is performed during the change effect, as in the present embodiment, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process B may be executed when the change effect is started.

  Here, referring to FIG. 64, continuous notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, hold first area to hold fourth area) of prefetch information storage area 223 a by continuous notice execution status check process B. An example of the flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B.

  In FIG. 64, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the fluctuation effect is newly executed based on the start winning prize held, and, apart from the starting winning prize, two starting winning prizes Indicates a pending status. In addition, in each of the fluctuation effects of the fluctuation effect to be newly executed and the fluctuation effects corresponding to the two starting winning prizes being held, it is shown that execution of the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the gaming state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is on, and as shown in FIG. 64 (b-1), the prefetching information is stored in the execution area of the prefetching information storage area 223a. As the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a low probability state, and data of status value “1” is stored as the continuous notice execution status.

  In addition, in the first reserve area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is long, the prediction precondition is the low probability state, and the status value “1” as the continuous notice execution status Data is stored. In addition, in the second area for reserve, the prediction result of the big hit lottery as the pre-reading information is the probability variation big hit, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is the super reach, the prediction precondition is the high probability state, and the status value “11 "" Is stored.

  In the state shown in FIG. 64 (b-1), when the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process B (see FIG. 63) is executed, first, from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction The precondition is acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j. However, in this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j are different, and furthermore, the acquired lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out, the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and It becomes unclear whether the main controller 110 matches the actual jackpot lottery result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can not trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery, that is, the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the process proceeds to S3901, and all areas (execution area, holding first area to holding fourth area) in the pre-reading information storage area 223a in which the prediction result of the big hit lottery (that is, pre-reading information) is stored. A minus sign is attached to the continuous advance notice execution status of. As a result, the status values of both the execution area and the pending first area are changed to “−1”, and the status value of the pending second area is changed to “−11”, and continuous notice effect is executed in the fluctuation effect. It is changed to a status indicating that it was planned but has been cancelled. And this continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B is ended.

  Then, after the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process B is ended, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), Since the status value is “−1”, the process branches to S3706: No, and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 as it is Be done. As a result, in the present variation production, the execution of the continuous advance presentation production is stopped, and the normal stop display is performed.

  Then, even when the second variation effect is executed after the current variation effect is finished, and also when the third variation effect is executed, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 60) When the stop type of each variation effect is set, the status of the continuous advance notice execution status is “−11”, and the process is instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 to branch to S3706: No. The type is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is canceled and the normal stop display is performed over the respective change effects from the current change effect to the last change effect which is scheduled to be performed.

  As described above, when it is not possible to trust the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery, the continuous notice effect over the respective change effects from the current change effect to the last change effect which was scheduled to be performed for the continuous advance notice effect. You can cancel Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, continuous notice execution status check process C will be described which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status check process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status check process C which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status check process A described above.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processes A and B described above, only with respect to the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the area can be trusted. In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C, whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in the area can be trusted not only for the execution area but also for all the holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) It is determined whether or not.

  Furthermore, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C, if it is determined that the prediction result stored in any area is not credible, the continuous advance notice effect is generated from the fluctuation effect corresponding to the prediction result determined to be unreliable. It is set to stop the execution of the continuous advance notice effect over the respective change effects until the last change effect which was scheduled to be executed.

  The continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is executed instead of the continuous notice execution statuses A and B described above. That is, in the case of causing the third symbol display device 113 to newly start the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, continuous notice in the fluctuation effect It is executed if it is set to execute the effect.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C, the processes of S3801 to S3803 are executed, and in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the preread information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j have the same gaming state. If it is indicated (S3803: Yes), it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is a jackpot (S4001).

  Here, when it is determined that S4001: Yes, the prediction precondition acquired in the process of S3801 matches the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j, and the prediction of the jackpot lottery acquired in the process of S3801 Since the result and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery match in the main control unit 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted. Furthermore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery acquired in the process of S3801 is a jackpot, after the current fluctuation presentation ends, it always becomes the same jackpot as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result.

  And, as described above, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery is a big win, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is new according to the big hit type at the big hit end. Set to Therefore, after becoming the same jackpot as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the same jackpot type indicated by the jackpot indicated by the prediction result. Therefore, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, and further, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot, the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined from the jackpot type indicated by the prediction result. it can.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot in the processing of S4001 (S4001: Yes), the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k of the RAM 223, pachinko machine at the end of the jackpot The gaming state set to 10 is set (S4002). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to ON, and if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is usually a large win, the effect execution time game state flag 223k Set to off. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery can be indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S4004.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is out (S4001: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4003. Further, in the process of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), the prefetch information storage area 223a It is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot (S3804).

  In the process of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is the jackpot (S3804: Yes), as described above, exceptionally, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out Since this is a case that can be treated as credible, the process moves to the processing of S4003. As described above, in the case of the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, even the prediction result treated as being unreliable may be treated as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  In the process of S4003, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, that is, the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k of the RAM 223 (S4003). Specifically, when the gaming state flag 223j is on, the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k is also set on, and when the gaming state flag 223j is off, the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k is also off Set

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the present big hit lottery is a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type at the end of the big hit. In other words, while the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out of game, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. Therefore, if the prediction result of the current big hit lottery is out, by setting the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, the jackpot random number table 202a1, which is used in the next big hit lottery 202a2 can be indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S4004.

  In the process of S3804, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is out (S3804: No), the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, and the game indicated by the gaming state flag 223j This is a case different from the state, and further, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is deviated. In this case, as described above, the prediction result corresponding to the present jackpot lottery can not be trusted, and it becomes unclear whether the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery will be the jackpot or the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the process of S3901 is performed, and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), It shifts to the processing of S3804 and determines whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is the jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the processing of S3804 is regarded as the jackpot lottery result being unreliable. It may be configured to shift to the processing of S3901 without performing.

  In the process of S4004, the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S4004), and it is determined whether the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S4005) . In the process of S4005, when the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b is 0 (S4005: No), the main control unit 110 does not hold any big hit lottery, so this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4005, when the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S4005: Yes), since one or more jackpot lottery is held in the main control unit 110, From the earlier held order of pending jackpot lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery are checked one by one. Specifically, among the reserve areas (preserve area 1 to reserve area 4) of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserve area in order from the reserve area with the smallest area number Check one by one. The smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning combination that is older in time is stored.

  First, a variable i is set to 1 (S4006), and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S4007). Then, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in the reserve i area is compared with the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k (S4008), and as a result of the comparison, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition It is determined whether the game state indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k indicates the same game state (S4009).

  Here, the state of the flag 223k is such that the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k indicates the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery by the process of S4002 or the process of S4003 described above. It is set. Specifically, when the effect execution time game state flag 223k is off, the main control unit 110 refers to the low probability time jackpot random number table 202a1 and indicates that the next jackpot lottery is to be performed. On the other hand, when the effect execution time game state flag 223k is on, the main control unit 110 refers to the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 and indicates that the next big hit lottery is to be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, of the reserve areas (preserve area 1 to reserve area 4) of the pre-reading information storage area 223a, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning combination older in time is stored. Therefore, at this point in time, the prefetch information corresponding to the next jackpot lottery is stored in the pending first area.

  Therefore, in the process of S4007 described above, by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information with the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, it is used in the prefetching corresponding to the next jackpot lottery It can be compared whether the main control unit 110 matches the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the next big hit lottery.

  Then, in the process of S4009, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k indicate the same gaming state (S4009: Yes), the next time In the case where the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the next jackpot lottery.

  Therefore, since the values of the first random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same, the comparison results match each other, and the next jackpot lottery prediction result and the next The main control device 110 matches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery as credible.

  Therefore, in the process of S4009, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k indicate the same gaming state (S4009: Yes), a jackpot lottery Since it is possible to trust the prediction result of the next, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the pending i-th area is a jackpot (S4010).

  In the process of S4010, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserve i-th area is a jackpot (S4010: Yes), the effect execution time game state flag 223k, when the jackpot is finished in the pachinko machine 10 The gaming state to be set is set (S4011). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to ON, and if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is usually a large win, the effect execution time game state flag 223k Set to off. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery can be indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k. Then, the process proceeds to step S4014.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4010, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is out (S4010: No), the process of S4011 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4014. As described above, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out, the jackpot scheduled to be used in the jackpot lottery The random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 also do not change. Therefore, while the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out, by maintaining the state of the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery, This can be indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k.

  In the case of S4010: No, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, that is, the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be set in the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k. Specifically, when the gaming state flag 223j is on, the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k is also set on, and when the gaming state flag 223j is off, the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k is also off Set

  And, in the process of S4009, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k indicate different gaming states (S4009: No), as described above In the main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in prefetching corresponding to the next jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the next jackpot lottery do not match in the main control unit 110. .

  Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the next big hit lottery and the lottery result of the next big hit lottery match in the main control unit 110, in this case, even the voice lamp control device 113 of this embodiment is a big hit The prediction result of the lottery can not be relied upon, and it will refrain from using the prediction result.

  However, as described above, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be exceptionally treated as credible, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is the jackpot (S4012). As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability large hitting random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability large hitting random number table 202a2 do not become overlapping values. As such, each hit value is set. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the preread information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the next jackpot lottery and the next time Even if the main jack 110 does not match the planned jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the jackpot lottery of the next, if the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery is the jackpot, the lottery result is the next jackpot lottery It comes off. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery are identical in the main control unit 110, and it is uniquely determined that they are out. The lamp control device 113 can handle the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery as credible.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, the numerical value which is the winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes the outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but the outlier in the one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 It is unknown whether the numerical value which becomes is a win value or an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and even if the result is determined to be out of order, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the main control unit 110 determines that the result is a big hit or it is determined that the result is out of order. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as unreliable.

  In the process of S4012, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserve i-th area is the jackpot (S4012: Yes), as described above, exceptionally, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order and can be trusted In the case where it can be treated as, the processing shifts to the processing of S4014. As described above, in the case of the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, even the prediction result treated as being unreliable may be treated as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled. In that case, as described later, the processing returns to S4014 and the repetition processing of S4007 to S4015 can be continued and executed, and if there is an unreliable one among the prediction results of the jackpot lottery there By the process of S4013, which will be described later, it is possible to stop the continuous advance notice effect over the respective change effects from the change effect to the last change effect which was scheduled to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  In the process of S4014, 1 is added to the variable i (S4014), and it is determined whether the value of the variable i is less than or equal to the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b (S4015). In the process of S4015, when the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b (S4015: Yes), the prefetch information is stored also in other reserve areas in the prefetch information storage area 223a Since it is the case, the process returns to the process of S4007 to confirm the prefetch information stored in the other hold area. In addition, after returning to the process of S4007, each process of S4007-S4015 mentioned above is repeated, and the gaming state shown by the prediction precondition stored in the other hold area (hold 2nd area-hold 4th area) The comparison with the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k is performed in ascending order of the area number.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4015, when the value of the variable i exceeds the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b (S4015: No), the prefetch information stored in the reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a All confirmed. In this case, since there is no more preread information to be confirmed, this processing ends.

  Further, in the process of S4012, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserve i-th area is out (S4012: No), the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, and the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k This is the case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state. In this case, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be trusted, and it becomes unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result will be the jackpot or the jackpot.

  Therefore, in this case, the process does not return to the processes of S4007 to S4015, but proceeds to the process of S4013 and holds the i-th hold of the hold areas (the first hold area to the fourth hold area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A minus sign is added to the continuous advance notice execution status stored in each of the reserve areas from the area to the reserve M area (S4013), and this process is ended.

  That is, in the process of S 4013, the continuous advance notice execution status indicating that continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the change effect is changed to a status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled to be performed in the change effect but is canceled. . As a result, in the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 60), the process branches to S3706: No each time the stop type of the change effect corresponding to the prefetch information from the reserve i area to the reserve M area is set. Therefore, it is possible to stop the execution of the continuous advance notice effect over the respective variable effects corresponding to the pre-reading information from the hold ith area to the hold M area.

  That is, when an unreliable item is found in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, over the respective fluctuation effects from the fluctuation production corresponding to the prediction result to the last fluctuation production intended to execute the continuous advance notice production, Continuous notice production can be canceled. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  In addition, as described above, in the continuous run execution status confirmation process C, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery is the jackpot or the jackpot, it is not returned to each processing of S4007 to S4015, and the remaining It is configured not to confirm the pre-reading information of. This is because one of the prediction results is obtained when the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery are checked one by one from the earlier held order of the jackpot lottery held in the main control unit 110. If unknown, the remaining prediction results will also be unknown.

  That is, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of this big hit lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next big winning lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next big winning lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about the big hit lottery after next time.

  And since the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction result of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted later than the prediction result also becomes unknown. . Therefore, when confirming the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. But there is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  According to the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C shown in FIG. 65, in the process of S4008, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is compared with the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k. The main control unit 110 compares whether the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery after next time and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery after next time it can.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the pachinko machine is executed before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 When the gaming state of 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery.

  As described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the gaming state at the next jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about the big hit lottery after next time.

  Therefore, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control unit 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after next time and the lottery of the next jackpot lottery Since there is a possibility that the result may be different from the result, the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery not only this time but also the next time as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the prediction precondition and the effect execution time game state flag 223k are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery from next time onwards. , 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotterys can always be determined. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main control is the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery after the next time and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the jackpot lottery after the next time Even in the case where it is unclear in the device 110 whether or not they match, this determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, when the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as credible. As described above, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible, so the present embodiment In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  In addition, as described above, in the process of S4012, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, the prefetching corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery In the main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery do not match. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the big hit lottery after the i-th and the lottery result of the big hit lottery after the i-th match in the main control device 110, in this case, the voice lamp control device of this embodiment Even in the case of 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after the i-th round can not be relied upon, and it is refrained from using the prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning values stored in the low probability large jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning values stored in the high probability large jackpot random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, in the process of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, and the jackpot random number table used in the prefetching corresponding to the i th jackpot lottery Even if the main control unit 110 does not match 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th big hit lottery, the predicted result of the big hit lottery in the prefetch information is the big hit in the processing of S4012. If there is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result will be out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the i-th big-hit lottery and the i-th big-luck lottery result match in the main control unit 110, and it is decided uniquely as outliers. In the voice lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  Therefore, if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as the credible one, the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment may be able to handle the prediction result which is treated as being unreliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, and in the process of S4012, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetched information is If it is not, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result becomes unknown. In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is finished.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the (i + 1) -th jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the subsequent jackpot lottery also becomes unknown.

  Therefore, when confirming the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. But there is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the process branches to S4012: No, and the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Also, in such a case, in the continuous advance notice execution status check process C, of the hold areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the continuous advance notice stored in the respective hold areas from the hold i area to the hold M area A minus sign is attached to the status, and the continuous advance notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect was scheduled to be performed in the change effect but was canceled.

  As a result, when the fluctuation display setting process described above (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set, it is possible to branch to S3706: No. It is possible to cancel the execution of the advance presentation. Therefore, when it is not possible to trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark cloud and the continuous advance notice effect irrelevant to the actual lottery result is performed.

  In the present embodiment, in the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), It shifts to the processing of S3804 and determines whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is the jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the processing of S3804 is regarded as the jackpot lottery result being unreliable. It may be configured to shift to the processing of S3901 without performing.

  Further, in the continuous advance execution status confirmation process C described above, in the process of S4009, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the presentation state game state flag 223k. In the case (S4009: No), the process proceeds to S4012 to determine whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot, but in the case of S4009: No, the jackpot lottery It may be configured to shift to the process of S4013 without performing the process of S4012, assuming that the prediction result is not credible.

  Further, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C described above is executed when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the voice lamp control device 113 and the change effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 Be done. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed at the end of the change effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is performed between the start of the change effect and the time immediately before the end of the change effect. If it is executed, it may be executed at any time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the "chance of chance" at the end of the change effect is the continuous advance notice effect, but an image different from the normal is displayed during the change effect or a sound different from the normal is displayed. An effect of emitting noise may be used as a continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed during the change effect, or may be performed during the change effect and at the end of the change. Then, in the case where the continuous advance notice effect is performed during the change effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C may be executed when the change effect is started as in the present embodiment.

  Moreover, although the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C mentioned above is performed when a fluctuation production is started in the 3rd symbol display device 81, it replaces with the case where a fluctuation production is started, and is performed during a big hit It may be configured as follows. By being configured to be executed during the jackpot, the number of times of execution of the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C described above, it is confirmed by the process of S4010 among the repetitive processes of S4007 to S4015 whether or not the prediction result of the big hit lottery in the held i area is a big hit, If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the i-th area is a jackpot, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be regarded as unreliable, and the processing may be repeatedly interrupted there.

  Here, referring to FIG. 66, continuous notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, hold first area to hold fourth area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status check process C. An example of the flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C.

  In FIG. 66, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, a variable effect is newly executed based on the start winning prize held, and three starting winning prizes are performed separately from the starting winning prizes. Indicates a pending status. In addition, in each of the fluctuation effects of the fluctuation effect to be newly executed and the fluctuation effects corresponding to the three start winning prizes being held, a state where execution of the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled is shown.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the gaming state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is used as prefetch information. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a low probability state, and data of status value "3" is stored as the continuous notice execution status.

  In addition, in the first reserve area, the prediction result of the big hit lottery as the pre-reading information is the probability variation big hit, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is the super reach, the prediction precondition is the low probability state, and the status value “3 "" Is stored. In addition, in the second reserve area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is super reach, the prediction precondition is the low probability state, and the status value "3" as the continuous notice execution status. Data is stored. In addition, in the reserved fourth area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as prefetching information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is super reach, the prediction precondition is a low probability state, and the status value "13" as continuous notice execution status. Data is stored.

  In the state shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C (see FIG. 65) is executed, first, from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition Is acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223j are compared.

  In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition matches the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j, the main jack 110 in the main control 110 determines the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery result. Match Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the processing of S4001 is executed, S4001: No, and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j in the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, that is, the gaming state of the current pachinko machine 10 Is set.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while it is determined that the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out. Therefore, by setting the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the effect execution time game state flag 223k, showing the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next big hit lottery by the effect execution time game state flag 223k Can.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the acquired prediction precondition and effect execution time game state flag 223k in the process of S4008. And are compared. In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition matches the gaming state of the effect execution time game state flag 223k, the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery result are main control A match is made in device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process branches to S4009: Yes, the process of S4010 is executed, and it is determined whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot, the process branches to S4010: Yes, and in the effect execution time game state flag 223k, the play state at the end of the big hit, ie It is set. Specifically, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to on. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery can be indicated by the effect execution time game state flag 223k.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved second area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the acquired prediction precondition and effect execution time game state flag 223k in the process of S4008. And are compared. However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k are different, and further, since the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the acquired jackpot lottery It is unclear whether the prediction result and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can not trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the processing proceeds to step S4013, and a minus sign is attached to the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the respective pending areas from the pending second area to the pending third area among the pending areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a. And the continuous advance notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect was scheduled to be performed in the change effect but was canceled. Specifically, the status value of the pending second area is changed to "-3", the status value of the pending third area is changed to "-13", and it is planned to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the change effect, but it is canceled It is changed to the status indicating that it has become. Then, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is ended.

  Then, after the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process C ends, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), the status of the continuous notice status Since the value is "3", the process branches to S3706: Yes, and "chance" is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, a continuous advance notice effect is performed in the current change effect, and a "chance of chance" is displayed in the change effect.

  Then, even when the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed for the second time is set, the status value of the continuous advance notice status is "3", so the process branches to S3706: Yes, and the fluctuation in the third symbol display device 81 As the stop type of the effect, the "chance eye" is set. As a result, a continuous advance notice effect is performed in the current change effect, and a "chance of chance" is displayed in the change effect.

  However, when the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed for the third time is set, the status value of the continuous advance notice status is “-3”, so the process branches to S3706: No and the stop from the main control device 110 The stop type instructed by the type command is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the third variation production, the execution of the continuous advance presentation production is stopped, and the normal stop display is performed.

  Further, when the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed for the fourth time is set, since the status value of the continuous advance notice status is “−13”, the process branches to S3706: No and the stop from the main control device 110 The stop type instructed by the type command is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, in the fourth variation production, the execution of the continuous advance presentation production is stopped, and the stop display as usual is performed.

  As described above, when an unreliable item is found in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the respective fluctuation effects from the fluctuation production corresponding to the prediction result to the last fluctuation production scheduled to be performed for the continuous advance notice production are You can cancel the continuous notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status check process D which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status check process A described above.

  In addition, although continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, and C which were mentioned above were performed when starting a fluctuation production in the 3rd symbol display device 81, continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D mentioned the continuous notice mentioned above It is executed when it is determined in the determination process (see FIG. 59) that the continuous advance presentation effect is to be executed.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D, substantially the same process as the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is performed. The point different from the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C is that there are no steps of S4004 and S4005 and that steps of S4101 to S4104 are added.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D, first, it is judged whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S4101), and if it is not in the jackpot (S4101: No), the processing proceeds to S3801 and S3801-3804 Processing, processing of S3901, and processing of S4001 to S4003 are executed. Then, when the process of S4002 or the process of S4003 ends, the process proceeds to S4006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if the jackpot is in progress (S4101: Yes), the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game status flag 223c in the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, ie, the pachinko machine when the current jackpot is over Set 10 game states (S4102). Shifts to the process of S4006. In the process of S4102, specifically, if the after-big-play game state flag 223c is on, then the effect-on-play game state flag 223k is also set on, and if the after-big play state flag 223c is off, the effect is on execution The game state flag 223k is also set to off.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot can be determined based on the jackpot after-game state flag 223c. Therefore, after the present jackpot is completed, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 can be determined based on the state of the jackpot after-game state flag 223c. Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are set in the effect execution time game state flag 223k by setting the game state indicated by the big hit after game state flag 223c in the effect execution time game state flag 223k. Can be shown.

  Then, the processing of S4006 to S4015 is executed, and in the processing of S4015, if the value of the variable i is less than or equal to the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 223b (S4015: Yes), or the processing of S4013 is completed. Then, it is determined whether the value of variable i is 2 or less (S4103). In the process of S4103, when the value of the variable i is 3 or more (S4103: Yes), the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is performed although the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed over a plurality of fluctuation effects There is not, and continuous notice production does not continue for a long time. So, in this embodiment, when continuous notice production does not continue for a long time, it is constituted so that execution of a continuous notice production may be canceled. As a result, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, since the continuous advance notice effect continues for a long time, it is possible to give the player a long sense of expectation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Specifically, in the process of S4103, if the value of the variable i is 2 or less (S4103: Yes), of the hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a, A minus sign is added to all the continuous advance notice execution statuses, which is the number of (S4104), and this process is ended. That is, in the process of S4104, the continuous advance notice execution status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the change effect is changed to a status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled to be performed in the change effect but is canceled. .

  As a result, in the above-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), when the stop type of the variation effect corresponding to the prefetching information from the holding i area to the holding m area is set, the process branches to S3706: No Therefore, it is possible to stop the execution of the continuous advance notice effect over the respective variable effects corresponding to the pre-reading information from the hold ith area to the hold M area. As a result, the continuous advance notice production itself is stopped, and the continuous advance notice production is not executed even once. On the other hand, in the process of S4103, when the value of the variable i is 3 or more (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  According to the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D shown in FIG. 67 described above, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the continuous advance notice determination process (see FIG. 59) described above, It is possible to determine whether the prefetch information stored in the hold area (hold first area to hold fourth area) can be trusted. And when a thing which can not be trusted among pre-reading information is found, from the fluctuation production corresponding to the pre-reading information to each fluctuation production from the last fluctuation production which was scheduled to execute consecutive announcement production, it is continuous You can cancel the advance production.

  Furthermore, when the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed is 2 or less, although the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed over a plurality of fluctuation effects, the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is performed is small. , The continuous advance notice itself is canceled, and the continuous advance notice is not executed even once. However, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, since the continuous advance notice effect continues for a long time, it is possible to give the player a long sense of expectation that the game state shifts to the advantageous gaming state. In the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D, if the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed is 2 or less, the continuous notice effect itself is canceled, but the number of times is not limited to 2 and may be set arbitrarily. .

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous advance presentation status confirmation process D described above is to execute the continuous advance presentation effect in the above-described continuous advance notice determination process (see FIG. 59), the above-described continuous advance execution status check process Similar to A, B, and C, the third symbol display device 81 may execute the change effect when it is started. In addition, it may be performed any time between the start of the change production and the time immediately before the end of the change production. In addition, it may be performed during the fluctuation production, may be performed during the fluctuation production and at the end of the fluctuation, or may be performed during the big hit.

  Here, referring to FIG. 68, the continuous advance notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, hold first area to hold 4th area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status check processing D. An example of the flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow of changing the continuous notice execution status by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D.

  In FIG. 68, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a state of large probability hit, when the gaming state is a low probability state, four start winning combinations are held. In addition, for each of the variable effects corresponding to the four start winning prizes being held, it is shown that execution of continuous advance notice effects is scheduled.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the gaming state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and the jackpot after gaming state flag 223c is on. Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), the prediction area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a is the pre-reading information, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is a probability change big hit, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is special reach, the prediction precondition Is a low probability state, and data of a status value "0" is stored as a continuous advance notice execution status.

  In addition, in the first reserve area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is the high probability state, and the status value "2" as the continuous notice execution status. Data is stored. In addition, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is usually big hit as the pre-reading information in the second reserved area, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type is the super reach, the prediction precondition is the high probability state, and the status value “2 "" Is stored.

  In addition, in the reserved third area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is deviated as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is the high probability state, and the status value "2" as the continuous notice execution status. Data is stored. Also, in the reserved fourth area, as prediction information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is usually a big hit, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is special reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value “12 as a continuous notice execution status "" Is stored.

  When the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), first, in the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress. Here, since it is a probability change big hit, S4101: It branches to Yes, and the state of the big hit after game state 223c is set to the effect execution time game state flag 223k. Specifically, since the current jackpot type is a probability change jackpot, the jackpot after game state 223c is set to ON, and the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to ON as in the jackpot after game state flag 223c. Ru.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the acquired prediction precondition and effect execution time game state flag 223k in the process of S4008. And are compared. In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition matches the gaming state of the effect execution time game state flag 223k, the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery result are main control A match is made in device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process of S4010 is executed to determine whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of step, the process branches to S4010: No, and the state of the effect execution time game state flag 223k is maintained as it is. As described above, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out. Therefore, while the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out, by maintaining the state of the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery, when the effect is executed It can be indicated by the gaming state flag 223k.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved second area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the acquired prediction precondition and effect execution time game state flag 223k in the process of S4008. And are compared. In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition matches the gaming state of the effect execution time game state flag 223k, the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery result are main control A match is made in device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Then, in this case, the process of S4010 is executed to determine whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is usually a jackpot, S4010: branch to Yes, the gaming state flag at the end of the big hit in the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, ie, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the normal big hit It is set. Specifically, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to off. As a result, the effect execution time game state flag 223k indicates the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the second jackpot lottery.

  Next, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved third area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the acquired prediction precondition and effect execution time game state flag 223k in the process of S4008. And are compared. However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k are different, and further, since the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the acquired jackpot lottery It is unclear whether the prediction result and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can not trust the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the processing proceeds to step S4013, and a minus sign is attached to the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the respective pending areas from the pending third area to the pending fourth area among the pending areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The continuous notice execution status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed in the change effect is changed to a status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled to be performed in the change effect but has been canceled. Specifically, the status value of the pending third area is changed to "-2", the status value of the pending fourth area is changed to "-12", and it is planned to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the change effect, but it is canceled It is changed to the status indicating that it has become.

  Here, among the continuous notice execution statuses stored in the hold first area to the hold fourth area, the continuous notice execution status, which is a positive number, is stored in the hold first area and the hold second area There are two. Therefore, in the process of S4103, the process branches to S4103: Yes, and a minus sign is also attached to the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the pending first area and the pending second area.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 68 (b-2), the status values of all the pending first area to the pending third area are changed to "-2", and the status value of the pending fourth area is changed to "-12". The status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is to be performed in the change effect is all changed to the status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled to be performed in the change effect but has been canceled. Then, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D is ended.

  Then, after the current successive notice execution status confirmation process D is completed, that is, after the probability variation jackpot under execution is finished, the variable display setting process (refer to FIG. 60) is executed by the first to fourth times. Since the status value of the continuous notice status is "-2" or "-12" every time the stop type of the fluctuation effect is set, the process branches to S3706: No, and instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 The determined stop type is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result, in each of the first to fourth variation effects, the execution of the continuous advance presentation effect is stopped, and the normal stop display is performed. That is, the continuous advance notice effect itself is cancelled, and the continuous advance notice effect is not executed even once. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed is 2 or less, although the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed over a plurality of fluctuation effects, the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Because the number of times the event is performed is small, the continuous advance notice itself is stopped, and the continuous advance notice is not executed even once. However, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, since the continuous advance notice effect continues for a long time, it is possible to give the player a long sense of expectation that the game state shifts to the advantageous gaming state.

  The above is the description of the second embodiment. As described above, in the second embodiment, as an example capable of suitably handling the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is suitably handled in the processing related to the continuous advance presentation effect, The example which performs continuous notice production has been described.

  That is, according to the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processing A to D (see FIG. 61, FIG. 63, FIG. 65, and FIG. 66) described above, in the processing of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state By comparing it with the gaming state indicated by the flag 223j, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the present jackpot lottery The main controller 110 can compare whether they match.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the pachinko machine is executed before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 When the gaming state of 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the present jackpot lottery Become. Therefore, in this case, since there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control device 110, the conventional lamp ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine Treated the lottery prediction results as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223 j are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery It can always be determined whether 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present jackpot lottery. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main control unit 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery Even in the case where it is unclear whether or not it is possible to perform the determination in the present embodiment.

  Then, when the respective big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, both the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison become the same, so the respective comparison results In the main control device 110, the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery coincide with each other. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the present jackpot lottery as credible. As described above, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible, so the present embodiment In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  In addition, as described above, in the processing of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, it is used in the prefetching corresponding to the current jackpot lottery In this case, the main control unit 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the present jackpot lottery. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of this big hit lottery and the lottery result of this big hit lottery correspond in the main control device 110, in this case, even with the voice lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, the big hit The prediction result of the lottery can not be relied upon, and it will refrain from using the prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning values stored in the low probability large jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning values stored in the high probability large jackpot random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j are different, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the present jackpot lottery If the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot in the process of S3804, the prediction result is In the corresponding actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery coincide with each other in the main control unit 110, and it is determined uniquely as outliers. In the audio lamp control device 113 according to the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  Therefore, if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as the credible one, the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment may be able to handle the prediction result which is treated as being unreliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and in the process of S3804, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is not For example, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result becomes unknown. In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is finished.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of this big hit lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next big winning lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next big winning lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about the big hit lottery after next time.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is changed Change to a status indicating that it was planned to perform continuous advance notice effects in the effect, but was canceled. As a result, when the fluctuation display setting process described above (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set, it is possible to branch to S3706: No. It is possible to cancel the execution of the advance presentation. That is, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the present jackpot lottery is the jackpot or the jackpot, it is possible to cancel the execution of the continuous advance notice effect for the fluctuation change which is executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark clouds and the continuous advance notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed.

  On the other hand, in such a case, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processes B, C and D, not only the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a but also stored in all pending areas. The continuous advance notice execution status is also changed to a state indicating that the continuous advance notice effect was scheduled to be performed in the change effect, but was canceled. Thereby, the above-mentioned fluctuation display setting process (refer to FIG. 60) is executed, and for the fluctuation effect scheduled to be subjected to the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to branch to S3706: No every time the stop type is set. The execution of the continuous advance notice can be stopped in each of the variable effects for which the continuous advance notice is scheduled to be performed. Therefore, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery after this time becomes unknown, continuous notice effect is executed for the dark clouds, and there is a problem that the continuous notice effect not related to the actual lottery result is performed. It can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C, D (see FIG. 65, FIG. 67) described above, in the process of S4008, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetched information and the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k By comparing it with the gaming state shown, the main control is the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery after the next time and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery after the next time A match can be compared at device 110.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored in the first place, the pachinko machine is executed before the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching is performed after the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 When the gaming state of 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether the main control device 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the present jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery.

  As described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, temporarily, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the gaming state at the next jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery also becomes unknown. In addition, a lottery result becomes unknown similarly about the big hit lottery after next time.

  Therefore, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main control unit 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after next time and the lottery of the next jackpot lottery Since there is a possibility that the result may be different from the result, the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine treats the prediction result of the jackpot lottery not only this time but also the next time as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the prediction precondition and the effect execution time game state flag 223k are stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery from next time onwards. , 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the next and subsequent jackpot lotterys can always be determined. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main control is the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery after the next time and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the jackpot lottery after the next time Even in the case where it is unclear in the device 110 whether or not they match, this determination can be made in the present embodiment.

  Then, when the respective jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as credible. As described above, even if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible, so the present embodiment In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled.

  In addition, as described above, in the process of S4012, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, the prefetching corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery In the main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery do not match. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the big hit lottery after the i-th and the lottery result of the big hit lottery after the i-th match in the main control device 110, in this case, the voice lamp control device of this embodiment Even in the case of 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after the i-th round can not be relied upon, and it is refrained from using the prediction result.

  However, in the present embodiment, the winning values stored in the low probability large jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning values stored in the high probability large jackpot random number table 202a2 do not overlap. Each has a set value. Therefore, the numerical value which becomes a hit value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big hit random number tables 202a1, and if it is determined that the result is a big hit, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other big hit random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out.

  Therefore, in the process of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, and the jackpot random number table used in the prefetching corresponding to the i th jackpot lottery Even if the main control unit 110 does not match 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th big hit lottery, the predicted result of the big hit lottery in the prefetch information is the big hit in the processing of S4012. If there is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result will be out. That is, in this case, it is not determined whether the prediction result of the i-th big-hit lottery and the i-th big-luck lottery result match in the main control unit 110, and it is decided uniquely as outliers. In the voice lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as credible.

  Therefore, if the audio lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as the credible one, the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment may be able to handle the prediction result which is treated as being unreliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k, and in the process of S4012, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetched information is If it is not, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result becomes unknown. In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the present jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is finished.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the (i + 1) -th jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the subsequent jackpot lottery also becomes unknown.

  Therefore, when confirming the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results also become unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. But there is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the process branches to S4012: No, and the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Also, in such a case, in the continuous advance notice execution status check process C, of the hold areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the continuous advance notice stored in the respective hold areas from the hold i area to the hold M area A minus sign is attached to the status, and the continuous advance notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous advance notice effect was scheduled to be performed in the change effect but was canceled.

  As a result, when the fluctuation display setting process described above (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set, it is possible to branch to S3706: No. It is possible to cancel the execution of the advance presentation. Therefore, when it is not possible to trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the dark cloud and the continuous advance notice effect irrelevant to the actual lottery result is performed.

  Also, according to the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67), the execution area of the pre-reading information storage area 223a when it is determined to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the continuous notice determination process described above (see FIG. 59). Alternatively, it can be determined whether or not the prefetch information stored in the hold area (hold first area to hold fourth area) can be trusted. And when a thing which can not be trusted among pre-reading information is found, from the fluctuation production corresponding to the pre-reading information to each fluctuation production from the last fluctuation production which was scheduled to execute consecutive announcement production, it is continuous You can cancel the advance production.

  Furthermore, when the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed is 2 or less, although the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed over a plurality of fluctuation effects, the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is performed is small. , The continuous advance notice itself is canceled, and the continuous advance notice is not executed even once. However, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, since the continuous advance notice effect continues for a long time, it is possible to give the player a long sense of expectation that the game state shifts to the advantageous gaming state.

  The "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "special game state" described in the claims, and the "probability information" described in the claims is the "chance" described in the embodiments. Corresponds to Also, the "high probability state or high probability jackpot random number table 202a2" described in the above embodiment corresponds to "an example of a plurality of lottery conditions" described in the claims, and "low" described in the above embodiment The probability state or low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 corresponds to “an example of a plurality of lottery conditions” described in the claims. The "bit value indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "determination result information" described in the claims, and the "prefetch command" described in the above embodiment The bit value indicating the prediction precondition included in the "corresponds to the" decision The “bit value indicating the playing state” corresponds to the “condition information” described in the claims.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the "chance of chance" at the end of the change effect is a continuous advance notice effect, but during the change effect, an image different from normal is displayed or a sound different from normal is displayed. An effect such as emitting noise may be used as a continuous advance notice effect. If configured in this manner, the stop type of each of the variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect does not have to be changed to "chance", and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is. it can. In addition, since the continuous advance notice effect can be performed also in the last variation effect for executing the continuous advance notice effect, the number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of giving the player a sense of anticipation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Moreover, when performing continuous advance notice production over a plurality of change effects, the effect contents may be changed for each change effect, or the effect contents may be changed for only some of the change effects. In addition, if the prediction result that triggered the continuous advance presentation effect is a big hit and the prediction result is credible, the continuous advance notification that suggests a big hit decision with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2) You may comprise so that presentation may be performed. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed during the change effect, or may be performed during the change effect and at the end of the change. In the case where the continuous advance notice effect is performed during the change effect, as in the present embodiment, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processes A, B, C, and D may be executed when the change effect is started.

  Also, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) described above, in the process of S3803, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the preread information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j are different from each other. If it is (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the jackpot lottery It may be configured to shift to the process of S3805 without performing the process of S3804, assuming that the prediction result is not credible.

  Further, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processing B, C, D (see FIG. 63, FIG. 65, and FIG. 67) described above, in the processing of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state flag 223 j If the game state shown is different from the game state (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804 to determine whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot, but S3803 In the case of No, it may be configured to shift to the processing of S3901 without performing the processing of S3804, assuming that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is not credible.

  Further, in the above-mentioned continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, C (see FIG. 61, FIG. 63, FIG. 656), the variation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 is received by It is executed when the fluctuation effect is started in the 3 symbol display device 81. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed at the end of the change effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is performed between the start of the change effect and the time immediately before the end of the change effect. , B and C may be executed at any time. Then, in the case where the continuous advance notice effect is performed during the change effect, as in the present embodiment, the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processes A, B, and C may be executed when the change effect is started.

  Also, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C, D (see FIG. 65, FIG. 67) described above, in the process of S4009, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, and the game indicated by the effect execution time gaming state flag 223k If the game state is different from the game state (S4009: No), the process proceeds to S4012, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserve i-th area is a jackpot, but S4009 In the case of No, it may be configured to shift to the process of S4013 without performing the process of S4012 on the assumption that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is not credible.

  Moreover, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processing C and D (refer to FIG. 65 and FIG. 67) mentioned above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserve i area is the jackpot by the processing of S4010 among the repetition processing of S4007 to S4015. If it is confirmed that there is a jackpot lottery prediction result in the pending i-th area is a jackpot, the jackpot lottery prediction result may be regarded as unreliable, and processing may be repeatedly interrupted there. good.

  Further, although the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process C (see FIG. 65) is executed when the fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, instead of the case where the fluctuation effect is started, the big hit It may be configured to be executed during. By being configured to be executed during the jackpot, the number of times of execution of the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67), if the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed is 2 or less, the continuous notice effect itself is canceled, but the number of times is not limited to 2. And may be set arbitrarily.

  Further, in the above-mentioned continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, C, D (see FIG. 61, FIG. 63, FIG. 65, FIG. 67), when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is unreliable, it corresponds to the unreliable prediction result The continuous advance notice execution status is changed to a state indicating that the continuous advance notice effect was scheduled to be performed in the change effect but was canceled. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is unreliable, not only the unreliable prediction result but also the continuous notice execution status corresponding to the credible prediction result is scheduled to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the fluctuation effect. You may change the status to indicate that it has been canceled.

  Further, although the above-mentioned continuous notice execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67) is executed when it is judged that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the above-mentioned continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59), the third symbol display The apparatus 81 may be configured to be executed when the fluctuation effect is started. In addition, it may be performed any time between the start of the change production and the time immediately before the end of the change production. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may be performed during a jackpot. By being configured to be executed during the jackpot, the number of times of execution of the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D can be suppressed.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the above-described continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59) that the continuous notice effect is to be performed, the hold area (hold 1 area to hold 4 area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The status of “1, 2, 3, 12, 11, 12,” which indicates that the continuous advance notice execution status of each reserve area in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored is temporarily executed in the fluctuation effect. It is set to 13 ". After that, the continuous advance notice execution status in each pending area in which the unreliable prediction result is stored is scheduled to be executed in the change presentation by the continuous advance notice status confirmation processing A, B, C, D. However, the status has been changed to "-1, -2, -3, -11, -12, -13" indicating that it has been canceled. On the other hand, in each of the holding areas in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored in the above-described continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59), the fluctuation effect is produced only in the holding area in which the credible prediction result is stored. In the above, the status "1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13" may be set to indicate that continuous advance presentation effects are to be executed.

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment, a gaming state flag 223 j configured similarly to the gaming state flag 203 a of the main control device 110 is provided. As described above, in the main control device 110, when the jackpot lottery is preread when the gaming state flag 203a is off, the jackpot random number table 202a1 for low probability is referred to, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is Read ahead. On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery is pre-read when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched. Then, when pre-reading of the big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery is immediately notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by the pre-reading command. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the prefetch command is received, any jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 is used by referring to the state of the game state flag 223j configured similarly to the game state flag 203a. As a result, it is possible to determine whether the pre-reading has been performed in the main control unit 110 and to determine the prediction precondition. Therefore, since the prediction precondition can be stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the prefetch information storage area 223a, when the main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 of the prefetch command, the prediction precondition is stored therein. You do not need to include it. As described above, in the main control unit 110, when the jackpot lottery is read during the jackpot, the jackpot after the jackpot indicating the gaming state at the time of the jackpot end based on the jackpot state gaming state flag 203d, It is determined whether to refer to the random number table 202a1 or to refer to the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2. The voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a jackpot after game state flag 223 c configured similarly to the jackpot after game state flag 203 d of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the pre-reading command is received during the jackpot, it is possible to refer to the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c configured similarly to the jackpot after game state flag 203d. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 are used to allow the main control unit 110 to determine whether prefetching has been performed during a jackpot. Accordingly, since the prediction precondition can be stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a prediction precondition storage area 223a3, when the main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the prefetch command, the prediction precondition is included therein. It does not have to be. That is, with this configuration, the main controller 110 can use the conventional one as it is. Therefore, the development cost of the gaming machine and the burden on the designer can be reduced.

  Further, in the variation process (see FIG. 21) of the above embodiment, the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S314, and then the jackpot flag 203e is set on in the process of S315. As described above, when the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S314, when the jackpot control process (S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, S901: to Yes (see FIG. 27) Branch. Therefore, in the jackpot control process, when the processing branches to S901: Yes, the jackpot flag 203e may be set to ON. That is, as long as the flag 203e is set to ON before the start of the jackpot, any processing may be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the setting of the state of the big hit post game state flag 203d (S410 and S411 in FIG. 22) is performed in the change start process (see FIG. 22). In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) to be described later, the process of S902 is executed and referred to when a fanfare command is generated. Therefore, it may be set at any timing before the process of S902 is performed.

  In the above embodiment, the big hit medium winning flag 203g is provided. However, when each process is executed in the single task method in the main control unit 110, the big hit middle winning flag 203g may not be provided. When the big hit middle winning flag 203 g is not provided, the big hit middle flag 203 e is referred to in place of the big hit middle winning flag 203 g. When execution of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started by the single task method, another process (main process, other interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process is completed. Because there is not, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of execution of the above-mentioned start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetch process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the big hit medium flag 203e, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data acquired along with the start winning combination is obtained along with the big start winning combination.

  In the above embodiment, the winning game state flag is provided. However, when each process is executed in the single task mode in the main control device 110, the winning game state flag may not be provided. When the winning game state flag is not provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to in place of the winning game state flag. As described above, the winning game state flag is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the start winning, and when the ball starts winning to the first ball entrance 64, each counter C1 to C1 at the timing when the starting win is made. The values of C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired. Then, the gaming state flag 203a acquired here is set as a winning game state flag. Therefore, if the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning is the high probability state, and if the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, the pachinko at the time of starting winning Indicates that the gaming state of the machine 10 is in a low probability state. When execution of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started by the single task method, another process (main process, other interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process is completed. Because there is not, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a does not change from the start of execution of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetch process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning can be determined by referring to the gaming state 203a. In addition, since it is not necessary to execute the processing of S207 in the above-described start winning processing (see FIG. 20) when the winning game state flag is not provided, the burden on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the winning game state storage area 203b5 in the holding ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  Also, in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) of the above embodiment, for those that start winning during the big hit, pre-reading is performed with the gaming state at the end of the big hitting as a prediction precondition, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result is I am improving. As described above, since the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot, after that determination, it is possible to pre-read the gaming state at the jackpot end as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in addition to the winning combination during the big hit, after the big hit classification is determined in the big hit lottery, for the starting winning until the big hit is started, the prefetching is made with the gaming state at the big hit end as a prediction precondition You may do so. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance that the main control device 110 matches the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the predicted result. Therefore, since the number of prediction results treated as credible in the voice lamp control device 113 can be further increased, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery can be more suitably used.

  In the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) of the above embodiment, the big hit medium winning flag 203g is provided, but when each process is executed in the single task method in the main control unit 110, the big hit middle winning flag 203 g You do not have to When the big hit middle winning flag 203 g is not provided, the big hit middle flag 203 e is referred to in place of the big hit middle winning flag 203 g. When execution of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started by the single task method, another process (main process, other interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process is completed. Because there is not, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of execution of the above-mentioned start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetch process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, by referring to the big hit medium flag 203e, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data acquired along with the start winning combination is obtained along with the big start winning combination.

  In addition, although the game condition flag at the time of winning is provided in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) of the above embodiment, when each process is executed in the single task method in the main control unit 110, the game condition flag at the time of winning You do not have to When the winning game state flag is not provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to in place of the winning game state flag. As described above, the winning game state flag is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the start winning, and when the ball starts winning to the first ball entrance 64, each counter C1 to C1 at the timing when the starting win is made. The values of C3 and CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a are acquired. The game state flag 203a acquired here is set as a winning game state flag. Therefore, if the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning is the high probability state, and if the game condition flag at the time of winning is on, the pachinko at the time of starting winning Indicates that the gaming state of the machine 10 is in a low probability state. When execution of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is started by the single task method, another process (main process, other interrupt process, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt process is completed. Because there is not, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the gaming state flag 203a does not change from the start of execution of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetch process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the start winning can be determined by referring to the gaming state 203a. In addition, since it is not necessary to execute the processing of S207 in the above-described start winning processing (see FIG. 20) when the winning game state flag is not provided, the burden on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the winning game state storage area 203b5 in the holding ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command, but the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit In this case, the main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 whether the present jackpot is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot by the above-described stop type command. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, it is not necessary to include in the fanfare command the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by the fanfare command, but instead of the fanfare command, fluctuation The main control unit 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit by another command such as a pattern command, stop type command, round number command or ending command. You may. That is, after the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot in the main control unit 110 and the jackpot type is determined, the main control unit is determined until the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the sound lamp control unit 113. As long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by the audio lamp control device 113, any command may be used for notification. In addition to the fanfare command, a new command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit is provided, and the new command causes the pachinko machine 10 to be set at the end of the current big win. The gaming state may be notified from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113. When a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command may not include information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit.

  Further, when the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the voice lamp control device 113 of the above embodiment extracts the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current big hit from the fanfare command. And, according to the game state, the jackpot after game state flag 223c is set. However, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 110 is a jackpot, the main lamp control device from the main control unit 110 determines whether the present jackpot is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot by the stop type command described above. 113 is notified. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, when the stop type command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, if the stop type command indicates a big hit type, the big hit after game state flag 223c is set according to the big hit type. It is good. In this case, it is not necessary to include in the fanfare command the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit.

  Moreover, although the ending effect determination process (refer FIG. 33) of the said embodiment is comprised so that it may be performed when the ending command transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 is received, the ending effect determination process is an ending effect. Since the processing is to determine the display mode of, it may be performed and finished before the ending effect is started. That is, it may be executed any time as long as it is finished before the ending effect is started after the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like, the information indicating the prediction precondition is further included in the prefetch command. However, the information included in the prefetch command is not limited to the information indicating the prediction precondition, and the voice lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was obtained using Any information may be used as long as it is information. For example, information indicating which table 202a1 or 202a2 the prediction result of the jackpot lottery has been obtained may be included in the prefetch command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the process of determining the display mode of the ending effect is taken as an example and described as an example that can appropriately handle the prediction result of the big hit lottery in the voice lamp control device 113. If it is a process to be used, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled, as in the process of determining the display mode of the ending effect. For example, also in the case of setting the display mode of the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to preferably handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In the above embodiment, although the fanfare command includes information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, but instead of the fanfare command. The other commands may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 including information indicating the state of skill set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit. For example, it may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 including information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the round number command or the ending command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the ending command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received by the voice lamp control unit 113, the ending effect determination process is executed in the voice lamp control unit 113, but the pachinko machine 10 is hit big The ending effect determination process may be performed any time before the end effect is performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control device 110 transmits the fanfare command to the voice lamp control device 113 including the information indicating the gaming state set to the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command. The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state at the end of the jackpot from the received fanfare command. On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the gaming state to be set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the stop type command. You may. In other words, if the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command is a probability change jackpot, it is determined that the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is a high probability state, and the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command If is usually a big hit, it is determined that the gaming state set for the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the present big hit is a low probability state. In such a case, the main control device 110 does not need to include the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit in the fanfare command, and thus the main control device The control burden of 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control unit 110 transmits the prefetch command to the voice lamp control unit 113 including the prefetch precondition of the prefetch in the prefetch command. It may be included in the hold number command and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, after the pre-reading is completed, the pending number command is generated.

  Further, in the ending effect determination process of the above embodiment, while acquiring the prefetching information stored in the hold area of the prefetching information storage area 223a one by one in the order of the stored order, the prediction precondition of the prefetching information And the jackpot after the jackpot gaming state flag 223c is compared, and each indicates the same gaming state, it is confirmed whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is a jackpot, First of all, it is checked whether there is something indicating that the lottery result is a big hit among the prefetching information stored in the reserve area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and it is shown that the lottery result is a big hit If there is a prediction condition of the pre-read information and the gaming condition indicated by the jackpot after game condition flag 223c, it is good. .

  Further, in the ending effect determination process of the above embodiment, while the prefetching information stored in the hold area of the prefetching information storage area 223a is acquired one by one in the order of the stored order, the prediction precondition of the prefetching information and If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information indicates a jackpot when the game state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c is compared and each indicates the same game state, the display of the ending effect It is comprised so that it may be decided whether it will set "the fixed effect display" as an aspect. On the other hand, while the prefetching information stored in the hold area of the prefetching information storage area 223a is acquired one by one regardless of the stored order, the prediction precondition of the prefetching information and the big hit after-game status flag 223c If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-reading information indicates a jackpot when the game state indicated by is compared and each indicates the same game state, the "display effect display" as the display mode of the ending effect It may be configured to determine whether to set. As described above, when the prediction precondition of the prefetch information matches the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c, the prediction result corresponding to the prediction precondition is the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery And likely to match. Therefore, even though the "finalized display" is performed in the ending production, then the jackpot production (ending production) is ended, and all the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot production is performed, It can suppress that the problem that a lottery result does not become a jackpot actually generate | occur | produces. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the player from disappointing by giving the player a sense of useless expectation, and thus it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the possibility that the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game can be increased.

  Further, in the main control device 110 of the above embodiment, when pre-reading for the start winning is performed, information indicating the prediction precondition of the pre-reading, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the variation pattern type Information is included in the prefetch command and the prefetch command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, but without transmitting the prefetch command, information indicating the prediction precondition of prefetching, and the jackpot lottery The information indicating the prediction result and the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type may be included in the pending ball number command and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. By configuring in this way, both the number of holding balls and the prediction result of the pre-reading (appropriate, stop type, variation pattern type) are included in the number-of-hold-balls command. Therefore, when the holding lamp number command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, the correspondence between the holding ball number and the prediction result of the pre-reading becomes clear. That is, the correspondence between the number of holding balls and the prediction result of prefetching is always correct without being careful about the timing of receiving the command and acquiring the number of holding balls and the prediction result of prefetching from the RAM. Such processing can be performed accurately. In addition, when pre-reading for the start winning is performed, part of information indicating the prediction precondition of the pre-reading, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type The rest may be included in the pending ball number command and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the ending effect determination process of the above embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information indicates the jackpot In this case, the "fixed effect display" is set as the display mode of the ending effect with a probability of 1/3, but the probability of setting the fixed effect display may be appropriately determined.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect, the main control device 110 transmits a change pattern command and a stop type command, and as a result, in the third symbol display device 81 , Fluctuation representation according to the fluctuation pattern command is started. Thereafter, when it is time to execute the variation effect execution time, the stop symbol of the stop type corresponding to the stop type command is displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, a command (for example, a confirmation command) instructing the stop display of the stop symbol is newly provided, and until the confirmation command is transmitted from main control device 110, the execution time of the scheduled fluctuation effect is scheduled Even if it finishes, you may comprise so that the fluctuation production may be continued.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control unit 110 performs pre-reading for the start winning combination, but the voice lamp control device 113 may perform pre-reading for the starting winning combination. In that case, when the start winning combination is detected in main controller 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, and pachinko at the time of winning The gaming state of the machine 10 (in addition, during the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by a prefetch command. Then, in the voice lamp control device 113, the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, the low probability big hit random number table 202a1, etc., so that the lottery result of the big hit lottery can be read ahead. Each table such as a jackpot type table (not shown) is stored in the voice lamp control device ROM 222, respectively. Also, the prefetching process (see FIG. 23) executed by the main control unit 110 is stored in the ROM 222 so that it can be executed by the audio lamp control unit 113. If configured in this way, when the read ahead command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, the voice lamp control unit 113 extracts various counter values from the read ahead command, and a lottery for a big hit lottery You can look ahead to the results. As a result, since the main control device 110 does not have to look ahead to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be further alleviated, and transition should be made based on entering the first ball entrance 64. It is possible to concentrate on the lottery process for lottery the gaming state. However, since important random number values such as the random number value of the jackpot may be discovered unfairly, notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the lottery result (success or failure), the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are included in the prefetch command. Is preferred. For example, it can be prevented that the signal output from the main control device 110 is illegally stolen and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are analyzed. Moreover, it can prevent that important random number values, such as a random number value which determines whether it is a big hit, from the signal output from the main control apparatus 110 is analyzed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether to start the continuous advance notice effect (continuous notice determination process in FIG. 32) or determines the display mode of the ending effect (FIG. 33). In the display control device 114, these processing may be executed. In that case, a program for executing each process so that the display control apparatus 114 can execute the continuous notice determination process shown in FIG. 32 and the ending setting process of FIG. 33, and the continuous notice determination table 222a. It is stored in the character ROM 234 (for example, the second program area 234a1). In the work RAM 233, the above-mentioned prefetch information storage area 223a, reserved ball number counter 223b, big hit after game status flag 223c, ending mode counter 223f, continuous notice lottery counter 223g, continuous notice frequency counter 223h, big notice flag after notice 223i, etc. Provide each memory of. Then, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the command as it is to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the pre-read command, the display control device 114 executes a process of determining whether or not to start the continuous advance presentation effect (continuous advance notification determination process of FIG. 32). Further, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command from the main control device 110, it is configured to transmit the command as it is to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command, the display control device 114 executes a process of determining the display mode of the ending effect (the ending setting process of FIG. 33).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, you may integrate each apparatus 113,114 instead, and may provide them as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control unit 113, it is transmitted to the display control unit 114 in the audio lamp control unit 113. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is configured to be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, when the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 and the command is received by the display control unit 114, the display control unit 114 determines the command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113. After that, the display control device 114 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, it is determined that the image controller 237 accesses the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (that is, using) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from the image controller 237 as needed. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or a notification from the image controller 237 whether the scan is in a blank period or not. If the scan state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 235, 236 is not in use. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is not in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Also, in this case, the MPU 231 transfers data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since a predetermined address is defined, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, drawing of the sprite is performed. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for the above can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading out image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, transfer processing of image data can be executed using time during which important processing in the display control apparatus 114 such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing is not performed. In addition, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed prior to the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the video RAMs using the addresses held by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or regular video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but merely designates the address, and The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the regular video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the specification. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as an information indicating the storage destination of the data of the sprite, without using the storage RAM type, simply using the address set in the common address system. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be connected directly to 237. Also, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. It is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise of using a general mask ROM as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to be able to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and is configured by a large capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit, for example, a hard disk It may be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 causes the image to be displayed without any problem at the time when it is desired to display by using the configuration described in the above embodiment. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after releasing the system reset in the first program storage area 234d1. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first cancels the system reset in that area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the character ROM 234 and a first program storage area is provided thereon. It may store part of the boot program to be executed first.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program to be executed first in the area after releasing the system reset in the MPU 231 Is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can be read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a. The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset release in the MPU 231 may be stored in the memory. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like may be provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided thereon. A part of the boot program to be executed first after system reset release may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when it is detected in the ROM controller 234b that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When it is detected that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated "0000H" in the ROM controller 234b, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line You may output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can.

  When ROM controller 234 b detects that the address designated by internal bus (bus line 240) designates a control program stored in first program storage area 234 d 1, first program storage area 234 d 1 is detected. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read out from the memory and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can. In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by connecting to the image controller 237 has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. An internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234 and the image controller 237 are connected It may be provided directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. When the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is not necessary even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  Although the above embodiment describes the case where the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more may be provided. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be made resident, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by the DRAM of one port type (one input / output port) is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A type of RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn, it is read from the character ROM 234 The process of writing the processed image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The contents may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least for residence in response to a received command received from the main control unit 110 or the audio lamp control unit 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably, it is resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is partially transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident is described, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 You may In this case, since the image data stored in the nonresident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 If the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is largely different based on the command received from the image, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined timing. Good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept updated in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it. In addition, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while not in use (ie, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). Image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 according to data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (ie, while image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) You may do it.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the content of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the above embodiment, after all image data to be resident is made resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when power failure is eliminated. Before the transfer of the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is started in the display main process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control unit 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, this means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, and thus the image data transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be made non-execution by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for the power failure recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data if the data of the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary stop or the like. Since time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Alternatively, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

  In the above embodiment, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a has been described as one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. However, the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a buffer period (blank period) during scanning on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed A data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 may be used as the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 generated in this blank period. .

  Although the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from the other buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while an area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since processing can be performed, the time taken for the processing can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thereby, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power on of the power-on main image and image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image Although the case of transferring to 235 b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on. Thus, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the image at power-on, while using the character ROM 234. The image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data corresponding to the image data, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is not sent from the character ROM 234 but through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on, and power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the hour main image, etc., Image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 through the buffer RAM 237a, the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power activation fluctuation. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235 b has been described, while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. Directly transfer image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and power-on fluctuation image from character ROM 234 directly to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on fluctuation image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without passing through buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power stored in the normal video RAM 236 While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 If the image data is not read out from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the contents of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10, and change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 From the resident area, the back image can be displayed immediately using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the definition of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the back image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the vibration error is detected by the audio lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 The controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main controller 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114. Then, when an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and sends an error command for further notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of the vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 47). The warning image setting process (see FIG. 48) may be performed when it is determined, to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 was described in the said embodiment, it replaces with the vibration sensor or with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 It is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress that the flow of the ball is changed by the magnetic field such as a magnet and the ball is intentionally entered into the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is An error command to be transmitted may be sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 via the audio lamp control unit 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that indicates an error may be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident in the error message pictorial area 235 f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113 The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving an error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 to transmit the magnetic field error. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. Thereby, the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, or recognizes the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is not It can be suppressed.

  When the drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of one presentation is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is represented as one unit, and the change in the sprite It may define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452 d and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If color information to be displayed is specified, color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information specified by the additional drawing content of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 In correspondence with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying is displayed as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and the new It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 displays the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. It may include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data which is required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may configure it.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer image data of a sprite used in drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, effects to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table May be This makes it possible to easily identify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table is defined not only for the additional drawing content but also including transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. This makes it possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition The processing load required for the specification can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start", "high speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation production, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the fluctuation production specified are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, in the display data table and the transfer data table, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f using the common pointer 233f has been described. Alternatively, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame for ending the drawing processing (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interruption signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed every display of an image of one frame By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Has been described and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 is a frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded each time the drawing list is received. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  In the above embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main display unit 110 is notified via the audio lamp control device 113 until the finalized display effect is finished. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the case of setting the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect to the display data table buffer 233 d Although this has been described, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233 d again. Also, in this case, until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is Each time the process is ended, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, the finalized display effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiment, a case was described where the demonstration effect was to change the back image and to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers from "0" to "9". The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol including the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image after power-on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and power on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on after the transfer is completed, transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control means 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power on after power on from the character ROM 234 to the power on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 at power on after power transfer is completed. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be checked in the operation check in the player, the person in charge of the hall, or the factory at the time of manufacture. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b. Thereby, when the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b and the display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after that, the display fluctuation pattern command is received. Based on the above, it is possible to display a simple variation display on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b be performed immediately after displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display by the power-on fluctuation image.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should be transferred to the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) or to that time, corresponding to the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit. Although the case of defining the information (transfer data information) of the image data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table, as a sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, an address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. May be defined. The display control device 114 reads the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233 j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored. Although the case has been described, in place of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data It may be determined whether or not it has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of that predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the case where the MPU 231 performs the process of disabling the transfer process has been described. The process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233 j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. Also, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in a work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in this case, the MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where only the image data corresponding to “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear surface images is made to reside in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, transfer processing of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the back image of super reach expected to have a high or high frequency of occurrence resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case of controlling the image controller 237 to transfer the image data instructed in step from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. The MPU 231 describes information on the type of sprite required in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, in the back surface C that is the back image of the "island stage", the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time is described, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time Good. In addition, not only images that scroll with time or changes in color tone as back images, but instead of such back images, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time It may be moving or changing.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 81 in which the fluctuation effect is performed, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 and the third symbol display device 81 Is provided with another fourth symbol display device, and combined with the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, even if continuous notice effect is executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device Good. In this case, control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, an award winning feature may be provided in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various effects, and the bonus item may be combined with the fluctuation effect and actuated in a predetermined mode to perform continuous advance notice effect. In addition, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by causing the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 to output the sound for the continuous advance announcement effect by the control of the audio lamp control device 113, and the electric decoration portion of the pachinko machine 10 Continuous advance notice effects may be performed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the change effects.

  Thereby, every time when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the prize is operated in a predetermined mode Alternatively, the player can be made to have a feeling of jackpot expectation by outputting a voice from the voice output device 226 or lighting or blinking the lighting units 29 to 33. In addition, the player usually pays attention to the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed and continues playing the game, but the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 Since the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the action of the special effects, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, a different effect is produced to the player. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effects can be easily and easily continued by simple control such as display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, activation of characters, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33. An advance notice can be made.

  In addition, if the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice lamp control device 113, so The main control unit 110 causes the main control unit 110 to perform a determination of acceptance or rejection at the start of the change, causes the voice lamp control unit 113 to perform continuous advance notice effects, and causes the display control unit 114 to perform change effects. In the case of performing the advance presentation, each control device can share each processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so it is possible to suppress the performance required for the MPU of each control device.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the character in the predetermined mode, the voice from the voice output device 226 Continuous advance notice effects may be performed by combining at least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and interlockingly controlling them. As a result, it is possible to execute a more diverse continuous notice effect. In addition, execution method of continuous announcement production (the indication with the 3rd symbol display 81, the indication with the 4th symbol display, the action of the special feature, the voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the electric decoration 29-33) Or, even by preparing a plurality of continuous notice effect modes to be selected according to the gaming state (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time junior high hit, disconnection) after the continuous advance notice effect is finished by changing the combination thereof. Good.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the image for continuous notice effects other than a fluctuation production was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, when continuous notice effects are performed, it is necessarily limited to this. Instead of the above, continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called "chance", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the change effect is finished. In this case, in the stop type command processing (refer to FIG. 37) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on and other stop symbol determination The flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process, so the chance symbol is set as a stop pattern instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command, so the fluctuation stop Sometimes you can see the chance eyes fixed. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as the stop symbol for each of the fluctuation effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

  Further, in the audio lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined by the continuous advance notification determination process (S1211) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 31), and the continuous advance presentation effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in response to the reception of this command. It is also good. As a result, transfer of image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode can be started from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the start of the change effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the display control device 114 may store the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect in the sub-area dedicated to the continuous advance notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect from being overwritten by another image data, so the image data corresponding to the desired continuous advance image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 The probability can be increased. Thus, it is possible to suppress repeated transfer of image data used in continuous advance notice effects.

  In addition, the stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect. Thus, since the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous advance notice effect is the last, while the continuous advance notice effect is being performed, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used for the continuous advance notice effect. When control is performed so that image data is not overwritten, cancellation of the overwrite control can be easily performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the information about the execution of continuous notice effect and the continuous notice image type is included in the display change pattern command, the display data table not corresponding to the continuous notice image for each change pattern, and each continuous The display control device 114 prepares a display data table corresponding to each notice image type, and the display control device 114 displays a corresponding display data table according to the change pattern indicated by the display change pattern command and the continuous notice image type. It may be set to 233 d. That is, the display data table may include the drawing content corresponding to the fluctuation pattern and the drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, setting of the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type is not necessary. Therefore, since the data table to be set can be reduced, the increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the transfer instruction of the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be performed in accordance with the reception of the display variation pattern command. As a result, one transfer data table may be prepared for each fluctuation pattern, and therefore, an increase in data tables can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the stop symbol of the change effect for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is a voice lamp control device based on the stop symbol (long reach, reach other than forward or backward, complete miss reach) determined by the main controller 110. Although the case where it was set by 113 was explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided by the sound lamp control device 113, the stop symbol of the last fluctuation effect that has been held is If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be replaced with the stop symbol of the reach aspect out of reach, instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control unit 110. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol defined by the main control unit 110, but is always an out-of-front reach, giving the player a high sense of expectation. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, when performing continuous advance notice effects along with all of the pending change effects, each change effect is performed in an effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each change, but in this case It may be configured to change the effect mode of change effects other than the last change effect on hold, to out-of-change effects. The variation pattern is changed according to the setting condition of the continuous advance presentation effect and the number of times of the continuous advance presentation effect executed by the process of generating the display change pattern command in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1504 in FIG. 38). May be In addition, when the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the change effect is displayed based on the change pattern determined by the main control unit 110 without updating the effect mode of the change effect. May be Here, even if continuous notice effects are continuously performed, the player's sense of expectation if the situation where the jackpot does not appear as a result continues even though the mode of the corresponding change effect is, for example, the super reach change effect. There is a risk that they will move backwards, but with the continuous advance notice effect being performed continuously, the fluctuation effect other than the change effect performed last is performed finally by being performed by the change effect continuously. It is possible to give the player a higher expectation for the fluctuation effect.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, when execution of continuous notice production was decided, although a case where continuous notice production was always performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81 was explained, it is not necessarily restricted to this, for example, continuous notice When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player in a situation where the execution of the effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed when performing variation effects. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced in size so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow-noise-like images in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly.

  In the above-described embodiment, although the case where one first entrance 64 is arranged in the game board 13 where the lottery of the big hit is started when the ball enters the ball has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entry ports where entry is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when there is a hold at each first entrance indicates which first entrance is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started, information indicating which of the first ball entry is the fluctuation effect reserved by the first ball entrance is included. Good. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the reserved ball number command If you set the number of holding balls in the number of holding balls counter for the mouth and receive the fluctuation pattern command, if you decrease the number of holding balls counter for the first entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command by 1, the first ball entrance The number of holding balls can be counted every time.

  In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect when the ball holding ball number command is received, all the first ball entrances are performed at that time. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed over the fluctuation effect (hold ball) held by the mouth. In addition, in pachinko machines that are provided with a plurality of first ball entrances and preferentially execute the fluctuation effects reserved in one first ball entrance, the fluctuation effects are preferentially executed. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only when the ball enters the first ball entrance. As a result, since the continuous advance notice effect is not started for the fluctuation effect held at the first entrance with low priority, the continuous announcement effect for the fluctuation effect held at the first entrance with low priority It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where continuous advance notice effects are not easily finished when the fluctuation effect is continuously suspended at the first entrance with high priority.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control unit 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the main control unit 110 holds the holding ball number command. Although the case of transmitting to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only when the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203c is increased in the main controller 110, the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, when the voice pattern control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the holding ball number counter 223b is reduced by one. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the ball holding ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ball holding ball number command can be reduced respectively. The control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be alleviated.

  In the above embodiment, when the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined in the voice lamp control device 113 when the pre-reading command is received, the continuous advance presentation effect is executed for all the fluctuation effects pending at that time. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each of further variation effects. As a result, since the continuous advance notice effect does not appear or does not appear for each of the fluctuation effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous advance effect, and perform the effect that does not make the player bored. Can. In this case, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated every time the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and a counter for determining whether to perform the continuous notice effect in each variation effect is selected. You may provide. Then, in the continuous advance notice determination process, when performing continuous advance notice effects (S 1316: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effects in each variation effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous notice effect may be started. Further, in this case, the number (range) of the predetermined value of the counter for setting the continuous advance notice effect execution for the corresponding fluctuation effect may be changed according to the condition. As this condition, for example, the value of the holding ball number counter 223b at the time of judging whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous advance notice effect, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect for which judgment is performed, a series The game state (15 probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15 normal big hit, out) after the continuous advance notice effect of, or a combination of two or more of these, etc. may be mentioned. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in each of the change effects is changed according to the condition, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each change effect. .

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and the voice lamp control unit 113 instructs the display control unit 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing output of each sound and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of the command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 such as an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114, a continuous notice flag or an error occurrence Various flags such as flags are generated, and based on the flags, display data table and transfer data table are set in display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as warning image are generated. Alternatively, it may set an instruction to transfer necessary image data.

  In the above embodiment, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times. It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown. In a random number information storage unit that acquires random number information when a predetermined start condition is met, a random number information storage unit that stores random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition unit, and a random number information storage unit A lottery for determining, from stored random number information acquired by the stored information acquiring unit, stored information acquiring means for acquiring one stored random number information, and a lottery result under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions A main player having a main control related to the game while having a determination means and a lottery condition setting means for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended. A control means, first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special gaming state, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information are reported. Game machine having a notification means and an auxiliary control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. In the first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the player and the lottery conditions acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means, the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery conditions is the lottery judgment means Determination that includes lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result in the case of being determined, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub control means, the sub control means being transmitted by the determination information transmission means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information, and condition information of the main control means Condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Comparison means for comparing with a condition, and, when notification by the notification means is performed, the first suggested information and the second indication based on the comparison result by the comparison means A gaming machine A1 comprising: notification control means for controlling the notification means such that one of the information and the insulting information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the random number information associated with the establishment is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery result under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is selected from the random number information. The game is judged by the judging means, and it shifts to the special game state according to the lottery result. Further, one of the first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special gaming state is ended. When it is determined that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means is acquired by the first drawing condition acquiring means, and the drawing result judging means acquires the drawing under the acquired drawing conditions. A lottery result in the case where random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means is determined. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information and the judgment condition information are associated with each other. It is stored in the determination information storage means. In addition, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The lottery condition indicated by is compared by the comparison means. And when alerting | reporting by alerting | reporting means is performed, based on the comparison result of a comparison means, it controls by an alerting | reporting control means so that one of 1st suggestion information and 2nd suggestion information may be alert | reported by alerting | reporting means. For example, when notifying one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information on the basis of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used Since it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means if this is refrained, the notification by the notification means is suppressed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine A1, the first suggested information and the second based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended. The notification means can notify one of the suggestion information. Therefore, even when it is refrained from utilizing the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, since notification by the notification means can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determination It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means becomes useless. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.

  In the gaming machine A1, as a result of comparison by the comparison means, the notification control means includes lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and condition information received by the condition information receiving means. A gaming machine A2 that controls the notification unit so that the second suggestion information is notified when the lottery condition to be indicated is not identical.

  According to the gaming machine A2, as a result of comparison by the comparison means, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means do not match the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means. In this case, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the second suggestion information is notified. When the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means do not match, the lottery result is obtained even if the random number information used for each determination is the same. Since there is a risk that the lottery result determined by the determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted. According to the gaming machine A2, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means are different, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted , The second suggestion information can be reported to the notification means. Therefore, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted, the second suggestion information can be notified by the notification means regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the use of the unreliable lottery result, it is possible to more suitably handle the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means.

  In the gaming machine A2, the notification control means, as a result of comparison by the comparison means, lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and condition information received by the condition information receiving means If the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates the lottery result for transitioning to the special gaming state when the lottery conditions indicated by the match, the first suggested information is notified A game machine A3 for controlling the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, as a result of comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means In this case, if the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates a lottery result to shift to the special game state, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the first suggestion information is notified. Ru. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery condition of the determination made by the lottery determination means, and further, if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination means Since the lottery result determined by the above-mentioned method matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be trusted. According to the gaming machine A3, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be trusted In this case, if the credible lottery result indicates the lottery result for transitioning to the special game state, it is possible to notify the notification means of the first suggestion information. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, the notification means can notify using the reliable lottery result. That is, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, those that can be trusted can be used, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more suitably handled.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. The comparison means acquires, among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, those for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means When the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the judgment result information acquiring means and the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is discontinued. The determination condition information acquired by the determination result information acquisition unit, indicating the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order; And drawing conditions, the gaming machine is characterized in that to compare the drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination result of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information is not determined by the lottery determination means and acquired by the determination result information acquisition means. Then, with respect to the obtained judgment condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit in order from the oldest reception order, by the comparison unit, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the first comparison cancellation means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result performed first by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving means. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in the descending order of reception order. Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received, and the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means are determined by the lottery determination means while the respective lottery conditions match. It is likely to be consistent with. On the other hand, when the comparison is made, if there is a mismatch between the respective lottery conditions, there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means. In the subsequent comparisons, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, even if the respective lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine A4, the comparison by the comparing means can be continued while the possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determining means is high, and each lottery If the results are unknown or not consistent, the comparison can be aborted. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when the comparison by the comparison means is meaningless, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. The comparison means acquires, among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, those for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination means In the comparison by the comparison result determination means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and is associated with the judgment condition information in which the lottery conditions coincide. And second comparison stopping means for stopping comparison by the comparing means when the determination result information being displayed indicates the lottery result for transition to the special game state. Among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order, and the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means A game machine A5 characterized by comparing.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, those for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information is not determined by the lottery determination means are acquired by the determination result information acquisition means. Then, with respect to the acquired judgment condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit in order from the oldest reception order, by the comparison unit In the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the determination result information correlated with the determination condition information matched by the lottery condition changes to the special gaming state When the selected lottery result is indicated, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the second comparison cancellation means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result performed first by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving means. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in the descending order of reception order. Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received, and the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means are determined by the lottery determination means while the respective lottery conditions match. It is likely to be consistent with. According to the gaming machine A5, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is In the case of showing the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be canceled even when the determination condition information to be compared of the lottery conditions remains. Therefore, since the number of comparisons by the comparison means can be suppressed, the control burden can be further reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the comparison means stores the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means, and the determination information storage means A game machine A6 characterized by comparing with the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means immediately before the notification is performed by the notifying means Are compared by the comparison means. Therefore, when performing comparison by the comparison means, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means without performing comparison immediately, so that the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, since the opportunity which can perform comparison by a comparison means can be increased, the opportunity which can perform the process which uses the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  In a random number information storage unit that acquires random number information when a predetermined start condition is met, a random number information storage unit that stores random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition unit, and a random number information storage unit A lottery for determining, from stored random number information acquired by the stored information acquiring unit, stored information acquiring means for acquiring one stored random number information, and a lottery result under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions A main player having a main control related to the game while having a determination means and a lottery condition setting means for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended. A control means, first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special gaming state, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information are reported. Game machine having a notification means and an auxiliary control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. In the first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the player and the lottery conditions acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means, the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery conditions is the lottery judgment means Determination that includes lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result in the case of being determined, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub control means, the sub control means being transmitted by the determination information transmission means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information, and condition information of the main control means Condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Comparison means for comparing with a condition, and, when notification by the notification means is performed, the first suggested information and the second indication based on the comparison result by the comparison means A gaming machine B1 comprising: notification control means for controlling the notification means so that one of the information and the insulting information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the random number information associated with the establishment is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery result under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is selected from the random number information. The game is judged by the judging means, and it shifts to the special game state according to the lottery result. Further, one of the first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special gaming state is ended. When it is determined that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means is acquired by the first drawing condition acquiring means, and the drawing result judging means acquires the drawing under the acquired drawing conditions. A lottery result in the case where random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means is determined. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information and the judgment condition information are associated with each other. It is stored in the determination information storage means. In addition, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The lottery condition indicated by is compared by the comparison means. And when alerting | reporting by alerting | reporting means is performed, based on the comparison result of a comparison means, it controls by an alerting | reporting control means so that one of 1st suggestion information and 2nd suggestion information may be alert | reported by alerting | reporting means. For example, when notifying one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information on the basis of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used Since it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means if this is refrained, the notification by the notification means is suppressed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to gaming machine B1, the first suggested information and the second based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended. The notification means can notify one of the suggestion information. Therefore, even when it is refrained from utilizing the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, since notification by the notification means can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determination It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means becomes useless. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.

  In any of gaming machine B1 and gaming machines A1 to A6, the lottery condition setting means sets the lottery condition of the lottery judgment means to a predetermined lottery condition when shifting to the special gaming state, and the lottery judgment The means is configured to hold the determination of the random number information from the transition to the special game state until the end, and the main control means is configured to hold the predetermined start condition. When it is determined by the gaming state determination means that determines whether or not the special gaming state is the special gaming state by the gaming state determination means, setting by the lottery condition setting means after the special gaming state is ended And third lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the selected lottery conditions, and the lottery result judging means is determined to be the special gaming state by the gaming state judging means, 3 lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means are characterized in that the lottery result is determined when the random number information acquired with the establishment of the predetermined starting condition is determined by the lottery judging means. Game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when transitioning to the special gaming state, the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means are set to the predetermined lottery conditions by the lottery condition setting means, and the transition from the transition to the special gaming state to the end The judgment of the random number information by the lottery judgment means is put on hold. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, it is determined by the game state determination means whether or not the special game state is determined, and if it is determined that the special game state is selected, a lottery is made after the special game state is ended. The lottery conditions set by the condition setting means are acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. In addition, if it is determined that the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means, the random number information acquired upon establishment of the predetermined start condition is the lottery determination means under the lottery conditions acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. The lottery result in the case where the determination is made is determined by the lottery result determination means. Since the determination by the lottery determination means is suspended during the special gaming state, when a predetermined start condition is established between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the determination of the random number information accompanying the establishment is It is made after the special gaming state is over. According to the gaming machine B2, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special game state and the termination, the special game condition is not set but the special game condition set during the special game state. It is possible to determine the lottery result of the random number information accompanying the establishment of the predetermined start condition by the lottery condition set for the lottery determination means after the state is ended. Therefore, even when the predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the lottery result of the determination performed by the lottery determination means can be accurately determined along with the establishment, so the correct lottery can be performed. The possibility of determining the result can be increased. Therefore, the opportunity which can handle suitably the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  In a random number information storage unit that acquires random number information when a predetermined start condition is met, a random number information storage unit that stores random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition unit, and a random number information storage unit A lottery for determining, from stored random number information acquired by the stored information acquiring unit, stored information acquiring means for acquiring one stored random number information, and a lottery result under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions A main player having a main control related to the game while having a determination means and a lottery condition setting means for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended. A control means, first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special gaming state, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information are reported. Game machine having a notification means and an auxiliary control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. In the first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the player and the lottery conditions acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means, the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery conditions is the lottery judgment means Determination that includes lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result in the case of being determined, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub control means, the sub control means being transmitted by the determination information transmission means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information, and condition information of the main control means Condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Comparison means for comparing with a condition, and, when notification by the notification means is performed, the first suggested information and the second indication based on the comparison result by the comparison means A gaming machine C1 comprising: notification control means for controlling the notification means such that one of the information and the insulting information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the random number information associated with the establishment is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery result under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is selected from the random number information. The game is judged by the judging means, and it shifts to the special game state according to the lottery result. Further, one of the first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special gaming state is ended. When it is determined that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means is acquired by the first drawing condition acquiring means, and the drawing result judging means acquires the drawing under the acquired drawing conditions. A lottery result in the case where random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means is determined. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information and the judgment condition information are associated with each other. It is stored in the determination information storage means. In addition, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The lottery condition indicated by is compared by the comparison means. And when alerting | reporting by alerting | reporting means is performed, based on the comparison result of a comparison means, it controls by an alerting | reporting control means so that one of 1st suggestion information and 2nd suggestion information may be alert | reported by alerting | reporting means. For example, when notifying one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information on the basis of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used Since it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means if this is refrained, the notification by the notification means is suppressed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine C1, the first suggested information and the second based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended. The notification means can notify one of the suggestion information. Therefore, even when it is refrained from utilizing the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, since notification by the notification means can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determination It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means becomes useless. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.

  In any one of the gaming machine C1, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, each of the plurality of lottery conditions is determined by the lottery determination unit according to the random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition unit. The random number information for indicating the lottery result to be determined and for which the lottery result to be shifted to the special game state is determined is configured to be different for each lottery condition, and the comparison means is configured to determine the determination condition information The lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information for each of the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match The lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means is compared, and in the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the condition When the lottery conditions indicated by the information do not match, it is determined whether the determination result information related to the determination condition information that the lottery conditions do not match indicates the lottery result to shift to the special game state The comparison control which controls the comparison means to continue the comparison when it is determined that the determination result information determination means and the determination result information determination means indicate the lottery result to shift to the special game state And the notification control means, as a result of comparison by the comparison means, includes lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and condition information received by the condition information receiving means. If the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates a lottery result for transitioning to the special gaming state when the selected drawing condition matches, the above-described first Gaming machine C2, which suggests information is characterized in that for controlling the informing means so as to broadcast.

  According to the gaming machine C2, each of the plurality of lottery conditions indicates the lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination means according to the random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition means, and shifts to the special gaming state The random number information for which the lottery result is determined is configured to be different for each lottery condition. Then, until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information becomes unmatched by the comparison means, the judgment condition information for each of the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means The lottery condition indicated by is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. In the comparison by the comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information indicating that the lottery condition does not coincide is It is determined by the determination result information determination means whether it indicates a lottery result to shift to the special gaming state. Here, if it is determined that the result indicates a lottery result for transition to the special game state, the comparison means is controlled by the comparison control means to continue the comparison. Then, when the result of the comparison by the comparison means indicates that the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means, the determination If the determination result information associated with the condition information indicates a lottery result for transitioning to the special gaming state, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the first suggestion information is notified. Since the random number information for which the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state is determined is different for each of a plurality of lottery conditions, the random number information is determined under a certain lottery condition, and the lottery result is shifted to the special gaming state Then, even if the random number information is determined under another lottery condition, the lottery result does not become the lottery result for shifting to the special game state. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means are different, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is shifted to the special game state If it is a lottery result to be played, the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means can be regarded as a lottery result different from the lottery result transitioning to the special gaming state. According to the gaming machine C2, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination means are different, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery determination means If the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means can be considered to be another lottery result different from the lottery result transitioning to the special gaming state, even if there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by will be different The comparison can be continued. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is different from the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination means, the comparison result is simply determined by the comparison means regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means. Compared with the case where the comparison is ended, the opportunity to perform the comparison by the comparison means can be increased. Therefore, the opportunity which can handle suitably the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C2, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, the determination information storage means determines the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and the determination condition. Information is stored in association with the reception order of the determination information, and the comparison means is a lottery result corresponding to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. In the comparison by the comparison means, the determination condition information acquiring means for acquiring one that is not determined by the lottery determination means, and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison means And the first comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the comparing means, and the determination condition information acquired by the determination result information acquiring means, Gaming machine C3 which characterized in that a comparison between sequentially drawing condition indicated by the determination condition information to old signal sequence, and a drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in the determination information storage means, the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information are stored in association with the reception order of the determination information Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination result of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information is not determined by the lottery determination means and acquired by the determination result information acquisition means. Then, with respect to the obtained judgment condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit in order from the oldest reception order, by the comparison unit, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the first comparison cancellation means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result performed first by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving means. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in the descending order of reception order. Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received, and the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means are determined by the lottery determination means while the respective lottery conditions match. It is likely to be consistent with. On the other hand, when the comparison is made, if there is a mismatch between the respective lottery conditions, there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means. In the subsequent comparisons, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, even if the respective lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine C3, the comparison by the comparing means can be continued while the possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determining means is high, and each lottery If the results are unknown or not consistent, the comparison can be aborted. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when the comparison by the comparison means is meaningless, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, gaming machines A1 to A6, and gaming machines B1 to B2, the determination information storage means determines the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and the determination condition. Information is stored in association with the reception order of the determination information, and the comparison means is a lottery result corresponding to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. In the comparison by the comparison means, the determination condition information acquiring means for acquiring one that is not determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information, and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information And, when the determination result information associated with the determination condition information matching the lottery condition indicates the lottery result for transitioning to the special gaming state, the comparison is made. And second comparison stop means for stopping comparison by the second row, wherein, among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in the descending order of the reception order; A gaming machine C4 characterized by comparing with a lottery condition indicated by condition information received by the condition information receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, those for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information is not determined by the lottery determination means are acquired by the determination result information acquisition means. Then, with respect to the acquired judgment condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit in order from the oldest reception order, by the comparison unit In the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the determination result information correlated with the determination condition information matched by the lottery condition changes to the special gaming state When the selected lottery result is indicated, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the second comparison cancellation means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result performed first by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving means. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in the descending order of reception order. Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received, and the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means are determined by the lottery determination means while the respective lottery conditions match. It is likely to be consistent with. According to the gaming machine C4, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is In the case of showing the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be canceled even when the determination condition information to be compared of the lottery conditions remains. Therefore, since the number of comparisons by the comparison means can be suppressed, the control burden can be further reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, the comparison means is a condition received by the condition information reception means immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by comparing a lottery condition indicated by information with a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit Are compared by the comparison means. Therefore, when performing comparison by the comparison means, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means without performing comparison immediately, so that the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, since the opportunity which can perform comparison by a comparison means can be increased, the opportunity which can perform the process which uses the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  In a random number information storage unit that acquires random number information when a predetermined start condition is met, a random number information storage unit that stores random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition unit, and a random number information storage unit A lottery for determining, from stored random number information acquired by the stored information acquiring unit, stored information acquiring means for acquiring one stored random number information, and a lottery result under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions A main player having a main control related to the game while having a determination means and a lottery condition setting means for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended. A control means, first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special gaming state, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information are reported. Game machine having a notification means and an auxiliary control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, wherein the main control means sets the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. In the first lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the player and the lottery conditions acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring means, the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery conditions is the lottery judgment means Determination that includes lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result in the case of being determined, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and (2) condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub control means, the sub control means being transmitted by the determination information transmission means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information, and condition information of the main control means Condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and a lottery indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Comparison means for comparing with a condition, and, when notification by the notification means is performed, the first suggested information and the second indication based on the comparison result by the comparison means A game machine D1 comprising: notification control means for controlling the notification means so that one of the information and the insulting information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the random number information associated with the establishment is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery result under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is selected from the random number information. The game is judged by the judging means, and it shifts to the special game state according to the lottery result. Further, one of the first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special gaming state is ended. When it is determined that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means is acquired by the first drawing condition acquiring means, and the drawing result judging means acquires the drawing under the acquired drawing conditions. A lottery result in the case where random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means is determined. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information and the judgment condition information are associated with each other. It is stored in the determination information storage means. In addition, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The lottery condition indicated by is compared by the comparison means. And when alerting | reporting by alerting | reporting means is performed, based on the comparison result of a comparison means, it controls by an alerting | reporting control means so that one of 1st suggestion information and 2nd suggestion information may be alert | reported by alerting | reporting means. For example, when notifying one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information on the basis of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used Since it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means if this is refrained, the notification by the notification means is suppressed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine D1, the first suggested information and the second based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended. The notification means can notify one of the suggestion information. Therefore, even when it is refrained from utilizing the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, since notification by the notification means can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determination It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means becomes useless. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.

  In any of the game machine D1, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the determination information storage means determines the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means. And the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information, and the comparison means corresponds to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. Judgment result information acquiring means for acquiring the judgment result of the lottery result to be undecided by the lottery judgment means, and the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison means And the determination result information associated with the determination condition information matching the lottery condition indicates the lottery result for transition to the special game state Of the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest one of the reception order among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The condition and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means are compared, and the notification control means determines the determination information stored in the determination information storage means as a result of the comparison by the comparison means. When the lottery condition indicated by the condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information is shifted to the special gaming state A gaming machine D2 that controls the notification means so as to notify the first suggestion information if it indicates a lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, those for which the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information is not determined by the lottery determination means are acquired by the determination result information acquisition means. Then, with respect to the acquired judgment condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit in order from the oldest reception order, by the comparison unit In the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the determination result information correlated with the determination condition information matched by the lottery condition changes to the special gaming state When the selected lottery result is indicated, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the second comparison cancellation means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result performed first by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery condition is the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving means. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in the descending order of reception order. Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received, and the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means are determined by the lottery determination means while the respective lottery conditions match. It is likely to be consistent with. According to the gaming machine D2, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is In the case of showing the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be canceled even when the determination condition information to be compared of the lottery conditions remains. Therefore, since the number of comparisons by the comparison means can be suppressed, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D2, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the comparison means receives the condition information immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means. A gaming machine D3 characterized by comparing a lottery condition indicated by condition information received by the means with a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means immediately before the notification is performed by the notifying means Are compared by the comparison means. Therefore, when performing comparison by the comparison means, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means without performing comparison immediately, so that the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, since the opportunity which can perform comparison by a comparison means can be increased, the opportunity which can perform the process which uses the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  Random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, random number information storage means for storing a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means, and the random number information storage Memory information acquiring means for acquiring one piece of random number information stored in the means, and lottery results under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions based on random number information acquired by the memory information acquiring means Lottery determination means for determining the lottery conditions, lottery condition setting means for setting the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means, and the subsequent lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended Main control regarding the game while having lottery control means for controlling so that the determination by the above is performed under the predetermined lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means It has main control means for controlling, notification means for notifying suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special game state, and sub control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means is a first lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the first lottery conditions Lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result when random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination means under the lottery condition acquired by the acquisition means, and the lottery result determination means A determination information transmitter that transmits determination information including determination result information indicating the determined lottery result and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result to the sub control means And second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and condition information for indicating the lottery conditions acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means to the sub control means Information transmission means, the sub control means being transmitted by the condition information reception means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmission means of the main control means, and by the determination information transmission means of the main control means A determination information receiving unit for receiving the determination information, a determination information storage unit for storing the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit, and the determination condition information in association with each other, and the storage in the determination information storage unit Comparing means for comparing the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information being carried out with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means; and the judgment information Notification setting means configured to set the notification information to be notified by the notification means based on the determination result information of the determination information received by the receiving means, and the indication information by the notification means according to the setting by the notification setting means A game machine E1 comprising: notification control means for controlling whether or not the indication information is to be notified by the notification means based on the comparison result by the comparison means when the information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, random number information is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit based on the establishment and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the plurality of random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is performed based on the random number information. The result is determined by the lottery determination means, and transition to the special game state is made according to the lottery result. In addition, the notification means notifies the suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state, and when the special gaming state is ended, the subsequent determination by the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means It is controlled by the lottery control means so as to be performed under a predetermined condition. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, information for determining the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means is acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means, and is acquired by the lottery result judgment means The lottery result in the case where the random number information acquired along with the information of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determined by the lottery information is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means. Then, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the judgment information and the judgment condition information are correlated and stored in the judgment information storage means Be done. Further, based on the determination result information of the received determination information, it is determined by the notification determination means whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means, and when it is determined to notify the suggestion information here, the condition information receiving means The lottery condition indicated by the received condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means by the comparison means. And based on the comparison result, it is controlled by the notification control means whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means.

  When a lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting means, there is a possibility that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means will change. Temporarily, if the lottery condition changes, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means before the change of the lottery condition disagrees with the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means after the change of the lottery condition. And there is a possibility that the respective lottery results do not match. Therefore, when the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means may not be used as being unreliable. In such a case, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is not used and is wasted. According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the notification information is notified of the suggestion information based on the relationship between the drawing condition of the drawing result determined by the drawing result judging means and the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means. It can be done. Therefore, even when using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means is refrained, using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means, the notifying means is notified of the suggestion information it can. Accordingly, since it is possible to suppress that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.

  In any one of the game machine E1, the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the notification control means determines the result of comparison by the comparison means. A gaming machine E2 that is controlled such that the notification information is notified by the notifying unit when a lottery condition indicated by the condition information matches a lottery condition indicated by the condition information.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the notification control means is configured to notify the suggestion information by the notification means when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information as a result of the comparison by the comparison means. Control is performed. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery condition of the determination made by the lottery determination means, and further, if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination means Since the lottery result determined by the above-mentioned method matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be trusted. According to the gaming machine E2, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be trusted In this case, the notification means can be notified of the suggestion information by using the credible lottery result. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, those that can be trusted can be used, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be handled more suitably.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E2, the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the notification control means is a result of comparison by the comparison means, A gaming machine E3 that is controlled such that the notification information is not notified by the notification unit when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the notification control means is configured so that the notification information is not notified by the notification means when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of comparison by the comparison means. Control is performed. When the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means do not match, the lottery result is obtained even if the random number information used for each determination is the same. Since there is a risk that the lottery result determined by the determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted. According to the gaming machine E3, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means are different, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted In this case, the unreliable lottery result can be used to prevent the notification means from notifying the suggestion information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the use of unreliable ones among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more suitably handled.

  In any of gaming machines E1 to E3, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, identification is made based on the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification setting means includes a plurality of display results based on the determination result information of the determination information. The information processing apparatus further comprises a notification determination unit that determines whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification unit in the fluctuation effect, and when it is determined by the notification determination unit to notify the suggestion information, the determination made by the lottery determination unit The notification in each of the variation effects performed based on the lottery result of the determination according to the lottery result indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. When the indication information is set to be notified by the row, and the notification control means makes a comparison between the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match A game machine E4 that is controlled such that the indication information is not notified by the notification means in each of the variable effects performed by the display means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, when the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification determining means determines whether to notify the suggestion information by the notifying means in the plurality of fluctuation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information. It is judged. Here, if it is determined to notify the suggestion information, among the determinations made by the lottery determination means, based on the lottery results of the determinations of the lottery results indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means The notification setting unit sets the notification information so that the notification unit notifies the suggestion information in each of the variation effects to be performed. Then, when the result of the comparison by the comparison means does not match the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the notification means does not notify the suggestion information in each of the variable effects performed by the display means Control is performed by the notification control means. If the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means Because there is a possibility of becoming, it is not possible to trust the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means. Then, when it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, there shifts to the special gaming state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, and thereafter, the lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting means There is also a possibility that the lottery condition of the determination means may be changed. Therefore, also in the next comparison, it becomes unclear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the comparison thereafter is also similarly unclear. If it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the result judging means, then it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result judged by the lottery result judging means. According to the gaming machine E4, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information become different in the comparison by the comparison means, and thereafter the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted In addition, it is possible that notification information is not notified by the notification unit in each of the variable effects. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, it is possible to further suppress the use of unreliable ones, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be handled more suitably.

  In any of gaming machines E1 to E3, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, identification is made based on the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means The display apparatus is provided with display means on which a variable effect including dynamic display of information is performed, and the judgment information storage means judges the judgment information of the judgment information received by the judgment information reception means and the judgment condition information. When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification setting means causes the notification in a plurality of variation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information. In the case where it is determined that the indication information is to be notified by the notification judgment means, the lottery judgment is provided. Among the determinations made by the means, the notification means is notified of the suggestion information in each of the variable effects performed based on the lottery result of the determination of the lottery result indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means Of the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest one of the reception order, and the condition The notification control means compares the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information as a result of the comparison by the comparison means. And in the case of each variation effect subsequent to that including the variation effect performed corresponding to the determination result information that becomes mismatched Gaming machine E5, wherein the suggesting information is used to control so as not to be notified by.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information are stored in the determination information storage means in association with the reception order of the determination information. When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification determination means determines whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means in the plurality of fluctuation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information. Here, if it is determined to notify the suggestion information, among the determinations made by the lottery determination means, based on the lottery results of the determinations of the lottery results indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means The notification setting unit sets the notification information so that the notification unit notifies the suggestion information in each of the variation effects to be performed. Then, among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means in order from the oldest reception order. A comparison is made by the means, and as a result of the comparison, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the variation effect to be performed corresponding to the mismatched determination result information is included. Control is performed by the notification control unit so that the notification unit does not notify the suggestion information in each of the subsequent variable effects. If the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means does not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means Because there is a possibility of becoming, it is not possible to trust the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means. Then, when it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, there shifts to the special gaming state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, and thereafter, the lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting means There is also a possibility that the lottery condition of the determination means may be changed. Therefore, also in the next comparison, it becomes unclear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the comparison thereafter is also similarly unclear. If it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the result judging means, then it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result judged by the lottery result judging means. According to the gaming machine E5, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted It is possible to prevent notification information from being notified by the notification means in each of the subsequent variable effects including the fluctuation effect performed corresponding to the judgment result information that becomes unmatched. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, it is possible to use the ones that can be relied upon and the ones that can not be relied upon to be used more, so the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means It can be handled suitably.

  In any one of the game machine E5, the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the comparison means determines the determination condition information in comparison by the comparison means. A game machine E6 comprising a first comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the comparing means when there is a mismatch between the lottery conditions indicated by and the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information.

  According to the gaming machine E6, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the first comparison cancellation means. Therefore, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, and thereafter the lottery result judged by the lottery result judgment means can not be trusted You can cancel the comparison. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when the comparison by the comparison means is meaningless, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any one of the game machines E5 to E6, the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the notification control means is a result of comparison by the comparison means, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates the lottery result to be transferred to the special game state For example, the gaming machine E7 is characterized in that control is performed such that the notification information is not notified by the notification means in each of the variable effects performed after the special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine E7, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information as a result of comparison by the comparison means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information is a special game If it indicates a lottery result to shift to the state, control is performed by the notification control means such that the notification information is not notified by the notification means in each of the variable effects performed after the special gaming state. When transitioning to the special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means after the special game state is ended. Therefore, the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means may be changed. Therefore, in the next comparison, it becomes unclear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the comparison after that also similarly becomes unknown. If it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the judging means, then the lottery result judged by the lottery result judging means can not be trusted. According to the gaming machine E7, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates the special gaming state It is possible to prevent notification information from being notified by the notifying means in each of the variable effects when the lottery result determined to be shifted to the lottery result can not be trusted after that from the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the use of unreliable ones among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more suitably handled.

  In any of the game machine E7, the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the comparison means determines the determination condition information in comparison by the comparison means. The lottery conditions indicated by the match the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information, and the determination result information associated with the determination condition information corresponding to the lottery conditions indicates the lottery result for transition to the special game state A game machine E8 characterized by comprising second comparison stop means for stopping the comparison by the comparison means, if any.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in the comparison by the comparison means, the determination result in which the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information and is associated with the determination condition information in which the lottery conditions coincide. When the information indicates the lottery result for transition to the special game state, the comparison by the comparison means is canceled by the second comparison cancellation means. Therefore, in the comparison by the comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information shifts to the special game state In the case where the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted thereafter, the comparison by the comparison means can be stopped. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when the comparison by the comparison means is meaningless, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any one of the game machine E5, the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A6, the game machines B1 to B2, and the game machines C1 to C5, the comparison means determines the determination condition information in comparison by the comparison means. The determination result information associated with the determination condition information matching the drawing condition indicates the drawing result transitioning to the special gaming state when the drawing condition indicated by the condition and the drawing condition indicated by the condition information match. When it is determined that the determination result information indicates the lottery result for transitioning to the special game state by the transition determination means for determining whether there is any, and the transition determination means, the special game state is ended after the end Lottery condition determination means for determining the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and when the lottery conditions are determined by the lottery condition determination means, the condition information Gaming machine E9, characterized in that instead of drawing conditions, the comparison means by lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determining means comprises a first comparator control means for controlling to continue the comparison shown.

  According to the gaming machine E9, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison means, the determination result information correlated with the determination condition information corresponding to the lottery condition is It is determined by the transition determination means whether it indicates a lottery result for transitioning to the special gaming state. Here, if it is determined that the lottery result for transitioning to the special game state is indicated, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is determined by the lottery condition determination means after the special game state is ended, and the condition is set. Control is performed by the first comparison control means such that the comparison means continues comparison based on the lottery conditions determined by the lottery condition determination means instead of the lottery conditions indicated by the information. When transitioning to the special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means after the special game state is ended. . Therefore, after the special gaming state ends, it becomes unclear whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. According to the gaming machine E9, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is determined by the lottery condition determination unit after the special gaming state is ended, and is changed to the lottery condition indicated by the condition information and determined by the lottery condition determination unit Control is performed such that the comparison means continues comparison based on the selected lottery conditions. Therefore, since it becomes clear whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information even after the special gaming state has ended, the lottery result determined by the lottery result judging means It can distinguish whether it can be trusted or not. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, those that can be trusted can be increased, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more suitably handled.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E9, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, each of the plurality of lottery conditions is the memory information acquisition means Shows the lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination means in accordance with the random number information acquired by the random number information for which the lottery result to be transferred to the special game state is determined to be different for each lottery condition The comparison means stores the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match. Each time the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, the comparison by the comparison means is performed. If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicating that the lottery condition does not match is the special game state In the case where it is determined by the determination result information determination means that determines whether or not to indicate the lottery result to be transferred to, and the determination result information determination means indicates the lottery result to transition to the special gaming state, A game machine E10 comprising: second comparison control means for controlling the comparison means to continue comparison.

  According to the gaming machine E10, each of the plurality of lottery conditions indicates a lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination means in accordance with the random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition means, and shifts to the special gaming state The random number information for which the lottery result is determined is configured to be different for each lottery condition. Then, until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information becomes unmatched by the comparison means, the judgment condition information for each of the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means The lottery condition indicated by is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. In the comparison by the comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information indicating that the lottery condition does not coincide is It is determined by the determination result information determination means whether it indicates a lottery result to shift to the special gaming state. Here, if it is determined that the result indicates a lottery result for transition to the special game state, control is performed by the second comparison control means such that the comparison means continues the comparison. Since the random number information for which the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state is determined is different for each of a plurality of lottery conditions, the random number information is determined under a certain lottery condition, and the lottery result is shifted to the special gaming state In this case, even if the random number information is determined under another lottery condition, the lottery result is not the lottery result for transition to the special game state. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means do not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is the special game state If it is a lottery result to shift to, it can be considered that the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means is a lottery result different from the lottery result transitioning to the special gaming state. According to the gaming machine E10, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means does not match the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery determination Even if there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the means may not match, if it can be considered that the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means will be another lottery result than the lottery result transitioning to the special gaming state, The comparison by the comparison means can be continued. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination means do not match, the comparison is simply made regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means Compared with the case where the comparison by means is ended, the opportunity which can be compared by the comparison means can be increased. Therefore, the opportunity which can handle suitably the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  In any one of game machines E1 to E10, game machines D1 to D3, game machines A1 to A6, game machines B1 to B2, and game machines C1 to C5, the lottery condition setting means shifts to the special game state In this case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set to a predetermined lottery condition, and the lottery determination means suspends the determination of the random number information from the transition to the special gaming state until the process is ended. The main game control unit is in the special game state by the game state determination unit that determines whether or not the special game state is established when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the main control means is in the special game state by the game state determination unit And third lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means after the special game state is ended, the lottery result judging means comprising If it is determined that the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means, the random number information acquired with the establishment of the predetermined start condition under the lottery condition acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means is the lottery A game machine E11 characterized by judging a lottery result in the case of being judged by the judging means.

  According to the gaming machine E11, when transitioning to the special gaming state, the drawing condition setting means sets the drawing condition of the drawing determination means to a predetermined drawing condition, and from the transition to the special game state to the end The judgment of the random number information by the lottery judgment means is put on hold. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, it is determined by the game state determination means whether or not the special game state is determined, and if it is determined that the special game state is selected, a lottery is made after the special game state is ended. The lottery conditions set by the condition setting means are acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. In addition, if it is determined that the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means, the random number information acquired upon establishment of the predetermined start condition is the lottery determination means under the lottery conditions acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. The lottery result in the case where the determination is made is determined by the lottery result determination means. The determination by the lottery determination means is suspended during the special gaming state, so if the predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the determination of the random number information accompanying the establishment is , It is made after the special game state ends. According to the gaming machine E11, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special game state and the end, the special game condition is not set but the special game condition set during the special game state. It is possible to determine the lottery result of the random number information accompanying the establishment of the predetermined start condition by the lottery condition set for the lottery determination means after the state is ended. Therefore, even when the predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the lottery result of the determination performed by the lottery determination means can be accurately determined along with the establishment, so the correct lottery can be performed. The possibility of determining the result can be increased. Therefore, the opportunity which can handle suitably the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E11, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparison means immediately before notification by the notification means A gaming machine characterized by comparing the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means with the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means. E12.

  According to the gaming machine E12, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means immediately before the notification is performed by the notifying means Are compared by the comparison means. Therefore, when performing comparison by the comparison means, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means without performing comparison immediately, so that the comparison can be performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the determination condition information is stored. Therefore, since the opportunity which can handle the lottery result determined by the lottery result judging means can be increased by the comparing means, the opportunity which can suitably handle the lottery result judged by the lottery result judging means can be increased.

  A gaming machine F1 characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine F3 characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
  <Others>
  Conventionally, a pachinko machine has been known which performs a big hit lottery along with the game ball winning to the starting opening and displays on the display screen a variable effect and a big hit effect according to the lottery result. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . Among pachinko machines of this type, for example, when a game ball wins in a starting opening, a player who predicts a lottery result of a jackpot lottery accompanying the prize based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of winning. is there. In addition, as the gaming state, a low probability state in which the probability that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the winning will be a big hit is low, a high probability state in which the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than the low probability state, etc. Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is predicted, and the prediction result becomes a jackpot, an effect (notice to notify in advance that there is a high possibility of shifting to the jackpot which is a special gaming state advantageous to the player In order to improve the player's expectation, for example, the effect is given.
  In this pachinko machine, when the game ball wins to the starting opening, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the winning is predicted based on the gaming state at the time of winning, but the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the prize is It is performed later than prediction, and is performed based on the gaming state at the time of the lottery. More specifically, when the gaming ball wins the starting opening, a random number value is acquired along with the winning, and if the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the winning is a low probability state, the lottery table for low probability If the gaming state at the time of winning is the high probability state, the lottery table for high probability is referred to. Then, the lottery result is predicted based on the table referred to and the random number value acquired in connection with the winning.
  In addition, when random number values are acquired in connection with the winning, when a variable effect corresponding to the winning is started, a jackpot lottery based on the random values is performed. In this jackpot lottery, unlike the prediction of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the lottery table is referred to based on the gaming state at the time of lottery. More specifically, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of lottery is a low probability state, the lottery table for low probability time is referred to, while if the gaming state at the time of lottery is a high probability state, high probability The hourly lottery table is referred to. Then, the lottery result is determined based on the table referred to and the random number value acquired in connection with the winning. If the lottery result is a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set according to the big hit type when the big hit is finished.
  However, even when random numbers are acquired as a result of winning, if random effects are being performed or a big hit, the random values obtained as a result of that winning are accumulated in a predetermined storage area, and a jackpot lottery Execution is suspended. In addition, when the same winning is repeatedly generated, for example, the jackpot lottery is suspended up to four times. And, when the fluctuation production and jackpot being executed is ended, if the held jackpot lottery is left, the oldest one of the held jackpot lottery is executed. Similarly, while the jackpot lottery is being held, the pending jackpot lottery is executed one by one each time the on-going variation effect or the jackpot is finished. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-333089)
  Therefore, when the game ball is newly awarded to the starting opening, if the jackpot lottery is held, after the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new prize is predicted, the held jackpot lottery is executed. Then, the actual jackpot lottery with the new prize is performed. Therefore, if the pending jackpot lottery is executed and any lottery result becomes a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set at the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, so the jackpot of The gaming state may change before and after.
  Here, when the gaming state changes, the actual jackpot lottery with a new winning is performed in the gaming state after the change, so the lottery table referred to in the prediction of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with a new prize and And the lottery table to be referred to in the actual jackpot lottery accompanying a prize will change. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result will not coincide, and if the effect (pre notice effect) is performed using the prediction result, the actual jackpot There is a high possibility that an effect unrelated to the lottery result of the lottery will be performed. Therefore, when there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may not coincide with each other, it is avoided to use the prediction result. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.
  The present technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably handling the prediction result of the jackpot lottery.
  <Means>
  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 is acquired by random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information accompanying establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the random number information acquiring means A random number information storage unit for storing random number information, a stored information acquisition unit for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage unit, and a lottery under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions The lottery determination means for determining the result from the random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition means, and the lottery condition for the lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended Main control means for performing main control regarding the game while having a lottery condition setting means to perform, and first suggested information indicating that the possibility of shifting to the special game state is high And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means and having notification means for notifying one of the second suggestion information and the first suggestion information, and the main control The first lottery condition acquiring unit for acquiring the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquiring unit And a lottery result judging means for judging the lottery result when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery condition is judged by the lottery judging means, and a judgment showing the lottery result judged by the lottery result judging means Determination information transmitting means for transmitting determination information including result information and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result to the sub-control means; and the lottery condition setting means The sub-control means comprises: second lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions; and condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery conditions acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means. A decision information receiving means for receiving the decision information transmitted by the decision information sending means of the main control means, the decision result information of the decision information received by the decision information receiving means, and the decision condition information are associated with each other. Judgment information storage means to be stored, condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and A first comparing means for comparing with the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means; and when the notification by the notifying means is performed, the first comparing means And notification control means for controlling the notification means such that one of the first indication information and the second indication information is notified based on the comparison result by the comparison means.
  In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the lottery condition setting means sets the lottery condition of the lottery determination means to a predetermined lottery condition when shifting to the special gaming state. The setting is performed, and the lottery determination means is configured to hold the determination of the random number information from the transition to the special game state until the end, and the main control means is configured to perform the predetermined start condition. When it is determined that the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means for determining whether or not the special gaming state, and the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means, after the special gaming state is ended The third lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means is provided, and the lottery result judging means is judged to be the special gaming state by the gaming state judging means If, is to determine the lottery result in the case where the third drawing condition random number information that is acquired along with the establishment of the predetermined start-up condition by lottery conditions acquired by the acquisition means is determined by the lottery determining means.
  The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 stores a plurality of random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, and a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means. The random number information storage means, the stored information acquisition means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and the stored information of the lottery result under one lottery condition set in advance among the plurality of lottery conditions The lottery determination means to determine based on the random number information acquired by the acquisition means, the lottery condition setting means for setting the lottery condition of the lottery determination means, and the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means And a lottery control unit configured to control the subsequent determination by the lottery determination unit to be performed under a predetermined lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit when the process ends. And controlling means for performing main control regarding the game, and notifying means for notifying information suggesting that there is a high possibility of transition to the special game state, and controlled by an instruction from the main control means The sub control means is provided, and the main control means acquires information for determining the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. 1 lottery condition acquisition means and lottery conditions determined by the information acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means, wherein the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the information is determined by the lottery determination means A lottery result determination means for determining the result, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and a determination condition indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result Information transmitted to the sub-control means, a second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and the second lottery condition acquisition means And condition information transmitting means for transmitting the condition information indicating the lottery conditions to be acquired to the sub control means, the sub control means receiving the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmission means of the main control means. Information receiving means, determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means, determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and determination condition information Information stored in association with each other, lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and the condition information receiving means The notification means is set to notify the suggestion information based on the second comparison means for comparing with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information to be displayed, and the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means And the notification means for notifying the suggestion information based on the comparison result by the second comparison means when the indication information is notified by the notification means according to the setting by the notification setting means and the notification setting means And notification control means for controlling the
  The gaming machine described in the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 and is provided with a display means in which a variable effect including dynamic display of identification information is performed based on the lottery result determined by the lottery determining means. The determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information, and the notification setting means A notification determination unit that determines whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification unit in a plurality of fluctuation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information when the determination information receiving unit receives the determination information The determination information storage means is included in the determination made by the lottery determination means when the notification determination means determines that the suggestion information is to be notified. It is set to notify the suggestion information by the notification means in each of the variable effects performed based on the lottery result of the determination according to the lottery result indicated by the determination result information, and the second comparison means Among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means in order from the oldest reception order. If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of the comparison by the second comparison means, the notification control means disagreed. Control is performed such that the notification information is not notified by the notification means in each subsequent change effect including the change effect performed corresponding to the determination result information A.
  In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the second comparing means indicates a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information in comparison by the second comparing means. A transition determining unit that determines whether the determination result information associated with the determination condition information matching the lottery condition indicates the lottery result transitioning to the special gaming state, when the lottery condition matches, When it is determined by the transition determination means that the determination result information indicates a lottery result to shift to the special gaming state, the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means after the special gaming state is ended. If the lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determination means for determining the condition and the lottery condition determination means, the lottery condition determination means is changed to the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. And a first comparison control means for controlling so that said second comparing means continues to compare the more the determined drawing condition.
  <Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the random number information associated with the establishment is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery result under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is selected from the random number information. The game is judged by the judging means, and it shifts to the special game state according to the lottery result. Further, one of the first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special gaming state is ended. When it is determined that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means is acquired by the first drawing condition acquiring means, and the drawing result judging means acquires the drawing under the acquired drawing conditions. A lottery result in the case where random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination means is determined. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the received judgment information and the judgment condition information are associated with each other. It is stored in the determination information storage means. In addition, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The lottery conditions indicated by are compared by the first comparison means. Then, when notification by the notification means is performed, the notification control means is controlled based on the comparison result of the first comparison means so that one of the first indication information and the second indication information is indicated by the notification means. Ru. For example, when notifying one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information on the basis of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used Since it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means if this is refrained, the notification by the notification means is suppressed. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first drawing condition based on the relation between the drawing condition of the drawing result determined by the drawing result judging means and the drawing condition set when the special gaming state is ended. The notification means can notify one of the suggestion information and the second suggestion information. Therefore, even when it is refrained from utilizing the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, since notification by the notification means can be performed using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determination It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means becomes useless. Therefore, there is an effect that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.
  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when shifting to the special gaming state, the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means are set to predetermined lottery conditions by the lottery condition setting means, and during the transition to the special gaming state, the lottery determination means The judgment of the random number information by is suspended. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, it is determined by the game state determination means whether or not the special game state is determined, and if it is determined that the special game state is selected, a lottery is made after the special game state is ended. The lottery conditions set by the condition setting means are acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. In addition, if it is determined that the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means, the random number information acquired upon establishment of the predetermined start condition is the lottery determination means under the lottery conditions acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. The lottery result in the case where the determination is made is determined by the lottery result determination means. Since the determination by the lottery determination means is suspended during the special gaming state, when a predetermined start condition is established between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the determination of the random number information accompanying the establishment is It is made after the special gaming state is over. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special game state and the end, the predetermined lottery condition set in the special game state Rather, it is possible to determine the lottery result of the random number information accompanying the establishment of the predetermined start condition under the lottery condition set for the lottery determination means after the special gaming state is ended. Therefore, even when the predetermined start condition is satisfied between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the lottery result of the determination performed by the lottery determination means can be accurately determined along with the establishment, so the correct lottery can be performed. The possibility of determining the result can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the chance of suitably handling the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means.
  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the random number information is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit based on the establishment and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the plurality of random number information storage means is acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the lottery under one lottery condition preset among the plurality of lottery conditions is performed based on the random number information. The result is determined by the lottery determination means, and transition to the special game state is made according to the lottery result. In addition, the notification means notifies the suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state, and when the special gaming state is ended, the subsequent determination by the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means It is controlled by the lottery control means so as to be performed under a predetermined condition. In the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, information for determining the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means is acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means, and is acquired by the lottery result judgment means The lottery result in the case where the random number information acquired along with the information of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determined by the lottery information is determined by the lottery determination means. Then, determination information including the determination result information indicating the lottery result and the determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub control means by the determination information transmission means. Further, when the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition means, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery conditions is transmitted to the sub control means by the condition information transmission means. In the sub control means, condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means. Then, when the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the judgment information receiving means, the judgment result information of the judgment information and the judgment condition information are correlated and stored in the judgment information storage means Be done. Further, based on the determination result information of the received determination information, it is determined by the notification determination means whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means, and when it is determined to notify the suggestion information here, the condition information receiving means The second comparison means compares the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information with the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means. And based on the comparison result, it is controlled by the notification control means whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means.
  When a lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting means, there is a possibility that the lottery condition of the lottery determination means will change. Temporarily, if the lottery condition changes, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means before the change of the lottery condition disagrees with the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means after the change of the lottery condition. And there is a possibility that the respective lottery results do not match. Therefore, when the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means may not be used as being unreliable. In such a case, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is not used and is wasted. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the relationship between the drawing condition of the drawing result determined by the drawing result judging means and the drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means. It can be informed. Therefore, even when using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means is refrained, using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means, the notifying means is notified of the suggestion information it can. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is wasted, there is an effect that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be suitably handled.
  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information are stored in the determination information storage means in association with the reception order of the determination information. When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification determination means determines whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means in the plurality of fluctuation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information. Here, if it is determined to notify the suggestion information, among the determinations made by the lottery determination means, based on the lottery results of the determinations of the lottery results indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means The notification setting unit sets the notification information so that the notification unit notifies the suggestion information in each of the variation effects to be performed. Then, among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information in descending order of reception order and the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means are listed first (2) When the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of the comparison by the comparison means, the fluctuation effect to be performed corresponding to the determination result information indicating the mismatch Control is performed by the notification control unit so that the notification unit does not notify the suggestion information in each of the subsequent variable effects including the above. When the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the second comparison means, the lottery result judged by the lottery result judgment means and the lottery result judged by the lottery judgment means Because there is a possibility that they will not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can not be trusted. Then, when it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, there shifts to the special gaming state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, and thereafter, the lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting means There is also a possibility that the lottery condition of the determination means may be changed. Therefore, also in the next comparison, it becomes unclear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the comparison thereafter is also similarly unclear. If it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result determined by the result judging means, then it becomes impossible to trust the lottery result judged by the lottery result judging means. According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 4, in the comparison by the second comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, and the lottery result judged by the lottery result judgment means is trusted In the case where it becomes impossible, it is possible not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means in each subsequent variable rendition including the fluctuation rendition performed corresponding to the judgment result information that becomes unmatched. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, it is possible to use the ones that can be relied upon and the ones that can not be relied upon to be used more, so the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means There is an effect that it can be handled suitably.
  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the following effect is exerted. That is, in the comparison by the second comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information corresponding to the lottery condition is the special gaming state It is determined by the transition determination means whether or not it indicates the lottery result to be transferred to. Here, if it is determined that the lottery result for transitioning to the special game state is indicated, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means is determined by the lottery condition determination means after the special game state is ended, and the condition is set. Control is performed by the first comparison control means so that the second comparison means continues comparison based on the lottery conditions determined by the lottery condition determination means instead of the lottery conditions indicated by the information. When transitioning to the special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means after the special game state is ended. . Therefore, after the special gaming state ends, it becomes unclear whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is determined by the lottery condition determination unit after the special gaming state is ended, and the lottery condition is changed to the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. Control is performed such that the second comparing means continues the comparison according to the lottery condition determined by the condition determining means. Therefore, since it becomes clear whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information even after the special gaming state has ended, the lottery result determined by the lottery result judging means It can distinguish whether it can be trusted or not. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means, those that can be trusted can be increased, so that the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means can be more suitably handled.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 third symbol display equipment 110 main controller (main controller)
113 audio lamp controller (sub-control hand stage)
114 Display control device ( variation display means )
203b Holding sphere storage area (random number information storage means)
223a Pre-reading information storage area (decision information storage means)
223c big hit after the game state flag (lottery condition information storage means)
223j gaming state flag (lottery condition information storage means)
S206 Random number information acquisition means S401 Stored information acquisition means S402 to S405 Lottery determination means
S408, S413 variation type determination means S409~S411, S915, S916 drawing condition setting hand stage S501 ~ S507 lottery result estimation unit S511 ~ S513, S515 estimation information transmission unit
S902, S903 Condition information transmission means

Claims (5)

In a random number information storage unit that acquires random number information when a predetermined start condition is met, a random number information storage unit that stores random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition unit, and a random number information storage unit A lottery for determining, from stored random number information acquired by the stored information acquiring unit, stored information acquiring means for acquiring one stored random number information, and a lottery result under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions A main player having a main control related to the game while having a determination means and a lottery condition setting means for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended. A control means, first suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special gaming state, and second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information are reported. In the gaming machine that includes a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control unit together with a notification means for,
The main control means
First lottery condition acquiring means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result when random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination means under the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means;
Judgment information transmission means for transmitting judgment information including judgment result information indicating the lottery result judged by the lottery result judgment means and judgment condition information indicating the lottery condition of the drawing result to the sub control means;
Second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means;
Condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating lottery conditions acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring means to the sub control means;
The sub control means
Judgment information receiving means for receiving the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means;
A determination information storage unit that stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit in association with the determination condition information;
Condition information receiving means for receiving condition information sent by the condition information sending means of the main control means;
First comparison means for comparing the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means with the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means;
A notification control unit that controls the notification unit such that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified based on the comparison result by the first comparison unit when the notification by the notification unit is performed. And a game machine characterized by comprising. The lottery condition setting means
When shifting to the special gaming state, the lottery condition of the lottery determination means is set to a predetermined lottery condition,
The lottery determination means is
The determination of the random number information is configured to be suspended from the transition to the special game state until the end.
The main control means
Game state determination means for determining whether or not the special game state is established when the predetermined start condition is established;
The third lottery condition acquiring means is provided for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means after the special game state is ended when it is determined that the special game state is determined by the gaming state determination means. ,
The lottery result judging means
If it is determined that the special game state is determined by the gaming state determination means, the random number information acquired with the establishment of the predetermined start condition under the lottery condition acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means is the lottery The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that the lottery result in the case of being determined by the determination means is determined. Random number information acquiring means for acquiring random number information based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, random number information storage means for storing a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquiring means, and the random number information storage Memory information acquiring means for acquiring one piece of random number information stored in the means, and lottery results under one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions based on random number information acquired by the memory information acquiring means Lottery determination means for determining the lottery conditions, lottery condition setting means for setting the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means, and the subsequent lottery determination means when the special gaming state to shift according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is ended Main control regarding the game while having lottery control means for controlling so that the determination by the above is performed under the predetermined lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means It has main control means for controlling, notification means for notifying suggestion information indicating that there is a high possibility of transition to the special game state, and sub control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means. In the game machine
The main control means
A first lottery condition acquiring unit that acquires information for determining the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A lottery result determination that determines a lottery result when random number information acquired with the acquisition of the information is determined by the lottery determination means under the lottery conditions determined by the information acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means Means,
Judgment information transmission means for transmitting judgment information including judgment result information indicating the lottery result judged by the lottery result judgment means and judgment condition information indicating the lottery condition of the drawing result to the sub control means;
Second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means;
Condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating lottery conditions acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring means to the sub control means;
The sub control means
Condition information receiving means for receiving condition information sent by the condition information sending means of the main control means;
Judgment information receiving means for receiving the judgment information transmitted by the judgment information transmitting means of the main control means;
A determination information storage unit that stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit in association with the determination condition information;
Second comparison means for comparing the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means;
A notification setting unit configured to set the notification information to be notified by the notification unit based on the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit;
Notification control that controls whether the notification information is notified by the notification unit based on the comparison result by the second comparison unit when the indication information is notified by the notification unit according to the setting by the notification setting unit And a game machine characterized by comprising: The display device is provided with display means on which a variable effect including dynamic display of identification information is performed based on the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means,
The determination information storage means
The determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information are stored in association with the reception order of the determination information,
The notification setting unit
When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, a notification determination means is provided that determines whether the notification means is to notify the suggestion information in a plurality of variation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information,
Of the determinations made by the lottery determination means, when it is determined that the indication information is to be announced by the notification determination means, of the determinations made by the determination result information indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means It is set so that the indication information is notified by the notification means in each of the variable effects performed based on the lottery result,
The second comparing means is
Among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order, and the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception means To compare,
The notification control means
When the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of the comparison by the second comparison means, the fluctuation effect to be performed corresponding to the determination result information that does not match 4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the notification means controls the notification information not to be notified by each of the subsequent variable effects including the. The second comparing means is
In the comparison by the comparison means, when the drawing condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the drawing condition indicated by the condition information, the judgment result information associated with the judgment condition information matching the drawing condition is the special A transition determination unit that determines whether or not a lottery result indicating transition to a gaming state is indicated;
When it is determined by the transition determination means that the determination result information indicates a lottery result to shift to the special gaming state, the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means after the special gaming state is ended. Lottery condition determination means for determining
When the lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determination means, the second comparison means continues the comparison according to the lottery condition determined by the lottery condition determination means, instead of the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. 5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, further comprising: first comparison control means for controlling.

Images